20150239 Project Manual 07062015BID SET
PROJECT MANUAL
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS NO. 2
Education Center
Tenant Improvement
June 23, 2015
ERICKSON •MCGOVERN
Project Manual
EDUCATION CENTER
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
OWNER
CHIS HANSEN
FACILITIES AND CAPITAL PROJECTS DIRECTOR
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS NO. 2
1071 ST STREET NORTH (PO BOX 476)
YELM, wA 98597 -0476
PHONE: (360) 458 -6127
FAX: (360) 458 -6178
ARCHITECT
RAY Mow, AIA
ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.L.L.C.
120 131 ST STREET SOUTH
TACOMA, WA 98444
PHONE: (253) 531 -0206
FAX: (253) 531 -9197
CIVIL ENGINEER
.JENNA MCCLURE
BCE ENGINEERS
6021 12TH STREET EAST, SUITE 200
TACOMA, WA 98424
PHONE: (253) 922 -0446
FAX: (253) 922 -0896
MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
CARRIE TAYLOR
BCE ENGINEERS
6021 12TH STREET EAST, SUITE 200
TACOMA, WA 98424
PHONE: (253) 922 -0446
FAX: (253) 922 -0896
JUNE 2015
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION NUMBER OF PAGES
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 00- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 00 0100, TABLE OF CONTENTS ........................................................... ...............................
3
00 4200, FORM OF PROPOSAL ............................................................ ...............................
2
00 5000, AGREEMENT ........................................................................ ...............................
10
00 5200, GENERAL CONDITIONS ......................................................... ...............................
2
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01 0000, SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS .................................................... ...............................
1
01 1000, SUMMARY ........................................................................... ...............................
3
01 2300, ALTERNATES ....................................................................... ...............................
1
01 3000, ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS ......................................... ...............................
8
014000, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ..................................................... ...............................
4
01 6000, PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ................................................... ...............................
5
01 6001, SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM ............................................ ...............................
2
01 7000, EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS ......................... ...............................
10
01 7800, CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE ...................................................... ...............................
10
DIVISION 02 - SITEWORK
SECTION 02 4100, DEMOLITION ........................................................................ ............................... 8
DIVISION 03 -CONCRETE
SECTION 03 3000, CAST -1 N -PLACE CONCRETE ................................................. ............................... 10
03 5400, SELF LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT .......................................... ............................... 3
DIVISION 06 -WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06 1000, ROUGH CARPENTRY ............................................................ ............................... 11
06 2000, FINISH CARPENTRY ............................................................. ............................... 6
06 6400, PLASTIC LAMINATE WAINSCOT ............................................. ............................... 2
171 V/ &I Is] kql K I Y d 9: 1 =1 0► v i/_ 1 IF-11 kql 113 ► v i[ o] hI i I] 0=1:1ZION I =10 III I:*] hil
SECTION 07 2100, BOARD AND BATT INSULATION .............................................. ............................... 2
07 4646, FIBER CEMENT SIDING ......................................................... ............................... 3
07 5400, THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (ALTERNATE 1) ......... ............................... 7
07 6200, SHEET METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES ......................... ............................... 5
07 9005, .JOINT SEALERS ................................................................... ............................... 5
] 1V/ &I Is] 9111-0111 l isle] *-T-11 ►11 ] ► J 11►11 161T J �?
SECTION 08 1113, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES .................................. ............................... 6
08 1416, FLUSH WOOD DOORS .......................................................... ............................... 5
08 5313, VINYL WINDOWS ................................................................. ............................... 6
08 7100, HARDWARE ......................................................................... ............................... 12
08 8000, GLAZING ............................................................................. ............................... 9
I]1V /&I Is] [&10;1I1►1&1:1 *?
SECTION 09 2116, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES .............................................. ............................... 6
09 5100, SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS ...................................... ............................... 7
09 6005, NEW FLOORING PREPARATION ............................................. ............................... 3
09 6010, EXISTING FLOORING PREPARATION ...................................... ............................... 4
09 6500, RESILIENT FLOORING ........................................................... ............................... 6
09 6800, CARPET .............................................................................. ............................... 4
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI Bid - TOC - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
09 9000, PAINTS AND COATING- NEW CONSTRUCTION ....................... ............................... 18
09 9005, PAINTS AND COATINGS - EXISTING STRUCTURES .................. ............................... 18
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
SECTION10 1400, SIGNAGE ............................................................................. ............................... 5
10 2800, ACCESSORIES ..................................................................... ............................... 3
DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12 2113, HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS ............................................... ............................... 2
12 3450, FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK ................................................. ............................... 11
12 4813, ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES ................................. ............................... 1
171 V/ &I Is] ► f �K I > ! ► v i I =101: l _ 1►1 [ � _ 1 1&1:2 =101 I J [ of _ r I Is] kql ! ;?
SECTION 20 0000, GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................... ............................... 13
QLV A& I Is] ► fP*# :jILI Jivi1-11►[e]&1:jX011J[of_rI Is] l;?
SECTION 22 0523, VALVES FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING ...................................... ...............................
2
22 0529, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT .......... ...............................
3
220719, PIPING INSULATIONS ............................................................ ...............................
3
22 1116, DOMESTIC WATER PIPE FITTING .......................................... ...............................
3
22 1117, CROSSLINKED POLYETHYLENE (PEX) PIPING SYSTEM ........... ...............................
3
22 1119, PIPING SPECIALTIES ............................................................ ...............................
2
22 1300, SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM .............................. ...............................
3
22 3300, ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS ......................... ...............................
2
22 4000, PLUMBING FIXTURES ........................................................... ...............................
3
DIVISION 23. HEATING. VENTILATING. AND AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 23 0529, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ............................. 3
23 0548, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL ....................................... ............................... 4
23 0593, AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING .................................. ............................... 3
23 0713, EQUIPMENT /DUCTWORK INSULATION .................................... ............................... 3
23 3113, STEEL DUCTWORK .............................................................. ............................... 5
23 3300, HVAC SPECIALTIES ............................................................. ............................... 3
23 3423, EXHAUST FANS ................................................................... ............................... 2
23 3700, AIR TERMINALS ................................................................... ............................... 2
23 7400, PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNIT .................................................. ............................... 3
23 9000, MECHANICAL DEMOLITION .................................................... ............................... 1
DIVISION 26. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 26 0000, ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS ...................................... ............................... 11
26 0005, ELECTRICAL- EXISTING SYSTEMS ........................................ ............................... 2
26 0519, WIRES AND CABLES ............................................................ ............................... 2
26 0526, GROUNDING AND BONDING .................................................. ............................... 2
26 0532, OUTLET AND PULL BOXES .................................................... ............................... 2
26 0533, RACEWAY ........................................................................... ............................... 4
26 0534, METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS ...................... ............................... 3
26 2416, PANELBOARDS .................................................................... ............................... 3
26 2419, MOTOR CONTROLLERS ........................................................ ............................... 3
26 2726, SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES ............................................. ............................... 2
26 2813, FUSES ................................................................................ ............................... 2
26 2816, DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES .................................. ............................... 1
26 4300, TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) / SURGE PROTECTION
DEVICE(SPD) .................................................................... ............................... 5
26 5000, LIGHTING ............................................................................ ............................... 4
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI Bid - TOC - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 DIVISION 27. COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATIONS
2 SECTION 27 0000, LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................ .............................28
3 27 0528, PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ......................... ............................... 8
4 27 2000, DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE ...................................... ............................... 12
5
6 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI Bid - TOC - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
SECTION 00 4200
2
FORM OF PROPOSAL
3
1.01
FORM OF PROPOSAL
4
A.
BIDS ARE DUE NO LATER THAN 3:00 P.M. ON THURSDAY JULY 2, 2015
5
B.
In this Section 00 4200 there is the Form of Proposal which must be submitted in its entirety
6
with the correct bid package and at the appropriate date and time. The follow two options are
7
provided in submitting a bid.
8
1. TO: Chris Hansen, Director of Facilities and Capital Projects
9
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
10
107 1St Street N (PO Box 476)
11
Yelm WA, 98597 -0476
12
Phone: (360) 458 - 6127
13
2. Bids may be e- mailed attention Chris Hansen at chris hansen(c-)-ycs.wednet.edu, Micki Yoder
14
at micki yoder @vcs.wednet.edu and Raymond Mow at ray(c-)ericksonmcgovern.com.
15
E- mailed bids to include all form of proposal requirements including a bid bond or copy of the
16
bid bond check. Contractor shall be responsible to confirm the Owner's receipt of e- mailed
17
bids.
18
C.
Having carefully examined the Project Manual and Drawings entitled Education Center Tenant
19
Improvement, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, the Undersigned
20
proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies and to construct the project and perform
21
all work as required by the Contract Documents for the following sums:
22
D.
Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in
23
words will govern.
24
E.
BASE BID
25
1. For the Base Bid, as defined in the Specifications, the sum of:
26
($ )
27
(Numeric format)
28
Dollars
29
(written)
30
F.
TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY PROVISIONS
31
1. (Include also in Base Bid). ($ )
32
2. If the bid amount contains any work which requires trenching exceeding a depth of four
33
feet, all costs for trench safety shall be included in the Base Bid and indicated above for
34
adequate trench safety systems in compliance with Chapter 39.04 RCW, 49.17 RCW and
35
WAC 296- 155 -650. Bidder must include a lump sum dollar amount in blank above (even if
36
the value is $0.00) to be responsive.
37
G.
ADDENDA
38
1. Receipt of the following Addenda is hereby acknowledged and costs of the work therefore
39
have been included in the proposal.
40
Addendum No. Addendum No.
Addendum No. Addendum No.
41
42 H. SALES TAX AND PERMITS
43 1. The retail sales tax shall not be included in the Bid sums; the Owner will pay such taxes
44 proportionally with each periodic payment. Additional fees and permits identified as to be
45 paid by the Contractor in Section 01 1000 - SUMMARY shall be paid by the Contractor
46 and included the Bid.
47
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 004200-1 FORM OF PROPOSAL
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 I. OVERHEAD AND PROFIT
2 1. All of the above Bid prices include overhead and profit.
3 J. THE UNDERSIGNED ALSO AGREES AS FOLLOWS
4 1. To do any extra work, not covered by the above schedule of prices which may be ordered
5 by the Owner, pursuant to the Contract Documents.
6 K. TIME OF COMPLETION
7 1. See Section 01 1000 —SUMMARY
8 L. ALTERNATE BIDS
9
A -1 Roof Replacement ADD $
10
11 M. REINSTATEMENT OF ALTERNATE BIDS
12 The Undersigned agrees that the Owner has the right to reinstate, at the bid price, any
13 Alternate Bid, Base Bid Substitute Bid or Alternate Bid Substitute Bid, not incorporated in the
14 Contract, provided the Owner so notifies the Undersigned within 45 calendar days after the
15 Contract is signed.
16 N. CONTRACT AND BOND
17 1. If the Undersigned be notified of the acceptance of this Bid within forty -five (45) days after
18 the time set for opening bids, he agrees to execute a Contract for the above work for a
19 compensation established by adjusting the Base Bid by any Alternate Bids selected by the
20 Owner, in the Form of Agreement required by the Specifications, and to furnish
21 Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds (if bid exceeds $35,000.00) as
22 required by the Specifications.
23 2. The Standard Form of the agreement between the Owner and the Contractor is included
24 in the specifications.
25 O. BID GUARANTEE
26 1. The Undersigned further agrees that the check or bid bond accompanying this Bid is left in
27 escrow with the Owner, that its amount is the measure of the damages which the Owner
28 will sustain by the failure of the Undersigned to execute said agreement and bonds, and
29 that if the Undersigned fails to deliver said documents within ten (10) days after written
30 notice of the award of the Contract to him, then the check shall become the property of the
31 Owner or the bid bond shall remain in full effect. But if this Bid is not accepted within
32 forty -five (45) days after the time set for opening bids, or if the Undersigned delivers said
33 Contract and bonds, then the check shall be returned to him or the bid bond shall become
34 void. Bid bond shall be 5% of the value of the bid.
35
COMPANY NAME:
SIGNATURE:
TITLE:
ADDRESS:
STATE:
ZIP:
TELEPHONE NO.
CONTRACTOR'S REGISTRATION NO.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 004200-2 FORM OF PROPOSAL
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 00 5000
AGREEMENT
AGREEMENT BETWEEN
SCHOOL DISTRICT AND CONTRACTOR
The effective date of the Agreement is:
The Parties to the Agreement are
The "School District"
The "Contractor"
Contract Sum for the Work:
July _ , 2015
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Date of Substantial Completion of the Work: August 24, 2015
Date of Final Completion of the Work: 30 calendar days after substantial completion.
Liquidated Damages:
Unit Prices:
Minimum Required Insurance
Commercial General Liability:
Commercial Auto Liability, Owned
And Non -Owned Auto Liability:
Workers' compensation (industrial
Insurance):
Employer's Liability:
Installation Floater:
$200.00 per day
N/A
At least $1 million per occurrence;
$1 million general aggregate
At least $1 million
State statutory amount
At least $100,000
Value of goods and equipment to be Installed
The School District and Contractor agree as set forth below.
ARTICLE 1: THE WORK. The Contractor shall fully execute and complete the entire Work described in
the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 2: COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL AND FINAL COMPLETION
2.1 The date of commencement of the Work (the date from which the Contract Time is measured) is the
date of this Agreement.
2.2 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the entire Work as
specified above, subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 3: THE CONTRACT SUM. The School District shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum for
the performance of the Contract, subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 4: PAYMENT. The School District will pay the Contractor based upon an Application for
Payment within thirty (30) days of an approved Application for Payment.
ARTICLE 5: PERMITS AND FEES. The Contractor shall secure and pay all governmental permits, fees,
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 005000-1 AGREEMENT
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 licenses, and inspections.
2
3 ARTICLE 6: ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents include the
4 executed Agreement, including the attached General Conditions, any Supplementary and other Conditions of
5 the Agreement, the Specifications, the Drawings, any Addenda, and the prevailing wage rates set forth by the
6 Department of Labor and Industries (determined as of the Bid Date for the county in which the Project is
7 located and are available at http;// www. Ini. wa. gov/ TradesLicensing /PrevWages /WageRates /default. asp), and
8 are enumerated as follows:
9
10 1. Specifications:
11
12 Section Description
13 Attachment Table of Contents
14
15 2. Drawings:
16
17 School District: Yelm Community Schools Contractor
18 By: By
19
20 Title: Title:
21
22
23 GENERAL CONDITIONS
24
25 ARTICLE 7: THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
7.1 The intent of the Contract Documents
is to include all items necessary for the proper
execution and completion of the Work by the
Contractor. Performance by the Contractor is
required to the extent consistent with the Contract
Documents and reasonably inferable from them as
being necessary to produce the intended results.
7.2 "Work" means the construction and
services required by the Contract Documents and
include all labor, materials, equipment and services
to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the
Contractor's obligations.
ARTICLE 8: ADMINISTRATION OF THE
AGREEMENT
8.1 The School District will provide
administration of the Agreement. If an Architect or
Engineer is also involved, its duties beyond those
addressed in the General Conditions will be
described in an attachment to this Agreement.
Pages
54 requirements of the Contract Documents, or to
55 approve or accept any portion of the Work not
56 executed in accordance with, or to issue
57 instructions contrary to, the Contract Documents.
58
59 8.3 The School District may reject work
60 when, in its opinion, the Work does not conform to
61 the Contract Documents.
62
63 8.4 The School District may visit the site
64 at intervals it considers appropriate to the stage of
65 the Work to become generally familiar with the
66 progress and quality of the completed Work.
67
68 ARTICLE 9: THE CONTRACTOR
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
8.2 School District representatives are not 81
authorized to revoke, alter, relax or release any 82
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 005000-2
9.1 Using its best skill and attention, the
Contractor shall perform, supervise and direct the
Work. The Contractor shall be solely responsible
for and have control over construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences, procedures and
personnel, for safety, and for coordinating all
portions of the Work under the Agreement. The
Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor,
materials, equipment, tools and machinery,
transportation, and other facilities and services
necessary for the proper execution and completion
of the Work.
AGREEMENT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
9.2 Subcontractors. A "Subcontractor" is
a person or entity that has a direct contract with the
Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the
Site or to supply materials or equipment. A
"Subcontractor of any tier" includes Subcontractors
and all lower level sub - subcontractors and
suppliers. As soon as practicable and no later than
ten (10) days after award of the Agreement, the
Contractor shall confirm in writing to the School
District the names of the Subcontractors for each
portion of the Work.
9.3 Workers. The Contractor shall
enforce strict discipline and good order among
persons carrying out the Work and shall not permit
employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled
in tasks assigned to them. A person shall be unfit
and removed from the Work who has been found
guilty of any felony crime as specified in RCW
28A.400.330, generally crimes against children.
9.4 Compliance with Law. The
Contractor, its employees and representatives shall
at all times comply with all applicable laws,
ordinances, statutes, rules and regulations, federal
and state, county and municipal, and particularly
those relating to wages, hours, fair employment
practices, non - discrimination, safety and working
conditions.
9.5 Prevailing Wages. Pursuant to
39.12, no worker, laborer, or mechanic shall be
paid less than the "prevailing rate of wage" (in
effect as of the date that bids were due).
9.6 Hours of Labor. The Contractor shall
comply with all applicable provisions of RCW
49.28.
9.7 Workers' Right to Know. The
Contractor shall comply with RCW 49.70 and WAC
296 -62 -054 regarding workplace surveys and
material safety data sheets for "hazardous"
chemicals at the Site.
9.8 Warranty. The Contractor warrants
that materials and equipment furnished under the
Agreement will be of good quality and new, that the
Work will be performed in a workmanlike manner,
free from defects not inherent in the quality
required or permitted, and that the Work will
conform to the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
9.9 Submittals. The Contractor shall
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
56 review, approve and submit to the School District
57 with reasonable promptness Shop Drawings,
58 Product Data, Samples and similar submittals
59 required by the Contract Documents. The Work
60 shall be in accordance with approved submittals.
61
62 9.10 Progress Schedule. Within ten (10)
63 days of execution of this Agreement, the
64 Contractor shall submit a schedule of the Work to
65 the School District.
66
67 9.11 Clean -Up. The Contractor shall keep
68 the premises and surrounding area free from
69 accumulation of waste materials caused by
70 operations under the Agreement.
71
72 9.12 Indemnification. Subject to the
73 following and to the extent of the Contractor's
74 negligence, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify,
75 and hold harmless the School District and its
76 agents, employees, consultants, successors and
77 assigns from and against all claims, damages,
78 losses and expenses, direct and indirect, or
79 consequential, including costs and attorneys' fees
80 incurred on such claims and in proving the right to
81 indemnification, arising out of or resulting from the
82 performance of the Work or any act or omission of
83 the Contractor, its agents, any of its Subcontractors
84 of any tier, and anyone directly or indirectly
85 employed by them.
86
87 9.13 Records. The Contractor shall
88 maintain and preserve books, ledgers, records,
89 documents, estimates, correspondence, logs,
90 schedules, electronic data and other evidence
91 relating or pertaining to the costs and /or
92 performance of the Contract ( "records "). Within
93 seven (7) days of the School District's request, the
94 Contractor shall make available at the Contractor's
95 office all records for inspection, audit and
96 reproduction (including electronic reproduction) by
97 the School District's representatives.
98
99 9.14 Licensing. The Contractor shall be
100 duly licensed in the jurisdiction of the Project.
101
102 ARTICLE 10: CONSTRUCTION NOT BY THE
103 CONTRACTOR
104
105 10.1 The School District may perform
106 construction or operations related to the Project
107 with its own forces and to award separate contracts
108 in connection with other portions of the Project
109 under contractual conditions substantially similar to
110 those of the Contract Documents.
005000-3
AGREEMENT
1 56
2 10.2 The Contractor shall afford the School 57
3 District and separate contractors reasonable 58
4 opportunity for the introduction and storage of their 59
5 materials and equipment and performance of their 60
6 activities, and shall connect and coordinate the 61
7 Contractor's construction and operations as 62
8 required by the Contract Documents. 63
9 64
10 ARTICLE 11: CHANGES IN THE WORK
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
11.1 The School District, without
invalidating the Agreement, may order changes in
the Work consisting of additions, deletions or
modifications ( "Changes "), and the Contract Sum
and Contract Time will be adjusted accordingly.
Changes in the Work, the Contract Sum and /or the
Contract Time shall be authorized only by written
Change Order signed by the School District and
the Contractor.
11.1.1 Change Orders. A
Change Order is a written instrument signed by the
School District and the Contractor stating their
agreement upon a change in the Work; the amount
of any adjustment in the Contract Sum and the
extent of any adjustment in the Contract Time.
11.1.2 Proposal Request. A
Proposal Request is a written order prepared and
signed by the School District and the Contractor,
stating their agreement upon a change in the
Work, the method for determining the adjustment
in the Contract Sum, if any; and the method for
determining the adjustment in the Contract Time, if
any.
11.2 If the parties cannot agree on the cost
or credit to the School District from a Change in the
Work, the Contractor shall keep and present an
itemized accounting with supporting data. The total
cost of any Change or Claim shall be limited to the
reasonable value of the direct labor costs,
materials costs, construction equipment usage
costs for the actual time equipment appropriate to
the Work is used solely on the Change in the
Work, the cost of any change in insurance,
Subcontractor costs, and a Fee for all combined
overhead and profit, including impact costs of any
kind limited to 12% of the cost of any materials or
work performed by a Contractor's or Sub-
contractor's own forces, 8% of amounts due to
lower -tier Subcontractors.
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
Conditions. If conditions unknown to the
Contractor are encountered at the site that are (1)
concealed physical conditions that differ materially
from those indicated in the Contract Documents or
(2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual
nature that differ materially from those ordinarily
found and generally recognized as inherent in
activities of the character provided for in the
Contract Documents, then the Contractor shall give
written notice to the School District promptly before
conditions are disturbed and in no event later than
seven (7) days after the first observance on the
conditions. Any Claim arising from such condition
shall be made in accordance with the dispute
resolution process.
ARTICLE 12: TIME
12.1 If, through no fault of the Contractor or
a Subcontractor of any tier, the Work is delayed by
changes ordered in the Work, unanticipated
general labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in
deliveries, abnormal adverse weather conditions
not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable
casualties or any other causes beyond the
Contractor's control, then the Contract Time shall
be extended by Change Order to the extent the
critical path is affected. The Contractor and
Subcontractors shall be entitled to damages for
delay, only where the School District's actions or
inactions were the actual, substantial cause of the
delay and where the Contractor could not have
reasonably avoided the delay by the exercise of
due diligence. If a delay was caused by the
Contractor, a Subcontractor of any tier, or anyone
acting on behalf of them, the Contractor is not
entitled to an increase in the Contract Time or in
the Contract Sum.
12.2 The timely completion of this Project is
essential to the School District. The School District
will incur serious and substantial damages if
Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur
within the Contract Time; however, it would be
difficult if not impossible to determine the amount
of such damages. Consequently, the Agreement
may include provisions for liquidated damages,
which are not affected by partial completion,
occupancy, or beneficial occupancy; otherwise, the
Contractor is responsible for actual damages.
107 ARTICLE 13: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
108
109 13.1 Payments. Payment shall be made
11.3 Claims for Concealed or Unknown 110 as provided in this Agreement. If progress
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 005000-4 AGREEMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
payments are specified, they will be made as
specified in the Supplemental Conditions.
13.2 Prevailing Wages. The Contractor
shall comply with all applicable provisions of RCW
39.12, including but not limited to submission of
approved "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing
Wage," payment of all L &I fees, submission and
posting of approved "Statements of Intent to Pay
Prevailing Wages" and payment of prevailing
wages.
13.3 Withheld Payment. Payment may be
withheld on account of (1) defective Work not
remedied, (2) claims filed by third parties, (3)
failure of the Contractor to make payments
properly for labor, materials or equipment, (4)
damage to the School District or another
contractor, (5) reasonable evidence that the unpaid
balance would not be adequate to cover actual or
liquidated damages for delay for which the
Contractor is responsible, (6) failure to carry out the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,
or (7) liquidated damages.
13.4 Substantial Completion.
13.4.1 When the Contractor
believes that the Work is Substantially Complete, it
shall notify the School District in writing. When the
School District agrees, it will issue a Certificate of
Substantial Completion. Substantial Completion is
the state in the progress of the Work when the
construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance
with the Contract Documents, so the School
District can fully utilize the Work (or a designated
portion) for its intended use. All Work other than
incidental corrective or punchlist work and final
cleaning shall have been completed. The Work is
not Substantially Complete if all systems and parts
affected by the Work are not usable. The fact that
the School District may use or occupy the Work or
designated portion thereof does not indicate that
the Work is Substantially Complete, nor does such
occupation toll or change any liquidated damages
due the School District.
13.4.2 Immediately before any
occupancy, the School District will schedule an
inspection tour of the area to be occupied.
Representatives of the School District and
Contractor will jointly tour the area and record
items still remaining to be finished or corrected.
The Contractor shall supply and install any items
missed by the inspection but required or necessary
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
005000-5
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
for Final Completion as a part of the Contract Sum.
13.5 Final Payment. Pursuant to RCW
60.28, completion of the Contract Work shall occur
and final payment shall become due after the
Contractor has been notified that the Work has
been concluded and submits the items listed below
to the School District, any required occupancy
permit has been issued and the School District's
Board of Directors formally accepts the Project.
.1 An affidavit that all payrolls,
Subcontractors, bills for materials and equipment,
and other indebtedness connected with the Work
for which the School District might be responsible
or encumbered, have been paid or otherwise
satisfied,
.2 A certificate evidencing that
insurance required by the Contract Documents to
remain in force after final payment is currently in
effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire
until at least thirty (30) days' prior written notice has
been given to the School District,
.3 Other data establishing payment or
satisfaction of or protection (satisfactory to the
School District) against all obligations, such as
receipts, releases and waivers of liens arising out
of the Contract, satisfactorily demonstrating to the
School District that the claims of Subcontractors
and laborers who have filed claims have been paid,
.4 Pursuant to RCW 39.12.040,
required "Affidavits of Wages Paid,"
.5 Pursuant to RCW 50.24, a
certificate from the Department of Employment
Security,
.6 A certified statement that the
Contractor has closed all necessary permits or
otherwise met the requirements of all governing
jurisdictions related to this Project,
.7 All warranties, guarantees,
certificates, spare parts, specified excess material,
and other documents or items required by the
Contractor Documents,
.8 A legible hard copy of the as -built
drawings, and
documents.
9 Original permits and permit
AGREEMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
13.6 If any Subcontractor of any tier
refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by
the School District, the School District may retain
such amount as to defray the cost of foreclosing
the liens of such claims and to pay attorneys' fees,
the total of which shall be no less than 150% of the
claimed amount. If any such lien remains
unsatisfied after all payments are made, the
Contractor shall refund to the School District all
moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in
discharging such lien, including all costs and
reasonable attorneys' fees.
13.7 Waivers.
13.7.1 Final Payment by the School
District. The making of final payment shall
constitute a waiver of claims by the School District
except those arising from (1) claims or
encumbrances arising out of the Agreement and
unsettled; (2) failure of the Work to comply with the
requirements of the Contract Documents; or (3)
terms of warranties required by the Contract
Documents or law.
13.7.2 Final Payment to the
Contractor. Acceptance of final payment by the
Contractor shall constitute a waiver of Claims
except those previously made in writing and
identified in writing as unsettled on the final
Application for Payment.
13.7.3 Change Orders. The
execution of a Change Order shall constitute a
waiver of Claims by the Contractor arising out of
the Work to be performed or deleted pursuant to
the Change Order, except as specifically described
in the Change Order. If the Contractor adds a
reservation of rights that has not been initialed by
the School District, any amounts previously agreed
shall be considered disputed and not yet payable.
13.8 Warranty of Title. The Contractor
warrants and guarantees that title to Work,
materials and equipment covered by payment,
whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass
to the School District no later than the time of
payment, free and clear of liens.
ARTICLE 14: PROTECTION OF PERSONS
AND PROPERTY
14.1 The Contractor shall be solely
responsible, and the School District shall not have
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
005000-6
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
responsibility, for all aspects of safety. The
Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for
safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection
of persons and property to prevent damage, injury
or loss.
14.2 The Contactor shall not be required to
perform without consent any Work relating to
asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl ( "PCB "),
unless identified as such in the Contract
Documents.
ARTICLE 15: INSURANCE AND BONDS
15.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance.
The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in
a company or companies lawfully authorized and
admitted to do business in the jurisdiction in which
the Project is located, possessing a Best's
policyholder's rating of "A minus" or better and a
financial rating of no less than VIII, and reasonably
acceptable to the Owner, an occurrence -based
Commercial General Liability Insurance Policy,
which shall provide personal injury, bodily injury,
and property damage liability to cover the
Contractor's operations, including Subcontractors
and suppliers of any tier, and including but not
limited to premises, products /completed
operations, personal injury, blanket contractual
liability, explosion, collapse or underground (XCU),
and stopgap employer's liability; advertising injury;
automobile liability (including but not limited to
owned, non - owned, and hired vehicles) on work
the Contractor may subcontract or sublet to others
and on the indemnity provisions of this Contract.
This insurance shall name the Owner, any
Architect or Engineer and their consultants and
employees as additional insureds and will include a
severability of interest (cross liability clause) for
Work performed under this Contract. The
Contractor's policy shall be designated primary
coverage for both defense and indemnity, and any
Owner's policies excess and shall have limits of
liability insurance not less than those described
herein. Such limits of liability insurance shall have
per project general aggregate provisions and shall
be no less than those described herein as will
protect the Contractor from claims that may arise
out of or result from the Contractor's operations
and completed operations under the Contract and
for which the Contractor may be legally liable,
whether such operations be by the Contractor or by
Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable. Before
AGREEMENT
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
commencing the Work or exposure to loss can
occur, the Contractor shall furnish the School
District with a signed Certificate of Insurance in a
form reasonably acceptable to the School District
as evidence of all insurance required by the
Contract Documents. Coverage shall be
maintained without interruption from the date of
commencement of the Work until no earlier than
the date of Final Acceptance. Completed
operations coverage shall remain in force for three
(3) years after Final Acceptance.
15.2 Property Insurance. The School
District shall insure the property in the amount of its
insurable replacement cost, including additions and
alterations, against physical loss. The policies
shall inure to the benefit of the School District only.
Upon the occurrence of an insured loss, the School
District shall have the power to adjust and settle
any loss with the insurers. The Contractor shall
bear the risk of any loss, damage or destruction of
its own property to the extent that it will not be
incorporated in the Work, including but not limited
to loss from theft or vandalism. Any insurance
provided by the School District will not cover any
such loss, damage or destruction. The Contractor
shall carry an "installation floater" to cover its goods
and equipment on site.
15.3 Payment and Performance Bond.
The Contractor is required by RCW 39.08 to
secure a payment and performance bond on this
Project in a form and with a surety approved by the
School District.
ARTICLE 16: CORRECTION OF WORK
16.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct
Work rejected or failing to conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents at any
time through a period of one (1) year from the date
of Substantial Completion of the Agreement or by
terms of a longer manufacturer's warranty or an
applicable special warranty required by the
Contract Documents.
16.2 If the Contractor fails to correct Work
that is not in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents or fails to carry out the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,
the School District, by a written order, may order
the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion
thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
56 16.3 Nothing in this Article shall establish a
57 period of limitation with respect to other obligations
58 that the Contractor might have under the Contract
59 Documents.
60
61 ARTICLE 17: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISONS
62
63 17.1 The Agreement shall be governed by
64 the internal law of Washington, without regard to its
65 choice -of -law provisions.
66
67 17.2 The Contractor shall give notices and
68 comply with applicable laws, rules, regulations and
69 orders of public authorities, including but not limited
70 to RCW 39.06 and RCW 18.27 (Registration),
71 RCW 49.60 (Discrimination), RCW 70.92 (Aged
72 and Handicapped Persons), WAC 296 -155 (Safety
73 Standards), RCW 50.24 (Unemployment
74 Compensation), Drug -Free Workplace Act of 1988
75 (Drug -Free Workplace), RCW 9.41.280 (Weapons)
76 and RCW 49.26 (any asbestos removal). Smoking
77 or use of any kind of lighted smoking equipment,
78 material, or smokeless tobacco products is
79 prohibited on all School District property.
80
81 ARTICLE 18: TERMINATION OF THE
82 CONTRACT
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
005000-7
18.1 Termination for Cause by
Contractor. If the School District fails to make
payment for a period of sixty (60) days through no
fault of the Contractor, the Contractor may, upon
seven (7) additional days' written notice, terminate
the Agreement and recover from the School District
payment for all Work executed.
18.2 Termination for Cause by the
School District. The School District may, upon
seven (7) days' written notice to the Contractor,
terminate without prejudice the whole or any
portion of the Work for cause, including but not
limited to the Contractor's material breach of this
Agreement, the Contractor's failure to prosecute
the Work or any portion thereof with sufficient
diligence to ensure the Substantial Completion of
the Work within the Contract Time, the Contractor's
material disregard of laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations or orders of any public authority having
jurisdiction, the Contractor's being adjudged
bankrupt, making a general assignment for the
benefit of its creditors, or a receiver being
appointed on account of the Contractor's
insolvency.
18.3 Termination for Convenience by
AGREEMENT
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
99
100
101
102
103
School District. The School District may, at any
time upon ten (10) days' written notice to the
Contractor, terminate without prejudice the whole
or portion of the Work for the convenience of the
School District. The School District shall be liable
to Contractor only for (1) the amount due under this
Agreement for the performance of the Work
terminated and (2) other pre- approved costs,
consistent with the categories in Paragraph 11.2,
necessary and reasonably incurred in connection
with the termination of Work.
18.4 Effects of Termination.
18.4.1 The total sum to be paid to
the Contractor under this Paragraph 18 shall not
exceed the Contract Sum as reduced by the
amount of payments otherwise made.
18.4.2 Unless the School District
directs otherwise, after receipt of a Notice of
Termination by the School District, the Contractor
shall promptly stop Work as specified in the Notice
of Termination, place no further orders or
subcontracts, except as necessary for the
completion of non - terminated Work, procure
cancellation of all orders and subcontracts to the
extent related to the performance of terminated
Work, assign to the School District all of the right,
title and interest of the Contractor under all orders
and subcontracts, with the School District's
approval, settle all outstanding liabilities and all
claims arising out of such termination of orders and
subcontracts not assigned to the School District,
transfer title and deliver to the entity or entitles
designated by the School District the fabricated or
unfabricated parts, Work in process, partially
completed supplies and equipment, materials,
parts, tools, dies, jigs and other fixtures, completed
Work, supplies and other material produced as part
of, or acquired in connection with the performance
of, the Work terminated, and the completed or
partially completed plans, drawings, information
and other property related to the Work, take such
action as may be necessary or as directed by the
School District to preserve and protect the Work
and property related to this Project in the
possession of the Contractor in which the School
District has an interest, and continue performance
only to the extent not terminated.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
51
52 18.4.3 The damages and relief
53 from termination shall be the Contractor's sole
54 entitlement in the event of termination.
55
56 ARTICLE 19: DISPUTE RESOLUTION
57
58 19.1 All claims, disputes and other matters
59 in question of the Contractor arising out of, or
60 relating to, the Contract Documents or the breach
61 thereof ( "Claims ") shall be decided exclusively by
62 the following dispute resolution procedure. The
63 Contractor shall diligently carry on the Work and
64 maintain the progress schedule during the dispute
65 resolution procedure, unless the parties mutually
66 agree in writing otherwise.
67
68 19.2 Notice of Claim. The Contractor
69 shall submit notice of all Claims to the School
70 District in writing within fourteen (14) days of the
71 event giving rise to them.
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
005000-8
19.3 Claim Submission. Within thirty (30)
days of the event giving rise to the Claim, the
Contractor shall provide the School District in
writing with a Claim, including a clear description of
the Claim, all changes in cost and in time, and data
supporting the Claim.
19.4 Litigation. Any Claim arising out of or
related to the Contract, or the breach thereof,
except for Claims which have been waived as
provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents and
except for Claims waived under the provisions of
the Contract Documents, shall be decided by court
of competent jurisdiction pursuant to the regular
rules of civil procedure unless the parties hereafter
mutually agree in writing to mediation or binding
arbitration. This provision for litigation in place of
arbitration shall be called in these Contract
Documents "dispute resolution." When the term
"demand for mediation or arbitration" or any phrase
with similar meaning shall be used in the Contract
Documents, there shall be deemed substituted in
the place thereof the term "commencement of
litigation." Litigation may be commenced when
forty -five (45) days have passed after a Claim has
been referred and no decision has been rendered.
AGREEMENT
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
Supplemental Conditions
Progress Payments. Progress payments shall be made monthly for Work duly approved and performed
during the calendar month preceding the application according to the following procedure.
7 1. Draft Application. Within the first ten (10) days of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the
8 School District a report on the current status of the Work as compared to the Progress Schedule
9 and a draft itemized application for payment for Work performed during the prior calendar month.
10 This shall not constitute a payment request. The Contractor, the School District and the Architect or
11 Engineer (if any) shall meet within the next ten (10) days and confer regarding the current progress
12 of the Work and the amount of payment to which the Contractor is entitled. The School District may
13 request the Contractor to provide data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment, such as
14 copies of requisitions or invoices from Subcontractors. The Contractor shall not be entitled to make
15 a payment request, nor is any payment due the Contractor, until such data is furnished.
16 2. Payment Request. Within five (5) days after the Contractor and the School District have met and
17 conferred regarding the draft application, and the Contractor has furnished all data requested, the
18 Contractor may submit a payment request in the agreed -upon amount, in the form of a notarized,
19 itemized Application for Payment of Work performed during the prior calendar month on a form
20 supplied or approved by the School District. Among other things, the Application shall state that
21 prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the prefiled statement(s) of intent to pay
22 prevailing wages on file with the School District and that all payments due Subcontractors from
23 School District's prior payments have been made. THE SUBMISSION OF THIS APPLICATION
24 CONSTITUTES A CERTIFICATION THAT THE CONTRACT IS CURRENT ON THE PROGRESS
25 SCHEDULE, unless otherwise noted on the application. If the Contractor believes it is entitled to
26 payment for Work performed during the prior calendar month in addition to the agreed -upon amount,
27 the Contractor may, within the same five (5) daytime period, submit to the School District a separate
28 written payment request specifying the exact additional amount due, the category in the Schedule of
29 Values in which the payment is due, the specific Work for which the additional amount is due, and
30 why the additional payment is due.
31 3. Payments to Subcontractors. No payment request shall include amounts the Contractor does not
32 intend to pay a Subcontractor. If, after making a request for payment but before paying a
33 Subcontractor for its performance covered by the payment request, the Contractor discovers that
34 part or all of the payment otherwise due to the Subcontractor is subject to withhoilding from the
35 Subcontractor for unsatisfactory performance, the Contractor may withhold the amount as allowed
36 under the subcontract, but it shall give the Subcontractor and the School District written notice of the
37 remedial actions that must be taken as soon as practicable after determining the cause for the
38 withholding but before the due date for the Subcontractor payment, and pay the Subcontractor within
39 eight (8) working days after the Subcontractor satisfactorily completes the remedial action identified
40 in the notice.
41 4. Schedule of Values. Prior to submitting the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit
42 to the Owner a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the
43 Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the
44 Owner may require. The approved Schedule of Values shall be used as a basis for reviewing the
45 Contractor's Applications for Payment. The Schedule of Values shall allocate ten percent (10 %) of
46 the Contract Sum as a separate line item for that portion of the Work between Substantial
47 Completion and Final Completion, including, for example, completion of the punchlist, furnishing of
48 deliverables required by the Contract Documents, commissioning, trainings, and completion of all
49 requirements for Final Completion and final payment. This line item will be earned and paid as a
50 part of the final payment. This percentage is not the statutory retainage described in Section 5 but
51 rather requires the Contractor to recognize that it will expend significant efforts and costs in
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center Ti 005000-9 AGREEMENT
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
advancing the Work from Substantial Completion to Final Completion, and that this amount is not
earned until Final Completion of the Work is accomplished.
3 5. Retainage. Pursuant to RCW 60.28, the School District will reserve 5% from the moneys the
4 Contractor earns on estimates during the progress of the Work, to be retained as a trust fund for the
5 protection and payment of the claims of any person arising under the Agreement and the state with
6 respect to taxes imposed that may be due from the Contractor. The moneys reserved will be
7 retained in a fund by the School District until forty -five (45) days following Final Acceptance. If
8 moneys are retained from the Contractor, it may retain payment of not more than 5% from the
9 moneys earned by any Subcontractor, provided that the Contractor pays interest to the
10 Subcontractor at the same interest rate it receives from its reserved funds.
11
12 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 005000-10 AGREEMENT
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 00 5200
2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS & CONDITIONS
3 Yelm Community Schools No. 2
4 1. All work shall be completed in accordance with applicable laws, ordinances, codes, and regulations
5 Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits and approvals
6 from agencies with jurisdiction.
7 2. Contactor shall comply with the requirements of RCW 39.12 regarding the payment of prevailing
8 wages, including the requirements to deliver a Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages and post
9 notice of such intent prior to commencement of work, and to file an Affidavit of Wages Paid after
10 completion of the work. Contractor shall provide certified payroll records.
11 3. All work under this Agreement shall be subject to the requirements of RCW 60.28.011 regarding the
12 retention of a percentage of the amount to be paid Contractor or the provision of other security,
13 pending the completion of the work and the release of any and all liens by subcontractors and
14 suppliers.
15 4. If the price to be paid for the work by District exceeds $35,000, Contractor shall, pursuant to RCW
16 39.08.010, post a performance /payment bond.
17 5. If the price to be paid for the work by District is less than $35,000, Contractor shall, pursuant to RCW
18 39.08.010, either post a performance /payment bond or the Contractor may request in writing that the
19 Owner retain 50% of the contract amount for a period of 45 days from the date of acceptance or until
20 necessary releases and settlement from liens, if any, whichever is later. Letter must have signature
21 and company name and be forwarded to: Yelm Community Schools No.2, attention, Chris Hansen,
22 Director of Facilities and Capital Projects.
23 6. Contractor shall maintain the following insurance issued by insurance companies admitted in the
24 State of Washington and acceptable to the Owner, with a Best Rating of no less than "B +VII ",
25 providing no less than the following coverage and limits. Such insurance shall protect against claims
26 arising from any act or omission of the Contractor or the subcontractors or by anyone employed
27 directly or indirectly by either of them. A certificate of insurance evidencing the following coverages
28 shall be forwarded to Yelm Community Schools No.2, attention, Chris Hansen, Director of Facilities
29 and Capital Projects. rp for to the commencement of work. Such certificate shall state that the
30 coverage cannot be cancelled or materially changed without 30 days prior notice to the Owner:
31 a. Commercial General Liability with a limit of $1,000,000 bodily injury, personal injury and
32 property damage combined per occurrence, with $1,000,000 aggregate is required. Such
33 insurance shall include contractual, broad form property damage, and fire and water damage
34 legal liability and hall include an endorsement naming the Owner and its officials,
35 employees, agents, and agencies having jurisdiction as additional insureds.
36 b. Automobile Liability covering all autos with a limit of $1,000,000 bodily injury and property
37 damage combined per accident.
38 c. Evidence of Workers' Compensation.
39 The District carries builder's risk insurance on its property for the interest of the District only. The
40 Contractor is responsible for any damage, which it may cause. The Contractor may choose to
41 purchase builder's risk or other insurance to cover this risk.
42 7. Contractor shall protect all school occupants and property from injury or damage caused by the
43 work, and to the extent possible, Contractor shall minimize any disruption of normal functions and
44 activities of the school during work.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 005200-1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS & CONDTIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
8.
Contractor shall clean up and remove all refuse and unused materials from areas open to school use
2
at the end of each workday, and from all areas prior to final completion of the work. Contractor shall
3
repair, at Contractor's expense, any damage caused by Contractor while working pursuant to this
4
contract.
5
9.
All activities performed by Contractor are performed at its own risk. Contractor shall hold the District
6
and authorities having jurisdiction harmless and defend the District against all claims, liens, suits,
7
expenses, or other liability for injury or death to any person or damage to or destruction of any
8
property arising from Contractor's performance of the work, provided this provision shall not apply to
9
any injury, death, damage or destruction caused by the sole negligence of the District.
10
10.
Contractor shall guarantee all work to be new and free from faults and defects in materials and
11
workmanship for a period of one year after the date of the District's acceptance of the work, or for
12
any longer period of time required by law.
13
11.
Contractor will comply fully with all ADA /504 requirements.
14
12.
Prior to submitting the proposal, the Contractor and each Subcontractor shall have evaluated and
15
satisfied themselves as to the conditions and limitations under which the work is to be performed.
16
13.
Adjustments to the contract sum will be limited to 15% overhead and profit for Contractor and 15%
17
overhead and profit for Subcontractor with a maximum of 30% overhead and profit combined for all
18
tiers.
19 14. The Owner shall have the right to terminate the Agreement for default if the Contractor:
20 a. Refuses or fails to supply sufficient properly skilled workmen or materials of the proper
21 quality, or
22 b. Fails to prosecute the work continuously to completion with promptness and diligence, or
23 c. Fails to perform any of Contractor's obligations under the Agreement.
24 15. The District reserves the right to request, prior to the release of final payment, that Contractors must
25 submit proof of payment for themselves and all subcontractors under their direct control of all L &I
26 premiums affected by this project to the Capital Projects Office. This includes sufficient detail to
27 reconcile the corresponding premium liability generated as a result of this project to the payment.
28 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 005200-2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS & CONDTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 0000-1
RN. I=I Bill 1 *•10QCL\4 IzLev
SECTION 01 0000
SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS
PART 1 SCHEDULE OF
DRAWINGS
LIST ALL DRAWING
- GET FROM PROJECT ARCHITECT AND ALL CONSULTANTS
General
A0.00
Project Information Sheet
A0.01
Building Code Analysis
Civil
A0.00
Project Information Sheet
A0.01
Building Code Analysis
Demolition
A0.00
Project Information Sheet
A0.01
Building Code Analysis
Septic
A0.00
Project Information Sheet
A0.01
Building Code Analysis
Landscape
A0.00
Project Information Sheet
A0.01
Building Code Analysis
Architectural
A0.00
Project Information Sheet
A0.01
Building Code Analysis
Food Service
A0.00
Project Information Sheet
A0.01
Building Code Analysis
Structural
A0.00
Project Information Sheet
A0.01
Building Code Analysis
Mechanical
A0.00
Project Information Sheet
A0.01
Building Code Analysis
Electrictal
A0.00
Project Information Sheet
A0.01
Building Code Analysis
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 0000-1
RN. I=I Bill 1 *•10QCL\4 IzLev
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1[:
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
4
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 01 1000
SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT
A. Project Name: Education Center Tenant Improvements
B. Owner's Name: Yelm Community Schools No. 2
C. Architect's Name: Erickson McGovern Architects
D. The scope of work involves the tenant improvement to a 1,010 square foot single story existing
administration building. Work includes, but not limited to architectural, mechanical and
electrical improvements.
E. Special provisions.
1. See Section 00 5000 Agreement:
a. For State of Washington requirements regarding prevailing wage rates.
b. For U.S. Department of Labor (DOL) requirements regarding prevailing wage rates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 00 5000 - Agreement between School District and Contractor (Small Works Contract)
B. Section 00 5200 - General Requirements & Conditions
1.03 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Section 00
5000.
1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the School during the entire
construction period.
B. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.
1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Construction Operations: Limited to area of work specifically identified on the drawings..
B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow:
1. Owner occupancy of the existing adjacent facilities.
2. Work by Others.
3. Work by Owner.
4. Use of site and premises by the public.
C. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:
1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open
during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily
altered.
2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.
1.06 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Contractor is required to coordinate all related requirements and work specified throughout the
Project Manual.
1. General: The work of this Contract includes coordination of the entire work of the project,
including preparation of general coordination drawings, diagrams and schedules, and
control of site utilization, from beginning of construction activity through project close -out
and warranty periods.
a. Sequences of demolition and construction have been established to ensure that
existing Schools remain operational for the Owner's use at times during the
construction period as identified herein and on the drawings.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
01 1000-1
SUMMARY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
2. The General Prime Contractor is responsible for coordinating and scheduling work of
2
subcontractors to expedite progress of the project. General Contractor assumes all
3
responsibility if his subcontractors do not perform. When emergencies occur or if the
4
District's operations are compromised due to incomplete or inaccurate work by
5
subcontractors, the General Contractor will take whatever measures are necessary to
6
correct problems at no expense to the Owner and before leaving the site.
7
B.
Coordinate operations with the construction schedule, Architect, and Owner's representative.
8
C.
Unless otherwise indicated the Contractor's work and responsibilities also include, but are not
9
limited to the following:
10
1. Providing and paying for labor, materials, equipment, tools, machines, facilities and
11
services necessary for proper execution and completion of work.
12
2. Paying required taxes except as noted in the General and Special Conditions.
13
D.
Securing and paying for, as necessary for proper execution and completion of work (as
14
applicable at time of receipt of Bid):
15
1. Fees.
16
2. Licenses.
17
3. Inspections, unless otherwise noted.
18
E.
Giving required notices.
19
F.
Enforcing strict discipline and good order among employees.
20 G. Using new materials, except as noted.
21 H. Maintaining required access to and egress from the site and other requirements in accordance
22 with governing codes, ordinances and Owner's Policies throughout the work. Coordinate and
23 provide for school operation access.
24 1. Coordination, sequencing, and scheduling of work in right -of -way:
25 a. Comply with requirements of State of Washington.
26 b. Comply with Sections 1 -07.23 and 1 -10 of the WSDOT /APWA Standard
27 Specifications.
28 1.07 TIME OF COMPLETION
29 A. Start Date: Upon the Owner's written notice to proceed and intent to award contract or by the
30 date of contract execution, whichever is earliest.
31 B. Substantial Completion: August 24, 2015
32 C. Final Acceptance Date: Thirty calendar days from the date of Substantial Completion.
33 1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
34 A. Business Licenses:
35 1. It is the General Contractor and (all lower tier) Sub - Contractors responsibility to secure
36 said license at no cost to the Owner.
37 B. The Owner shall be for the primary building, plumbing and HVAC permitting. The General
38 Contractor shall provide and pay for any other required permits including ORCCA demolition
39 permits.
40 1.09 STATUTES
41 A. The General Prime Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with the State of Washington
42 statutes as per reference in the General Conditions and the remainder of the Contract
43 Documents.
44 1. Includes all WAC's per reference.
45 2. Includes all RCW's per reference.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 1000-2 SUMMARY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1.10 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Separate Contract: The Owner, under separate contract, may elect to remove and /or install
new materials and equipment at the site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously
with work under this Contract.
B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under those contracts may be carried out
smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
1.11 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Construction Operations: During the construction period the Contractor shall have use of all
areas of the premises in which construction activities are indicated. Coordinate ingress and
egress to the site with the Owner.
1. Cooperate fully with the Owner or their representative during construction operations to
minimize conflicts.
2. Smoking or open fires will not be permitted on the premises.
3. Contractor shall limit his use of the premises for work and for limited storage.
B. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during
construction period.
C. Time Restrictions:
1. Limit conduct of work to requirements and standards of the State of Washington.
2. Limit conduct of exterior work to the hours of 7:00 AM and 7:00 PM unless approved by
Owner.
1.12 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
1.13 FINAL COMPLETION
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
END OF SECTION
01 1000-3
SUMMARY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 01 2300
ALTERNATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Procedures for pricing Alternates.
B. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum.
1.02 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternatives quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the option of
Owner (Yelm Community Schools). Accepted alternatives will be identified in the
Owner - Contractor Agreement.
B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternative No. A -1 (Roof Replacement): Alternate Bid shall be the removal of the existing
membrane roof, associated flashings and accessories. Prepare the existing roof deck to receive
a new mechanically attached membrane roof. Install a new mechanically attached membrane
roof and provide all required eave flashings, penetration flashing and boot flashings. Base Bid
Is
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
END OF SECTION
01 2300-1
ALTERNATES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 01 3000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Schedule of Values.
B. Project coordination.
C. Preconstruction meeting.
D. Progress meetings.
E. Construction progress schedule.
F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
G. Submittal procedures.
H. Color selection process.
I. General coordination.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 00 5000 - Agreement
B. Section 00 5200 - General Requirements
C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.
D. Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: Project record documents.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment
Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered.
B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 10 days after date of Owner - Contractor
Agreement.
C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number
and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization.
1. Identify each line item with number and title of respective major Specification Section and
its corresponding Construction Schedule category.
2. Include in each item a directly proportionate amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.
3. Provide unit costs for Sections of specified items or work in the Project Manual when
possible. Provide material and labor costs.
4. List separate line item at end of Schedule of Values equal to 3% of each portion of the
contract for project closeout as defined in Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout
Requirements.
5. For each line item of installed value exceeding $5,000, show breakdown by major
products or operations under each item.
6. Round -off figures to nearest dollar amount.
7. Make sum of total scheduled costs equal to Contract Sum.
8. Coordinate Schedule of Values submittal with Construction Schedule submittal.
D. Include separately from each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead
and profit.
E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders with each Application For Payment.
1.04 PROJECT COORDINATION
A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution requirements for additional requirements.
B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices
and sheds, for emergency access, traffic, and parking facilities.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 3000-1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
C.
During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator.
2
D.
Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra - project communications; submittals,
3
reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution
4
of ambiguities and conflicts.
5
E.
Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and
6
construction facilities.
7
F.
Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator.
8
G.
Make the following types of submittals to Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) through the
9
Project Coordinator:
10
1. Requests for interpretation.
11
2. Requests for substitution.
12
3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
13
4. Test and inspection reports.
14
5. Design data.
15
6. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.
16
7. Applications for payment and change order requests.
17
8. Progress schedules.
18
9. Coordination drawings.
19
10. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
20
11. Closeout submittals.
21
PART 2
PRODUCTS - NOT USED
22
PART 3
EXECUTION
23
3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
24
A.
Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.
25
B.
Attendance Required:
26
1. Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
27
2. Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
28
3. Contractor.
29
4. Mechanical, and Electrical Engineers.
30
C.
Agenda:
31
1. Execution of Owner (Yelm Community Schools)- Contractor Agreement.
32
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
33
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
34
4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, Schedule of Values, and Progress
35
Schedule.
36
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, Owner (Yelm Community
37
Schools) and Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects)
38
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
39
payments, proposal requests, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
40
7. Scheduling.
41
D.
Items of significance that could affect progress including such topics as following:
42
1. Critical Work sequencing.
43
2. Designation of responsible personnel.
44
3. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
45
4. Preparation of Record Documents.
46
5. Use of premises.
47
6. Office, work and storage areas.
48
7. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
49
8. Erosion control measures.
50
9. Safety procedures.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 3000-2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 10. First aid.
2 11. Security.
3 12. Housekeeping.
4 13. Working hours.
5 14. Scheduled progress meetings.
6 E. Record minutes and distribute copies within 4 days after meeting, with 1 copy to Architect
7 (Erickson McGovern Architects), Owner (Yelm Community Schools), participants, and those
8 affected by decisions made.
9
3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS
10
A.
Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi- monthly
11
intervals.
12
B.
Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) will make arrangements for meetings, prepare
13
agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings.
14
C.
Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner (Yelm
15
Community Schools), Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects), as appropriate to agenda
16
topics for each meeting.
17
D.
Agenda:
18
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
19
2. Review of Work progress.
20
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
21
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
22
5. Review of submittals, schedule, and status of submittals.
23
6. Maintenance of progress schedule.
24
7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
25
8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
26
9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
27
10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
28
11. Other business relating to Work.
29
12. Other Topics: Review present and future needs of each entity present, including such
30
items as following:
31
a. Interface requirements.
32
b. Sequences.
33
c. Deliveries.
34
d. Off -site fabrication problems.
35
e. Access.
36
f. Site utilization.
37
g. Temporary facilities and services.
38
h. Hours of Work.
39
i. Hazards and risks. Housekeeping.
40
j. Quality and Work standards.
41
k. Change Orders.
42
I. Documentation of information for payment requests.
43
E.
Erickson McGovern shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to
44
participants, with two copies to Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects), Owner (Yelm
45
Community Schools), participants, and those affected by decisions made.
46
1. Format: Record minutes of these meetings per following format:
47
a. Header:
48
1) Project Name, Date, and Time.
49
2) Attendees.
50
b. Main Headings.
51
c. Corrections (previous weeks meeting minutes).
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 3000-3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 d. Progress.
2 e. Technical Concerns:
3 1) Civil.
4 2) Structural.
5 3) Mechanical.
6 4) Electrical.
7 5) Architectural.
8 f. Schedule.
9 g. Submittals.
10 h. Coordination and Changes (RFI's, COP's, CCD's, and CO's) (Pay Requests).
11 i. Old Business.
12 j. New Business.
13 k. Site Observations.
14 I. Other Items.
15 m. Distribution.
16 1) All attendees and others required (provide listing).
17 2. Next Meeting Time and Location: (Agenda for last meeting of month will include review of
18 monthly payment request).
19 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
20 A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit Preliminary Schedule
21 B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.
22 C. Within 10 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete
23 schedule for review.
24 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
25 schedule.
26 D. Within 5 days afterjoint review, submit complete schedule.
27 3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
28 A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
29 1. Product data.
30 2. Shop drawings.
31 3. Samples for selection.
32 4. Samples for verification.
33 B. Submit to Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) for review for the limited purpose of
34 checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the
35 contract documents.
36 C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
37 D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
38 article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT
39 PROCEDURES.
40 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
41
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:
42
1.
Design data.
43
2.
Certificates.
44
3.
Test reports.
45
4.
Inspection reports.
46
5.
Manufacturer's instructions.
47
6.
Manufacturer's field reports.
48
7.
Other types indicated.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 3000-4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Submit for Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects)'s knowledge as contract administrator or
2 for Owner (Yelm Community Schools). No action will be taken.
3 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
4 A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
5 B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
6 C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
7 1. Project record documents.
8 2. Operation and maintenance data.
9 3. Warranties.
10 4. Bonds.
11 5. Other types as indicated.
12 D. Submit for Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s benefit during and after project completion.
13 3.07 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
14 A. Documents for Review:
15 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8 -1/2 x 11 inches (215 x 280 mm): Submit the
16 number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by
17 Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
18 2. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches (910 x 1220 mm): Submit the number of
19 opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by
20 Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
21 B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies.
22 C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed.
23 Submit one extra of submittals for information.
24 D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; all of which will be
25 retained by Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
26 1. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.
27 3.08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
28 A. Shop Drawing Procedures:
29 1. Prepare accurate, drawn -to- scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting the
30 Contract Documents and coordinating related Work.
31 2. Generic, non - project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the
32 requirements for shop drawings.
33 B. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form.
34 C. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810 or similar transmittal form.
35 1. Items to be included:
36 a. Date
37 b. Project name and address.
38 c. "To" name and address.
39 d. "From" name and address.
40 e. Description of item being transmitted.
41 f. Action requested.
42 g. Number of copies being transmitted.
43 h. Format and description of transmitted item.
44 i. Remarks if any.
45 j. Who is making the submission - "name ".
46 k. Persons or others that have been also transmitted copies - "CC ".
47 D. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a
48 sequential alphabetic suffix.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 3000-5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number,
and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.
3 F. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of
4 Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
5 information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
6 G. Deliver submittals to Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) at business address.
7 H. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
8 I. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
9 J. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be
10 detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
11
K.
Provide space for Contractor and Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) review stamps.
12
L.
When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
13
M.
Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to
14
comply with requirements.
15
N.
Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
16
3.09 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
17
A.
Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is
18
required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken,
19
and return promptly.
20
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
21
B.
Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self - explanatory action
22
stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked to indicate action taken.
23
1. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise as Noted and Resubmit" or "Rejected" to be
24
used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
25
2. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special
26
processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "No Exceptions Noted"
27
or "Provide as Noted ".
28 3.10 COLOR SELECTIONS
29 A. All samples required to be submitted for selection and verification will be approved as soon as
30 acceptable, however colors will be selected as a group according to the following groups:
31 1. Architectural interior finishes.
32 2. Architectural exterior finishes.
33 3. Electrical items and fixtures.
34 4. Mechanical items and fixtures.
35 B. It is vital that the contractor provide all items required in a group designation for a color
36 selection. Missing items will delay the selection process and all delays will be the responsibility
37 of the Contractor. No additional time or extensions will allowed due the delay of submitting
38 required submittals.
39 C. Allow 4 calendar days for selection of colors by the Owner and the Architect
` WC] 4 0 14:1-1111111150101010 1110 V-111 I IQ 0
41 A. Administration:
42 1. Assign specific persons as project manager, superintendent, project engineer, and staff to
43 administer and supervise Work. Do not change assigned persons without permission of
44 Owner and Architect. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
45 procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress
46 of Work.
47 B. Organization:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 3000-6 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1. Coordinate construction activities to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of
2 Work. Coordinate construction operations of Contractor, subcontractors of any tier, and
3 suppliers, that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and
4 performance.
5 C. Timing:
6 1. Where installation of part of Work is dependent on installation of other components,
7 schedule construction activities in sequence required to obtain best results. Make
8 adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
9 D. Notification:
10 1. Where necessary, prepare transmittal for distribution to each party involved, outlining
11 special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices,
12 reports, and attendance at meetings.
13 2. Other Work: Prepare similar memoranda for Owner, utility companies, and separate
14 Contractors where coordination of their Work is required.
15 E. Cleaning And Protection:
16 1. General: During handling and installation of work at the project site, clean and protect
17 work in progress and adjoining work on the basis of continuous maintenance. Apply
18 protective covering on installed work where it is required to ensure freedom from damage
19 or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
20 a. Clean and maintain as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction
21 period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without
22 damaging effects.
23 2. Limiting Exposures of Work: To the extent possible through reasonable control and
24 protection methods, supervise performance of the work in such a manner and by such
25 means which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be
26 subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the
27 construction period.
28 a. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following:
29 1) Excessive static or dynamic loading.
30 2) Excessive internal or external pressures.
31 3) Excessively high or low temperatures.
32 4) Thermal shock.
33 5) Excessively high or low humidity.
34 6) Air contamination or pollution.
35 7) Water or ice.
36 8) Solvents.
37 9) Chemicals.
38 10) Light.
39 11) Radiation.
40 12) Puncture.
41 13) Abrasion.
42 14) Heavy traffic.
43 15) Soiling, staining and corrosion.
44 16) Bacteria.
45 17) Rodent and insect infestation.
46 18) Combustion.
47 19) Electrical current.
48 20) High speed operation.
49 21) Improper lubrication.
50 22) Unusual wear or other misuse.
51 23) Contact between incompatible materials.
52 24) Destructive testing.
53 25) Misalignment.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 3000-7 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 26) Excessive weathering.
2 27) Unprotected storage.
3 28) Improper shipping or handling.
4 29) Theft.
5 30) Vandalism.
6 F. Conservation and Salvage:
7 1. General: It is a requirement for supervision and administration of the work that
8 construction operations be carried out with the maximum possible consideration given to
9 conservation of energy, water and materials.
10 END OF SECTION
11
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 3000-8 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 01 4000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality assurance submittals.
B. Control of installation.
C. Tolerances.
D. Testing and inspection services.
E. Manufacturers' field services.
F. Schedule of required testing and inspections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00 3100 - Available Project Information: Soil investigation data.
B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants;
2008 (Reapproved 2014).
B. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates
for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2014.
C. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2013.
D. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the
Testing and /or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction;
2012a.
E. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection,
Testing, or Special Inspection; 2014a.
F. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2013.
G. 2012 Washington Energy Code: Section C402.4.1.2.3 - Building Test.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency Qualifications:
1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names
of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.
2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction
Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of
remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
B. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect
(Erickson McGovern Architects) and to Contractor.
1. Include:
a. Date issued.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name of inspector.
d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
e. Identification of product and specifications section.
f. Location in the Project.
g. Type of test/inspection.
h. Date of test /inspection.
i. Results of test/inspection.
j. Conformance with Contract Documents.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
01 4000-1
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 k. When requested by Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects), provide interpretation
2 of results.
3 2. Test report submittals are for Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects)'s knowledge as
4 contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
5 given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner (Yelm
6 Community Schools)'s information.
7 C. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
8 instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start -up, adjusting, and finishing, for the
9 Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter
10 conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application
11 or installation.
12 D. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects)'s benefit as
13 contract administrator or for Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
14 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
15 given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
16 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect
17 (Erickson McGovern Architects) or Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
18 1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS - SEE SECTION 01 4219
19 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES
20
A.
Owner (Yelm Community Schools) will employ and pay for services of an independent testing
21
agency to perform other specified testing.
22
B.
As indicated in individual specification sections, Owner (Yelm Community Schools) or
23
Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other
24
specified testing.
25
C.
Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in
26
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
27
D.
Contractor Employed Agency:
28
1. Testing Agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 543, ASTM C 1021,
29
ASTM C 1077, and ASTM C 1093.
30
2. Inspection Agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329.
31
3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State of Washington.
32
4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.
33
5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST
34
established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality
35
assurance program.
36
PART 2
PRODUCTS - NOT USED
37
PART 3
EXECUTION
38
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
39
A.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
40
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
41
B.
Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
42
C.
Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
43
Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) before proceeding.
44
D.
Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
45
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
46
workmanship.
47
E.
Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
48
F.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
49
manufacturer.
2015-19/
YCS Ed Center TI 01 4000-2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
G.
Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
2
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
3
3.02 TOLERANCES
4
A.
Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
5
Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
6
B.
Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract
7
Documents, request clarification from Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) before
8
proceeding.
9
C.
Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
10
3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION
11
A.
See building envelop testing requirements specified below.
12
B.
Testing Agency Duties:
13
1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect (Erickson McGovern
14
Architects) and Contractor in performance of services.
15
2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
16
standards.
17
3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
18
4. Promptly notify Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) and Contractor of observed
19
irregularities or non - conformance of Work or products.
20
5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect (Erickson McGovern
21
Architects).
22
6. Submit reports of all tests /inspections specified.
23
C.
Limits on Testing /Inspection Agency Authority:
24
1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract
25
Documents.
26
2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
27
3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
28
4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
29
D.
Contractor Responsibilities:
30
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be
31
used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
32
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to
33
manufacturers' facilities.
34
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
35
a. To provide access to Work to be tested /inspected.
36
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be
37
tested /inspected.
38
c. To facilitate tests /inspections.
39
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
40
4. Notify Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected
41
time for operations requiring testing /inspection services.
42
5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional
43
samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
44
6. Arrange with Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s agency and pay for additional samples,
45
tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
46
E.
Re- testing required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall be performed
47
by the same agency on instructions by Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
48
F.
Re- testing required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
49
Contractor.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 4000-3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 G. Re- testing required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall be performed
2 by the same agency on instructions by Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects). Payment for
3 re- testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract
4 Price.
5 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
6 A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
7 manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
8 surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start -up of equipment, test, adjust and
9 balance of equipment and training as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
10 B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
11 supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
12 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
13 A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
14 B. If, in the opinion of Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects), it is not practical to remove and
15 replace the Work, Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) will direct an appropriate remedy or
16 adjust payment.
17 3.06 SCHEDULE OF REQUIRED TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
18 A. Additional Structural: As specified on Structural General Notes Quality Assurance /Special
19 Inspection.
20 B. Schedule:
21 1. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel Placement: Periodic visual inspection (see Structural
22 drawings).
23 2. Suspended Ceilings: Periodic visual inspection.
24 END OF SECTION
25
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 4000-4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General product requirements.
1. Existing products.
2. New products.
B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
C. Product option requirements.
D. Substitution limitations and procedures.
1. Product substitutions.
a. Requirements prior to bid.
b. Requirements after bid date.
E. Procedures for Owner (Yelm Community Schools)- supplied products.
F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
G. Damaged materials or products.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturer's
standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical
characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for
functional equipment and appliances.
C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the
manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS
A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically
required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re -used, relocated,
reinstalled, delivered to the Owner (Yelm Community Schools), or otherwise indicated as to
remain the property of the Owner (Yelm Community Schools), become the property of the
Contractor; remove from site.
C. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or
other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified.
2.02 NEW PRODUCTS
A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 6000-1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics:
2 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.
3 C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:
4 1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 01 6116.
5 2. If wet - applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 01 6116.
6 3. Have a published GreenScreen Chemical Hazard Analysis.
7 D. Motors: Refer to Section 22 0513, NEMA MG 1 Type. Specific motor type is specified in
8 individual specification sections.
9 E. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
10 and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box.
11 F. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot (2 m) cord and plug including grounding connector for
12 connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification
13 sections.
14 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS
15 A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting
16 those standards or description.
17 1. Provide products that comply with Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless
18 otherwise indicated, new at time of installation. Provide products complete with
19 accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for complete
20 installation and intended use and effect. Where available, provide standard products of
21 types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other
22 projects.
23 B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
24 Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
25 C. Product Selection:
26 1. Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection and not industry
27 traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects.
28 Procedures governing product selection include following:
29 a. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only single
30 product or manufacturer, provide product indicated.
31 b. Semi - proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name two or
32 more products or manufacturers, provide one of the products indicated.
33 c. Or Approved: Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name,
34 accompanied by term "or approved ", comply with Contract Document provisions
35 concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of unnamed product.
36 d. Nonproprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or manufacturers
37 that are available and may be incorporated in Work, but do not restrict Contractor to
38 use of these products only, Contractor may propose other available product that
39 complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Comply with Contract
40 Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of
41 unnamed product.
42 e. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe product or
43 assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of brand or trade
44 name, provide product or assembly that provides characteristics and otherwise
45 complies with Contract requirements.
46 f. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance
47 with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these
48 requirements and are recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
49 Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature or
50 by the manufacturer's certification of performance. Overall performance of product is
51 implied where product is specified for specific performances.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 6000-2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 g. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only
2 require compliance with imposed code, standard, or regulation, select product that
3 complies with standards, codes, or regulations specified.
4 h. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching established Sample,
5 Architect's decision will be final on whether proposed product matches satisfactorily.
6 Where no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and
7 complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of Contract
8 Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of matching product in another
9 product category.
10 i. Where specified product requirements include phrase "... as selected from
11 manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or similar phrase, select product
12 and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. Architect will
13 select color, pattern, and texture from product line selected.
14 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
15 A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in
16 individual specification sections.
17 B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
18 PART 3 EXECUTION
19 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
A. During bidding, requests for approved equal or substitutions, clarification of specifications, or
protest of specifications shall be received by Architect, not later than six (6) days prior to bid
date. Requests received after that time will not be considered
1. To aid in the review of requests, submit on form following this section, which may be
copied.
2. If proposed substitution is approved, such approvals will be set forth in an Addendum.
Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner
B. After date of Contract, the Owner may, at his option, consider formal requests from Contractor
for substitution of products in place of those specified when submitted in accordance with the
requirements of this Section. One or more of the following conditions must also be
documented:
1. The substitution must be required for compliance with final interpretation of code
requirements or insurance regulations
2. The substitution must be due to the unavailability of the specified products, through no
fault of the Contractor. The contractor must provide a letter from the supplier or
manufacturer attesting to the products unavailability.
3. The substitution may be requested when subsequent information discloses the inability of
the specified products to perform properly or to fit in the designated space.
4. The substitution may be due to the manufacturer's or fabricator's refusal to certify or
guarantee performance of the specified product as required.
5. The substitution may be requested when it is clearly seen, in the judgment of the
Architect, that a substitution would be in the Owner's best interests in terms of cost, time,
or other considerations.
6. Request for substitution beyond those identified in items 1 through 4 above, will not be
considered unless General contractor and / or material supplier agree to an adjustment in
the contract amount associated with costs relating to the review of the substitution
request. An adjustment in the contract amount shall be required in both cases of approval
or disapproval of the substitution request.
7. Rates of Compensation shall be as follows:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
01 6000-3
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Erickson McGovern Architects
$150.00 per hour
Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical Engineers
$150.00 per hour
Landscape Architect
$150.00 per hour
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
01 6000-3
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
Other Consultants $150.00 per hour
Mileage .65 per mile
1
2 C. Substitutions will not be considered if:
3 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents
4 2. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or product data submittals without
5 request submitted in accordance with Article 3.01.
6 D. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
7 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one
8 proposed substitution.
9 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed
10 product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
11 3. Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) will notify Contractor in writing of decision to
12 accept or reject request.
13 3.02 OWNER- SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
14
A.
General: Owner will furnish certain products for Project.
15
1. Contract installation work includes providing any necessary backing and support systems
16
to receive and install Owner's equipment, plus make mechanical, electrical, and ancillary
17
connections.
18
2. Cost for installation of this work is included in Contract Sum.
19
B.
Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s Responsibilities:
20
1. Arrange for and deliver Owner (Yelm Community Schools) reviewed shop drawings,
21
product data, and samples, to Contractor.
22
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.
23
3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.
24
4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient
25
items.
26
5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.
27
C.
Contractor's Responsibilities:
28
1. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with
29
Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
30
2. Handle, store, install and finish products.
31
3. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.
32
3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
33
A.
Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site
34
storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
35
B.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
36
C.
Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of
37
surrounding areas.
38
D.
Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
39
correct, and products are undamaged.
40
E.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
41
disfigurement, or damage.
42
F.
Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
43
3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
44
A.
Designate receiving /storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to
45
installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to
46
excessive materials handling and misapplication.
47
B.
Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
2015-19/
YCS Ed Center TI 01 6000-4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D. Store sensitive products in weather - tight, climate controlled enclosures in an environment
favorable to product.
E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
prevent condensation and degradation of products.
G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
3.05 DAMAGED PRODUCTS
A. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the premises. Replace materials
which have been damaged.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
END OF SECTION
01 6000-5
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 01 6001
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
1.01 TO: OWNER (YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS)
1.02 PROJECT: EDUCATION CENTER TENANT IMPROVEMENT
1.03 SPECIFIED ITEM:
A. Section: Page: Paragraph:
B. Description:
1. The undersigned requests consideration of the following:
a.
(manufacturer)
b.
1.04 MANUFACTURER
A. Address:
B. Phone Number:
C. Trade Name:
(product)
D. History: _ less than 5 years _ less than 10 years _ greater than 10 years
1.05 INSTALLER (PROVIDE, OR LIST SAME IF BY MANUFACTURER)
A. Name of Company:
B. Address:
C. Phone Number:
D. History: _ less than 5 years _ less than 10 years _ greater than 10 years
1.06 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION
A. Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance
and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly
identified.
1. Include complete information on changes to Drawings and /or Specifications which
proposed substitution will require for it proper installation or use.
B. Fill in the blanks below:
1. Does the substitution affect dimensions indicated on the drawings ? YES NO
M.
a. If yes, provide information indicating change.
2. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and
detail costs caused by the requested substitution ? YES NO ( *).
a. "Yes" answers shall be grounds for rejection.
3. Will the substitution affect other trades? YES NO ( *).
a. If yes, provide information indicating affect or change.
4. Will the substitution affect or be affected by applicable code requirements? YES
NO M.
a. If yes, provide information indicating affect.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 6001 -1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
5. Are there significant differences between the proposed substitution and the specified
item? YES NO M.
a. If yes, provide information indicating differences.
6. Is there a difference relating to guarantee /warranties between the proposed substitution
and the specified item? YES NO ( *).
a. If yes, provide information indicating differences.
7. Will the substitution affect an increase in contract time? YES NO ( *).
a. If yes, provide information indicating affect or change.
C. ( *) - If the answer to any of the above questions is "NO" and this is found to be incorrect, the
substitution may be rejected and the Undersigned will be required to provide the original
specified item, including corrective work.
D. The undersigned further states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments,
are correct.
1. They have personally investigated the specified item and compared it to the item
requested for substitution.
2. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.
3. The function, appearance and quality of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent or
superior to the Specified Item.
4. Waives any known or unknown for an increase in Contract Sum or Time.
E. Submitted by:
1. Signature:
a. (Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind its firm to the above
terms.)
2. Firm:
3. Address:
4. Date:
5. Telephone:
F. Attachments:
FOR USE BY ARCHITECT
ACCEPTED NOT ACCEPTED
ACCEPTED AS NOTED RECEIVED TO LATE
REMARKS
BY:
DATE:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
END OF SECTION
01 6001 -2
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
Drawings.
Reports.
Product Data.
Warranty.
Samples.
Other:
Tests.
FOR USE BY ARCHITECT
ACCEPTED NOT ACCEPTED
ACCEPTED AS NOTED RECEIVED TO LATE
REMARKS
BY:
DATE:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
END OF SECTION
01 6001 -2
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
►#►J
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 01 7000
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition.
C. Pre - installation meetings.
D. Cutting and patching.
E. Cleaning and protection.
F. Safety procedures.
G. Starting of systems and equipment.
H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner (Yelm Community Schools) personnel.
I. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment
procedures.
J. General requirements for maintenance service.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 00 5200 - Contract Forms.
1. The Standard Form of the American Institute Of Architects or a Project of Limited Scope -
AIA document A -107 - 2007.
B. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy;
work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated materials.
C. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.
D. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating
facilities.
E. Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES: Project record documents, operation and
maintenance data, warranties and bonds.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner (Yelm Community Schools) or separate Contractor.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required.
1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
B. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over
adjacent property.
C. Cover all ductwork intake and exhaust diffussers during all demolition and /or construction.
Remove upon conpletion of construction and system start -up.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7000-1 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
D.
Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects
2
from damaging the work.
3
E.
Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,
4
water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced
5
E.
by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
6
1.06 COORDINATION
7
A.
Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to
8
21
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,
9
22
with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
10
B.
Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
11
C.
Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible
12
25
with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities
13
A.
for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
14
D.
Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work
15
that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and
16
conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces
17
efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
18
E.
In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
19
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
20
F.
Coordinate completion and clean -up of work of separate sections.
21
G.
After Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for
22
correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize
23
disruption of Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s activities.
24
PART 2
PRODUCTS
25
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
26
A.
New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching
27
and extending work.
28
B.
Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where
29
necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
30
C.
Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
31
described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
32
PART 3
EXECUTION
33
3.01 EXAMINATION
34
A.
Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.
35
Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
36
B.
Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being
37
applied or attached.
38
C.
Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
39
D.
Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize
40
waste due to over - ordering or misfabrication.
41 E. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements
42 subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,
43 assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means
44 acceptance of existing conditions.
45 3.02 PREPARATION
46 A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
47 B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7000-2 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
C.
Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
2
applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
4
A.
Inspection of Conditions:
5
1. Require installer of each Work component to inspect both substrate and conditions under
6
which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
7
corrected in acceptable manner. Initiation of installation will confirm installer's acceptance
8
of work place for Work to proceed.
9
B.
Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's
10
instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
11
C.
Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
12
D.
Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and
13
horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.
14
E.
Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
15
F.
Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
16
G.
When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not
17
possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make
18
recommendation to Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
19
H.
Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors,
20
walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.
21
I.
Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs in existing work, submit recommendation
22
for providing a smooth transition for Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) review and
23
request instructions.
24
J.
Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required.
25
K.
Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified
26
condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.
27
L.
Re -cover and refinish work that exposes mechanical and electrical work exposed accidentally
28
during the work.
29 3.04 ALTERATIONS
30 A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
31 existing record documents only.
32 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
33 2. Report discrepancies to Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) before disturbing
34 existing installation.
35 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
36 B. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for
37 replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.
38 1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior
39 enclosure weatherproof.
40 2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by
41 alterations work.
42 C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
43 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace
44 with new construction specified.
45 2. Remove items indicated on drawings.
46 3. Relocate items indicated on drawings.
47 4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch,
48 and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if
49 necessary for successful application of new finish.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7000-3 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged
2 surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.
3 D. Services (including, but not limited to, HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, and Telecommunications):
4 Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction.
5 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to
6 equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access
7 or provide access panel.
8 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require
9 reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment
10 as required.
11 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new
12 services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready
13 for service.
14 a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize
15 duration of outages.
16 b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.
17 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above
18 accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub
19 and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new
20 construction.
21 E. Protect existing work to remain.
22 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
23 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
24 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
25 4. Patch as specified for patching new work.
26 F. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.
27 1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not
28 possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and
29 make recommendation to Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
30 2. Trim existing wood doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required.
31 G. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the
32 surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch
33 so that the substrate is ready for the new finish.
34 H. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:
35 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces
36 to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent
37 finishes.
38 2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re -cover and
39 refinish to match.
40 3. Patch as specified for patching new work.
41 I. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off -site;
42 do not burn or bury.
43 J. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.
44 K. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.
45 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING
46 A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
47 B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.
48 C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
49 1. Complete the work.
50 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7000-4 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
2 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
3 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
4 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
5 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
6 8. Remove and replace defective and non - conforming work.
7 D. Execute cutting and patching to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install
8 improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non - conforming work, to
9 remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work
10 for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent
11 work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work.
12 1. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to
13 Divisions 21 - 28 for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching
14 mechanical and electrical installations.
15 2. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner
16 that would reduce their load- carrying capacity or load- deflection ratio.
17 3. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety
18 related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as
19 intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.
20 4. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed to the exterior or in
21 occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
22 aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and
23 replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
24 E. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate
25 surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
26 1. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions
27 under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before
28 proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.
29 a. Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching,
30 including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and
31 conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.
32 2. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
33 3. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
34 Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might
35 be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
36 a. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to
37 adjoining areas.
38 b. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or duct work
39 serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have
40 been made to bypass them.
41 c. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with
42 the original installer's recommendations.
43 1) In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for
44 sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to
45 size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
46 openings when not in use.
47 2) To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or
48 finished side into concealed surfaces.
49 3) Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a
50 carborundum saw or diamond core drill.
51 4) By -pass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting, where services
52 are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut -off pipe or
53 conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal the
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7000-5 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other
2 foreign matter after by- passing and cutting.
3 F. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture
4 resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.
5 1. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and
6 moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.
7 2. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of
8 other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore
9 surfaces to their original condition.
10 G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior
11 approval.
12 H. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
13 I. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
14 J. Patching:
15 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous
16 surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire
17 unit.
18 2. Match color, texture, and appearance.
19 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other
20 imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair
21 substrate prior to repairing finish.
22 K. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest
23 intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
24 1. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are
25 involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible
26 with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or
27 surpass that of existing materials.
28 L. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing
29 other imperfections. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform
30 finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to
31 nearest intersections.
32 1. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified
33 tolerances.
34 a. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the
35 installation.
36 b. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
37 adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and
38 refinishing.
39 M. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as
40 access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly
41 clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore
42 damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
43 N. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where
44 new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.
45 3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING
46 A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
47 condition.
48 B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed
49 or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7000-6 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning
to eliminate dust.
3 D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash /rubbish from site periodically and
4 dispose off -site; do not burn or bury.
5 3.07 SAFETY PROCEDURES
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
6%
A. Preliminary Work:
1. Prior to the start of and during the course of the Work (above and below ground), the
Contractor shall make a thorough survey of the entire worksite to determine all potential
hazards. Workmen shall be made aware of those hazards and shall be instructed in
procedures and the use of equipment for their protection. The Contractor shall verify the
location and condition ( "live" or "dead ") of all utilities on and near the worksite and take
precautions to protect his employees, the general public, and the property.
B. Imminent Danger:
1. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for any accidents (including death) occurring at
any time during the progress of the work and until the final acceptance of the work by the
Owner which may happen to any of his workmen or those of any Subcontractor employed
on the building, or for any damage or injuries (including death) which his work and
operations may cause to the work being constructed, or to existing buildings, or to any
tenants and occupants of the property, or of the adjoining properties, or to the public or
private property.
C. Safety:
1. The Contractor shall ensure that all employees, visitors, subcontractors' employees, and
suppliers' employees, while on the work site, comply with the requirements of WISHA,
these requirements and the safety precautions contained in the several Specifications
Sections. The Contractor shall promptly and fully comply with, execute and, without
separate charge thereof to the Owner, shall enforce compliance with the provisions of the
Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act of 1973, with particular attention paid but not
limited to Chapter 296 -155, WAC Safety Standards for Construction Work; with particular
attention paid but not limited to Chapter 296 -24 WAC General Safety and Health
Standards; with particular attention paid but not limited to Chapters 296 -27, 196 -350 and
296 -360 WAC regarding Administrative Safety and Health Act Chapter 49 -17 RCW, and
any addenda thereto.
2. The Contractor shall immediately advise the Owner of inspections conducted by WISHA at
the work site, and shall transmit copies of citations and violations to the Architect
(Erickson McGovern Architects).
D. Safety Responsibilities:
1. Contractor shall be responsible to:
a. Ensure compliance with these requirements, WISHA requirements, and other safety
requirements.
b. Authorize immediate action to correct substandard safety conditions.
c. Review and act to ensure compliance with safety procedures with his supervisors,
subcontractors, and suppliers.
d. Make thorough daily safety inspections of the work site and immediately act to
eliminate unsafe acts and unsafe conditions.
e. Investigate worksite accidents and recommend immediate corrective action.
f. Assist in the preparation of accident investigation and reporting procedures.
g. Be responsible for the control, availability, and use of safety equipment, including
employee personal protective equipment.
E. Request For Variances:
1. Requests for variances to deviate from WISHA requirements must follow the current
established procedures by the Agency.
F. Failure To Comply:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
01 7000-7
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
A.
1. If the project is shut down due to The Contractor's failure to comply with the requirements
2
of WISHA or other applicable safety requirements, no part of the time loss due to any such
3
B.
suspension of operations or stop orders shall be made the subject of a claim for extension
4
of time or for increased cost or damage by the Contractor.
5
3.08 CONSERVATION AND SALVAGE
6
A.
General: It is a requirement for supervision and administration of the work that construction
7
42
operations be carried out with the maximum possible consideration given to conservation of
8
A.
energy, water and materials.
9
3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
10
A.
Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
11
B.
Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
12
C.
Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate
13
work area to prevent damage.
14
D.
Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
15
E.
Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement
16
of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
17
F.
Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary,
18
obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
19
G.
Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if
20
possible.
21
3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP
22 A. Coordinate schedule for start -up of various equipment and systems.
23 B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
24 rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
25 C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required
26 by the equipment or system manufacturer.
27 D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
28 E. Execute start -up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
29 representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
30 F. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
31 representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system
32 installation prior to start -up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
33 G. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning
34 correctly.
35 3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
36
A.
Demonstrate start -up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble- shooting, servicing, maintenance,
37
and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.
38
B.
For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
39
season within six (6)months.
40
C.
Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration
41
and instruction of owner personnel.
42
3.12 ADJUSTING
43
A.
Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
44
3.13 FINAL CLEANING
45
A.
Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
2015 -19 /
YCS Ed Center TI 01 7000-8 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains
2 and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft
3 surfaces.
4 C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or
5 nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.
6 D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the
7 surface and material being cleaned.
8 E. Replace filters of operating equipment.
9 F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, drainage
10 systems, and
11 G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
12 H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash /rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;
13 dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
14 I. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for
15 cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's
16 property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems.
17 Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner
18 1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have
19 become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.
20 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
21 A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals and Procedures for additional requirements
22
B.
Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
23
C.
Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for
24
completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of
25
Substantial Completion.
26
D.
Notify Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) when work is considered ready for Substantial
27
Completion.
28
E.
Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract
29
Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in
30
accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects)'s
31
Substantial Completion inspection.
32
F.
Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing
33
Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects)'s and Contractor's comprehensive list of items
34
identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
35
G.
Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for
36
access to Owner (Yelm Community Schools)- occupied areas.
37
H.
Notify Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) when work is considered finally complete and
38
ready for Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects)'s Substantial Completion final inspection.
39
I.
Complete items of work determined by Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) listed in
40
executed Certificate of Substantial Completion.
41
3.15 MAINTENANCE
42
A.
Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
43
B.
Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one
44
year from the Date of Final Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is
45
longer.
46
C.
Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,
47
and lubricate as required.
2015 -19 /
YCS Ed Center TI 01 7000-9 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
WE
3 E
4
5
6
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace
parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
prior written consent of the Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
END OF SECTION
01 7000- 10
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT
REQUIREMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 01 7800
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Inspection Procedures.
B. Project Record Documents.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals.
D. Warranty Data and Manuals.
E. One Year Correction Period.
F. Warranties and Bonds.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near end of Contract time, in
preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy by
Owner and similar actions evidencing completion of the work. Time of closeout is directly
related to "Substantial Completion."
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 00 5000 - Agreement
B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.
C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities.
1. Certificate of Temporary Occupancy or Certificate of Occupancy.
a. For final acceptance provide a copy of the Certificate of Occupancy, if not submitted
at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Final Adjustments to Accounts.
1. The original Contract sum.
2. Reflect all adjustments to Contract Sum for review, and revision if necessary, by Architect
and Owner Indicate the following:
a. Previous Change Orders.
b. Alternatives.
c. Deductions for reinspection costs.
3. Architect will prepare final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum
not previously made by Change Orders.
a. Contractor will issue final Certificate for Payment.
4. Final payment cannot be released until after forty -five (45) days have elapsed following
the completion of the Contract and final acceptance of the Work by the Owner.
C. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) 15
day prior to the substantial completion date.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before
start of Work. Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) will review draft and return one
copy with comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner (Yelm Community Schools), submit completed documents within ten
days after acceptance.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7800-1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will
2 be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect (Erickson McGovern
3 Architects) comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final
4 submission.
5 4. Submit:
6 a. 1 set of preliminary documents within ten days after substantial inspection and
7 receiving punchlist.
8 1) For review by Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects), engineers and
9 consultants, and Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
10 b. 1 set of revised final documents in final form within ten days after final inspection.
11 1) For review by Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects), engineers and
12 consultants, and Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
13 C. 1 set of revised final documents in final form and CD disk with all documents in PDF
14 format within ten days prior to final Application for Payment.
15 1) For Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s records.
16 5. Submit 3 sets of revised final documents in final form within ten days after final inspection.
17 E. Warranties and Bonds:
18 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
19 Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s permission, submit documents within 10 days after
20 acceptance.
21 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Final Completion, prior to final
22 Application for Payment.
23 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Final Completion,
24 submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of final acceptance as the
25 beginning of the warranty period.
26 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
27 PART 3 EXECUTION
28 3.01 INSPECTION PROCEDURES
29 A. Substantial Completion:
30 1. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial
31 Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
32 a. Submit a written notice that the Work, or designated portions thereof, is substantially
33 complete.
34 1) Submit Certificate of Occupancy.
35 2) Submit Asbestos Free Certification.
36 (a) The Contractor shall certify that all new materials and products for this
37 Contract are free of asbestos. Each supplier and sub - contractor shall
38 warrant to the Contractor that materials and products provided by them as
39 part of the work are free of asbestos. If specified materials or products are
40 known to contain asbestos, the Architect shall be informed, and appropriate
41 action shall be taken to provide asbestos free materials or products. Where
42 any doubt exists, it shall be the responsibility of the supplier or
43 sub - contractor providing the materials and products to verify test results
44 showing that materials and products are free of asbestos.
45 (b) Submit notarized statement on Contractor's letterhead addressed to the
46 Owner certifying that "to the best of our knowledge" all materials and
47 products provided for this Contract are free of asbestos. Asbestos free
48 certification required prior to Substantial Completion and occupancy of the
49 facilities.
50 b. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial
51 Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work
52 claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7800-2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of
2 changes to the Contract Sum.
3 1) If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items,
4 the value of incomplete construction, an reasons the Work is not complete
5 c. Advise Owner of pending insurance change -over requirements.
6 d. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final
7 certifications and similar documents.
8 e. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
9 access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and
10 similar releases. Furnish to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner a Certificate of
11 Occupancy, issued by duly authorized officials, stating that the work complies with
12 provisions of the applicable building codes. Contractor to contact and coordinate all
13 necessary City, County, or State officials required to review the work for the
14 Certification of Occupancy.
15 f. Complete final clean up requirements, and otherwise repair and restore marred finish
16 work.
17 g. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to
18 Owner.
19 h. Make final changeover of locks and transmit keys to Owner, and advise Owner's
20 personnel of changeover in security provisions.
21 i. Complete start -up testing of systems, and schedule instruction of Owner's
22 operating /maintenance personnel. Discontinue (or change over) and remove from
23 project site temporary facilities and services, along with construction tools and
24 facilities, mock -ups, and similar elements.
25 2. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either
26 proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect
27 will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion on AIA Form G704 following
28 inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected
29 before the certificate will be issued.
30 a. Should Architect determine that the Work is not substantially complete:
31 1) Architect will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons
32 therefore.
33 2) Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second written
34 notice of substantial completion to Architect.
35 b. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has
36 been substantially completed.
37 1) Re- inspection Fees: Should the Architect or design consultant be required to
38 make more than two substantial inspections due to Contractor's failure to correct
39 specified deficiencies, the Contractor shall bear all costs (including
40 compensation for the design consultant's additional services) made necessary
41 thereby. The Contractor will be required to submit a signed agreement to pay
42 such costs as per the agreement contained here.
43 c. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
44 acceptance.
45 B. Final Acceptance:
46 1. See Section 00 5000 for teh Warranty Start Date. If not indicated, the substantial
47 completion date shall be the start date for all warranties.
48 2. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final
49 acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
50 a. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not
51 previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and
52 completed operations where required.
53 1) An affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other
54 indebtedness connected with the work for which the Owner of property might in
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7800-3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. (Use AIA
2 Document G706).
3 (a) An affidavit from each subcontractor on AIA Form G706.
4 (b) If any liens are filed and cause the Owner to employ the services of any
5 attorneys, the cost of the services will be deducted from the retainage.
6 (c) State Department of Labor and Industries Affidavit of Wages Paid (State
7 Form 9843).
8 2) Letter from Bonding Company addressed to Owner but submitted to the
9 Architect, approving release of final payment and waiving submission of final
10 receipts as well as a statement confirming the extension of the Bond for the
11 one -year guarantee period. Final receipts from all subcontractors and material
12 and equipment suppliers shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor if the
13 Surety does not waive this requirement.
14 (a) Consent of Surety Company to final payment, per AIA Document G707 or
15 as otherwise approved by Owner.
16 3) Return all copies of the drawings and specifications in accordance with the
17 General Conditions.
18 b. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the
19 Contract Sum.
20 c. Final payment of funds reserved for Project closeout and punchlist or other withheld
21 funds and release of retainage will not be granted until all punch list items are
22 complete. Each punch list item, when completed by the Contractor, must be initialed
23 by the project superintendent prior to resubmission to the Architect.
24 d. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed
25 or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
26 acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect.
27 e. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
28 f. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement
29 g. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
30 requirements.
31 h. Warranties: As required by appropriate technical sections.
32 i. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: as required by appropriate technical sections.
33 j. Asbestos letter of compliance.
34 3. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for final inspection, the Architect will either
35 proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements.
36 a. Should Architect determine that the Work is not complete:
37 1) Architect will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons
38 therefore.
39 2) Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second written
40 notice of substantial completion to Architect.
41 b. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has
42 been substantially completed.
43 1) Re- inspection Fees: Should the Architect or design consultant be required to
44 make more than two final inspections due to Contractor's failure to correct
45 specified deficiencies, the Contractor shall bear all costs (including
46 compensation for the design consultant's additional services) made necessary
47 thereby. The Contractor will be required to submit a signed agreement to pay
48 such costs as per the agreement contained here.
49 c. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
50 acceptance.
51 C. Rates Of Compensation For Reinspection Services:
52 1. Reinspection services are hereby defined as the following:
53 a. Travel time to and from the job site.
54 b. Mileage compensation for vehicles used to and from the job site.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7800-4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 c. Time required for review, inspection, and meeting at the job site.
2 d. Time required to document, coordinate, and transmit documentation that records a
3 summary of the reinspection.
4 e. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
5 f. Rates of Compensation shall be as follows:
6
Erickson McGovern Architects
$150.00 per hour
Civil, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical Engineers
$150.00 per hour
Landscape Architect
$150.00 per hour
Other Consultants
$150.00 per hour
Mileage
.65 per mile
7
8 3.02 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
9 A. General:
10 1. Project Record Documents shall be kept current and changes recorded concurrently as
11 they are constructed. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
12 2. Record Documents will be reviewed at weekly project meetings. Failure to keep Record
13 Documents current will result in returning to Contractor any Application for Payment until
14 such time that recording of revisions being current is demonstrated to Architect.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
B. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
a. As -Built Drawings: During the Construction Phase, maintain clean, undamaged set of
blue or black line white - prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawing. Mark sets to
show actual installation where installation varies substantially from Work as originally
indicated. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and
accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record cross - reference at corresponding
location on Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that
would be difficult to measure and record at later date.
b. As -Built drawings shall comprise Architectural, Structural, Civil, Plumbing, Mechanical
and Electrical drawings, plus all special equipment, all of which form a part of the
Contract Documents.
c. As -Built drawings shall comprise of all drawings provided, which form a part of the
contract documents.
d. As -built drawings shall be shall be continuously updated by the following method:
1) Electronically update contract drawings by way of PDF (Adobe Acrobat Pro).
Contractor shall acquire, manage and facilitate system use as part of base bid.
2) Electronically up contractor drawings by way of Bluebeam document
management systems. Contractor shall acquire, manage and facilitate system
use as part of base bid.
3) By Hand Adjustments: Color: Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use
other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of Work.
(a) Information: Mark information that is of value to Owner, but that was not
indicated on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. Such information would
be pertaining to equipment data for this specific Project (as when several
items are listed) which is helpful to the repair. Maintenance and operation
shall also be clearly noted.
(b) Record Changes: Note the following related items:Addenda, with
"ADD- (No.) ". Note related accepted and unaccepted Alternates, with
"ALT- (No.) ". Note related Modifications; with "RFI- (No.), ASI- (No.),
CCD- (No.), and PR- (No.) ".
(1) Items added by Addendum.
(2) Accepted Alternate Bid items.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
01 7800-5
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
(3) Modifications made by: RFI- (No.), ASI- (No.), CCD- (No.), and
2
PR- (No.).
3
(4) Form: Organize record document sheets into manageable sets, bind
4
with cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other
5
identification on cover of each set.
6
(5) Updates: Keep current during entire course of Work and available on
7
request for examination by Architect and, when necessary, to establish
8
clearances for other parts of Work. Failure to do so to Architect's
9
satisfaction is grounds for withholding progress payment and final
10
payment.
11
(6) Submittal: Submit as -built drawings with record drawings. As -built
12
drawings will be returned to Contractor after Architect's review and
13
acceptance of record drawings.
14
e.
Concealed Work: Make it possible, using these drawings, to correctly and easily
15
locate, identify and establish orientations, sizes, routings, directions and other
16
features of work which will be concealed underground and /or in finished building.
17
f.
Underground: Establish locations of underground work by dimensions to column lines
18
or walls, locating turns, etc., and by properly referenced centerline or invert elevations
19
and rates of fall.
20
g.
Concealed in Building: Provide sufficient information so work can be located with
21
reasonable accuracy and ease. In some cases, this may be by dimensions. In others,
22
it may be sufficient to illustrate work on drawings in relation to spaces in building near
23
which it was actually installed. Review options with Architect and proceed as directed.
24
h.
General: Following requirements apply to record drawings.
25
1) Quality: Do drawings carefully and neatly by competent draftsman and in form
26
approved by Architect. Use ink marking pen of type specifically for mylars.
27
2) Additional Drawings: Provide as necessary for clarification.
28
3) Identity: Stamp each sheet "RECORD DRAWINGS" and date same.
29
4) Submittal: Submit record drawings, one (1) set of mylars and three (3) sets of
30
blue lines.
31
5) Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
32
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
33
6) Field changes of dimension and detail.
34
7) Details not on original Contract drawings.
35
8) Record Drawings should include a survey of all storm and sewer pipe inverts,
36
manhole, catch basin and area drain rims, location of water features - valves
37
and fire hydrants, and any site features which moved or changed during
38
construction.
39
i.
Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall provide, at his expense, one
40
complete set of revised contract drawings on reproducible diazo mylar and one
41
complete set of blue -or black -line white prints. Submit record drawings to the
42
Architect for approval and transmittal to the Owner.
43
j.
Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall provide the final revised contract
44
drawings in the follow formats:
45
1) One 1/2 size set of drawings with front and back page mylar laminated.
46
2) One full size set of drawings with front and back page mylar laminated.
47
3) One disc with PDF's of updated drawings. PDF drawings shall have titles
48
coinciding with actual drawing sheet numbers and titles.
49
2. Specifications.
50
a.
Record Manual: Maintain one complete copy of Project Manual, expanded to include
51
Addenda, and Modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these
52
documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison
53
with text of manual. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and
54
similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7800-6 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and
2 Product Data.
3 b. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Project Data submittal. Mark these
4 documents to show significant variations in actual work performed in comparison with
5 information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to site, and from
6 manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular
7 attention to concealed products and portions of Work, which cannot otherwise be
8 readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and
9 mark -up of record drawings and manual on Product Data.
10 c. Record Samples: Immediately prior to date or dates of Substantial Completion, meet
11 at site with Architect and Owner's personnel to determine which of submitted samples
12 that have been maintained during progress of Work are to be transmitted to Owner
13 for record purposes. Comply with delivery to Owner's sample storage area.
14 d. Record Changes: Note the following related items:Addenda, with "ADD- (No.) ". Note
15 related accepted and unaccepted Alternates, with "ALT- (No.) ". Note related
16 Modifications; with "RFI- (No.), ASI- (No.), CCD- (No.), and PR- (No.) ".
17 1) Items added by Addendum.
18 2) Accepted Alternate Bid items.
19 3) Modifications made by: RFI- (No.), ASI- (No.), CCD- (No.), and PR- (No.).
20 e. Upon completion of the Work, submit two copies of the record Specifications and one
21 disc containing record specifications in PDF to the Architect for approval and
22 transmittal to the Owner.
23 3. Addenda.
24 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
25 C. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner (Yelm
26 Community Schools).
27 D. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
28 E. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
29 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
30 A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of
31 Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
32 B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and
33 data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
34 C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
35 systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
36 maintenance drawings.
37 D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions
38 for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
39 E. Submittal schedule:
40 1. Preliminary Draft:
41 a. Submit one (1) copy of proposed format, approximately thirty (30) days before
42 substantial completion
43 b. Architect will review and return one (1) copy with comments
44 c. Final Submittal:
45 1) Submit, in final form, one (1) copy of complete data fifteen (15) days prior to
46 Substantial Completion inspection. Copy will be returned with comments.
47 2) Submit two (2) copies in approved final form at Substantial Completion
48 inspection.
49 3) submit one (1) disc containing O & M manual in same order and title as -hard
50 copy.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7800-7 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
2 A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:
3 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.
4 2. Information for re- ordering custom manufactured products.
5 B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents
6 and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and
7 recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
8 C. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed
9 instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and
10 maintenance of the specific products.
11 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
12 A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
13 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.
14 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
15 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.
16 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
17 B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed
18 instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and
19 maintenance of the specific products.
20 C. Operating Procedures: Include start -up, break -in, and routine normal operating instructions and
21 sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions.
22 Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
23 D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative
24 maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and
25 alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
26 E. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
27 F. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
28 G. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
29 H. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
30 required for maintenance.
31
I.
Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
32
3.06 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
33
A.
Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner (Yelm Community
34
Schools)'s personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the
35
specification sections. CSI division and section numbers shall match the contract document
36
specifications.
37
B.
Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for
38
each system.
39
C.
Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
40
described products.
41
D.
Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
42
E.
Binders: Commercial quality, 8 -1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 280 mm) three D side ring binders with
43
durable plastic covers; 1 inch (25.4 mm) maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used,
44
correlate data into related consistent groupings.
45
F.
Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
46
INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7800-8 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 G. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
2 Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects), Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with
3 names of responsible parties.
4 H. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on
5 the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in
6 each volume, with the current volume clearly identified.
7 I. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents
8 on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and
9 major component parts of equipment.
10 J. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper.
11 K. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
12 size of text pages.
13 L. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this
14 Project Manual.
15 M. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system
16 description identified, in three parts as follows:
17 1. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
18 Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects), Consultants, and Contractor with name of
19 responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
20 2. Part 1: Directory listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect (Erickson
21 McGovern Architects), Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
22 3. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
23 specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone
24 numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
25 a. Significant design criteria.
26 b. List of equipment.
27 c. Parts list for each component.
28 d. Operating instructions.
29 e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
30 f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning
31 methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
32 4. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
33 a. Shop drawings and product data.
34 b. Air and water balance reports.
35 c. Certificates.
36 5. Part 4: Warranties. See Section 3.08 of this Section.
37 3.07 ONE YEAR CORRECTION PERIOD
38 A. The one (1) year period begins as set forth:
39 1. Refer to Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor - AIA document
40 A107 - 2007.
41 a. See Article 18 - Correction of Work for requirements.
42 3.08 WARRANTIES
43 A. Warranty requirements as set forth:
44 B. Definitions:
45 1. "Guarantee" and "warranty" are used interchangeably.
46 2. "Standard product warranties" are preprinted, written warranties published by individual
47 manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to
48 the Owner
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7800-9 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
3. "Special warranties" are written warranties required by or incorporated into the contract
2
documents either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide
3
greater rights for the Owner.
4
C.
Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,
5
and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for
6
items put into use with Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s permission, leave date of beginning
7
of time of warranty until the Date of Final Completion is determined.
8
D.
Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
9
E.
Co- execute submittals when required.
10
F.
Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
11
G.
Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project
12
Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which
13
specified, and the name of product or work item.
14
H.
Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing.
15
Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor,
16
supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible
17
principal.
18
I.
Disclaimers and Limitations:
19
1. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties shall not relieve the
20
contractor of the general warranty on the work under this contract that incorporates the
21
products nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to
22
countersign special warranties with the contractor.
23
2. The contractor is obligated to comply with warranties under the contract or at law
24
regardless of the terms and conditions of warranties of supplier, manufacturer and
25
subcontractors extended to the contractor.
26
J.
Warranty Obligations:
27
1. Restore or remove and replace warranted work to its originally specified condition at such
28
time during warranty as it does not comply with or fulfill terms of warranty. Restore or
29
remove and replace other work which has been damaged by failure of warranted work or
30
which must be removed and replaced to gain access to warranted work
31
2. Except as other wise indicated or required by governing regulations, warranties do not
32
cover damage to building contents (other than work or contract) which results from failure
33
of warranted work.
34
3. Cost of restoration or removal and replacement is contractor's obligation without regard to
35
whether Owner has already benefited from use of ailing work.
36 K. Owner's Recourse:
37 1. Warranties and warranty periods do not diminish implied warranties and do not deprive
38 Owner of actions, rights, and remedies otherwise available for Contractor's failure to fulfill
39 requirements of the Contract Documents or rights and causes of action of or by the Owner
40 available at law. Owner reserves the right to reject coincidental product warranties
41 considered to be conflicting with or detracting from requirements of the Contract
42 Documents.
43 END OF SECTION
44
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 01 7800- 10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 02 4100
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building demolition.
B. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
C. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.
B. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements.
C. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Description of items to be removed by Owner (Yelm Community
Schools).
D. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage
and relocation.
E. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of
bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of
removed products; temporary bracing and shoring.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled,
salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property.
B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's
property. Carefully remove and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents
of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area on site.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Carefully remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare
them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in
locations indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations.
1.04 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain Owner (Yelm Community Schools) property, demolished materials shall
become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site, at no additional cost to
the Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
1.05 PERMITS
A. The Contractor shall obtain all special permits and licenses and give all notices required for
performance and completion of the selective demolition and removal work, hauling, and
disposal of debris.
1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A10.6 -Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations.
B. 29 CFR Part 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, current edition.
C. RFCI - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor
Covering Institute; 1998.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 024100-1 DEMOLITION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2 A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.
3 1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience.
4 2. Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective demolition Work
5 similar to that indicated for this Project.
6 B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
7 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
8 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
9 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
10 demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
11 delays.
12 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
13 by selective demolition operations.
14 1.08 SCHEDULING
15 A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on -site operations.
16 See Phasing Plan in specification Section 01100 - Summary of Work.
17 1.09 MISCELLANEOUS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
18 A. General: Comply with the following as noted in other Sections of the Project Manual.
19 1. Erection and maintenance of shoring, temporary fencing and safety protection.
20 2. Dust control.
21 3. Repair of damages.
22 4. Clearing and removal of rubbish and debris.
23 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
24 A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000.
25 1. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively
26 demolished.
27 a. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
28 Owner as far as practical.
29 b. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site will not be permitted.
30 B. Hazardous Materials:
31 1. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials
32 except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
33 C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site are not permitted.
34 1.11 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
35 A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
36 B. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
37 damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
38 warranties. Contact the issuer of the subject warranty for correctional work required.
39 PART 2 PRODUCTS
40 2.01 MATERIALS
41 A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment, devices, appurtenances, facilities,
42 and services as required for performing the selective demolition and removal work.
43 2.02 REPAIR MATERIALS
44 A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
45 1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use
46 materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
47 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 024100-2 DEMOLITION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.01 EXAMINATION
3 A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
4 selective demolition required.
5 B. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended
6 function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the
7 conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect.
8 C. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in
9 structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures
10 during selective demolition.
11
D.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
12
activities.
13
3.02 PREPARATION
14
A.
Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids,
15
flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition
16
operations.
17
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
18
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
19
1. Provide temporary weather protection on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure
20
that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas.
21
2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are
22
exposed during selective demolition operations.
23
3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
24
C.
Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
25
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
26
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
27
D.
Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve
28
stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively
29
demolished.
30
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
31
E.
Provide barriers and appropriate signs meeting requirements of 29 CFR 1910 for size and color
32
where necessary to restrict pedestrians from wandering into construction areas.
33
3.03 POLLUTION CONTROLS
34
A.
Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities
35
having jurisdiction.
36
B.
Dust Control: Use temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and
37
dirt. Comply with governing environmental - protection regulations.
38
1. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of
39
dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.
40
a. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or
41
objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
42
b. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
43
surfaces and areas.
44
c. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
45
will convey debris to grade level.
46
d. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
47
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before
48
start of selective demolition.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 024100-3 DEMOLITION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
2 surfaces and areas.
3 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
4 convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
5 D. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
6 selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
7 demolition operations began.
8 3.04 NOTIFICATIONS
9 A. Notifications of Concerning Utilities: All the utility companies owning conduits and pipes running
10 to and from the building and /or property are to be notified to make arrangements for their
11 removal or capping, in accordance with the instructions from the utility companies, local
12 governing agencies, and /or the Engineer. All other utilities, such as the sewer and storm drain,
13 shall be protected, supported or removed, in accordance with the instructions from the
14 Engineer.
15 1. Repair damaged or broken existing utilities subject to the approval of the Utility
16 Companies, local governing agencies, and the Engineer or the Consultant, at no added
17 cost to the Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
18 2. All the inactive or abandoned utilities shall be removed. If the inactive or abandoned
19 utilities located inside the wall or portion are indicated to remain or to be protected, the
20 utilities shall be cut and capped at the top of the wall or partition.
21 3.05 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
22 A. Asbestos and other hazardous material: Contractor is hereby notified that "Asbestos and other
23 hazardous items" are present in the Building.
24 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
25 immediately notify Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) and Owner (Yelm Community
26 Schools).
27 3.06 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
28 A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent
29 structures and the public.
30 1. Obtain required permits.
31 2. Use of explosives is not permitted.
32 3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be
33 removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of
34 unstable structures.
35 4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
36 5. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or
37 the public.
38 6. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and
39 occupants.
40 7. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permission from the Architect.
41 8. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do
42 not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from
43 removal operations.
44 9. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment
45 will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.
46 B. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.
47 C. Do not begin removal until vegetation to be relocated has been removed and specified
48 measures have been taken to protect vegetation to remain.
49 D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
50 1. Provide bracing and shoring.
51 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 024100-4 DEMOLITION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
2 E. Jackhammering:
3 1. Jackhammering will be permitted only to a limited degree with prior approval of the
4 Engineer.
5 2. Do not jackhammer within 2 inches of reinforcing or structural steel to remain.
6 a. Remove final 2 inches of material with a chipping gun.
7 F. Cutting:
8 1. Cut new openings neat, as close as possible to profiles indicated.
9 2. Do not cut or alter structural members without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
10 3. Remove concrete and masonry whenever possible by saw cutting or similar approved
11 method.
12 G. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect
13 (Erickson McGovern Architects) and Owner (Yelm Community Schools); hazardous materials
14 include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.
15 3.07 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
16 A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
17 existing record documents only.
18 1. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
19 construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within
20 limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
21 a. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
22 selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
23 members on the next lower level.
24 b. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
25 cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
26 construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,
27 not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces.
28 Temporarily cover openings to remain.
29 c. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
30 existing finished surfaces.
31 d. Do not use cutting torches without Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s approval, and
32 wait until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as
33 duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting
34 flame- cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire - suppression devices
35 during flame- cutting operations.
36 e. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
37 f. Remove decayed, vermin - infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials
38 and promptly dispose of off -site.
39 g. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
40 free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
41 h. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
42 impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
43 i. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
44 j. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing
45 before selective demolition operations began.
46 2. Remove all mechanical and electrical devices, panels, conduit, wiring, and other items not
47 for reuse in new systems.
48 3. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
49 4. Report discrepancies to Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) before disturbing
50 existing installation.
51 B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 024100-5 DEMOLITION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
1.
Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in
2
Section 01 5000 in locations indicated on drawings.
3
C. Maintain
weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for
4
replacement
or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.
5
D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
6
1.
Coordinate with General Contractor and do not remove any more of the existing roofing
7
than can be replaced by the new roofing in a single day.
8
2.
Remove items indicated on drawings.
9
E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical,
10
Telecommunications,
and ): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated.
11
1.
Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to
12
equipment and operational components.
13
2.
Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new
14
services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready
15
for service.
16
3.
See Section 01 1000 for other limitations on outages and required notifications.
17
4.
Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.
18
5.
Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, panels, devices, including
19
those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible,
20
otherwise cap stub and tag with identification.
21
6.
Remove air - conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants.
22
7.
If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
23
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the
24
conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending
25
receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule
26
as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay.
27
F. Protect existing work to remain.
28
1.
Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
29
2.
Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
30
3.
Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
31
4.
Patch as specified for patching new work.
32
G. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
33
1.
Clean salvaged items.
34
2.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
35
3.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
36
4.
Transport items at the direction of the Building Manager to storage area designated by the
37
Building Manager.
38
5.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
39
6.
Allow for storage of theater seating in Auditorium for salvage parts and seats (in Base Bid)
40
to be stored on the existing Stage until such time as the repairs are made to the existing
41
seats.
42
H. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:
43
1.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
44
equipment to match new equipment.
45
2.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
46
3.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
47
4.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
48
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
49
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
50 I. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain
51 and at regular intervals, using power- driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 024100-6 DEMOLITION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 J. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
2 using power- driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
3 K. Concrete Slabs -on- Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
4 remove.
5 L. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
6 recommendations in RFCI -WP and its Addendum.
7 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the
8 methods recommended by RFCI.
9 M. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and
10 so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 7 roofing
11 Sections for new roofing requirements.
12 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories.
13 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.
14 N. Air - Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.
15 3.08 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
16 A. Damage to existing materials and surfaces of adjacent construction, incurred during selective
17 demolition process shall be repaired or restored to their condition prior to the damage. This
18 repair or restoration work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.
19 B. Patch with materials similar in composition and dimension.
20 1. Completely fill holes 3" or less in diameter in existing masonry walls to remain with an
21 approved masonry patching material, applied according to manufacturer's printed
22 recommendations. For holes larger than 3" diameter replace full face of CMU with new
23 face piece and fully mortared perimeter joints.
24 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining
25 construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
26 3. Patch and repair the damaged areas of the floors, walls, and ceilings, where walls or
27 partitions have been removed.
28 4. Provide a flush and even surface with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
29 5. Closely match new texture to existing adjacent surface texture and blend the two together.
30 6. Where patching a smooth wall or ceiling surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire
31 surface of wall or ceiling after the application of primer and first coat of finish.
32 C. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into
33 another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
34 uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and
35 replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
36 1. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply
37 with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
38 2. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats
39 over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch.
40 Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
41 3. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity
42 of installation.
43 4. Voids, holes, and other demolition caused by the removal of mechanical and electrical
44 items shall be filled and repaired to match existing surfaces.
45 D. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane
46 surface of uniform appearance.
47 1. Voids, holes, and other demolition caused by the removal of mechanical and electrical
48 items shall be filled and repaired to match existing surfaces.
49 3.09 SALVAGED MATERIALS
50 A. See Section 01 1000 - Summary of the Work for salvage items
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 024100-7 DEMOLITION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
B.
Carefully remove all materials, equipment and items designated to be salvaged for the Owner
2
(Yelm Community Schools) and neatly clean and protect from damage. Neatly store on the
3
job -site where directed by the Owner (Yelm Community Schools) or the Architect (Erickson
4
McGovern Architects).
5
3.10 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
6
A.
Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
7
1. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to
8
accumulate on -site.
9
a. Transport demolished materials off Owner (Yelm Community Schools) property and
10
legally dispose of them off site at no additional cost to the Owner (Yelm Community
11
Schools).
12
2. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
13
3. Burning of demolished materials is strictly prohibited.
14
B.
Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
15
C.
Clean up spillage and wind -blown debris from public and private lands.
16
3.11 CLEANING
17
A.
Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.
18
B.
After demolition operations are completed, or along with demolition operations, as appropriate,
19
clean the entire buildings and site of all dirt and dust, cobwebs, oil and grease, stains of asphalt
20
and paint, and other debris.
21
C.
Ceilings, walls, and floors shall be dusted and wiped clean with brooms and cloths or other
22
suitable methods as required to clean all surfaces free of dirt and dust.
23
D.
Use suitable cleaning fluids or solvents, steel wool, blow -torch burning, scraping, and power
24
sanding as required to remove the various incrustations and stains, including asphalt.
25
END OF SECTION
26
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 024100-8 DEMOLITION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 03 3000
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete slab pour backs..
B. Slab Base Course.
C. Vapor retarder /vapor barrier.
D. Concrete curing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 02 4100 - Demolition: Extend of existing slab removal.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
B. ACI SP- 16 -89, "Field Reference Manual."
C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International;
2010 (Errata 2012).
D. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004 (errata 2007).
E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International; 2000.
F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
H. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International;
2001.
I. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2011.
J. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.
K. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement;
2007.
L. ASTM Al85/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2007.
M. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Billet -Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement; 2013.
N. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2013.
O. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2014.
P. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2014.
Q. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic- Cement Concrete; 2012.
R. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
S. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.
T. ASTM C172/C172M - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 2010.
U. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2014.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
033000-1
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
V.
ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
2
Method, 2014.
3
W.
ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing
4
Concrete; 2011.
5
X.
ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
6
C.
Continuous Mixing; 2011.
7
Y.
ASTM C881/C881 M - Standard Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding Systems for
8
Concrete; 2013.
9
Z.
ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to
10
Hardened Concrete; 2013.
11
AA.
ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic- Cement
12
D.
Concrete; 2012.
13
AB.
ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
14
and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved
15
2013).
16
AC.
ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water
17
Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011.
18
AD.
ASTM E 1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact
19
with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 1998 (Reapproved 2005).
20
AE.
ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
21
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.
22
AF.
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice."
23 1.04 SUBMITTALS
24 A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures
25
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on manufactured products showing compliance with
26
specified requirements.
27
1. For proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
28
admixtures, fibrous reinforcement, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing
29
compounds, dry -shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect.
30
C.
Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.
31
1. Provide 300 PSI minimum concrete mix.
32
2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 -
33
Concrete Mixtures.
34
3. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 -
35
Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing.
36
D.
Shop drawings shall be furnished by Contractor for fabrication, bending, and placement of
37
concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP -66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual," showing bar
38
schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement.
39
Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.
40
E.
Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect.
41
Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each
42
material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from
43
admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.
44
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
45
A.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
46
B.
Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project.
47
C.
Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
48
D.
Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
2015-19/
YCS Ed Center TI 033000-2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Wi
4
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
E. ACI SP- 16 -89, "Field Reference Manual ".
F. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II -Moderate Portland type or Type 1 -11.
1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.02 ADMIXTURES
A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight
of cement.
2.03 SLAB BASE COURSE
A. General: Drainage course consists of placement of crushed gravel material, in layer of 4 inch
thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs.
1. Slab Base Course: Use coarse aggregate, WSDOT 9- 03.1(3)C, Grading No. 5, with the
following proportions:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
3/4"
80-100
3/8"
10-40
#4
0 -4
B. Placing: Place base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness,
conforming to indicated cross - section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for
compacting material during placement operations. Compact to 95 percent maximum dry
density.
1. Level base material between screeds to 1/4 inch in 10 feet then compact to specified
density. Keep smooth and level during all operations including concrete placement.
2.04 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II acrylic non - redispersable type.
B. Epoxy Bonding System: ASTM C 881, type as required by project conditions. Provide
Concresive LPL manufactured by Master Builders or approved.
C. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi - layer, fabric -, cord -, grid -, or aluminum- reinforced polyethylene
or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for
installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply
polyethylene is prohibited.
1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.
2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic,
prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder.
3. Products:
a. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier 10 -mil (Class A):
www.stegoindustries.com.
b. Raven Industries, Inc. - "Vapor Block 10 ".
D. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq.
yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. Always shall be covered with Moisture - Retaining
Cover.
E. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 033000-3 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
1. Liquid Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: Liquid -type membrane - forming curing
2
compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A, and 20% min. Solids. Provide
3
one of the following or approved:
4
a. Sonneborn: Kure -N -Seal 30
5
b. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight CS- 309 -25
6
c. Masco: Mascocure - Biocure
7
F.
See Section 07190 - Water Repellents, Anti - graffiti Coatings, Slab Sealers for requirements for
8
sealing slabs.
9
2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
10
A.
Ready Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
11
1. Add all ingredients including all admixtures at the batch plant during the mixing time with
12
the weights recorded on the delivery ticket. This includes all Cement, Aggregate, Water,
13
and Admixtures.
14
2. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
15
mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is
16
above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
17
B.
Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
18
recommended or required by manufacturer.
19
2.06 MIXING
20
A.
On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685. Mix each batch not
21
less than 1 -1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
22
B.
Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
23
PART 3
EXECUTION
24
3.01 GENERAL
25
A.
Mix, place, vibrate, finish and cure concrete per ACI 301.
26
B.
Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders /barrier, and other related
27
materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
28
3.02 EXAMINATION
29
A.
Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
30
3.03 PREPARATION
31
A.
Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in
32
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
33
B.
Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by
34
cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's
35
instructions.
36
1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load- bearing
37
applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required.
38
C.
In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,
39
insert steel dowels and pack solid with non - shrink grout.
40
D.
Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum
41
6 inches (150 mm). Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's
42
recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor
43
retarder before covering.
44
E.
Cold Weather Preparation:
45
1. Remove all snow, ice, and frost from the surfaces, including reinforcement, against which
46
the concrete is to be placed. Before beginning concrete placement, thaw the subgrade to
47
the depth specified in the Contract Documents. Do not place concrete around massive
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 033000-4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
embedments identified in the Concrete Documents unless such embedments are at a
temperature above freezing.
3 3.04 SLAB BASE COURSE
4 A. General: Drainage course consists of placement of crushed gravel material, in layer of 4 inch
5 thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs.
6 B. Placing: Place base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness,
7 conforming to indicated cross - section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for
8 compacting material during placement operations. Compact to 95 percent maximum dry
9 density.
10 3.05 VAPOR RETARDER /BARRIER INSTALLATION
11 A. Install per ASTM E 1645.
12 1. General: Following leveling and tamping of drainage course for slabs on grade, place
13 vapor retarder /barrier sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
14 2. Lap joints 6 inches and seal vapor barrier joints with manufacturers' recommended mastic
15 and pressure- sensitive tape. Carry up vertical surfaces a minimum of 4 inches.
16 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE
17 A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
18 B. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,
19 within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.
20 1. Consolidate slab concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked
21 around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.
22 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or
23 darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to
24 beginning finishing operations.
25 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
26 C. Cold Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work
27 from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or
28 low temperatures.
29 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C),
30 uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
31 temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27deg C)
32 at point of placement.
33 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
34 frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
35 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or
36 chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
37 4. Scheduling Protection Materials:
38 a. All materials and equipment required for protection shall be available at the project
39 site before cold weather concreting.
40 D. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and
41 strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as specified.
42 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement
43 below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to
44 control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing
45 water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
46 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel
47 temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment
48 in concrete.
49 3. Cool placing environment as follows: Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just
50 before concrete is placed. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 033000-5 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 4. Use water - reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
2 humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect.
3 E. Ensure inserts will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
4 3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING
5 A. Repair surface defects, immediately after removing formwork.
6 B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
7 more in height.
8 C. Monolithic Slab Finishes
9 1. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other
10 finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing,
11 membrane or elastic roofing, or sand bed terrazzo; and as otherwise indicated.
12 a. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until
13 ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface
14 water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation
15 of power driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power driven floats or by
16 hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface
17 plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4 inch in 10 feet when checked with a 10 -foot
18 straightedge, ACI 301 Class B. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly
19 slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform,
20 smooth, granular texture.
21 2. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and
22 slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or
23 other thin film finish coating system.
24 a. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power driven trowel. Begin
25 final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over
26 surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel
27 marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to a tolerance not
28 exceeding 1/4 inch in 10 feet when checked with a 10 -foot straightedge, ACI 301
29 Class B. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor
30 covering system.
31 3. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic tile is to be installed with thin set mortar,
32 apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface with
33 a fine broom.
34 4. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps,
35 and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
36 a. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with
37 fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
38 with Architect before application.
39 D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at
40 1:100 nominal.
41 3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION
42 A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
43 premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
44 B. Cold Weather Protection Temperature:
45 1. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum temperature of concrete during the protection
46 period shall be as specified in ACI 306.1 -90. Temperatures specified to be maintained
47 during the protection period shall be those measured at the concrete surface, whether the
48 surface is in contact with formwork, insulation, or air. Measure the temperature with a
49 surface temperature measuring device having an accuracy of ±2 F. Measure the
50 temperature of concrete in each placement at regular time intervals as specified in the
51 Contract Documents.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 033000-6 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. Termination of Protection:
2 a. The maximum decrease in temperature measured at the surface of the concrete in a
3 24 -hour period shall not exceed the values as specified in ACI 306.1 -90. Do not
4 exceed these limits until the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F. of the
5 ambient or surrounding temperatures. When the surface temperature of the concrete
6 is within 20 F. of the ambient or surrounding temperature, all protection may be
7 removed.
8 3. Protection Against Freezing:
9 a. Cure and protect concrete against damage from freezing for a minimum period of 3
10 days, unless otherwise specified.
11 b. Maintain the surface temperature of the concrete during that period in accordance
12 with ACI 306.1 -90.
13 C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
14 necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
15 1. Normal Concrete: Not less than 7 days.
16 D. Hot Weather Protection Temperature:
17 1. Per the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Committee 301 recommendations, cure
18 concrete a minimum of 7 days or upon the concrete attaining 70% of the specified
19 compressive strength by one of the following methods.
20 a. Ponding and immersion.
21 1) Ponding is to be used to cure flat surfaces on smaller jobs. Care should be
22 taken to maintain curing water temperature at not more than 11 °C (20 °F) cooler
23 than the concrete to prevent cracking due to thermal stresses.
24 b. Spraying and fogging.
25 1) Spraying and fogging shall used when the ambient temperatures are well above
26 freezing and the humidity is low.
27 c. Saturated wet coverings
28 1) Wet coverings saturated with water should be used after concrete has hardened
29 enough to prevent surface damage. Slabs shall then be kept constantly wet.
30 d. Left in Place Forms.
31 1) Left in place forms shall be provided for satisfactory protection against moisture
32 loss for formed concrete surfaces. The forms shall be left in place as long as the
33 construction schedule allows. If the forms are made of wood, they should be
34 kept moist, especially during hot, dry weather.
35 e. Reducing the loss of mixing water from the surface of the concrete.
36 1) a. Covering concrete with impervious paper or plastic sheets.
37 (a) Impervious paper and plastic sheets shall be applied on thoroughly wetted
38 concrete. The concrete surface should be hard enough to prevent surface
39 damage from placement activities.
40 2. Hot weather shall be defined as any temperature above 68 degrees Fahrenheit (20
41 degrees Celsius).
42 E. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
43 1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive - Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other
44 surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive
45 manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring
46 and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to
47 flooring manufacturer's satisfaction.
48 2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep
49 continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water - saturated sand,
50 water -fog spray, or saturated burlap.
51 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
52 a. Moisture - Retaining Cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive.
53 F. Curing compound
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 033000-7 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1. Surface Preparation:
2 a. Newly Placed Concrete:
3 1) Surface must be sound and properly finished.
4 2) Surface is application ready when damp but not wet, and it can no longer be
5 marred by foot traffic.
6 b. Newly Cured Bare Concrete:
7 1) Level any gouges.
8 2) Remove all dirt, dust, oil, grease, asphalt, and foreign matter. Clean with
9 caustics and detergents as required. Citrus degreaser is excellent for removing
10 oil stains and many curing compounds.
11 3) Rinse thoroughly and allow to dry so that surface is no more than damp and
12 never wet.
13 c. Aged Concrete:
14 1) Patch, grout, and fill cracks and holes.
15 2) Surface must also be free of any dust, dirt, and other foreign matter. Remove
16 any incompatible sealers or coatings. Clean as described under "Newly cured
17 concrete."
18 2. Application:
19 a. Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by
20 manufacturer.
21 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
22 A. General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports.
23 Testing laboratory shall furnish all equipment for taking samples and testing.
24 B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following,
25 as directed by Architect:
26 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM
27 C 94.
28 a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type
29 of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.
30 b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight
31 concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each
32 day's pour of each type of air entrained concrete.
33 c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
34 (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set
35 of compressive strength specimens.
36 d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
37 compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
38 laboratory cured test specimens except when field cure test specimens are required.
39 e. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5
40 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of
41 each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two
42 specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if
43 required.
44 2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of
45 concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if
46 fewer than 5 are used.
47 3. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready Mix
48 Producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength
49 tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete
50 placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete
51 batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and
52 materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 day tests and 28
53 day tests.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 033000-8 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
4. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when
2
test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been
3
attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to
4
determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by
5
other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable
6
concrete is verified.
7
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
8
A.
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately
9
after removing forms, when acceptable to Architect.
10
B.
Mix dry -pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 -1/2 parts fine aggregate
11
passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
12
1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by
13
tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch.
14
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with
15
water, and brush coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar
16
before bonding agent has dried.
17
C.
For surfaces exposed to view, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so
18
that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at
19
inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
20
Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
21
D.
Repair Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects
22
cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture
23
irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections
24
on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out
25
form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with
26
bonding agent.
27
1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the
28
concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.
29
E.
Repair Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness
30
and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas
31
as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by
32
using a template having required slope.
33
1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability.
34
Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to
35
reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling,
36
popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
37
2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14
38
days.
39
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface
40
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish
41
repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may
42
be used when acceptable to Architect.
43
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in
44
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
45
clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around.
46
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
47
Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as
48
original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
49
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
50
F.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry pack method.
51
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose
52
particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place dry pack before
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 033000-9 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
bonding agent has dried. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent
concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
G. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using
specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.
H. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect (Erickson
McGovern Architects) and Contractor within 24 hours of test.
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances
or specified requirements.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect (Erickson
McGovern Architects). The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when
defective concrete is identified.
D. Do not patch, fill, touch -up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction
of Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects) for each individual area.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
03 3000 - 10
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
SECTION 03 5400
2
SELF - LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
3
PART 1
GENERAL
4
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
5
A.
Liquid - applied self - leveling floor underlayment.
6
1. Use gypsum -based type at
7
B.
Liquid applied, cementitious self - leveling floor underlayment.
8
1.02
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
9
A.
Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Alteration project procedures;
10
selective demolition for remodeling.
11
B.
Section 09 6005 - New Floor Preparation.
12
C.
Section 09 6010 - Existing Floor Preparation.
13
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
14
A.
ASTM C472 - Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and
15
Gypsum Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2014).
16
B.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
17
2014.
18
1.04
SUBMITTALS
19
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
20
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets documenting physical characteristics and
21
product limitations of underlayment materials. Include information on mixing instructions.
22
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate mix instructions.
23
D.
Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
24 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
25 A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section, and
26 approved by manufacturer.
27 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
28 A. A. In accordance with provisions of Section 01600 and the following: Materials shall be
29 delivered in its original unopened container and protected from contamination, damage or
30 deterioration as per manufacturer's instructions. All damaged products shall be removed from
31 project and discarded as per local requirements.
32 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
33 A. Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete.
34 B. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) 24 hours before,
35 during and 72 hours after installation of underlayment.
36 C. During the curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture.
37 PART 2 PRODUCTS
38 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
39 A. Gypsum Underlayment:
40 B. Cementitious Underlayment:
41 1. Raeco, Inc. Seattle, Washington Tel. (206) 763 -1335 Fax (206) 768 -0175 is specified for
42 type, material and quantity required
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 035400-1 SELF - LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Wi
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Gypsum -Based Underlayment: Gypsum based mix, that when mixed with water in accordance
with manufacturer's directions will produce self - leveling underlayment with the following
properties:
1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 2500 psi (17.24 MPa), tested per ASTM C472.
2. Density: Maximum 115 lb/cu ft (1842 kg /cu m).
3. Final Set Time: 1 to 2 hours, maximum.
4. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm) to maximum 3 -1/2 inch (89 mm).
5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread /Smoke developed index of 0/0 in
accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials.
C. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type.
1. Raeco R -2000 Primer, Bonding Agent.
D. Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer.
2.03 MIXING
A. Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mix to self - leveling consistency without over - watering.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, do not contain petroleum byproducts, or
other compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate.
1. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install
until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work will constitute your
acceptance of conditions as satisfactory
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove substrate surface irregularities. Fill voids and deck joints with filler. Finish smooth.
1. Remove all contaminants that would be detrimental to overlayment material bonding to
surface.
2. Vacuum clean surfaces.
B. Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry.
1. Prime sub -floor with specified compound. Priming instruction may vary according to type
of substrate, multiple coats may be necessary.
C. Close floor openings.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Place to indicated thickness, with top surface level to 1/8 inch in 10 ft (1:1000).
C. Place to minimum 1/8 inch (3 mm) and maximum 1/2 inch (6 mm) thickness.
D. Place before partition installation.
3.04 CURING
A. Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached.
B. Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.05 APPLICATION TOLERANCE
A. Top Surface: Level to 1/8 inch in 10 ft (1:1000).
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect against direct sunlight, heat, and wind; prevent rapid drying to avoid shrinkage and
cracking.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 035400-2 SELF - LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces.
2 1. Protect from heavy loads during construction, place temporary cover to area by means to
3 protect from contamination and damage.
4 END OF SECTION
5
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 035400-3 SELF - LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non - structural dimension lumber framing.
B. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.
C. Construction Panels.
1. Sheathing.
a. See special protection requirements for roof and exterior wall sheathing below.
D. Roofing cant strips.
E. Preservative treated wood materials.
F. Fire retardant treated wood materials.
G. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.
H. Fasteners and anchors.
I. Communications and electrical room mounting boards.
J. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
K. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.
L. Caulking and sealant to limit infiltration.
M. Weather resistive barrier (air infiltration barrier).
N. Door and window penetration flashing.
O. Sill (exterior sill plate) sealer.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 8113 - Sustainable Design Requirements: Requirements for meeting the
Washington State Sustainable Protocol (WSSP).
B. Section 07 2100 - Board and Batt Insulation: Requirements prior to installing insulation.
1. See Sections 07 2100 - Board and Batt Insulation and 09 2116 - Gypsum Board
Assemblies for requirements for cleaning of framed cavities.
C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings.
D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Requirements prior to installing gysum
wallboard.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two - Family Dwellings;
American Forest and Paper Association; 2012.
B. ASME B18.2.1 - Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed
Head, and Lag Screws (Inch Series); 2010.
C. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
D. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength; 2012.
E. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007.
F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2014.
G. ASTM F 568M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric
Fasteners; 2007.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 061000-1 ROUGH CARPENTRY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Wi
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
H. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood
Protection Association; 2012.
I. CABO NER -272 - Metal Fasteners.
J. FS FF -N -105 - Federal Specification — Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and
Wrought; 1971.
K. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
L. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology,
Department of Commerce; 2010.
M. RIS (GR) - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber; Redwood
Inspection Service; 2000.
N. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2014.
O. WCLIB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; West Coast Lumber
Inspection Bureau; 2004, and supplements.
P. WWPA G -5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, underlayment,
air - infiltration barriers, and metal framing anchors.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or
exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.
1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: RIS.
B. Exposed -to -View Rough Carpentry: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or
exceed specified requirements, in lieu of grade stamping.
C. Fire - Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating
compliance with specified requirements.
D. Preservative- Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC- accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with
AWPA standards.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. Species: Douglas Fir - Larch, unless otherwise indicated.
2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no
grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the
specified requirements.
3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 061000-2 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless
2
otherwise indicated.
3
B.
Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
4
C.
Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with
5
applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
6
D.
Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them,
7
include the following:
8
1. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
9
2. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
10
3. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of
11
inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying
12
grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
13
4. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each
14
piece, or omit grade stamps and provide grade - compliance certificates issued by
15
inspection agency.
16
E.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture
17
content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry
18
lumber.
19
1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
20
2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for
21
2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
22
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
23
A.
Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
24
B.
Grade: See Structural General Notes.
25
C.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
26
D.
Moisture Content: S -dry or MC19.
27
E.
Sizes: Framing members shall be as shown on the drawings.
28
F.
Structural Blocking: See Structural Drawings for structural blocking.
29
G.
Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
30
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
31
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
32
2.03 EXPOSED DIMENSION LUMBER
33
A.
Grading Agency: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau ( WCLIB).
34
B.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings.
35
C.
Surfacing: S4S.
36
D.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. (See Structural Notes.)
37
E.
Moisture Content: S -dry or MC19.
38
F.
For exposed framing lumber, provide material complying with the following requirements:
39
1. Definition: Exposed framing refers to dimension lumber that is not concealed by other
40
construction and is indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, i.e., exposed backing
41
for fascia and rake boards.
42
2. Grading: Material hand - selected at factory from lumber of species and grade indicated
43
below that complies with "Appearance" grade requirements of ALSC National Grading
44
Rule; issue inspection certificate of inspection agency for selected material.
45
a. For exposed decking, 3 x 6 Hem -Fir, Select Structural Grade per WCLB Std. Grading
46
Rules No. 17, Pg. 77, Par. 124 -a. Run thru tongue and groove decking pattern. End
47
matched.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 061000-3 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 b. For miscellaneous wood trim not included as standing or running trim, use Douglas
2 Fir Industrial Clear "C Industrial" MG per WCLB No. 17, Pg. 111, Par. 151 -c.
3 G. Sizes: Framing members shall be as shown on drawings.
4 2.04 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER
5 A. At contractor's option, structural composite lumber may be substituted for concealed dimension
6 lumber and timbers.
7 B. Structural Composite Lumber: Factory fabricated beams, headers, and columns, of sizes and
8 types indicated on drawings; structural capacity as published by manufacturer.
9 1. Columns: Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated strand lumber, or parallel strand
10 lumber with manufacturer's published E (modulus of elasticity): 1,800,000 psi, minimum.
11 2. Beams: Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated strand lumber, or parallel strand lumber
12 with manufacturer's published E (modulus of elasticity): 1,800,000 psi, minimum.
13 3. Headers not larger than 48 inches: Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated strand
14 lumber, or parallel strand lumber with manufactuer's published E (modulus of elasticity):
15 1,800,000 psi, minimum.
16 4. Manufacturers:
17 a. Redbuilt LLC: Product [Redlam LVL] www.redbuilt.com <http: / /www.redbuilt.com>
18 b. iLevel by Weyerhaeuser: www.ilevel.com <http: / /www.ilevel.com>
19 c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
20 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
21 A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop
22 equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds,
23 stripping, and similar members.
24 B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes
25 shown.
26 C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
27 preservative treatment.
28 D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NCR's
29 of any species. For board -size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or
30 WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA of any species.
31 2.06 BLOCKING AND BACKING FOR WALL- MOUNTED AND RECESSED ITEMS
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
A. Provide nominal 2 -inch thickness of same material as studs, placed and nailed as required for
nailing, bolting wall- mounted and recessed items, including for wall- mounted items noted as
"N.I.C." on the drawings.
B. The following is a list of probable items requiring solid blocking. Please note that this list is not
intended as a total inclusive list of all possible items and does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to furnish all required blocking.
1. Handrails /Guardrails.
2. Acoustic Wall Panels.
3. Toilet Partitions and Screens.
4. Metal Lockers.
5. Wire Mesh Partitions.
6. Operable Partitions.
7. Toilet Accessories.
8. Basketball Backstops.
9. Casework.
10. Shelf Standards.
11. Horizontal Blinds.
12. Markerboards /Tackboards.
13. Wall Mounted Signs.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
061000-4
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2.07 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
2 A. Structural -Use Panel Standards: Shall be plywood or Oriented Strand Board. Shall comply with
3 PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood panels and,
4 for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA - The Engineered Wood
5 Association "Performance Standard and Policies for Structural Use Panels," Form No. E445.
6 1. Roof and exterior wall sheathing weather protection:
7 a. See PART 3 below for requirements for protecting roof and exterior wall sheathing
8 weather protection.
9 2. General: Where structural use panels are indicated for the following concealed types of
10 applications, provide APA Performance Rated Panels of Span Rating per Structural Notes
11 on drawings.
12 a. Wall Sheathing (Plywood or OSB):
13 1) Plywood shall be used if specified on structural drawings.
14 b. Roof Sheathing (Plywood only):
15 1) Required to be tongue and groove (T &G).
16 2) Non - structural sheathing for ventilated rigid insulation application shall be 5/8"
17 tongue and groove (T &G) plywood - (Plywood only).
18 B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory- marked with APA trademark
19 evidencing compliance with grade requirements.
20 C. Fire Treated Plywood (panels): Treat as specifed below.
21 D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Panels: PS 1 A -D plywood, or medium density
22 fiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of
23 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
24 1. Paint with fire treatment paint per Section 09 9900 Paints and Coatings.
25 2.08 ACCESSORIES
26 A. Fasteners and Anchors:
27 1. Metal and Finish: Hot - dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity
28 and preservative- treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
29 2. Metal Framing Anchors (Connectors and Fasteners):
30 a. General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, size
31 indicated, and as follows:
32 1) Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code
33 research or evaluation reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having
34 jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for
35 application indicated with building code in effect for Project.
36 2) Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as
37 published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's
38 published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
39 engineering analysis, and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by
40 a qualified independent testing agency.
41 3) Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc - coated steel sheet complying with ASTM
42 standards for galvanized G60, G185, and G90 coating designation; structural,
43 commercial, or lock- forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of
44 anchor indicated. See Structural General Notes for acceptable connectors and
45 fasteners to be used in conjunction with various preservative wood treatments.
46 b. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF -N -105.
47 c. Power - Driven Fasteners: CABO NER -272.
48 d. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
49 e. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (AS ME B18.2.3.8M)
50 f. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class
51 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
52 B. Subfloor Glue: APA AFG -01, Waterproof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 061000-5 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2.09 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
2 A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
3 for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
4 applications.
5 1. Fire - Retardant - Treated Materials:
6 a. Product: Fire retardant chemical shall provide protection against termites and fungal
7 decay, shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by the U.S. Environmental
8 Protection Agency (EPA), shall comply with formulation FR -1 of the current edition of
9 AWPA Standard P17, and shall be free of halogens, sulfates and ammonium
10 phosphate. Treated wood shall have a flame spread of less than 25 when tested in
11 an extended 30 minute tunnel test in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL
12 723. Identify fire - retardant - treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL;
13 U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting
14 agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
15 1) Corrosion Properties: Fire retardant treated wood in contact with carbon steel,
16 galvanized steel, aluminum, copper and red brass shall exhibit corrosion rates
17 less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) per year when tested in accordance with Fed. Spec.
18 MIL -L- 19140, Paragraph 4.6.5.2.
19 2) Testing: Testing on fire performance, strength and corrosion properties of fire
20 retardant treated wood shall be recognized by issuance of a National Evaluation
21 Services Report.
22 b. Fire Retardant Treatment: Manufacturer's solution for fire retardant treatment of
23 wood.
24 1) Lumber Treatment Standard: Comply with AWPA Standard C20, current edition,
25 and Appendix H of AWPA Use Category System.
26 2) Plywood Treatment Standard: Comply with AWPA Standard C27, current
27 edition, and Appendix H of AWPA Use Category System.
28 3) Interior Type A (High Temperature): For interior locations, use chemical
29 formulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the following
30 properties under conditions present after installation:
31 (a) Bending strength, stiffness, and fastener - holding capacities are not reduced
32 below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation under
33 elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed
34 conditions when tested by a qualified independent testing agency.
35 (b) No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes
36 related to treatment.
37 (c) Contact with treated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
38 4) Exterior Type: Use of exterior locations and where indicated.
39 5) Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard
40 damaged or defective pieces.
41 c. Manufacturer's: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
42 the following or approved:
43 1) Fire - Retardant - Treated Materials, Interior Type A:
44 (a) Arch Wood Protection (Drycon).
45 (b) Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
46 2) Fire - Retardant - Treated Materials, Exterior Type:
47 (a) Arch Wood Protection (FRX).
48 (b) Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
49 B. Preservative Treatment:
50 1. Manufacturers:
51 a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc; : www.wolmanizedwood.com.
52 b. Viance, LLC; : www.treatedwood.com.
53 c. Osmose, Inc; : www.osmose.com.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 061000-6 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2 2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade (Interior applications): AWPA
3 U1, Use Category UC2, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25
4 lb/cu ft (4.0 kg /cu m) retention.
5 a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
6 1) Treat lumber exposed to weather.
7 b. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.
8 c. Treat lumber less than 18 inches (450 mm) above grade.
9 1) Treat lumber in other locations as indicated.
10 d. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade (Exterior applications):
11 AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne
12 preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft (4.0 kg /cu m) retention.
13 1) Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
14 3. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber in Contact with Soil: AWPA U1, Use Category
15 UC4A, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.4 lb/cu ft (6.4 kg /cu
16 m) retention.
17 a. Preservative for Field Application to Cut Surfaces: As recommended by manufacturer
18 of factory treatment chemicals for brush - application in the field.
19 b. Restrictions: Do not use lumber or plywood treated with chromated copper arsenate
20 (CCA) in exposed exterior applications subject to leaching.
21 2.10 WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIER (AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER)
22 A. Building Wrap:
23 1. Polyethylene sheet, 0.0061 inch thick, formed by spinning continuous strands of fine high
24 density polyethylene interconnected fibers and bonding them together by heat and
25 pressure; with a moisture vapor transmission rate of 400 grams /sq. meter /24 hrs. per
26 ASTM E 96, Procedure B; flame spread and smoke developed ratings of 5 and 10 per
27 ASTM E 84.
28 2. Woven polyolefin sheet, 0.005 inch thick, with a moisture vapor transmission rate of 70
29 grams /sq. meter /24 hours per ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and a flame spread not
30 exceeding 25 per ASTM E 84.
31 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or
32 approved:
33 a. "Tyvek Housewrap," Fibers Department, Du Pont Company.
34 b. "R- Wrap," Simplex Products Division, Anthony Industries, Inc.
35 2.11 SILL SEALER
36 A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved:
37 1. Sill Sealer Manufacturer: Protecto - www.protectowrap.com.
38 a. Product: Triple Guard Energy Sill Sealer.
39 b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
40 2. Primer Manufacturer: Protecto - www.protectowrap.com.
41 a. Protecto -Tak Spray Primer or No. 100 Primer.
42 b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
43 2.12 DOOR AND WINDOW PENETRATION FLASHING
44 A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved:
45 1. Tyvek Flex Wrap: Is made from a synthetic rubber adhesive and a laminate of
46 polyethylene film, elastic fiber, synthetic rubber adhesive, polyurethane adhesive, and a
47 top sheet of flash spunbonded high density polyethylene fibers.
48 2. Vycor Plus: As manufactured by Grace Construction Products, provide Vycor Plus, a
49 self- adhered flashing composed of two waterproofing materials - rubberized asphalt and
50 cross - laminated polyethylene.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 061000-7 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
3 A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
4 B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
5 components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
6 C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
7 after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
8 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
A. General:
1. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are
too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
2. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
and fitted.
3. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow
attachment of other construction.
4. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative- treated
lumber and plywood.
5. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
a. CABO NER -272 for power- driven staples, P- nails, and allied fasteners.
b. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
c. "Table 2304.9.1 - Fastening Schedule" of the International Building Code.
6. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work.
Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be
exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required.
7. Use hot -dip galvanized or stainless -steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to
weather, in ground contact.
8. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
9. Wood Nailers, Blocking, and Sleepers:
a. Install wood nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for
attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and
level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
b. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of
masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
10. Wall and Partition Framing:
a. General: Arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall
or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top
plates using members of 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness whose widths
equal that of studs; except single top plate may be used for non -load- bearing
partitions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Construct corners and intersections with 3 or more studs. Provide miscellaneous
blocking and framing as shown and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
c. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of
thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.
1) For non -load- bearing partitions, provide double -jamb studs with headers not less
than 4 -inch nominal (89 -mm actual) depth for openings 36 inches (900 mm) and
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
061000-8
ROUGH CARPENTRY
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
less in width, and not less than 6 -inch nominal (140 -mm actual) depth for wider
openings.
2) For load- bearing walls, provide double -jamb studs for openings 72 inches (1,800
mm) and less in width, and triple -jamb studs for wider openings. Provide
headers of depth shown or, if not shown, as recommended by AFPA's "Manual
for Wood Frame Construction." See Structural Drawings for additional
requirements.
3) For all mechanical openings within framed walls, the General Contractor shall
frame in such openings and shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor to
determine all sizes and locations.
4) Fire Blocking: Provide from materials and thickness, as required in Chapter 7 of
the International Building Code, members of same width as wall or partition at
the following locations:
(a) In concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces, at
the ceiling and floor levels, and at 10 -foot intervals both vertical and
horizontal. See also Section 803 of International Building Code.
(b) At all interconnections between concealed vertical and horizontal spaces
such as occur at soffits, drop ceilings, and cove ceilings.
(c) In concealed spaces between stair stringers at the top and bottom of the
run and between studs along and in line with the run of stairs if the walls
under the stairs are unfinished.
(d) In openings around vents, pipes, ducts, chimneys, fireplaces and similar
openings which afford a passage for fire at ceiling and floor levels, with
noncombustible materials.
(1) At openings between attic spaces and chimney chases for factory -built
chimneys.
Wood Stripping:
1) For rated and non -rated assemblies, including but not limited to the following:
(a) Ceiling, floor ceiling, roof, roof ceiling, and any other locations indicated or
shown on the drawings.
(b) When framing members are to receive a layer or multiple layers of gypsum
drywall, plywood, etc. in exposed and concealed conditions, and their
spacing is greater than 24 inches o.c., the contractor shall apply 2 x
stripping at spacings indicated below.
(1) Space stripping at 24" o.c. max: Apply material with long axis
perpendicular to stripping.
(2) Space stripping at 16" o.c. max: Apply material with long axis parallel
to stripping.
(c) Apply solid blocking between stripping at vertical surfaces and at all
openings, i.e. vents, access panels, lights, etc.
B. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
C. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
D. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would
lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.
E. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to
maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and
installation of permanent bracing.
F. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.
50 G. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and
51 spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame
52 Construction Manual.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 061000-9 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 H. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that
2 are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.
3 I. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.
4 3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
5 A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
6 specialty items, and trim.
7 3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD
8 A. Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementitious foundations. Lap
9 flashing joints 4 inches and seal.
10 B. Place sill gasket directly on sill flashing. Puncture gasket cleanly and fit tightly to protruding
11 foundation anchor bolts.
12 C. Coordinate installation of wood decking, wood chord metal joists, glue laminated structural
13 units, prefabricated wood trusses, and plywood web joists.
14 D. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating
15 lapping side members.
16 E. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings.
17 3.05 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
18 A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA
19 Design /Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and
20 applications indicated.
21 B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
22 1. Subflooring: Nail and glue to framing.
23 a. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets at locations shown on Structural
24 Drawings.
25 2. Wall Sheathing: Nail to framing.
26 C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with
27 edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches (610 mm) on center on all
28 edges and into studs in field of board.
29 1. At fire -rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire -rated
30 assembly.
31 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor -to- ceiling height, install with long edge of board
32 parallel to studs.
33 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
34 3.06 DOOR AND WINDOW PENETRATION FLASHING
35 A. Apply as detailed on drawings and as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
36 3.07 CAULKING AND SEALING
37 A. The following openings in the building shall be caulked or otherwise sealed to limit infiltration.
38 1. Around door and window casings and rough openings.
39 2. Between exterior wall sole plates and structural floor.
40 3. At openings for plumbing, electricity, gas lines and ductwork in exterior walls, floor and
41 ceiling.
42 4. Where walls and ceiling meet exposed beams and masonry facing.
43 5. Around interior attic access panels.
44 6. At the mud sill and in addition to normal sill sealer in conditioned basements.
45 7. At all other openings in exterior building envelope.
46 8. See Section 07 9005 for the appropriate sealers.
47 3.08 CLEANING
48 A. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 06 1000 - 10 ROUGH CARPENTRY
3
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 06 1000 - 11 ROUGH CARPENTRY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 06 2000
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Finish carpentry items.
B.
Exterior standing and running trim.
C.
Wood window MDF sills and trim.
D.
Interior MDF wainscot panels and MDF trim.
E.
Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, is non - structural,
and which is not specified as part of other sections.
1.02
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 01 8113 - Sustainable Design Requirements: Requirements for meeting the
Washington State Sustainable Protocol (WSSP).
B.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
C.
Section 07 4646 - Fiber Cement Siding: Cement lap and panel siding.
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.
B.
ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2005.
C.
AWI /AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.
D.
NHLA G -101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; National
Hardwood Lumber Association; 2011.
E.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
F.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce); 2010.
G.
WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
H.
WDMA I.S. 4 - Industry Specification for Preservative Treatment for Millwork; Window and Door
Manufacturers Association; 2013.
I.
WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 6 inch ( mm) long.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Factory -mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency
identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill
certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it
cannot be marked on a concealed surface.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect work from moisture damage.
1. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with
damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation
within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 062000-1 FINISH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements
2 specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation
3 areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for
4 installation areas.
5 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
6 A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
7 manner.
8 B. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough -in, electrical rough -in, and installation of associated
9 and adjacent components.
10 C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is
11 enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC
12 system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels
13 through the remainder of construction period.
14 D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and
15 forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's
16 recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be
17 applied without exposure to rain, snow or dampness.
18 1.08 PRIMING
19 A. Work of this Section shall be primed prior to installation as work of Section 09 9000 - Painting.
20 Coating with specified materials and under specified conditions may be applied either on site or
21 off site, at Contractor's option. Provide space and heat for priming and storage while prime
22 coats are drying. Painter subcontractor shall make an adequate quantity of priming material, of
23 applicable types, available to carpenters for priming job site cut ends and /or edges as the
24 installation work proceeds.
25 1.09 WARRANTY
26 A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
27 B. Ply -Trim Warranty: Provide a 20 -year limited warranty against delamination or structural failure
28 of the substrate.
29 PART 2 PRODUCTS
30 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
31 A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
32 AWI /AWMAC/WI (AWS) for Premium Grade.
33 2.02 MATERIAL STANDARDS
34 A. Lumber Standards: Comply with document PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for
35 lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber
36 Standards Committee Board of Review.
37 B. Woodworking Standard: Where indicated for a specific product, comply with specified provision
38 of the following:
39 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards."
40 C. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and other abbreviations used to reference them,
41 include the following:
42 1. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association.
43 2. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
44 3. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
45 D. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection
46 agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,
47 grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 062000-2 FINISH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each
2 piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued
3 by inspection agency.
4 E. Glued -up Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 56.
5 F. Softwood Plywood: Comply with document PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and
6 Industrial Plywood."
7 G. Medium - Density Fiberboard (Medite II): Product made without formaldehyde and complying
8 with requirements of ANSI A208.2 -1994, product class MD.
9 2.03 MATERIAL STANDARDS
10
A.
Lumber Standards: Comply with document PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for
11
lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber
12
Standards Committee Board of Review.
13
B.
Woodworking Standard: Where indicated for a specific product, comply with specified provision
14
of the following:
15
1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards."
16
C.
Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and other abbreviations used to reference them,
17
include the following:
18
1. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association.
19
2. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
20
3. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
21
D.
Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection
22
agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,
23
grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
24
1. For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each
25
piece, or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued
26
by inspection agency.
27
E.
Glued -up Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 56.
28
F.
Softwood Plywood: Comply with document PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and
29
Industrial Plywood."
30
G.
Medium - Density Fiberboard (Medite II): Product made without formaldehyde and complying
31
with requirements of ANSI A208.2 -1994, product class MD.
32
2.04 MATERIALS
33
A.
Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or
34
worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS
35
20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated.
36
B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and
37
manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry and relative humidity
38
conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
39
C.
Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Use pieces made of solid lumber stock.
40 D. Lumber for Painted Finish: At Contractor's option, use pieces which are either glued -up lumber
41 or made of solid lumber stock.
42 E. For exterior finish carpentry work, use glued -up lumber complying with PS 56 for "wet -use" and
43 certified so by respective grading and inspecting agency for species and product indicated.
44 2.05 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
45 A. Fascia /Rake Boards: For trim in form of boards and worked products, provide lumber complying
46 with the following requirements including those of the grading agency listed with species.
47 1. Product: Ply -Trim as manufactured by Ply -Trim or approved (1- 800 - 545 - 4454).
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 062000-3 FINISH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
2. Material: Manufactured from high grade exterior plywood with both edges plugged and
2
sealed and one face sealed and primed.
3
3. Texture: Sealed and primed face to be covered with proprietary overlay and pressed to
4
form a deep embossed wood grain surface. Both edges to be smooth.
5
B.
Wood Trim:
6
1. Size: As shown on drawings.
7
2. Species: Preprimed Fir
8
3. Grade: KD., Batten. (WCLIB No. 17 - Section 1 - Item (paragraph) 113).
9
4. Textured: Resawn.
10
2.06 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
11
A.
Standing and Running Trim for Transparent Finish: Manufactured to sizes and patterns (profile)
12
shown from selected first Grade Lumber (NHLA); complying with the following grade
13
requirements of referenced woodworking standard, for quality of materials and manufacture.
14
Finger joints not permitted.
15
1. MDF 3/4" thickness x dimensions per the drawings.
16
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS
MATERIALS
17
A.
Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the type,
18
size, material and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
19
concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications.
20
1. Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity, provide
21
fasteners and anchorages with a hot - dipped zinc coating (ASTM A 153).
22
B.
Soffit Vents: Provide the following as manufactured by Tamlyn & Sons Building Materials
23
(1- 800 - 334 - 1676), or approved.
24
1. Soffit Louver Strips: Tamlyn Brand Snapvent #SV516. Extruded vinyl with 1/8" wall
25
thickness. Overall width 3 -1/2 inches x 12.7 sq. inches of net free ventilation per lin. ft.
26
Color is white.
27
C.
Sealants: Comply with requirements of Section 07 9005 "Joint Sealants" for materials required
28
for sealing siding work.
29
2.08 WOOD TREATMENT
30
A.
Water Repellant Preservative Treatment by Dipping Method: WDMA I.S. 4, with 0.25 percent
31
retainage.
32
B.
Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 15 percent moisture content.
33
2.09 FABRICATION
34
A.
Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
35
B.
Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
36
1. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in
37
finished work:
38
a. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm).
39
b. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe mold and crown mold.
40
2. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/6 -inch (1.5 -mm)
41
radius.
42
3. Ease edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8 -inch (3 -mm)
43
radius.
44
C.
When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
45
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
46
2.10 SHOP FINISHING
47
A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
48
B.
Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 062000-4 FINISH CARPENTRY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and
is of type recommended for the applicable finish.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
4 3.01 EXAMINATION
5 A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
6 B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
7 ready to receive this work.
8 C. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
9 tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do
10 not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
11 3.02 PREPARATION
12
A.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
13
B.
Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
14
installation, for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by
15
manufacturer.
16
C.
Prime and backprime, prior to installation, as work of Division 9 - Section 09 9000, lumber on
17
the exterior of the building which is to be left exposed.
18
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
19
A.
Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
20
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
21
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
22
B.
Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
23
shims where required for alignment.
24
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
25
recommended by manufacturer.
26
2. Anchor finish carpentry work with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as
27
required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads
28
are required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with
29
colored caulking compound, and matching final finish where transparent is indicated.
30
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level. Install
31
adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32 -inch (0.8 -mm) maximum offset for flush installation and
32
1/16 -inch (1.5 -mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
33
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and
34
running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate
35
exposed surfaces of trim and rails.
36
3.04 INSTALLATION
37
A.
Install work in accordance with AWI /AWMAC/WI (AWS) requirements for grade indicated.
38
B.
Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
39
C.
Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (0.79 mm).
40
Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
41
3.05 INSTALLATION OF STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
42
A.
Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full - length pieces from maximum lengths
43
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where
44
necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns
45
and miter at corners to produce tight- fitting joints with full- surface contact throughout length of
46
joint. Use scarf joints for end -to -end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness
47
across joints, if required.
48
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 062000-5 FINISH CARPENTRY
1
2
3
4
5
6
FA
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill
holes.
4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to
weather.
3.06 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B. Site Finishing: See Section 09 9000.
C. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with
cementitious materials.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch (0.79 mm).
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual
defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi - exposed surfaces. Touch -up factory - applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage
or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
062000-6
FINISH CARPENTRY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 06 6400
PLASTIC LAMINATE WAINSCOT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Plastic laminate wainscoting and metal edging in Toilet Rooms and any other locations shown
on drawings or specified in the finish schedule.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry.
B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AWI P -200 - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork
Institute; 1997, Seventh Edition, Version 1.0.
B. NEMA LD 3 - High- Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturer's
Association; 1995.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Samples:
1. Submit samples of all available colors and brochure showing materials to be used
indicating quality and colors.
2. Submit two samples of selected laminates, 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating wood grain and
specified finish.
3. Submit two samples of metal edging and trim 6 inches long.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 3 years of experience.
B. Perform work in accordance with AWI P -200, Custom Grade.
1. Conform to the Architectural Woodwork Institute's "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards and Guide Specifications," latest edition, as issued by AWI, Chesterfield
House, Suite A, 5055 South Chesterfield Road, Arlington, Virginia 22206, hereinafter
called "AWI" for the installation of (HPDL) high pressure decorative laminates.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Store indoors. Store on edge to prevent accumulation of moisture between panels and away
from direct heat and sunlight.
1. Protect finish materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration.
2. Do not deliver finish materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations
which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation
areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in
other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for
installation areas.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
B. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough -in, electrical rough -in, installation of associated and
adjacent components, and casework.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
066400-1
PLASTIC LAMINATE WAINSCOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Final Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The miscellaneous laminates used may require selection of color from more than a single
manufacturer's standard color line.
1. Wilsonart.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. High Pressure Plastic Laminate: AWI "Premium grade;" edge treatment AWI 50013-2; exterior
corner AWI 50013-3.
B. Adhesive: Furnish contact cement meeting or exceeding the requirements of U.S. Commercial
Standard CS35 Type II, conforming to AWI Test 100 -G -11.
C. Metal Trim: Provide standard metal accessory trim, division bars, inside corners, and caps at all
panel tops and corners.
2.03 ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suite application.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Aluminum Edge Trim: Extruded convex shape; smooth surface finish; self locking serrated
tongue; of width to match component thickness; natural mill finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Wall surface shall be free of bumps, projections and misalignments.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Conform to AWI Section 500B for plastic laminates applied to wood, plywood or GWB
substrates, either done "in plant" or at the job site, to AWI "Premium Grade" laminate
construction and edge treatment. Use one piece full length for each panel unless otherwise
approved for faces of length greater than stock lengths; seams are required to be tightly butted,
practically invisible.
C. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
3.04 CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION
A. Replace damaged and defective finish work wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally
and visually. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean finish work on all exposed surfaces.
C. Protection: Installer of work shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintained
conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of
acceptance.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
END OF SECTION
066400-2
PLASTIC LAMINATE WAINSCOT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 07 2100
BOARD AND BATT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction.
1. Full depth of cavity at exterior conditions.
2. R- values to be minimum as specified below.
B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall
and roof.
C. Acoustical insulation.
1. Batt acoustical insulation:
a. Thickness as specified below.
D. Firestopping insulation.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation.
B. Section 07 5500 - Atactic- Polypropylene (App) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing:
Insulation specified as part of roofing system.
C. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Insulation as part of fire -rated through - penetration assemblies.
D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2014.
C. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;
2005a.
D. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At
750 Degrees C; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product
limitations.
C. Insulation Holder: Submit sample of all components of each type of insulation holder to be used
on job.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those
whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which
insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or
other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
B. Maximum Allowable Asbestos Content of Inorganic Insulations: Provide insulations composed
of mineral fibers or mineral ores which contain 0% asbestos of any type.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 072100-1 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. See Special Requirements below.
2 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
3 A. General Protection: Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled,
4 or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling,
5 storage and protection during installation.
6 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
7 A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
8 successful installation.
9 1.08 SEQUENCING
10 A. Sequence work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning work
11 of this section.
12 PART 2 PRODUCTS
13 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
14 A. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
15 1. CertainTeed Corp.
16 2. Johns Manville.
17 3. Knauf Insulation.
18 4. United States Gypsum.
19 B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
20 2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
21 A. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;
22 friction fit.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
B. Full Cavity Requirements for Exterior Walls: All exterior walls shall be filled to full depth of wall
cavity at all exterior walls and floor overhangs.
1. All exterior walls and soffits shall be filled to full depth of wall cavity at all exterior
conditions.
a. Note: This requirement shall supersede any drawing.
2. All roof assemblies shall be filled to full depth of joist or truss cavity less 2" at top at roof
sheathing for ventilation at all exterior conditions.
a. Note: This requirement shall supersede any drawing.
3. Minimum R- values:
a. 2 x 6 Walls: R -21
b. 2 x 8 Walls: R -25
c. 2 x 10 (or walls to 10 ") Walls: R -30
d. 2 x 12 (or walls to 12 ") Walls: R -38
e. Roof and attic areas: R -49
f. Note: This requirement shall supersede any drawing. If specifications and drawings
are in conflict, use the the higher R- value.
4. Not to be left exposed in any location.
5. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
6. Combustibility: Non - combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for
facing, if any.
7. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
8. Facing: Aluminum foil, flame spread 25 rated; one side.
C. Batt Unfaced Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit, Type I (blankets
without membrane facing) conforming to the following:
1. Not to be left exposed in any location.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed
index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
072100 -2
BOARD AND BATT INSULATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
3.
Combustibility: Non - combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for
2
facing, if any.
3
4.
Provide insulation made without formaldehyde.
4
5.
Facing: Unfaced.
5
6.
Width: Provide in full width to accommodate friction fit between studs.
6
D. Batt Faced Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass or mineral fiber batt; friction fit, Type III,
7
Class
A (blankets with reflective vapor- retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or
8
less) conforming to the following:
9
1.
To be used when exposed in any location.
10
2.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed
11
properly sealed. To be used when vapor retarder is exposed to inside atmosphere and not
index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
12
3.
Combustibility: Non - combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for
13
which are planned for future development. Flame spread classification of 25.
facing, if any.
14
4.
Facing: Foil- Scrim -Kraft Vapor- Retarder membrane on one face, respectively; and as
15
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
follows:.
16
1. Note: All seams and pentetrations to be fully tape sealed - no exceptions.
a. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
17
Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be
1) Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
18
adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate,
values of 25 and 50, respectively. ASTM E -84.
19
5.
Width: Provide in full width to accommodate friction fit between studs.
20 2.03 ACCESSORIES
21
A.
Polyimide (Nylon) Vapor Retarder: ASTM C 665 2 -mil polyimide film, with laboratory tested
22
vapor transmission rating of 0.2 perms, natural color. Seal to door and window frames. All
23
mechanical and electrical penetrations shall be properly sealed. To be used only when covered
24
by GWB or other fire resistant material.
25
1. Manufacturer: Certainteed
26
2. Product: Certainteed MemBrain
27
B.
Reinforced Vapor Retarder: Laminated. 00035" aluminum foil with Tri- Directional Fiberglass
28
Scrim and 30 lb. Natural Kraft paper. Vapor transmission rating of.02 Perms as tested by ASTM
29
E -96. Seal to door and window frames. All mechanical and electrical penetrations shall be
30
properly sealed. To be used when vapor retarder is exposed to inside atmosphere and not
31
covered by GWB or other finish material. This shall include insulated but unfinished spaces
32
which are planned for future development. Flame spread classification of 25.
33
C.
Vapor- Retarder Tape: Pressure - sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder
34
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
35
1. Note: All seams and pentetrations to be fully tape sealed - no exceptions.
36
D.
Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be
37
adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate,
38
capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
39
1. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by
40
insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate.
41
2. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer:
42
a. Simpson Strong Tie #IS24 -R100 -WEST 24" Insulation Support.
43
E.
Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints between
44
units and filling voids in work.
45
F.
Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
46
1. Bond insulation securely to substrate, and complying with requirements for fire
47
performance characteristics.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 072100-3 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.01 EXAMINATION
3
A.
Prior to installation of any insulation there shall be a Pre - installation Meeting (see paragraph
4
"Pre- Installation Meeting" of this Section.
5
B.
Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates
6
are ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
7
1. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
8
requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to
9
determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not
10
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
11
C.
Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or
12
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
13
3.02 PREPARATION
14
A.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
15
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.
16
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
17
A.
See note regarding full wall cavity insulation for exterior walls.
18
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice
19
and snow.
20
C.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If
21
printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult
22
manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with
23
work.
24
D.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
25
around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with
26
placement.
27
E.
Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to
28
make up total thickness.
29
F.
On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer's
30
instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended by manufacturer of insulation. Exercise care
31
so as not to damage insulation during backfilling operation or concrete pouring. For horizontal
32
insulation, provide smooth, flat surface for insulation bearing surface. Tape joint between
33
horizontal and vertical pieces continuously. Recess horizontal insulation into subgrade so as
34
not to encroach into slab thickness.
35
3.04 BATT INSTALLATION
36
A.
Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
37
1. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
38
written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with
39
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of
40
units.
41
B.
Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
42
C.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
43
D.
Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
44
within the plane of the insulation.
45
E.
Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap
46
ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members.
47
1. Seal joints between closed -cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive,
48
mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 072100-4 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by
2 insulation manufacturer.
3 a. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of
4 insulation to surrounding construction to ensure air -tight installation.
5 b. Note: All seams and penetrations to be fully tape sealed - no exceptions.
6 2. Install mineral -fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the
7 following requirements:
8 a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where
9 more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug
10 fit between ends.
11 b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
12 between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
13 c. For wood - framed construction with faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap
14 blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after
15 concealing finish material is in place
16 3. Stuff loose glass fiber insulation into all miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces in all walls
17 which receive insulation. Compact to approximately 40% of normal maximum volume (to a
18 density of approximately 2.5 lbs. per cu. ft.).
19 F. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
20 3.05 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
21 A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
22 Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder
23 to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose fiber -type
24 insulation.
25 B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten
26 vapor retarders to framing at top, end and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings and at
27 lap joints; space fasteners 16" o.c.
28 C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor- retarder tape according to
29 vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with
30 vapor- retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
31 D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
32 recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.
33 E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor
34 retarders with vapor retarder tape to create an air -tight seal between penetrating objects and
35 vapor retarder.
36 F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
37 work. Cover with vapor retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
38 G. Installation of Board Acoustical Insulation: Install to drywall using adhesive or screws as
39 recommended by manufacturer.
40 3.06 PROTECTION
41 A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
42 1. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
43 exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures
44 where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
45 permanent construction immediately after installation.
46 3.07 REPLACEMENT OF INSULATION
47 A. Any insulation that becomes water saturated due to lack of protection, roof leaks, or the results
48 of any other construction related incident shall be replaced.
49 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 072100-5 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 072100-6 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 07 4646
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood -fiber cement siding.
1. Lap siding.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate.
B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Water- resistive barrier under siding.
C. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Exterior wood trim.
D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Fiber Cement Sheets; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others.
2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation methods, including nail patterns.
C. Test Report: Applicable model code authority evaluation report (e.g. ICC -ES).
D. Maintenance Instructions: Periodic inspection recommendations and maintenance procedures.
E. Warranty: Submit copy of manufacturer's warranty, made out in Owner (Yelm Community
Schools)'s name, showing that it has been registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this
section with minimum 3 years of experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.
1. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
2. Store siding flat on a smooth level surface. Protect edges and corners from chipping.
Store sheets under cover and keep dry prior to installing.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Product Warranty: Limited, non - pro -rated product warranty.
1. Lap siding: 30 years.
C. Workmanship Warranty: Application limited warranty for 2 years.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 074646-1 FIBER CEMENT SIDING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIDING
A. Lap Siding: Individual horizontal boards made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high
pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186 Type A Grade II; with
machined edges, for nail attachment.
1. Style: Standard lap style.
2. Texture: Simulated rough sawn grain.
3. Length: 12 ft (3.7 m), nominal.
4. Width (Height): 5 -1/4 inches (133 mm).
a. Exposure: 6 inches.
5. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm), nominal.
6. Finish: Factory applied primer.
7. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable.
8. Lap Siding Manufacturers:
a. James Hardie Building Products, Inc: www.jameshardie.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim: See Section 06 2000 - Finished Carpentry.
B. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1 -1/4
inch (32 mm).
C. Joint Sealer: As specified in Section 07 9005.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencing installation, verify governing dimensions of building and condition of
substrate.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect (Erickson
McGovern Architects) of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be
detrimental to proper installation.
B. Verify that water - resistive barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly.
C. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect (Erickson
McGovern Architects) of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage.
2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to
location of project.
3. Use trim details indicated on drawings.
4. Touch up all field cut edges before installing.
5. Pre -drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.
B. Over Wood and Wood- Composite Sheathing: Fasten siding through sheathing into studs.
C. Allow space for thermal movement between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim;
seal joint between panel and trim with specified sealant.
D. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints are
inevitable stagger joints between successive courses.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
074646-2
FIBER CEMENT SIDING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
E. Do not install siding less than 6 inches (150 mm) from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch
(25 mm) to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.
F. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations.
Paint all exposed cut edges.
G. Finish Painting: Specified in Section 09 9113.
3.04 INSTALLATION - LAP SIDING
A. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Starting: Install a minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick lath starter strip at the bottom course of the
wall. Apply planks horizontally with minimum 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) wide laps at the top. The
bottom edge of the first plank overlaps the starter strip.
C. Place fasteners between 1 in and 1 -1/8 in. from the top edge and no closer than 3/8 in. from the
ends of the plank.
D. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Align vertical joints of the planks over framing members.
F. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade.
G. Locate splices at least one stud cavity or a minimum of 12 inches away from window and door
openings.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 074646-3 FIBER CEMENT SIDING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 07 5400
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (ALTERNATE BID A -1)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mechanically attached system with thermoplastic roofing membrane.
1. Including slipsheets, fasteners, metal flashings, and sealants.
B. Vapor retarder.
C. Deck sheathing.
D. Flashings.
E. Roofing cant strips and stack boots.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs.
B. Section 07 6200 -SHEET METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES: Counterflashings, reglets,
and cleats.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D6878/D6878M - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet
Roofing; 2013.
B. FM DS 1 -28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2007.
C. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors
Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.
D. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, vapor retarder,
surfacing, and fasteners.
C. Specimen Warranty: For approval.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other
materials, and paver layout.
E. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches (_x_ mm) in size
illustrating insulation.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter
conditions requiring special attention.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1. Certifications by manufacturers of roofing and insulating materials that all materials
supplied comply with all requirements of the identified ASTM and industry standards or
practices.
H. Warranty:
1. Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner
(Yelm Community Schools)'s name and registered with manufacturer.
2. Submit installer's certification that installation complies with all warranty conditions for the
waterproof membrane.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner
(Yelm Community Schools)'s name and registered with manufacturer.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 075400-1 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING (ALTERNATE BID A -1)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2 A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
3 B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section:
4 1. With minimum 5 years documented experience.
5 2. Approved by membrane manufacturer.
6 a. The roofing contractor must have been trained by a technical representative of
7 Roofing Manufacturer and be familiar with the product specified.
8 b. No deviations shall be made from this specification or Manufacturer's roofing systems
9 detail drawings without prior written authorization from the Manufacturer's Services
10 Department.
11 c. Upon completion of the installation, and after written notification to Manufacturer that
12 all work has been completed in strict accordance with the contract specifications and
13 the Manufacturer's requirements, a guarantee evaluation shall be made by a
14 representative of Manufacturer for the purpose of determining whether the system
15 installed meets the whether the system installed meets the JM requirements for
16 Guarantee Issuance. requirements for Guarantee Issuance.
17 1.06 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETING
18 A. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with
19 related work.
20 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
21 A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels
22 intact.
23 1. All materials must be protected from damage during transit, handling, storage and
24 installation. Place all materials on pallets and fully protect from moisture.
25 B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
26 1. All materials shall be stored in a dry area and protected from the elements. Membrane
27 rolls shall be stored flat on pallets.
28 C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.
29 D. All materials determined to have been damaged shall be replaced with new materials.
30 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
31 A. Only as much new roofing as can be made weathertight each day shall be installed each day.
32 This includes all flashing work.
33 B. substrate to receive new insulation, membrane or flashing shall be thoroughly dry. Should
34 surface moisture occur, the contractor shall provide adequate equipment to dry the substrate.
35 C. Prior to and during application, the contractor shall ensure that all dirt, debris and dust be
36 removed from surfaces to be roofed for both new and reroofing substrates.
37 D. Precautions shall be taken to prevent wind blow -off or wind damage during the course of the
38 roofing application. This may necessitate additional securement of temporary construction.
39 E. The contractor shall verify and ensure that all roof drain lines are unblocked before starting
40 work. If any drain blockages are found, they shall be reported to the owner or their
41 representative and the Manufacturer in writing.
42 F. Temporary waterstops shall be installed at the end of each work day or if inclement weather
43 conditions dictate. These temporary waterstops shall be removed at the start of the next work
44 day and disposed of properly.
45 G. Do not install the roofing membrane in direct contact with any product containing coal tar pitch,
46 creosote, or other harmful materials. Consult the Manufacturer for special installation
47 requirements and specification below for slipsheet requirements.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 075400-2 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING (ALTERNATE BID A -1)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
H.
Do not allow waste products containing petroleum, grease, acid, solvents, vegetable or mineral
2
oil, animal oil, animal fat, etc. or direct steam venting to come into direct contact with the
3
Roofing Membrane. Contact the Manufacturer for recommendations if such conditions exist.
4
I.
The contractor shall follow all safety regulations as recommended by OSHA.
5
J.
All work shall be scheduled and executed without exposing interior building areas to the effects
6
of inclement weather. The existing building and its contents shall be protected against all risks.
7
Arrange work sequences to avoid use of newly constructed roofing for storage, walking
8
surfaces and equipment movement. Contractor shall provide all necessary protection and
9
barriers to segregate the work areas and prevent damage to adjacent areas. If excessive foot
10
traffic over newly installed membrane is necessary, contractor shall provide plywood or
11
polyester felt protection to prevent damage.
12
K.
System is specified to meet an Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. or FM Global's rating, all
13
materials used in the system must be UL or FM Global labeled and approved for use for that
14
particular system.
15
1.09 CODE REQUIREMENTS
16
A.
The applicator shall submit evidence that the proposed roof system meets the requirements of
17
the local building code and has been tested and approved or listed by the following test
18
organizations.
19
1. All local building codes and requirements must be followed where applicable. It is the sole
20
responsibility of the roofing contractor to determine any and all local building code
21
requirements and to ensure that the roofing system selected complies with such
22
requirements.
23
B.
Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) - Norwood, MA.
24
1. Class 1 -90 (for high wind exposure).
25
1.10 WARRANTY
26
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
27
B.
Material Warranty: Provide membrane manufacturer's warranty agreeing to replace material
28
that shows manufacturing defects within 5 years after installation.
29
C.
System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing
30
that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes.
31
1. Warranty Term: 10 years.
32
2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty.
33
a. NDL (No Dollar Limit) - This Guarantee assures the owner that Manufacturer, under
34
the Roof Guarantee Agreement, is responsible for maintaining the roof in a watertight
35
condition if leaks occur solely as a result of deterioration of or improper workmanship
36
in applying the specified materials or products. The obligation under the NDL
37
Guarantee is for a specific number of years (as stated above) and specifies no
38
maximum monetary amount of coverage (No Dollar Limit).
39
D.
Owner Responsibility:
40
1. Owner shall notify both the roofing manufacturer and the Applicator of any leaks as they
41
occur during the time period when both warranties are in effect.
42
PART 2
PRODUCTS
43 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
44 A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane Materials:
45 1. Carlisle Roofing Systems, Inc; Sure -Weld TPO: www.carlisle- syntec.com.
46 2. Sarnafil Inc.; Sarnifil Express System S327: www.sarnafilus.com.
47 3. Johns Manville Corporation; JM TPO Mechanically Fastened Roofing System - Ultra Gard
48 (Plus 60 Membrane: www.jm.com.
49 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 075400-3 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING (ALTERNATE BID A -1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM
A. Roofing Assembly Requirements:
1. Roof Covering External Fire - Resistance Classification: UL Class A.
2. Factory Mutual Classification: Class I and windstorm resistance of 1 -90, in accordance with
FM DS 1 -28.
2.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
A. Membrane:
1. Material: Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) complying with ASTM D6878/D6878M.
2. Reinforcing: Internal fabric.
3. Thickness: 0.045 inch (1.1 mm), minimum.
4. Thickness: 60 mil. -.059 inch ( mm), minimum.
5. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible.
6. Color: White.
7. Solar reflectance index (SRI): 95.
B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
C. Membrane Fasteners: As recommended and approved by membrane manufacturer.
1. Disc Washers and Screws:
a. Type and spacing as required by Manufacturer; supplied by roof membrane
manufacturer.
D. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane.
2.04 DECK SHEATHING AND COVER BOARDS
A. Barrier Board: Perlite, Fiber glass faced gypsum board for roofing, or Moisture resistant gypsum
sheathing that is approved by its manufacturer for mechanically attached installations.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch, DensDeck DuraGuard@ Roof Board or approved equal.
B. Slip Sheet: Approved by membrane manufacturer; use if required by membrane manufacturer.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Stack Boots and Corners: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through
membrane; same material as membrane.
1. For vent stacks, pipes, drains, and corners: Prefabricated pipe boots and inside and
outside corners provided by manufacturer.
B. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
1. Contact cement to adhere membrane and fleshings to various substrates e.g., insulation
surfaces, masonry surfaces, plywood, concrete, or metal.
2. It is not acceptable to use bonding adhesive in the seams.
C. Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: Compatible with membrane and adhesives.
D. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with
membrane.
E. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped type, size and configuration as required to suit
application.
F. Strip Reglet Devices: Galvanized steel, maximum possible lengths per location, with
attachment flanges.
G. Termination Bar: Manufacturer's Termination Bar fastened 6 inches on center.
H. Metal Edge Assemblies: Manufacturer's Edge Metal installed per membrane manufacturer's
details.
1. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
J. Cut -Edge Sealant: Use to seal exposed cut edges of reinforced membrane.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 075400-4 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING (ALTERNATE BID A -1)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
3
A.
Do not deviate from this specification without written approval of the manufacturer. Should
4
deviations or changes occur without the manufacturer's approval, the project will not be eligible
5
for warranty coverage.
6
1. Do not deviate from this specification without written approval of the Architect (Erickson
7
McGovern Architects).
8
B.
Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's
9
instructions.
10
C.
Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.
11
D.
Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range
12
recommended by manufacturer.
13
E.
Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is
14
expected or occurring.
15
F.
Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
16
weatherproofed the same day.
17
3.02 EXAMINATION
18
A.
Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
19
B.
Verify deck is supported and secure.
20
C.
Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly
21
sloped and suitable for installation of roof system.
22
1. Verify that surfaces to be bonded to are dry, clean and free of debris. Suitable surfaces
23
are smooth, solid masonry, wood, and metal, plus insulation board fastened to the specific
24
manufacturer's recommendations for receiving adhered roofing membranes and accepted
25
by Manufacturer for adhered application.
26
D.
Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
27
E.
Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips
28
are in place.
29
F.
Verify that rooftop mechanical units are to have their condensation lines piped to drains or off
30
the roof.
31
G.
Verify that steel deck is covered with an approved insulation mechanically fastened to deck with
32
membrane manufacturer approved fasteners.
33
H.
Correct unsuitable conditions before proceeding with installation. Commencing installation
34
signifies acceptance by the installer of the substrate.
35 3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
36 A. Prior to the start of work, make the substrate smooth and free of debris, sharp edges, and other
37 surface irregularities that will be detrimental to the installation.
38 B. Correct unevenness and joint gaps greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the membrane substrate as
39 they can cause inconsistent membrane welds. When such conditions occur fill with appropriate
40 and properly secured insulation or material approved by manufacturer's technical review
41 department.
42 C. Existing Flashings: Remove and completely clean off wherever new roofing system
43 terminations and water stops are to be installed. Existing flashings may be left in place up to
44 Manufacturer's termination areas when in good structural condition and solidly attached to the
45 substrate.
46 D. Flashing Substrates: Verify that the substrate is smooth and free of sharp edges and other
47 surface irregularities that will be detrimental to 100 - percent adhesion of the flashing membrane.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 075400-5 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING (ALTERNATE BID A -1)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
E.
Plywood Decks: Install slip plates over all gaps or uneven joints where membrane seams will
2
cross to minimize welding inconsistency.
3
F.
Wood Deck Preparation:
4
1. Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Fill knot holes with latex filler.
5
2. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum.
6
3.04 FASTENERS - GENERAL
7
A.
Install fasteners with a depth- sensing screw gun to prevent overdriving or underdriving, unless
8
otherwise approved or required by project conditions.
9
3.05 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
10
A.
Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching.
11
B.
Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage.
12
C.
Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches (75 mm).
13
Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.
14
D.
Mechanical Attachment: Apply membrane and mechanical attachment devices in accordance
15
with manufacturer's instructions.
16
E.
At intersections with vertical surfaces:
17
1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) onto vertical
18
surfaces.
19
2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips.
20
F.
Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing.
21
G.
Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings.
22
3.06 FLASHINGS AND DRAINS
23
A.
Flashing: Flash perimeters as shown in Manufacturer's Drawings. Do not cover weep holes or
24
any form of through -wall drainage.
25
B.
Roof Drains: Install in accordance with membrane manufacturer's details.
26
1. Properly secure all bolts to provide 100 - percent continuous compression of the clamping
27
ring.
28
2. Do not run field seams through drains.
29
C.
Metal Work:
30
1. Install and anchor in a manner that prevents damage from buckling or wind, in accordance
31
with SMACNA guidelines or in manner approved by membrane manufacturer.
32
2. Seal and waterproof in an acceptable manner to prevent leakage.
33
3. Make and install Manufacturer's Metal flashing at perimeter in accordance with membrane
34
manufacturer's details.
35
D.
Overnight Seal /Temporary Water Stop: Make the partially installed roofing system watertight at
36
the end of each work day, using a method approved by membrane manufacturer.
37
1. Extend the membrane beyond the insulation.
38
2. Set edge into approved overnight seal material.
39
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
40
A.
Ensure that metal work shall be secured in a manner approved by Manufacturer, or in
41
accordance with SMACNA guidelines, to prevent damage from buckling, or wind exposure. All
42
metal work that is part of the waterproofing envelope shall be sealed, structurally sound, and
43
appropriately anchored to prevent leakage.
44
B.
Tests:
45
1. Seam Tests: Probe the entire lap edge of each seam with an approved seam probing tool
46
(Sears cotter -pin extractor) after seam has cooled completely to verify seam consistency.
47
Probing before the seam area has cooled will damage the membrane.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 075400-6 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING (ALTERNATE BID A -1)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. Destructive Seam Tests: Test 3 inch wide area of seam weld to verify good peel strength.
2 A properly welded seam will have membrane delamination from scrim prior to weld failure.
3 Perform the following destructive tests on welds:
4 a. First seam of each working day.
5 b. First seam after the automatic hot -air welder has been allowed to cool down.
6 c. After any extreme changes in weather conditions.
7 C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Upon completion of the installation, have the manufacturer's
8 representative make an inspection to ascertain that the roofing membrane system has been
9 installed according to manufacturer's approved specifications and details.
10 D. Warranty Inspection: Provide manufacturer's inspection for acceptance for warranty.
11 E. Rejection of Defective Work: Areas having excessive patching as a result of damage to the
12 membrane or faulty installation may be rejected by membrane manufacturer or the Architect
13 (Erickson McGovern Architects); replace the membrane completely in these areas.
14 3.08 CLEANING
15 A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of
16 surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.
17 B. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.
18 3.09 PROTECTION
19 A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.
20 B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable
21 materials.
22
23
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 075400-7 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE
ROOFING (ALTERNATE BID A -1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 07 6200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, and other items indicated
on Drawings for Mechanical Roof Penetrations.
1. Metal flashings for exterior opening penetrations.
B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.
C. Reglets and accessories.
1. Preformed kick -out flashing at eave of sloped roofing adjacent to vertical walls.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers.
B. Section 23 -3700: Roof curbs for mechanical equipment and associated installation.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
B. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.
C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2013.
D. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).
E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
F. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2007
(Reapproved 2012)e1.
G. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and
general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
1. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and
anchorage details. Include all flashing and sheet metal units and others as required for a
complete watertight and weathertight building. Provide layouts at 1/4 inch scale and
details at 3 inch scale.
D. Samples: Submit two samples in size illustrating metal finish color, as follows:.
1. 8 -inch- (200 -mm -) square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished
surfaces.
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA 1793 and CDA A4050 requirements and standard
details, except as otherwise indicated.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 076200-1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
ACCESSORIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years
2 of documented experience.
3 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
4 A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope
5 metal sheets to ensure drainage.
6 B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
7 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
8 A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of
9 each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of
10 materials and finishes.
11 1.09 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
12 A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
13 B. Warranty: Warranty exterior work watertight and weathertight for two years from date of final
14 completion.
15 PART 2 PRODUCTS
16 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS
17 A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch (0.6
18 mm) thick base metal.
19
B.
Pre - Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum
20
0.02 inch (0.6 mm) thick base metal, shop pre- coated with PVDF coating.
21
1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA
22
2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.
23
2. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603;
24
baked enamel finish system; custom color to match approved sample.
25
a. Colors: See Section 09 9999 for color selections. (Match existing metal roof).
26
2.02 ACCESSORIES
27
A.
Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal.
28
1. Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by
29
sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
30
B.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
31
C.
Primer: Zinc chromate type.
32
D.
Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
33
E.
Sealant to be Concealed in Completed Work: Non - curing butyl sealant.
34
F.
Sealant to be Exposed in Completed Work: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, 100 percent
35
silicone with minimum movement capability of plus /minus 25 percent and recommended by
36
manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; clear.
37
G.
Sealant: Specified in Section 07 9005.
38
1. Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components
39
being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified.
40
H.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
41
1. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and
42
weather - resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.
43
I.
Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
44
units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed;
45
noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
46
J.
Solder: ASTM B32; Sn50 (50/50) type.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 076200-2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
ACCESSORIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
2.03 FABRICATION
2 A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Shop- fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
3 sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural
4 Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of
5 the item indicated. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for
6 forming material.
7 B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects
8
C.
Form pieces in single lengths for entire runs.
9
D.
Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners.
10
E.
Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use
11
sealed lapped, bayonet -type or interlocking hooked seams.
12
F.
Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for rigidity,
13
seal with sealant.
14
G.
Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form
15
drip.
16
H.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and
17
weather - resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be
18
covered before fabricating sheet metal.
19
I.
Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
20
and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
21
J.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be
22
seamed, form seams, and solder.
23
K.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
24
sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
25
L.
Solder Corners: Provide fully soldered corners at all outside of roof curb flashings.
26
M.
Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed
27
surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as
28
recommended by manufacturer.
29
N.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
30
allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
31
O.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being
32
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.
33
1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application
34
but never less than thickness of metal being secured
35
2.04 FINISH
36
A.
Factory Finish, Sheet Metal: Provide manufacturer's standard baked -on factory finish on sheet
37
metal flashing units.
38
1. Metal Counter Flashing; and Base Flashing for through roof Mechanical curb penetrations.
39
2. Miscellaneous Wall Flashing.
40
3. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Accessories.
41
a. Finish as listed below:
42
1) Fluoropolymer Coating:
43
(a) Exterior coating to be full- strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked -on with
44
a dry film thickness of 1.0 mil, 30% reflective glass (ASTM D 523), over
45
minimum 0.2 mil baked -on modified epoxy primer.
46
(b) Back -side coating to consist of. 15 mil epoxy primer and.35 mil off -white
47
backer.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 076200-3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
ACCESSORIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.01 EXAMINATION
3
A.
Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
4
in place, and nailing strips located.
5
1. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be
6
installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation
7
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
8
B.
Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
9
3.02 PREPARATION
10
A.
Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
11
B.
Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
12
thickness of 15 mil (0.4 mm).
13
3.03 INSTALLATION
14
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
15
performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's
16
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods
17
indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible,
18
and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that
19
will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
20
1. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
21
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
22
hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and
23
weather - resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered
24
before fabricating sheet metal.
25
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work.
26
Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24
27
inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion
28
provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and
29
waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25
30
mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
31
3. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin
32
edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm), except where
33
pre- tinned surface would show in finished Work.
34
a. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
35
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
36
b. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
37
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and
38
form metal to completely seal joint.
39
c. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
40
d. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to
41
be seamed, form seams, and solder.
42
e. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by
43
coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other
44
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
45
1) Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for
46
waterproof performance.
47
f. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of
48
assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or
49
receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap -in installation and
50
sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and
51
sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and bed with
52
sealant.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 076200-4 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
ACCESSORIES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
E. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with
neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
F. preformed kick -out flashing at eave of sloped roofing adjacent to vertical walls/
1. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in proper relationship
with adjacent construction. Coordinate sequence of construction with installation of
adjacent materials.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work
during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time
of Substantial Completion.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
END OF SECTION
076200-5
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
ACCESSORIES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 07 9005
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sealants and joint backing.
B. This Section includes joint sealers for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non - traffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below.
a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in -place concrete.
b. Joints between architectural precast concrete units.
c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Joints between different materials listed above.
e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
f. Otherjoints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non - traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
c. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls
and partitions.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and
windows
e. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
f. Otherjoints as indicated.
C. Precompressed foam sealers.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Joint sealer, caulk, and sealant shall be interchangable in the specifications and the drawings.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in Place Concrete.
B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry, sealing of joints to limit infiltration.
C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
B. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.07 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES
A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight
and airtight continuous seal without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing
about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life,
curing time, and mixing instructions for Multi- component materials.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 079005-1 JOINT SEALERS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are
less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants
capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
B. Sequence installation of joint sealers to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after
completion of concrete and masonry waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Final Completion.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as
selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Silicone Sealants:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik - us.com.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
3. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
4. GE Plastics: www.geplastics.com.
5. Degussa Building Systems /Sonneborn: www.chemrex.com.
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
B. Polyurethane Sealants:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik - us.com.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
3. Degussa Building Systems /Sonneborn: www.chemrex.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C. Polysulfide Sealants:
1. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
2. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
D. Acrylic Sealants (ASTM C920):
1. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
E. Butyl Sealants:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik - us.com.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 079005-2 JOINT SEALERS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
A.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
2
B.
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
3
F.
Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants:
4
C.
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik - us.com.
5
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
6
D.
3. Degussa Building Systems /Sonneborn: www.chemrex.com.
7
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
8
G.
Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers:
9
3.01 EXAMINATION
1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd: www.emseal.com.
10
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
2. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.sandellmfg.com.
11
3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
12
2.03 SEALANTS
13
A.
General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M,
14
G, and A; single component.
15
1. Applications: Use for:
16
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
17
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
18
c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.
19
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
20
B.
Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with water - repellent.
21
1. Color: as selected.
22
2. Size as required to provide weathertight seal when installed.
23
3. Provide product recommended by manufacturer for traffic - bearing use.
24
4. Applications: Use for:
25
a. Exterior wall expansion joints.
26
C.
General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF
27
single component, paintable.
28
1. Applications: Use for:
29
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
30
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
31
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
32
D.
Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self - leveling; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses
33
T, M and A; single component.
34
1. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1 -1/2 inches.
35
2. Color: Colors as selected.
36
3. Applications: Use for:
37
a. Expansion joints in floors.
38 2.04 ACCESSORIES
39
A.
Primer: Non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
40
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
41
compatible with joint forming materials.
42
C.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
43
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
44
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
45
application.
46
PART 3
EXECUTION
47
3.01 EXAMINATION
48
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 079005-3 JOINT SEALERS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
2 3.02 PREPARATION
3 A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
4 B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
5 1. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint
6 sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer- substrate tests or prior
7 experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations.
8 Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto
9 adjoining surfaces.
10 C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
11 D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
12 1. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
13 adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
14 contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
15 immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
16 3.03 INSTALLATION
17 A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
18 surfaces and material installation instructions.
19 B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
20 C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
21 1. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint - fillers, compression seals or back of
22 joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant
23 failure.
24 D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags
25 E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
26 when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
27 F. Tool joints concave.
28 G. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and
29 intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) below adjoining surface.
30 H. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints
31 with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) below adjoining surface.
32 I. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following
33 requirements:
34 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at
35 position required to produce the cross sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
36 relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
37 a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
38 b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint fillers.
39 c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application
40 and replace with dry material.
41 3.04 CLEANING
42 A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces
43 3.05 PROTECTION
44 A. Protect sealants until cured.
45 1. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
46 substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that
47 they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
48 such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 079005-4 JOINT SEALERS
3
4
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to product joint
sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 079005-5 JOINT SEALERS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non - fire -rated steel doors and frames.
B. Steel frames for wood doors.
C. Thermally insulated steel doors.
D. Steel glazing frames.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood doors.
B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
B. ANSI /ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.
C. ANSI /SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI -100); 2014.
D. ANSI /SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011.
E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2013.
F. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by
Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2011.
G. BHMA Al 56.115 -American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and
Steel Frames; 2014. (ANSI /BHMA Al 56.115)
H. ICC A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009
(ANSI).
I. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door
and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI /DHI A115 Series).
J. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.
K. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;
The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2006.
L. NFRC - RC -31 (The National Fenestration Rating Council); current addition.
1. NFRC 100 -2010; Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U- factors.
2. NFRC 400 -2010; Procedure forDetermining Fenestration Product Air Leakage.
M. Washington State Energy code 2009 edition; Chapter 51 -11 WAC.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one
copy of referenced grade standard.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and
identifying location of different finishes, if any.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and
2 openings as those on contract drawings.
3 a. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
4 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
5 A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications
6 Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI A 250.8/SDI- 100 -98 and as herein specified.
7 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
8 A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and
9 job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished doors
10 and frames.
11 B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
12 refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise,
13 remove and replace damaged items as directed.
14 C. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
15 1. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4- inches
16 high wood blocking. Avoid use of non - vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create
17 humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton
18 immediately. Provide 1/4- inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
19 D. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build -up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
20 1.07 WARRANTY
21 A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
22 B. Submit door manufacturer's two -year warranty, from date of final completion, signed by
23 Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors or doors
24 that do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards.
25 PART 2 PRODUCTS
26 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
27 A. Steel Doors and Frames:
28 1. Ceco Door Products: www.cecodoor.com.
29 2. Curries Company: www.curries.com.
30 3. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.
31 4. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com.
32 5. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc.: www.hollowmetal.com.
33 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
34 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES
35 A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
36 1. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.
37 2. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
38 3. Glazed Lights: Non - removable stops on non - secure side; sizes and configurations as
39 indicated on drawings.
40 4. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA Al 56.115, with reinforcement welded in
41 place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
42 5. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: Components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated
43 (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard
44 coating thickness
45 6. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
46 B. Fabrication:
47 1. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects,
48 warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 081113-2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory - assembled before shipment, to
2
assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI /SDI -100 requirements.
3
a. Joints: The width of all exposed joints at the intersection of frame members shall not
4
exceed 1/64" (.015 ") maximum. Joints exceeding this limit shall be filled with the
5
specified plastic filler and sanded smooth to flush out with surface of frame.
6
b. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb, polyurethane,
7
polystyrene, unitized steel grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core with
8
internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance
9
with SDI standards. (Exterior doors insulated).
10
c. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between non -fire
11
rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.
12
2.
Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non -flush units,
13
from only cold - rolled steel.
14
3.
Fabricate door edges with exposed hairline seam of uniform width located on center of
15
door edge.
16
4.
Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and
17
moldings from either cold - rolled or hot - rolled steel. (Fabricator's option.)
18
5.
Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel in accordance
19
with SDI -112. Provide top flush edges of exterior doors as integral part of door
20
construction or by addition of minimum 16 gage inverted steel channels. Recessed space
21
between faces, at top of door, not acceptable.
22
6.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for
23
exposed screws and bolts.
24
7.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
25
surface applied hardware may be done at project site. Provide 10 gage reinforcement for
26
all hardware; include reinforcement for closers on frames whether closers are scheduled
27
or not, and plasterguards at strike pockets. Welding of hinges to frames or doors not
28
permitted.
29
8.
Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units,
30
including galvanized surfaces.
31
a. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials
32
before application of paint.
33
b. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished
34
surface ready to receive finish paint.
35
c. After welding of galvanized steel, clean and grind welds as necessary, and apply high
36
zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds, complying with the Military Spec.
37
MIL -P -21035 (Ships) or SSPC- Paint -20.
38
9.
Apply asphalt emulsion undiluted, to all concealed surfaces of frames in shower and
39
drying areas and exterior frames. This is in addition to the prime coat.
40
10.
Glazing Stops: Minimum 20 gage steel.
41
a. Provide non - removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of
42
interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
43
b. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on side opposite of stops for glass,
44
louvers, and other panels in doors. Screws shall be of tamper -proof type.
45
c. Locate glazing stops on opposite side of relite from horizontal blinds. See
46
Specification Section 12 2113 for horizontal blind locations.
47
11.
Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in locations listed
48
in SECTION 08 7100 - FINISH HARDWARE. If not indicated in the Finish Hardware then,
49
in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel
50
Doors and Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute.
51
C. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
52
than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for
53
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound -rated must comply with the
2015 -19 / YCS
Ed Center TI 081113-3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound -rated doors; where two requirements
2 conflict, comply with the most stringent.
3 2.03 STEEL DOORS
4 A. General:
5 1. If doors are scheduled with vision panels at 43" from bottom of door, the vision panel shall
6 be adjusted to accommodate vision frames, any undercutting and /or thresholds so glass is
7 a maximum of 43" above finished floor.
8 2. If doors are scheduled with vision panel more than 43" from bottom of door, Architect
9 (Erickson McGovern Architects) shall be notified and the correct dimension shall be
10 confirmed.
11 B. Exterior Doors:
12 1. Grade: NAAMM HMMA 861, physical performance Level A.
13 a. 16 gage.
14 2. Core: Kraftpaper honeycomb.
15 3. Top Closures for Outswinging Doors: Flush with top of faces and edges.
16 4. Galvanizing: Components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated (galvannealed) in accordance
17 with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
18 5. Insulating Value: U -value of 0.60 (max.), when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363.
19 a. U- factors for glazing and doors shall be determined, certified and labeled in
20 accordance with Standard RS -31 by a certified independent agency licensed by the
21 National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC). Compliance shall be based on the
22 Residential or the Nonresidential Model Size. Product samples used for U- factor
23 determinations shall be production line units or representative of units as purchased
24 by the consumer or contractor. Unlabeled glazing and doors shall be assigned the
25 default U- factor in Table 10 -6.
26 6. Air Leakage: Air leakage shall not exceed 1.0 cfm /ft for glazed swinging entrance doors
27 and revolving doors, tested at a pressure of at least 1.57 pounds per square foot (psf) in
28 accordance with NFRC 400, AAMA /WDMA /CSA 101/IS2/A440, or ASTM E283.
29 7. Weatherstripping: Integral, recessed into door edge or frame.
30 2.04 STEEL FRAMES
31 A. General:
32 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door.
33 a. ANSI /SDI A250.8 (SDI -100), Level 1 Door Frames: 16 gage, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm),
34 minimum thickness.
35 1) Fabricate interior frames of 16 -gage cold - rolled furniture steel.
36 b. ANSI /SDI A250.8 (SDI -100), Level 2 and 3 Door Frames: 14 gage, 0.067 inch (1.7
37 mm), minimum thickness.
38 1) Form exterior frames from 14 -gage hot - dipped galvanized steel.
39 c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with
40 ANSI /SDI A250.8 (SDI -100), Level 1, 18 gage, 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), minimum
41 thickness.
42 2. Finish: Same as for door.
43 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut -outs in frames to be installed in masonry or
44 to be grouted.
45 4. Frames Installed Back -to -Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and
46 overhead structure.
47 B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.
48 1. Galvanizing: Components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated (galvannealed) in accordance
49 with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
50 2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
51 3. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.
52 C. Interior Door Frames, Non - Fire - Rated: Knockdown type.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 081113-4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1. Terminated Stops: Provide at all interior doors; closed end stop terminated 6 inches (150
2 mm) above floor at 45 degree angle.
3 2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
4 D. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match
5 door frames, and as indicated on drawings.
6 1. Light Openings in Doors: For interior doors provide the required frame to accommodate
7 one thickness of 1/4 inch glass where indicated and for exterior doors provide the required
8 frame to accommodate a minimum of 1 inch thick insulated glass. Provide frame with
9 returns on both sides of door. Door skin is not acceptable as glass stop.
10 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
11
A.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000.
12
B.
Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted
13
corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.
14
C.
Grout for Exterior Door Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4 -inch slump for hand
15
troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited.
16
1. Grout for Interior Frames: Structo -Lite Gypsum Door Frame Packing: (Interior door frames
17
only) Provide Structo -Lite gypsum plaster or approved which complies with ASTM -C 28.
18
2. Grout for Exterior Frames: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated
19
or, if not otherwise indicated, of fine consistency, at time of placement that will completely
20
fill spaces intended to receive grout.
21
D.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into
22
exterior walls, hot -dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
23
E.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage sheet steel; G60 galvanized where
24
used with galvanized frames.
25
F.
Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center
26
mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
27
G.
Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop - assembled frames.
28
2.06 FINISH MATERIALS
29
A.
Primer: Rust - inhibiting, complying with ANSI /SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
30
B.
Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high - build, water - resistant, resilient coating.
31
PART 3
EXECUTION
32
3.01 EXAMINATION
33
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
34
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
35
3.02 PREPARATION
36
A.
Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior
37
to installation.
38
3.03 INSTALLATION
39
A.
Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM
40
HMMA 840.
41
B.
Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
42
C.
Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI -105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For
43
Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated.
44
1. Interior Frames: In all interior wood and steel stud walls or existing masonry walls, pack
45
solid the head and jambs of all newly installed hollow metal door frames with Structo -Lite
46
Gypsum. When integral sidelites are a part of the door frame assembly creating mullions,
47
pack only the perimeter framework of the overall frame assembly. Do not pack the
2015 -19 /
YCS Ed Center TI 081113-5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 inclosed interior mullions. Relites alone do not receive packing. In gypsum wallboard
2 walls, protect the exposed wallboard from excess moisture.
3 2. Exterior Frames: Solid grout the perimeter head and jambs of all newly installed hollow
4 metal door frame assemblies at all exterior walls. Provide wood or styrofoam filler
5 materials in "door stop" recess to promote easier drilling for weatherstrip installation. Seal
6 all joints between frame and wall surface to prevent loss of grout, bulging, uneven or
7 exposed grout surfaces.
8 3. Hollow metal frames in new unit masonry walls and masonry veneer walls are solid
9 grouted in another Division 4 section.
10 4. The installation of frames shall be prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set
11 frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
12 anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and
13 spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
14 5. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on
15 hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb.
16 a. Apply plastic filler over all anchor screw heads in all hollow metal frames and grind
17 smooth. Grinding marks will not be permitted.
18 D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that
19 pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.
20 E. Coordinate installation of hardware.
21 F. Coordinate installation of glazing.
22 G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
23 H. Touch up damaged factory finishes.
24 3.04 TOLERANCES
25 A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As indicated in ANSI /SDI A250.8 (SDI -100).
26 B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
27 3.05 ADJUSTING
28 A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
29 B. Prime Coat Touch -up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
30 prime coat and apply touch -up of compatible air drying primer.
31 C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and
32 frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
33 3.06 SCHEDULE
34 A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.
35 END OF SECTION
36
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 081113-6 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND
FRAMES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 08 1416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non - rated.
B.
Transom panels.
1.02
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
B.
Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
C.
Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AWI /AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.
B.
Architectural Woodwork Standards published jointly by the Architectural Woodwork Institute,
the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer Association of Canada, and the Woodwork Institute,
latest edition.
C.
ANSI /WDMA I.S. 1A, latest edition.
D.
ANSI /WDMA I.S. 6A, latest edition.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Submit shop drawings in conformance to the requirements of the Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
C.
Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
D.
Specimen warranty.
E.
Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts
required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory
finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing and louvers.
F.
Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 12 x 12 inch (_x_ mm) in size illustrating
wood grain, stain color, and sheen.
G.
Warranty, executed in Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s name.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Quality Standards: Comply with the current edition of the following standards:
1. Work shall be in accordance with the Grade or the Grades Specified of the Architectural
Woodwork Standards.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20
percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.
C.
Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
1. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration.
2. Deliver materials only when the project is ready for installation and the general contractor
has provided a clean storage area.
2015 -19
/
YCS Ed Center TI 081416-1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 a. Delivery of architectural millwork shall be made only when the area of operation is
2 enclosed, all plaster and concrete work is dry and the area broom clean.
3 3. Maintain indoor temperature and humidity within the range recommended by the
4 Architectural Woodwork Standards for the location of the project.
5 B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
6 1. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation
7 system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary,
8 removable or concealed markings.
9 C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or
10 wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with
11 tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
12 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
13 A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.
14 1. Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have
15 been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder
16 of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's
17 geographical location:
18 a. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100 -S -3 "Moisture Content ".
20
A.
See Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, for additional warranty requirements.
21
1. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner
22
may have under the Contract Documents.
23
2. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard
24
form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
25
defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core
26
construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced
27
quality standards.
28
a. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or
29
replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.
30
b. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Final
31
Completion.
32
B.
Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
33
C.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
34
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
35
D.
Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to
36
rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty.
37
PART 2
PRODUCTS
38
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
39
A.
Wood Veneer Faced Doors Components:
40
1. Doors shall meet the requirements of ANSI/WDMA Extra Heavy Duty performance level.
41
B.
Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
42
1. Eggers Industries; : www.eggersindustries.com.
43
2. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.
44
3. Oshkosh Door Company: www.oshkoshdoor.com.
45
4. V.T. Industries: www.vtindustries.com.
46
5. Vancouver Door Company: www.vancouverdoorco.com.
47
6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
48
2.02 DOORS
49
A.
General:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 081416-2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
1. If doors are scheduled with vision panels at 43" from bottom of door, the vision panel shall
2
be adjusted to accommodate vision frames, any undercutting and /or thresholds so glass is
3
a maximum of 43" above finished floor.
4
2. If doors are scheduled with vision panel more than 43" from bottom of door, Architect
5
(Erickson McGovern Architects) shall be notified and the correct dimension shall be
6
confirmed.
7
B.
All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
8
1. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork
9
Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 01 3000.
10
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5 -ply unless otherwise indicated.
11
C.
Interior Doors: 1 -3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
12
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations.
13
2. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish.
14
D.
Transom Panels: Same construction and finish as door; same performance rating as door.
15
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
16
A.
Non -Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and
17
faces as indicated.
18
2.04 DOOR FACINGS
19
A.
Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Birch (all doors must be of same facing), veneer
20
grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assembly
21
match; unless otherwise indicated.
22
1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade.
23
2. Transoms: Continuous match to doors.
24
2.05 ACCESSORIES
25
A.
Metal Frames for Light Openings in All Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard frame formed of
26
18 gauge cold - rolled steel, factory primed, and approved for use in non -rated doors as well as
27
in doors with fire - ratings indicated. To be painted per Section 09 9000. Interior doors to
28
accommodate 1/4" glass and exterior doors to accommodate 1" thick insulated glass assembly.
29
See Section 08 8000 for glass.
30
1. The "size" as indicated on the door types (in Door schedule) is the clear vision space
31
between the glass stops.
32
B.
Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink
33
style tamper proof screws.
34
2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
35
A.
Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
36
B.
Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
37
C.
Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.
38
D.
Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface - mounted hardware, in accordance with
39
hardware requirements and dimensions.
40
E.
Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge
41
clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
42
F.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
43
2.07 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS
44
A.
Finish work in accordance with AWI /AWMAC /WI (AWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade
45
specified and as follows:
46
1. Transparent:
47
a. AWS Grade: Premium.
48
b. System - 3, Lacquer, Postcatalyzed.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 081416-3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
c. Stain: As selected by Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
1) See Section 09 9999 - Color Section for color to be provided. If manufacturer is
other than specified manufacturer, color sample shall be provided to Architect
(Erickson McGovern Architects) for approval.
d. Sheen: Semigloss.
B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of- tolerance for size or
alignment.
D. Reject doors with defects.
E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
B. Factory- Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
1. For installation see Section 08 7100 - "Finish Hardware" section of these specifications.
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
E. Coordinate installation of glazing.
F. Install door louvers plumb and level.
1. Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or
permitted with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting
and machining.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
1. Fitting Clearances for Non -Rated Doors: Provide 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/16" per leaf
at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor
finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
2. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80.
B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 0.025 inch ( mm) (0.3 mm) measured with straight
edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches (915 by 2130 mm) surface
area.
D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 0.025 inch ( mm) (0.3 mm) measured with straight edge
or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches (915 by 2130 mm) surface area.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
1. Before completion of the installation, the installer shall adjust all moving and operating
parts to function smoothly and correctly.
B. All nicks, chips, and scratches in the finish shall be filled and retouched. Damaged items which
cannot be repaired shall be replaced.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 081416-4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
C. Adjust closers for full closure.
3.05 CLEANUP
3 A. A. Upon completion of installation, the installer shall clean all installed items of pencil and ink
4 marks, and broom clean the area of operation, depositing debris in containers provided by the
5 general contractor.
6 3.06 SCHEDULE
7 A. Refer to Drawings for Door Finish Schedule.
8 END OF SECTION
9
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 081416-5 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 08 5313
VINYL WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vinyl- framed, factory - glazed windows.
B. Insect screens.
C. Perimeter sealant.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction.
B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back -up materials.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA /WDMA /CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard /Specification for
windows, doors, and skylights; American Architectural Manufacturers Association /Window &
Door Manufacturers Association /Canadian Standards Association; 2011.
B. AAMA 701/702 - Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable
Fenestration Weatherseals; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2011.
C. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
D. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved
2010).
E. ASTM E 547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential; 2000.
F. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating
Glass Units; 1997.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Overall Standards: Comply with ANSI /AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, except as otherwise noted
herein.
B. Performance Requirements: As specified in PART 2, with the following additional requirements:
C. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by
pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of window.
1. Measure performance of units by testing in accordance with ASTM E330, using test
pressure equal to 1.5 times the design wind pressure and 10 second duration of maximum
load.
D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.3 cu ft /min /sq ft (1.5 L /s /sq m) of wall
area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf (75 Pa) as
measured in accordance with ASTM E 283.
E. Water Penetration: No water penetration at inward test pressure of 3.75 psf, ASTM E 547 -93.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchors, fasteners, glass, and internal drainage.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related
work, installation requirements.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 085313-1 VINYL WINDOWS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified
2
requirements.
3
E.
Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of
4
the following showing compliance with specified grade:
5
1. Evidence of AAMA Certification.
6
2. Evidence of WDMA Certification.
7
3. Evidence of CSA Certification.
8
4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to
9
authorities having jurisdiction.
10
F.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner
11
(Yelm Community Schools)'s name and registered with manufacturer.
12
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
13
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
14
section, with not less than five years of documented experience.
15
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
16
minimum three years experience.
17
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
18
A.
Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that
19
bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
20
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
21
A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C).
22
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.
23
1.09 WARRANTY
24
A.
See Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, for additional warranty requirements.
25
B.
Correct defective Work within a ten year period after Date of Final Completion.
26
C.
Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane
27
dusting or misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish.
28
PART 2
PRODUCTS
29 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
30 A. Vinyl Windows:
31 1. Atrium Windows & Doors: www.atrium.com.
32 2. Weathergard: www.weathergardwindows.com.
33 3. Milgard Mfg. Co.: www.milgard.com.
34 4. PlyGem Windows: www.plygemwindows.com.
35 2.02 VINYL WINDOWS
36 A. Vinyl Windows: Factory fabricated frame and sash members of extruded, hollow,
37 ultra - violet- resistant, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral color; with factory - installed glazing,
38 hardware, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
39 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
40 a. Product Type: H - Hung window, vertically sliding.
41 2. Color: Tan.
42 3. Size to fit openings with minimum clearance around perimeter of assembly providing
43 necessary space for perimeter seals.
44 4. Framing Members: Fusion welded corners and joints, with internal reinforcement where
45 required for structural rigidity; concealed fasteners.
46 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to exterior side by means of weep drainage network any
47 water entering joints, condensation within glazing channel, or other migrating moisture
48 within system.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 085313-2 VINYL WINDOWS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
6. Glazing Stops, Trim, Flashings, and Accessory Pieces: Formed of rigid PVC, fitting tightly
2
into frame assembly.
3
B.
Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following:
4
1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA /CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements for specific window type:
5
a. Performance Class (PC): R.
6
2. Performance Validation: Windows shall comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440
7
performance requirements as indicated by having AAMA, WDMA, or CSA certified label,
8
or an independent test report for indicated products itemizing compliance and acceptable
9
by authorities having jurisdiction.
10
2.03 COMPONENTS
11
A.
Glazing: Insulated double pane, annealed glass, clear, low -E coated, argon filled, with glass
12
thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions and acoustic rating
13
indicated.
14
B.
Windows: Extruded, hollow, tubular, ultra - violet resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral
15
color; factory fabricated; with vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment
16
devices.
17
1. Performance: Comply with requirements of AAMA 101 -93.
18
2. Performance Requirements: AAMA /WDMA /CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - see below for
19
performance requirements (WINDOW GRADES AND PERFORMANCE
20
CLASSIFICATION).
21
3. Configuration: vertical sliding, hung sash.
22
C.
Insect Screens: 14/18 mesh, steel strands.
23
1. Color: Black.
24
D.
Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to maintain weather
25
seal in accordance with AAMA 701/702.
26
E.
Fasteners: Stainless steel.
27
1. Provide materials warranted by the manufacturer to be non - corrosive and compatible with
28
vinyl window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of window units.
29
a. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw - anchor into vinyl, reinforce the interior with
30
aluminum or non- magnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide
31
standard non - corrosive pressed -in splined grommet nuts. (For lock attachment on
32
horizontal sliders and single hung windows).
33
b. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not
34
use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match the
35
finish of the member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
36
F.
Anchors, Clips and Window Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips and window accessories of
37
aluminum, non - magnetic stainless steel or hot -dip zinc coated steel or iron; provide sufficient
38
strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
39
2.04 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
40
A.
Glazing: Provide manufacturers clear, sealed insulating units of 7/8" overall thickness that
41
complies with ASTM E- 774 -81 Class A, exterior glazed using a closed cell foam tape and
42
applied PVC glazing bead. Glass shall be 3/16" minimum.
43
44
U- value:
Picture unit - 0.34 (max.)
Awning unit - 0.35 max.
Shading Coefficient (SC):
0.71
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 085313-3 VINYL WINDOWS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
Solar Heat Gain (SHG):
0.62
2 2.05 SEALANT MATERIALS
3
A.
Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by
4
the manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic,
5
non - shrinking, and non - migrating.
6
B.
Window (peel and stick) flashing membrane:
7
1. W.R. Grace and Company: Vycor@ Butyl Self- Adhered Flashing.
8
2. Carlisle: Window & Door Flashing.
9
3. Fortifiber Building Systems: Moiststop PF.
10
2.06 WINDOW
GRADES AND PERFORMANCE CLASSIFICATION
11
A.
Commercial Windows: Provide window units complying with requirements of AAMA Grade and
12
Performance Class indicated:
13
1. Operable C30
14
2.07 WINDOW
TYPES
15
A.
General: The following paragraphs define the operating arrangement for the types of sash
16
required in window units and specify minimum provisions for each type. The drawings indicate
17
which panels of each window unit are operable sash and which are fixed.
18
B.
Awning windows are window units containing one or more swing -out, top- hinged or projected
19
sash, arranged in a vertical stack within a common frame and operated by a common control
20
device that swings the bottom edges of ventilators outward. The control device shall operate
21
ventilators simultaneously, securely closing them at both jambs without use of additional
22
manually - controlled locking devices. Sash operation shall permit inside cleaning of outside
23
glass faces.
24
C.
Fixed windows are window units consisting of a glazed frame installed into one opening and
25
are not operable.
26
2.08 HARDWARE
27
A.
General: Except to the extent that more specific or stringent requirements are indicated, provide
28
the manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other
29
corrosion - resistant material compatible with vinyl and of sufficient strength to perform the
30
function for which it is intended.
31
2.09 FABRICATION
32
A.
General: Except to the extent that more specific or stringent requirements are indicated, provide
33
manufacturer's standard fabrication that complies with indicated standards and that produces
34
units that are reglazable without dismantling sash framing. Include a complete system for
35
assembly of components and anchorage of window units preglazed at the factory.
36
B.
Fabricate framing, mullions and sash members with fusion welded corners and joints, in a rigid
37
jig. Supplement frame sections with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity.
38
C.
Form snap -in glass stops, closure molds, weather stops, and flashings of extruded PVC for
39
tight fit into window frame section.
40
D.
Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide
41
internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
42
E.
Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for window units and profile requirements are indicated on
43
the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated along with maximum and minimum dimensions
44
as required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work.
45
1. Details shown are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. Similar
46
details by other approved manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 085313-4 VINYL WINDOWS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 size requirements, minimum /maximum profile requirements, and performance standards
2 as indicated or specified.
3 F. Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame and
4 secure. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers.
5 G. Factory glaze window units.
6 1. Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical for applications
7 indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of the "Glass and Glazing"
8 sections of these specifications, and AAMA 101V-86.
9 PART 3 EXECUTION
10 3.01 EXAMINATION
11 A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive this work.
12 B. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correct and the sill plate is level.
13 1. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean, sound and well - nailed, free of voids and without
14 offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the opening and
15 within 3 inches of the opening.
16 3.02 PREPARATION
17 A. Window (peel and stick) flashing membrane:
18 1. Installation of window flashing membrane.
19 a. Cut the air infiltration barrier (see Section 07 2500) wrap at the top of the header at a
20 45- degree angle to create a flap. Tape the flap temporarily out of the way.
21 b. Apply the peel- and -stick flashing to the sill first, then lap the flashing up on the jambs.
22 c. Next, caulk all around the window opening except on the sill. After caulking install the
23 window.
24 d. Next apply the flashing to the side jambs of the window so that it overlaps the edges
25 of the sill and extends down past it by 1 inch and extends past the window head by 2
26 inches.
27 e. To direct water out beyond the top of the opening. Extend the header flashing piece
28 past the jambs by at least 1 inch. If the window has a drip cap, have it installed
29 beforehand so that the flashing can cover it.
30 f. After installing the header flashing, fold the house wrap flap back over, taping it down
31 so that the house wrap material overlaps the header flashing.
32 3.03 INSTALLATION
33 A. Install window unit assemblies in accordance with manufacturers instructions and applicable
34 building codes.
35 B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances
36 and other irregularities as necessary.
37 C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist, and maintain dimensional tolerances and
38 alignment with adjacent work.
39 D. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
40 1. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets,
41 to provide weathertight construction.
42 2. Fill any remaining cavities between new window frame and existing frame with fiberglass
43 or foam insulation to maintain thermal break of new window.
44 3.04 TOLERANCES
45 A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft (1.5 mm /m) non - cumulative or
46 0.5 inches per 100 ft (12 mm /30 m), whichever is less.
47 3.05 ADJUSTING
48 A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 085313-5 VINYL WINDOWS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.06 CLEANING
2 A. Remove protective material from pre- finished surfaces.
3 B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to window manufacturer; rinse and
4 wipe surfaces clean.
5 C. Remove excess glazing sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable
6 to sealant manufacturer and appropriate for application indicated.
7 3.07 PROTECTION
8 A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder of the
9 construction period to ensure that, except for normal weathering, window units will be free of
10 damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion.
11 END OF SECTION
12
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 085313-6 VINYL WINDOWS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Support Operations Center Phase 2
Yelm School District #2
Erickson McGovern
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work under this section includes the complete finish hardware requirements for the project.
Quantities listed are for the Contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. Items not
specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work shall be furnished, matching the items
specified in quality and finish.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"
3. Division 08 Section "Door Schedule"
4. Division 12 Section "Factory Built Casework"
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Standards: Current edition at date of bid.
1. ADAAG — Americans with Disabilities Act "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities"
2. ANSI /BHMA A156.18 — Materials and Finishes
3. ICC /ANSI A117.1 — Accessible and Usable Facilities and Buildings
4. NFPA 80 — Standard for Fire Doors and Windows
5. NFPA 252 — Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
6. Underwriters Laboratories — Building Materials Directory
7. UL 10C — Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies
B. Codes
1. IBC International Building Code (IBC) 2009
2. Chapter 51 -50 WAC Washington State Building Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General Requirements: All Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 01 Section "Submittal
Procedures ".
B. Product Data: Submit six copies of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware
C. Hardware Schedule: Submit six copies of a detailed Finish Hardware Schedule.
1. The submitted Finish Hardware Schedule shall indicate the complete designation of every item
required for each door or opening.
2. Furnish cover sheet listing title of project as shown on the Contract Documents, name, address,
phone and fax numbers of Owner, Architect, Contractor, and Supplier, name of Certified
Hardware Consultant, and date of submittal.
3. List each opening individually under separate headings in the same order as the Door Schedule.
Do not continue individual headings on separate pages.
4. Each heading shall indicate opening location, handing, degree of opening, door size, type, fire
rating, and Door and Frame material.
2010 -16 / YCS - SOC
08 7100 - Page 1
DOOR HARDWARE
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Support Operations Center Phase 2
Yelm School District #2
Erickson McGovern
An index shall be included in the Finish Hardware submittals indicating door, page, and heading
numbers, and locking function of each opening
Indicate product Manufacturer and incorporate cross - reference to symbols used in Article 2.14
Hardware Groups.
A cross reference for any abbreviations or symbols used shall be included.
Schedules in coded or horizontal format are unacceptable.
Submittals not conforming to these requirements will be returned without review, for re- submittal.
Following is an example of the required format:
Sgl. Door #503A — Corridor 501 from Classroom 503 LHR 900
3 -0 x 7 -0 x 1 -3/4" x 20 Minute x Type B SC WD x HMF
3 Each Hinges MC TA2714 US26D (652) 4.5 x 4.5 x 1 /21VIS
1 Classroom Lockset CR ML2055 NSM 630 LHR x C6 x CT6
1 Door Closer NO PR7500 Alum /689 x STB
1 Kick Plate TI B4EKP — 10 x 34.5 — US32D x B4E x CTSK
1 Wall Stop TR 1270CX -SV 626 (US26D)
1 Set Gasket PE S88D — 17' per Set
D. Processing: Hardware schedules will not be reviewed by the Architect until they have been reviewed
and approved by Contractor. Resubmit only corrected copies of those sheets requiring correction and
update distributed copies with corrected sheets.
E. Modifications: The Finish Hardware Submittal shall be kept current throughout the project duration.
All revisions incorporated shall be submitted in accordance with the above requirements. Submit only
cover sheet and revised pages. All revisions shall clearly identify changes from previous submittal
content.
Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit one sample of each exposed hardware category,
finished as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with the hardware schedule.
Samples will be reviewed, by the Architect, for design and finish only, compliance with other
requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor. Units which are acceptable and remain
undamaged through submittal procedures may be used on the project.
G. Color Samples: Submit six sets of color charts and physical samples of each product requiring color
selection.
H. Operations and Maintenance Data.
1. Submit Maintenance and Operations Manuals under the provisions of Division 01 Section
"Closeout Submittals ".
2. Manuals shall be furnished in a clearly marked, tabbed, 3- ringed binder. Each Manual shall
contain:
Final "As Built" copy of the Finish Hardware Submittal
Product Data
Key Schedule
Parts lists and diagrams
Installation and maintenance instructions for Locksets, Exit Devices, and Door Closers
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier: Finish hardware shall be supplied by a recognized builders' hardware supplier who has been
furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not less than five years. They shall
be a factory direct, authorized distributor of the Exit Devices, Locksets and Door Closers. The
supplier's organization shall include an Architectural Hardware Consultant, certified by the Door and
Hardware Institute, who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work to meet with
2010 -16 / YCS - SOC 08 7100 - Page 2 DOOR HARDWARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Support Operations Center Phase 2
Yelm School District #2
Erickson McGovern
the Owner, Architect or Contractor for project hardware consultation. Provide certification of compliance
with these requirements prior to preparation of Finish Hardware Submittals
B. Approved Suppliers: The below listed suppliers are approved for use on this project. Alternative
suppliers must be pre- approved by procedure for "substitutions" described in Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements ". Other proposed suppliers must submit a resume of similar completed
projects for prior approval.
Benson Industries Tacoma, WA (253) 474 -5356
Builders Hardware & Supply Co. Inc. Seattle, WA (206) 281 -3700
Contract Hardware, Inc. Seattle, WA (206) 298 -4770
Evergreen Construction Specialties Auburn, WA (253) 395 -9933
Washington Architectural Hardware Co. Tacoma, WA (253) 471 -9150
C. Source: Obtain each kind of Hardware (Butts, Locksets, Exit Devices, Door Closers, etc.) from only
one manufacturer.
D. Installer: Finish hardware shall be installed only by experienced tradesmen in compliance with trade
union jurisdictions, either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project site.
E. Electronic Lock System: Provide for Exit Device Manufacturer's local Factory Representative to
consult and instruct General Contractor and Electrical sub - contractor in rough -in and installation
requirements for Electrified Exit Devices and Accessories. Include substantial completion inspection
and written acceptance of installation. Include two (2) separate visits, up to two hours each.
F. Templates: Furnish hardware templates for each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be
factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such
other work to confirm that provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware.
G. Regulatory Requirements:
1. All finish hardware shall comply with applicable local and state building codes.
2. Hardware for fire -rated openings shall also be in compliance with all fire building codes applicable
to the district in which the building is located. Provide only hardware which has been tested and
listed by "UL" for the types and sizes of doors required, and which complies with the
requirements of the door and door frame labels.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Packaging: Each item or package is to be separately tagged with identification related to the final
hardware schedule. Basic installation instructions shall be included in the packages.
B. Storage: Provide a locked room at the jobsite for the storage of the hardware.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Finish hardware shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and operation for a period of
one year, backed by a factory guarantee of the hardware manufacturer. The following products shall
be guaranteed for periods beyond one Year:
1. Lockset and Latchsets: Two Years
2. Door Closers: Ten Years
3. Panic Devices: Three Years
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish the following extra materials, which shall be delivered directly to the Owner prior to
substantial completion.
2010 -16 / YCS - SOC 08 7100 - Page 3 DOOR HARDWARE
Support Operations Center Phase 2
Yelm School District #2
Erickson McGovern
1. Provide one Set of Special Tools required for Installation and Adjustment
2. Extra Hardware:
Quantity
Description
Factory Number
One
Locksets
M L2055
One
Door Closers
PR7500
Two
Floor Stops
1215CKU
8 PART 2 — PRODUCTS
9
10 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND ACCEPTABLE SUBSTITUTIONS
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
2.E Products may be furnished by the
products of type, grade, design,
Substitutions ". Requests for products
"Product Requirements ".
Product
Butt Hinges
Locksets
Cylinders
Door Closers
Exit Devices
Kick & Mop Plates
Wall and Floor Stops
Overhead Stop and Holders
Weatherstrip & Thresholds
manufacturers listed under "As Specified" below, or equivalent
and function, from manufacturers listed under "Acceptable
not listed must be made in accordance with Division 01 Section
As Specified
McKinney (MC)
Corbin /Russwin (CR)
Corbin /Russwin (CR)
Norton 7500 Series (NO)
Corbin /Russwin
Tice Industries (TI)
Trimco JR)
Glynn Johnson (GJ)
Pemko (PE)
2.2 HARDWARE MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
Acceptable Substitutions
Bommer, Hager
None
None
None
None
Rockwood, Trimco
Rockwood
Rixson, ABH
National Guard, Reese
A. Fasteners: Provide fasteners for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips head
fasteners, countersunk oval, flat head, or undercut head per the manufacturer's templates and as
appropriate for material to be installed. Provide Door Closers and Exit Devices applied to wood
composite or mineral core doors with Sex Bolts sized to the thickness of the door.
B
2.3.
A
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49 2.4
50
Compatibility: Provide fasteners which are compatible with both unit fastened and substrate, and
which will not cause corrosion or deterioration of hardware, base material, or fastener.
FINISHES
Finish in general shall be: US26D Satin Chrome Plates (BHMA 626), except:
1. Locksets, Exit Devices, Push Plates, Door Pulls, Overhead Stops, Kick and Mop Plates, and
Exterior Butts: US32D, Satin Stainless Steel (BHMA 630).
2. Interior Hinges: US26D, Satin Chrome over Steel Base (BHMA 652).
3. Removable Mullions: Painted Aluminum (BHMA 689).
4. Door Closers: Painted Aluminum (BHMA 689).
5. Smoke Gasketing: As Selected.
6. Threshold, Weatherstrip & Door Bottoms: As listed
BUTT HINGES:
51 A. Quantity (per Leaf):
52 1. Door openings up to 60 ": 2 each.
53 2. Door openings 60 to 90 ": 3 each.
54 3. Doors over 90 ": Furnish one additional for each 30" increment or fraction thereof.
55
2010 -16 / YCS - SOC 08 7100 - Page 4 DOOR HARDWARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Support Operations Center Phase 2
Yelm School District #2
Erickson McGovern
B. Sizes:
1. 1 -3/4" Exterior & Vestibule Doors: 5 x 4 -1/2"
2. 1 -3/4" Interior Doors up to and including 36 ": 4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2"
3. 1 -3/4" Interior Doors over 36" — 5 x 4 -1/2"
C. Width of Hinges shall be as required to clear projecting trim or other conditions to allow maximum
degree of opening.
D. All hinges shall have non - removable pins (NRP — Set Screw in Barrel)
E. Hinges shall have Flat Button Tips.
F. For unusual size or weight doors, furnish type, size and quantity recommended by the hinge
manufacturer.
2.5. LOCKSETS AND CYLINDERS
A. Lever and Rose Design: NSR
B. Backset:2 -3/4"
C. Cylinders:
1. Furnish all Locksets and Cylinders with Key Removable Interchangeable Cores.
2. Provide appropriate cylinder type, length, collars, and cam type to operate specified Locksets and
Exit Devices.
D. All Locksets and Latchsets shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for A label and lesser class
doors.
E. Provide Curved Lip Strikes with adequate projection to protect door trim. Provide flat, flush lip strikes
for pairs of doors with overlapping Astragals.
F. Provide manufacturers standard wrought or plastic strike boxes.
2.6. PANIC DEVICES AND FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
A. Furnish Sex Nuts and Bolts for wood composite and mineral core door applications.
B. Rated Openings: Provide UL listed Fire Exit Devices at rated openings.
C. Sizes: Provide Exit Devices sized in accordance with the manufacturer manufacturers
recommendations.
D. Removable Mullions: Furnish Angle Brackets and Spacer Blocks for installation in narrow stop
frames
E. Vision Frames: Provide Glass Bead Kits where interference with vision frames occurs.
F. Lever Trim: Exit Device Lever Trim shall match design specified under Article 2.5.
2.7 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Furnish drop plates where doors have insufficient height top rails, or where Regular Arm Door
Closers are used in conjunction with Concealed Overhead Stops.
B. Furnish cold weather fluid, at exterior & vestibule doors.
2010 -16 / YCS - SOC 08 7100 - Page 5 DOOR HARDWARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Support Operations Center Phase 2
Yelm School District #2
Erickson McGovern
C. Furnish non - flammable hydraulic fluid at fire rated openings in conformance with UL Test Standard
10C.
D. Provide special closer mounting as required where interference with weatherstrip or sound seals
occurs.
E. Spacer Blocks: Furnish Spacer Blocks and /or shoe supports where frame stop does not provide for
adequate support for the parallel arm soffit shoe.
F. Furnish Shoulder Through Bolts for wood composite and mineral core door applications.
2.8 KICK, MOP, AND ARMOR PLATES
A. Kick Plates shall be applied to the Push Side of the Door, Mop Plate applied to the Pull Side.
B. Height: Kick Plates 10 ", Mop Plates 6 ", Armor Plates 34 ".
C. Provide stainless steel Phillips oval /undercut head, full tread type sheet meal screws for fastening not
more than 5 inches on center.
D. Plates shall be .050 Stainless Steel, beveled four edges (B4E) with satin finish.
E. All plates shall be furnished with width as required to provide '/4" clearance at sides of doors frame
stops, Mullions, Astragals, or Stop and Mullion applied seals.
2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders sized as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders with special shims, brackets, or special template mounting
where required.
C. Coordinate Voltage location requirements for Magnetic Holders with Electrical Contractor.
D. Where wall stops are not applicable, furnish floor stops 1215CKU Series, or Overhead Stops if
required.
2.11 THRESHOLDS
A. Furnish Thresholds with FHSL14200, '/4 -20 x 2" Phillips Flat Head Sleeve Anchors.
2.10 WEATHERSTRIP AND GASKETING
A. Furnish weatherstrip and gaskets for complete perimeter of opening, including mullions, and
astragals.
B. Provide Rain Drips full frame width including frame faces.
2.11 DOOR SILENCERS
A. Furnish Rubber Door Silencers for all openings not specified to have Smoke Gasketing or
Weatherstrip.
B. Quantity: Furnish three for each single door frame, and four for each pair of door frames.
C. Type:1229A.
2010 -16 / YCS - SOC 08 7100 - Page 6 DOOR HARDWARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Support Operations Center Phase 2
Yelm School District #2
Erickson McGovern
2.12 KEYING
A. All Locksets and Cylinders specified under this Section shall be keyed to the existing Russwin Grand
Master Key System for the Yelm School District.
B. Provide Brass Construction Cores and Keys for all interchangeable core type cylinders during the
construction period. Plastic Construction Cores are unacceptable
C. The Finish Hardware Supplier shall meet with the Owner to prepare the permanent keying schedule.
Submit for approval in accordance with paragraph 1.4 F.
D. The Permanent Cores, Change Keys, Master Keys, and Control Keys, prepared according to the
approved keying schedule, shall be transmitted directly from the manufacturer to the Owner, prior to
substantial completion. The General Contractor shall remove the construction cores and install the
permanent cores. All construction cores shall be returned to the Finish Hardware Supplier.
E. All Permanent Cores and Keys shall be sent direct from the lock manufacturer via Registered Mail,
Return Receipt Requested.
F. Provide a key transcript list of all cylinders, including 25% additional change combinations.
G. Stamp all Keys "Do not Duplicate" and with change designation as directed.
H. Furnish:
1. Six Building Grand Master Keys
2. Six Master Keys per Set
3. Four change keys per Lockset or Cylinder.
4. Six Construction Keys
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Not Used
2.14 HARDWARE GROUPS
HW -1
Doors # 001, 005
3 Each Hinges
MC
T4A3386
1 Classroom Lockset
CR
ML2042
1 Lock Astragal
TR
5000T
1 Door Closer
NO
PR7500 x 9623JWG
1 Overhead Stop
GJ
100S Series
1 Kick Plate
TI
B4EKP
1 Threshold
PE
172A
1 Set Weatherstrip
PE
2891AS (Head) x 290AS (Jambs)
1 Door Sweep
PE
315CN
HW -2
Door #006A
3 Each Hinges MC TA2714
1 Classroom Lockset CR ML2055
2010 -16 / YCS - SOC 08 7100 - Page 7
DOOR HARDWARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Support Operations Center Phase 2
Yelm School District #2
Erickson McGovern
1 Door Closer
1 Kick Plate
3 Silencers
HW -3
Doors # 002, 003, 004
NO UN17500
TI B4EKP
3 Each Hinges
MC
TA2714
1 Office Lockset
CR
ML2053
1 Wall Stop
TR
1270CX
1 Set Gasket
PE
S88D
HW -9
TI
B4EKP
ATZ'
Door #006
3 Each Hinges
MC
TA2714
1 Privacy Lock
CR
ML2060 x NSA x M 19V
1 Door Closer
NO
7500 -RA
1 Wall Stop
TR
1270CX
1 Kick Plate
TI
B4EKP
1 Mop Plate
TI
B4EMP
3 Silencers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine Doors, Frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of
the Finish Hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.
B. Provide solid blocking for wall mounted components.
C. Fasteners: Check all conditions and use fastening devices as needed to securely anchor all
hardware as per manufacturer's published templates. Self- tapping sheet metal screws are not
acceptable. All Door Closers, Exit Devices, and Surface Mounted Overhead Stops on wood doors
shall be through bolted.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount units at heights as recommended in "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (2001)" by Doors and Hardware
Institute, except as indicated below. Products not specifically covered shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's templates and instructions.
1. Hinges:
a. Top Hinge: 7 -1/4 ", Top of frame rabbet to centerline of hinge.
b. Bottom Hinge: 12 -1/4 ", Bottom of Frame to centerline of hinge
c. Intermediate Hinges: Centered, equal spacing between top and bottom hinges.
2. Lock Strikes: 40 ", bottom of frame to centerline of Strike.
3. Deadlocks at 48 ", Bottom of Frame to centerline of Cylinder.
4. Push and Pull Plates: 42 ", bottom of Frame to centerline of Plate.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
2010 -16 / YCS - SOC
08 7100 - Page 8
DOOR HARDWARE
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
C.
35 3.3
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Support Operations Center Phase 2
Yelm School District #2
Erickson McGovern
1. Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware surfaces which will be painted or
finished at a later time, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place.
After completion of the finishes, re- install each item.
2. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
3. Install Fire Rated openings to comply with NFPA 80.
4. Door shall swing to the maximum degree that project conditions will allow. The swings indicated
on the floor plan are intended to depict direction and do not indicate full degree of opening.
5. Trim Exit Devices to provide 1 -1/2" clearance between End Cap and hinge jamb stop face and
where applicable, stop applied weatherstrip.
6. Door Closers shall be located to allow maximum degree of opening that project conditions will
allow. Door Closers shall not be used to stop the door, except for models equipped with an
integral stop -on- the -arm feature.
7. Locate Overhead Stop and Holders with maximum degree of opening that project conditions will
allow.
8. Locate Floors Stops at maximum degree of opening that project conditions will allow. Do not
locate Floor Stops where they create a hazardous condition. Stops shall be located no more than
1/3 Door width from the latch edge of the Door.
9. Set all Exterior Thresholds in a bed of butyl rubber sealant. Remove excess sealant. Caulk edges
and joints to exclude moisture. Fasten Gym Floor Threshold to the concrete side of the transition
only.
10. Mount and Adjust Rigid Jamb Weatherstrip prior to mounting Parallel Arm Door Closers.
Weatherstrip shall be installed to provide a continuous seal at head and jambs. Do not notch
Weatherstrip for Door Closer shoe. Provide Parallel Arm 5th hole spacer of increased thickness
to allow for revised location.
11. Mount Astragals on the pull side of active leaf our out - swinging applications, inactive leaf for in-
swinging.
12. Smoke Gasket
a. Completely clean frame and apply gasket in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b. Mount Gasket to stop face of Strike Jambs and Headers, Door Rabbet of Hinge Jamb. If the
Gasket is required to be mounted on the door rabbet of the Strike Jambs due to fire labeling
requirements, provide Silencers.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to insure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
FINAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one (1) month prior to
acceptance or occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items during the week
prior to acceptance or occupancy. Clean and lubricate operating items as necessary to restore
proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Door Closer Adjustment: After mechanical systems have been balanced, adjust Door Closers to
comply with following ICC /ANSI A117.1 requirements.
1. Closing Speed: With the door open 70 degrees, the door closer shall be adjusted so that the
door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to a point where the leading edge of the door is
three inches from latching.
2. Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling a door open shall be as follows:
(these forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices
securing the door).
a. Fire Doors: The minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative
authority.
b. Exterior Doors: 10.0 Ibf.
c. Interior Doors: 5.0 Ibf.
2010 -16 / YCS - SOC
08 7100 - Page 9
DOOR HARDWARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C
Support Operations Center Phase 2
Yelm School District #2
Erickson McGovern
Door Closer Backcheck. Adjust Door Closer back check to provide protection for adjacent walls,
stops, and magnetic holders.
Instruction: Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and
hardware finishes
2010 -16 / YCS - SOC
END OF SECTION
08 7100 - Page 10
DOOR HARDWARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass.
B. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1. Doors.
2. Glazed entrances.
3. Interior relites.
4. Display case accessories.
C. Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back -up material.
B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites.
C. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors.
D. Section 08 5313 - Vinyl Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
C. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011 e1.
D. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat - Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;
2012.
E. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009e1.
F. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
G. ASTM C 1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid
Applied Sealants; 2002 (Reapproved 2007).
H. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010.
I. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced
Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials; 2010.
J. ASTM E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;
2010.
K. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
L. IBC - International Building Code; current addition.
1. Chapter 24 - all sections.
a. And specific - Section 2406.
M. NFRC - RC -31 (The National Fenestration Rating Council); current addition.
1. NFRC 100 -2010; Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U- factors.
2. NFRC 400 -2010; Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Air Leakage.
N. SIGMA TM -3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed Insulating
Glass Manufacturers Association; 2004.
O. Washington State Energy Code 2012 edition; Chapter 51 -11 WAC.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 088000-1 GLAZING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.04 DEFINITIONS
2
A.
Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both,
3
as defined in referenced glazing publications.
4
B.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
5
specified gas.
6
C.
Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
7
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
8
maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects
9
include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
10
D.
Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to
11
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
12
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
13
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
14
glass.
15
E.
Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
16
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
17
maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
18
Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and
19
blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard.
20
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
21
A.
General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
22
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
23
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
24
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other
25
defects in construction.
26
B.
Energy Requirements:
27
1. All glazing shall meet the Washington State Energy Code.
28
2. U- Values shall comply with NFRC 100 -2010; Procedure for Determining Fenestration
29
Product U- factors.
30
3. Air leakage shall comply with NFRC 400 -2010; Procedure for Determining Fenestration
31
Product Air Leakage.
32 C. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
33 Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass
34 lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than
35 thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat - treated) required to meet or exceed the
36 following criteria:
37 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
38 according to the following requirements:
39 a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic
40 wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above
41 grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
42 Structures ": Section 6.5, "Method 2- Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof
43 heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
44 1.06 SUBMITTALS
45 A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
46 B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
47 size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
48 C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
49 characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 088000-2 GLAZING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch (304 x 304 mm) in size of glass and plastic units,
2 showing coloration and design.
3 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
4 A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA
5 TM -3000 Glazing Guidelines, and GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual for glazing
6 installation methods.
7 B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
8 minimum three years documented experience.
9 1. An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent
10 to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a
11 record of successful in- service performance; and who employs glass installers for this
12 Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification
13 Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
14 C. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter- Coated with Solar - Control Low -E Coatings: Where
15 solar - control low -e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified
16 fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter- coated solar - control low -e coated glass in
17 fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated glass manufacturer.
18 1. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
19 a. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently
20 marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another
21 certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
22 b. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in
23 Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) in exposed surface
24 area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials; for
25 lites 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m) or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing
26 products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations
27 where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of
28 authorities having jurisdiction.
29 c. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing
30 Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more
31 stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of
32 glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced
33 standards.
34 2. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
35 manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
36 Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in
37 referenced standards.
38 a. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide"
39 and GANA's "Glazing Manual."
40 b. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG -1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA
41 TIR -A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
42 c. SIGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "Glazing Guidelines for
43 Sealed Insulating Glass Units."
44 d. NFRC - RC -31 (The National Fenestration Rating Council); current addition.
45 e. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on
46 at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following
47 testing and inspecting agency:
48 1) Insulating Glass Certification Council.
49 2) Associated Laboratories, Inc.
50 f. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance
51 and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator
52 for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass
53 obtained from a single source for each type and class required.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 088000-3 GLAZING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
2 A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
3 prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
4 exposure to sun, or other causes.
5 B. For insulating -glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with
6 insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid
7 hermetic seal ruptures.
8 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
9 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
10 temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
11 glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
12 B. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).
13 C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
14 compounds.
15 1.10 WARRANTY
16 A. See Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES, for additional warranty requirements.
17 B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal
18 failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
19 C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination,
20 including replacement of failed units.
21 PART 2 PRODUCTS
22 2.01 INSULATING GLASS UNITS
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
2.02 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. Zeledyne: www.versaluxglass.com.
2. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc - flatglass.com.
3. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com /na.
4. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com.
B. Float Glass: Provide float glass glazing unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2. Heat - Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048.
3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind
load design regardless of specified thickness.
C. Clear Float Glass: Clear, annealed.
1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2. Comply with ASTM C 1048.
3. 6 mm minimum thick.
D. Safety Glass: Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering (see special condition glazing
above).
1. Laminated Glass:
a. Laminated with 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick plastic interlayer; comply with ASTM C
1172
2. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select) and ASTM C 1048.
3. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
[II:r:1IIIII11KA I
GLAZING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
4.
Comply with all requirements in IBC - Section 2406.
2
5.
Where glazing is to be installed in fire -rated partition, provide glazing that is also
3
fire - protection rated in accordance with applicable code.
4
6.
3/16 inch minimum thickness.
5
7.
Provide this type of glazing in the locations required by code.
6
a. Glazed lites in doors except fire doors.
7
b. Shower and bathtub enclosures and doors.
8
c. Glazed sidelights to doors.
9
d. Glazed view windows and panels in partitions enclosing athletic activity rooms.
10
e. Glazed sidelites to doors (within 24" and where bottom exposed edge of glazing is
11
less than 60" above the floor).
12
f. Glazing in fixed or operable panel where glazing area is greater than 9 sf, glazing is
13
less than 18" above the floor, top edge of glazing is greater than 36" above the floor
14
and the walking surface is within 36" horizontally of the glazing.
15
g. Glazing adjacent to stairways. Landings and ramps within 36" horizontally of a
16
walking surface when the exposed surface of the glass is less than 60" above the
17
walking surface.
18
h. Glazing adjacent to stairways. Landings and ramps within 60" horizontally of bottom
19
tread of a stairway when the exposed surface of the glass is less than 60" above the
20
nose of the tread.
21
E. Glazing: Fully tempered ASTM C 1048 Kind FT, Quality q3.
22
1.
Laminated Tempered Thickness: 9/16 inch (13.52 mm).
23
2.
Color: Clear.
24
3.
Interlayer - IONOPLAST
25
a. Basis of Design: DuPont TM SentryGlas@ interlayer manufactured by DuPont Glass
26
Laminating Solutions, www.sentryglas.com <http: / /www.sentryglas.com >.
27
b. Thickness: [1.52mm]
28
c. Color: Clear
29
d. Interlayer Physical Properties:
30
1) Young's Modulus: 43 kpsi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D5026
31
2) Tensile Strength: 5.0 kpsi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638.
32
3) Elongation: 400 %, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638
33
4) Flex Modulus: 50 kpsi, when tested in accordance with D790.
34
5) Heat Deflection Temperature at 0.46 MPa: 110 deg F, when tested in
35
accordance with D648.
36
2.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
37
A. Manufacturers:
38
1.
Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass.
39
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
40
1.
Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
41
2.
Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
42
3.
Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
43
4.
Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
44
C. Insulated
Glass Units: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal.
45
D. System Type: Sungate 600 Low -E Glass (4th surface plus other low -e).
46
1.
Outer pane of PPG Solarban 60 glass, inner pane of PPG Sungate 600 glass.
47
2.
Place reflective coating on No.2 surface within the unit.
48
3.
Glazing: Provide manufacturers clear, sealed insulating units of 1" overall thickness that
49
complies with ASTM E- 774 -81 Class A, exterior glazed using a closed cell foam tape and
50
applied PVC glazing bead. Glass shall be 1/8" minimum. Actual thickness shall meet
51
performance requirements listed above.
52
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 088000-5 GLAZING
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
Shading
Winter
Summer
U -Value
EN 673
U -value:
0.23
0.21
1.3
Shading
0.41
Coefficient (SC):
Solar Heat Gain
0.36
(SHG):
Visible Reflectance
63%
4. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E 2190.
5. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
a. Provide hermetically sealed IG units with dehydrated airspace, dual sealed with a
primary seal of polyisobutylene (PIB), or thermo plastic spacer (TPS) and a
secondary seal of silicone or an organic sealant depending on the application.
6. Total unit thickness of 1 inch (25.4 mm) minimum.
E. Requirements:
1. Insulating glass units are certified per RC -31 through the NFRC - (The National
Fenestration Rating Council); current addition.
2. Annealed float glass shall comply with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Class 2
(tinted), Quality -Q3.
3. Heat - Strengthened float glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, Type I, Class 1 (clear),
Class 2 (tinted), Quality Q3, Kind HS.
4. Tempered float glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Class 2
(tinted), Quality Q3, Kind FT.
F. Edge Seal Construction: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
Q�XfZ WOIf_VA 10 [ Xd01611011J►1IR
23 A. Manufacturers:
24 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik - us.com.
25 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
26 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
27 4. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
28 B. Butyl Sealant, Type _: Single component; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12 -1/2, Uses M and
29 A, Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color.
30 C. Polyurethane Sealant, Type _: Single component, chemical curing, non - staining,
31 non - bleeding; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore
32 A hardness range of 20 to 35; color.
33 D. Silicone Sealant, Type _: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion
34 without loss of properties; non - bleeding, non - staining; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
35 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; color.
36 2.05 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
37 A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Length
38 of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch
39 (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing
40 method and pane weight and area.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 088000-6 GLAZING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
B.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.
2
Minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit
3
application, self adhesive on one face.
4
C.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15
5
B.
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
6
C.
1. Manufacturers:
7
a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
8
D.
b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
9
3.02 PREPARATION
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
10
D.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and
11
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
12
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
performance.
13
E.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire - Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to
14
Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
obtain fire - resistance rating.
15
F.
Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM
16
37
C864 Option II; color.
17
G.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
18
H.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
19 PART 3 EXECUTION
20 3.01 EXAMINATION
21
A.
Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
22
1. Presence and functioning of weep system.
23
2. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
24
3. Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members.
25
B.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
26
C.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
27
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
28
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
29
3.02 PREPARATION
30
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
31
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
32
C.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
33
D.
Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual.
34
E.
Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
35
3.03 GLAZING METHODS
36
A.
Glazing - General:
37
1. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
38
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including
39
those in referenced glazing publications.
40
2. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
41
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
42
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
43
3. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
44
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with
45
edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
46
performance and appearance.
47
4. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
48
preconstruction sealant substrate testing.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 088000-7 GLAZING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
5.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
2
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
3
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
4
6.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
5
7.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm)
6
as follows:
7
a. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of
8
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless
9
gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain
10
required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
11
b. Provide 1/8 inch (3.0 mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal
12
to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
13
thickness of tape.
14
8.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
15
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
16
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
17
9.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
18
B. Installation - Exterior Dry Method (Tape and Gasket Spline Glazing):
19
1.
General:
20
a. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed
21
edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
22
b. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not
23
stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
24
c. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to
25
jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads
26
and sills.
27
d. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
28
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
29
e. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
30
f. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant where required.
31
g. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by
32
inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against
33
faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward
34
centers of openings.
35
h. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
36
2.
Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and
37
sealing junctions with butyl sealant.
38
3.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch (152 mm) from
39
corners.
40
4.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain
41
full contact.
42
5.
Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous
43
contact.
44
6.
Trim protruding tape edge.
45
C. Installation - Interior Dry Method (Tape and Tape):
46
1.
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
47
above sight line.
48
2.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch (152 mm) from
49
corners.
50
3.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane
51
or unit.
52
4.
Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 088000-8 GLAZING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
5. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full
continuous contact.
6. Knife trim protruding tape.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
non - permanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged
from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
F. Remove labels after Work is complete.
G. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
1. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days
before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash
glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 088000-9 GLAZING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
A.
SECTION 09 2116
2
B.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3
PART 1
GENERAL
4
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
5
A.
Acoustic insulation.
6
B.
Gypsum wallboard.
7
26
1. Gypsum board screw - attached to wood framing and furring members.
8
C.
Joint treatment and accessories.
9
D.
Textured finish system.
10
29
1. Coordination with priming prior ( Section 09 9000) to texture application.
11
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
12
A.
Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.
13
B.
Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water- resistive barrier over sheathing.
14
C.
Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.
15
D.
Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings - (New Construction).
16
35
1. Coordinate primer coat to be provided by painting contractor, prior to texture application.
17
E.
Section 09 9005 - Paints and Coatings - (Existing Structures).
18
1. Coordinate primer coat to be provided by painting contractor, prior to texture application.
20
A.
ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.
21
B.
ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self- Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of
22
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.
23
C.
ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum
24
Veneer Base; 2014a.
25
D.
ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2013.
26
E.
ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014.
27
F.
GA -216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.
28
G.
GA -226 - Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces; Gypsum Association; 2008.
29
H.
GA -600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2012.
30
I.
ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012.
31
1.04 SUBMITTALS
32
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
33
B.
Samples: Submit two samples of predecorated gypsum board, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300
34
mm) in size, illustrating finish color and texture.
35
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
36
A.
Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA -600 for fire -rated
37
assemblies.
38
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and
39
finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
40
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
41
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and
42
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 092116-1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
2 weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes.
3 Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
4 C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or
5 otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
6 D. See Special Requirements below.
7 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
8
A.
Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for
9
application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board
10
manufacturer's recommendations.
11
B.
Minimum Room Temperatures: For non - adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing,
12
maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum
13
board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and
14
continuously thereafter until drying is complete.
15
C.
Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials.
16
Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials form drying too rapidly.
17
PART 2
PRODUCTS
18
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
19
A.
Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA -216.
20
2.02 BOARD MATERIALS
21
A.
Manufacturers - Gypsum -Based Board:
22
1. Georgia- Pacific Gypsum; : www.gpgypsum.com.
23
2. National Gypsum Company; : www.nationalgypsum.com.
24
3. USG Corporation; : www.usg.com.
25
4.
26
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
27
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: Paper -faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1 396/C 1 396M; sizes to
28
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
29
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
30
2. Thickness:
31
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
32
C.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
33
1. Regular Type:
34
a. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
35
b. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
36
c. Edges: Tapered.
37
D.
Water- Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; ends square cut.
38
1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas.
39
2. Core Type: Regular and Type X, as indicated.
40
a. Location: Tile backing for all locations except in shower rooms
41
1) Do not install over vapor retarder
42
b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
43
products or approved:
44
1) Densshield Tile Guard," G -P Gypsum
45
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
46
4. Edges: Tapered.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 092116-2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.01 EXAMINATION
3 A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
4 1. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal
5 frames, cast -in- anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with
6 requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
7 drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
8 been corrected.
9 B. Specific requirements:
10 1. All framing cavities shall be cleaned and vacuumed prior to closing, covering or filling.
11 2. Owner (Yelm Community Schools) shall inspect and approve all cavities prior to closing,
12 covering or filling.
13 3. Prior to the cover of any insulation, Owner (Yelm Community Schools) shall inspect and
14 approve the installation of the insulation.
15 4. Requirements for gypsum wallboard to be 3/8" above finished concrete slab will be
16 reviewed.
17 3.02 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
18 A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
19 electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
20 B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
21 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing
22 members.
23 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
24 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION
25 A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA -216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end
26 joints, especially in highly visible locations.
27 1. Fastening Method:
28 a. GWB Fastening: The fastening method of the gypsum wallboard shall be exclusively
29 by screws. When rated or non -rated systems are indicated in the specifications or on
30 the drawings, and they may refer to nailing, the following shall rule:
31 1) Screws meeting ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954 shall be permitted to be
32 substituted for prescribed nails. One for one, when the head diameter, length
33 and spacing of the screws equal or exceed the requirements for the nails used
34 in the tested system.
35 2) Partitions (Per International Building Code - IBC.)
36 3) Non -Rated Non -Load Bearing Partition, Single Ply: One layer 5/8" Type X
37 gypsum wallboard applied either vertically or horizontally to each side of studs
38 spaced at 24 inches maximum.
39 4) 1 -1/4" Type W screws spaced at 12 inches o.c. (maximum).
40 2. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and
41 stagger all vertical and horizontal joints not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of
42 board and opposite sides of wall.
43 3. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of
44 end -butt joints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger
45 end joints at least 24 inches.
46 4. Install wall /partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints or
47 avoids them entirely where possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards
48 horizontally with end joints staggered over studs.
49 5. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or
50 damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more
51 than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 092116-3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 6. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where
2 intermediate supports or gypsum board back - blocking is provided behind end joints.
3 Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut
4 or field -cut ends against mill -cut or field -cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut
5 edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
6 7. Apply gypsum board to wall framing leaving a gap of no less than 1/4" or more than 3/8"
7 between floor surface and bottom edge of GWB. If framing /flooring conditions create voids
8 greater than 3/8 ", mud in excess space flush with face of gypsum board, while complying
9 with listed clearances.
10 8. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional
11 support at openings and cutouts.
12 9. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges
13 of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.
14 10. Isolate perimeter of non -load bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide
15 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical
16 sealant.
17 11. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer,
18 install gypsum board over wood framing, with "floating" internal corner construction.
19 12. Where sound rated drywall construction is indicated, seal construction at perimeters,
20 control and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of
21 acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919
22 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off
23 sound - flanking paths around or through construction, including sealing of partitions above
24 acoustical ceilings.
25 13. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board
26 application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
27 B. Water Resistant Backing Board Installation And Finish:
28 1. Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin -set ceramic tile, plastic laminate wainscot,
29 and similar rigid applied wall finishes, install water - resistant gypsum backing board.
30 a. At "wet" areas (not including showers) install water - resistant backing board. Apply
31 with un -cut long edge at bottom of work. Seal ends, cut - edges, penetrations and
32 fastener heads of each piece with water - resistant adhesive or, where recommended
33 by backing board manufacturer, with water - resistant joint compound. Fill tapered
34 edges in gypsum panels with water - resistant joint compound, embed joint tape firmly
35 and wipe off excess compound; follow immediately with a second coat of
36 water - resistant joint compound over taping coat, being careful not to crown the joint.
37 Fold and embed tape in all interior angles to form true angles.
38 b. In areas not to be tiled, treat fastener heads and embed tape as indicated above
39 using water - resistant joint compound but finish with 2 coats of joint compound used
40 for regular gypsum board work.
41 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL JOINTS, TRIM, AND ACCESSORIES
42 A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.
43 1. Install control joints at locations indicated,
44 2. If not indicated, install control joints at not to exceed 30' -0" (as recommended by the N.W.
45 Wall and Ceiling Bureau), and approved by the Architect for visual effect.
46 B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
47 3.05 JOINT TREATMENT
48 A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready -mixed vinyl -based joint
49 compound and finished with ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound.
50 B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
51 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise
52 indicated.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 092116-4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the
2 completed construction.
3 C. Finish all gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 Level 4.
4 1. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim,
5 control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to
6 prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
7 2. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting -type joint
8 compound.
9 3. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish as
10 presented by
11 4. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau, Seattle, WA Phone 1 -206 / 524 -4243.
12 a. Level 1 (Fire- taping for plenum areas above ceilings, in attics, in areas where the
13 assembly would generally be concealed): All joints and interior angles shall have tape
14 set in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tape and
15 fastener heads need not be covered with joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are
16 acceptable.
17 b. Level 2 (For ceramic tile, acoustic tile, and plastic laminate wainscot backing board):
18 All joints, interior angles, and accessories, shall have tape embedded in joint
19 compound. Wipe off the excess leaving a thin coat of joint compound over the tape of
20 all joints, angles, and accessories. Cover fastener heads with one coat of joint
21 compound and wipe off the excess. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound.
22 Tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
23 1) Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels
24 specified:
25 (a) Embedding and First Coat: Light weight setting compound.
26 5. Level 4 (For all locations unless noted otherwise): All joints and interior angles shall have
27 tape embedded in joint compound and three separate coats of joint compound applied
28 over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between
29 coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready
30 for decoration. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
31 6. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready
32 to receive finishes.
33 a. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
34 b. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels
35 specified:
36 1) Embedding and First Coat: Ready- mixed, drying -type, taping compound.
37 2) Fill (Second) Coat: Ready- mixed, drying -type, topping compound.
38 3) Finish (Third) Coat: Ready- mixed, drying -type, topping compound.
39 c. Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall construction
40 which is indicated for drywall finishing or which requires finishing to achieve
41 fire - resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier.
42 7. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by
43 manufacturer.
44 3.06 TEXTURE FINISH
45 A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's
46 instructions and to match approved sample.
47 1. Sprayed -On Texture Finish (Requires Level 4 GWB Finish):
48 a. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare drywall and other surfaces in strict
49 accordance with texture finish manufacturer's instructions. All surfaces to be textured
50 shall be primer painted both prior to and after the texture application. Coordinate with
51 Section 09 9000 for primer application.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 092116-5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1) Gypsum Board Assemblies (drywall) contractor to coordinate and permit time for
2 Paints and Coating (painting) contractor to apply primer finish prior to texture
3 application.
4 b. Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surfaces indicated to
5 receive finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a
6 uniform texture matching Architect's sample without starved spots or other evidence
7 of thin application, and free of application patterns. If locations have not been
8 indicated, provide texture to all gypsum wallboard walls and ceiling unless otherwise
9 indicated.
10 c. Provide texture as approved by Architect from approved sample.
11 d. Remove any texture droppings or over spray from door frames, windows and other
12 adjoining construction.
13 3.07 PROTECTION
14 A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which
15 ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of
16 Substantial Completion.
17 3.08 TOLERANCES
18 A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
19 (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction.
20 END OF SECTION
21
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 092116-6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 09 5100
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B. Acoustical units.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant.
1.03 REFERENCES - (REFERENCE STANDARDS)
A. 2012 IBC (International Building Code).
B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7 -05).
C. ASTM A 641 M - Standard Specification for Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
(Metric); 1991.
D. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.
E. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems
for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels; 2013.
F. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2014.
G. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014.
H. Northwest Wall And Ceiling Bureau (NWCB).
1. Field Technical Information - Bulletin 401, Suspension Systems for Acoustical Lay -in
Ceilings; Current Edition.
a. Application recommendations for work at the wall or ceiling.
I. Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA).
1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced sources per hierarchy: 2012 IBC (International Building Code), American Society of
Testing Materials (ASTM C 635, ASTM C 636, ASTM E580 /E 580M), American Society of Civil
Engineers (ASCE 7 -05), and Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA).
B. Partitions that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be
laterally braced to the structure. Bracing shall be independent of the ceiling splay bracing
system.
C. For further information on bracing of non -load bearing partitions, refer to NWCB technical
document #200 -501.
D. All main beams are to be Heavy Duty (HD).
E. All cross tees shall be capable of carrying the design load without exceeding deflection equal to
1/360 of its span.
F. These recommendations are intended for suspended ceilings including grid, panel or tile, light
fixtures and air terminals weighing no more than 4 lbs. per square foot.
G. All wire ties are to be three tight turns around itself within three inches. Twelve gage hanger
wire spaced 4 foot on center.
H. Changes in ceiling planes will require positive bracing.
I. Lateral Force Bracing:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 095100-1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
1.
Ceilings constructed of lath and plaster or gypsum board, screw or nail attached to
2
suspended members that support a ceiling on one level extending from wall to wall shall
3
be exempt from the lateral force bracing requirements.
4
2.
Lateral force bracing is the use of vertical struts (compression posts) and splay wires.
5
3.
Lateral force bracing is required for ceilings over 1,000 square feet and not required for
6
ceilings less than 1,000 square feet provided they are surrounded by four walls and
7
braced to structure.
8
4.
Lateral force bracing shall be 12 feet on center (maximum) and begin no farther than 6
9
feet from walls.
10
5.
Splay wires are to be four 12 gage wires attached to the main beam. Wires are arrayed 90
11
degrees from each other and at an angle not exceeding 45 degrees from the plane of the
12
ceiling.
13
6.
Seismic splay wires shall be attached to the grid and to the structure in such a manner
14
that they can support a design load of not less than 200 pounds or the actual design load,
15
with a safety of 2, whichever is greater.
16
7.
shot -in- anchors" (PAF's), when used for seismic application as part of the prescriptive
17
path in Seismic Design Categories D, E and F, shall have an ICC -ES approval for seismic
18
applications and shall require "special inspection" irrespective of the type of occupancy
19
category the structure is in. PAF anchors for kicker wires (splayed wires installed for
20
purposes other than seismic restraint) are exempt from this requirement.
21
8.
Splay wires are to be within 2 inches of the connection of the vertical strut to suspended
22
ceiling.
23
9.
Rigid bracing may be used in lieu of splay wires.
24
10.
Ceilings with plenums less than 12 inches to structure are not required to have lateral
25
force bracing.
26
11.
Vertical struts must be positively attached to the suspension systems and the structure
27
above.
28
12.
The vertical strut may be EMT conduit, metal studs or a proprietary compression post.
29
J. Wall
Moldings:
30
1.
Wall moldings (perimeter closure angles) are required to have a horizontal flange 2 inches
31
wide, unless alternate methods are approved prior to installation by the local building
32
department and the designer of record. One end of the ceiling grid shall be attached to the
33
wall molding, the other end shall have a 3/4 inch clearance from the wall and free to slide.
34
2.
Where substantiating documentation has been provided to the local jurisdiction, perimeter
35
clips may be used to satisfy the requirements for the 2 -inch closure angle.
36
3.
The grid shall be attached at two adjacent walls (pop rivets or approved method). Soffits
37
extending to a point at least level with the bottom plane of the grid and independently
38
supported and laterally braced to the structure above are deemed to be equivalent to
39
walls.
40
K. Spreader Bars:
41
1.
Spreader bars are not required at perimeters where runners are attached directly to
42
closure angles.
43
2.
Wire tying is an acceptable alternative to spreader bars.
44
3.
Spreader bars are not required if a 90 degree intersecting cross or main is within 8 inches
45
of the perimeter wall.
46
4.
47
L. Hanger (Suspension) Wires:
48
1.
Hanger and perimeter wires must be plumb within 1 in 6 unless counter sloping wires are
49
provided.
50
2.
Hanger wires shall be 12 gage and spaced 4 feet on center or 10 gage spaced 5 feet on
51
center.
52
3.
Any connection device at the supporting construction shall be capable of carrying not less
53
than 100 pounds.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 095100-2 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 4. Powder - driven shot -in anchors (PAFs) are an approved method of attachment for hanger
2 wires.
3 a. Powder driven fasteners must be approved for the appropriate loading.
4 5. Terminal ends of each main beam and cross tee must be supported within 8 inches of
5 each wall with a perimeter wire.
6 6. Wires shall not attach to or bend around interfering material or equipment. A trapeze or
7 equivalent device shall be used where obstructions preclude direct suspension. Trapeze
8 suspensions shall be a minimum of back -to- back' /4 inch cold - rolled channels for spans
9 exceeding 48 inches.
10 M. Electrical Fixtures:
11 1. Light fixtures weighing less than 10 pounds shall have one 12 gage hanger wire
12 connected from the fixture to the structure above. This wire may be slack.
13 2. Light fixtures weighing more than 10 pounds and less than 56 lbs. shall have two 12 gage
14 wires attached at opposing corners of the light fixture to the structure above. These wires
15 may be slack.
16 3. Light fixtures weighing more than 56 lbs. shall be supported directly from the structure
17 above. These wires must be taut.
18 4. Pendant mounted fixtures shall be directly supported from the structure above using a 9
19 gage wire or an approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension system
20 for direct support.
21 5. Tandem fixtures may utilize common wires.
22 N. Mechanical Services:
23 1. Terminals or services weighing 20 lbs. but not more than 56 lbs. must have two 12 gage
24 wires connecting them to the ceiling system hangers or the structure above. These wires
25 may be slack.
26 2. Terminals or services weighing more than 56 lbs. must be independently supported
27 directly from the structure above. These wires must be taut.
28 O. Seismic Separation Joints:
29 1. For ceiling areas exceeding 2,500 square feet, a seismic separation joint or full height will
30 partition that breaks the ceiling shall be provided unless analyses are performed of the
31 ceilings bracing system, closure angles and penetrations to provide sufficient clearance.
32 2. The layout and location of the seismic separation joint shall be per the designer of record
33 and noted on the plans. If a seismic separation joint is required by the designer, the
34 designer may use the genetic joint detailed in this document or a proprietary joint. The
35 amount of free movement (gap design) shall be a minimum of 3/ inch.
36 3. In lieu of seismic separation joints, the ceiling may be divided into areas less than 2500
37 square feet by the use of partitions or soffits as follows: partitions shall extend a minimum
38 of 6 inches above the level of the plane of the grid and shall be independently braced to
39 the structure above. Soffits shall extend to a point at least level with the bottom plane of
40 the grid and shall be independently supported and laterally braced to the structure above.
41 4. Other than partitions and soffits, seismic joints may not be used as part of a fire rated
42 ceiling assembly unless substantiating documentation is provided.
43 P. Sprinklers:
44 1. For ceilings without rigid bracing, sprinkler head penetrations shall have a 2 inch oversize
45 ring, sleeve or adapter through the ceiling tile to allow free movement of at least 1 inch in
46 all horizontal directions. Flexible head design that can accommodate 1 inch free
47 movement shall be permitted as an alternate.
48 1.05 SUBMITTALS
49 A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
50 B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 095100-3 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2 A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
3 products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
4 B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
5 products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.
6 1. Single- Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit
7 from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
8 appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
9 2. Single- Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension
10 system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
11 appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
12 C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and
13 suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported
14 by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire suppression system components (if
15 any), and partition system (if any).
16 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
17 A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in
18 a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct
19 sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
20 B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a
21 stabilized moisture content.
22 C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
23 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
24 A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 degrees C), and maximum
25 humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
26 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
27 A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,
28 sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is
29 completed, tested, and approved.
30 B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry.
31 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
32 A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
33 PART 2 PRODUCTS
34 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
35 A. Acoustical Units -General: ASTM E1264, Class A.
36 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E -400 (plenum mounting in which face of test
37 specimen is 15 3/4 inches [400 mm] away from the test surface) per ASTM E 795.
38 2. Colors and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated
39 under each product type.
40 3. Sound Attenuation Performance: Provide acoustical ceiling units with ratings for ceiling
41 sound transmission class CSTC of range indicated as determined according to AMA 1 -II
42 "Ceiling Sound Transmission Test by Two -Room Method" with ceilings continuous at
43 partitions and supported by a metal suspension system of type appropriate for ceiling unit
44 of configuration indicated (concealed for tile, exposed for panels).
45 B. Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following
46 characteristics:
47 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or
48 approved:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 095100-4 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 a. Armstrong, Cortega, #769 or approved equal.
2 b. Certainteed (Celotex), Baroque, BET -197.
3 c. U.S.G. Interiors, Radar, #2310.
4 2. Size: 24 x 48 inches (600 x 1200 mm).
5 3. Thickness: 5/8 inches (15 mm).
6 4. Composition: Wet felted.
7 5. Light Reflectance: 0.82 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264.
8 6. NRC: 0.55 minimum, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264.
9 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35 minimum, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264.
10 8. Edge: Square.
11 9. Surface Color: White.
12 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
13 A. Mar
14 1.
15 2.
16 3.
17 4.
18 5.
iufacturers:
Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
Chicago Metallic Corporation: www.chicagometallic.com.
USG: www.usg.com.
BPB Certainteed (Celotex) Metal
Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
19 B. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type : Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled;
20 heavy -duty.
21 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch (24 mm) wide face.
22 2. Construction: Double web.
23 3. Finish: White painted, unless noted.
24 a. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory applied finish for type
25 of system indicated. Color to match ceiling panel color selection.
26 4. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
27 Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.
28 5. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
29 2.03 ACCESSORIES
30 A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type as required to suit application,
31 seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
32 B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
33 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L- shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of
34 grid.
35 2. Wire for Hangers and Ties: As specified above in GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - ASTM A
36 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
37 a. Gauge: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C
38 635, Table 1, Direct - Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less
39 than 0.106 inch diameter (12 gauge).
40 b. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated
41 or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that
42 fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Angle of 1" x 2 ". Thickness
43 shall be.021 inches.
44 c. For lay -in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms
45 reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at
46 exposed suspension member.
47 d. For acoustical tile adhered to substrate, provide edge moldings at ceiling perimeters
48 and where indicated.
49 3. Attachment Devices: As specified above in GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - Size for 5
50 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise
51 indicated.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 095100-5 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 4. Edge Moldings and Trim: As specified above in GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - Metal or
2 extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's
3 standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type of edge detail and suspension
4 system indicated.
5 C. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Specified in Section 07 9005.
6 D. Touch -up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
7 PART 3 EXECUTION
8 3.01 EXAMINATION
9 A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
10 1. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with
11 Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that
12 affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until
13 unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
14 B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
15 3.02 PREPARATION
16
A.
Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
17
installation is specified in other sections.
18
1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance
19
of time needed for coordination of other work.
20
2. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border
21
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders,
22
and comply with reflected ceiling plans.
23
3.03 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
24
A.
General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and
25
REFERENCE STANDARDS specified above.
26
1. Comply with installation standard referenced below, per manufacturer's instructions and
27
CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
28
2. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and
29
manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.
30
B.
Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum
31
deflection of 1:360.
32
C.
Install after major above - ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
33
work.
34
D.
Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
35
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
36
E.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
37
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
38
F.
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load
39
to exceed deflection capability.
40
G.
Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches (150 mm) of each
41
corner, or support components independently.
42
H.
Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
43
I.
Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with
44
other interruptions.
45
1. Use longest practical lengths.
46
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
47
3.04 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
48
A.
Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2015 -19 /
YCS Ed Center TI 095100-6 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D. Install units after above - ceiling work is complete.
E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F. Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch -up of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
095100-7 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 09 6005
2 NEW FLOORING PREPARATION
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
5 A. Coordination for, and preparation of, concrete floor slabs to receive carpeting and other floor
6 coverings to be installed.
7 1. The Contractor shall provide concrete floor preparation of concrete floors as specified in
8 this section and as needed for a complete and proper preparation to receive subsequent
9 floor surfacing.
10 2. Floor preparation as specified in this Section is intended where conditions require the use
11 of mechanical abrading equipment or chemical removers as supplementary methods of
12 floor preparation to receive scheduled finish floor materials.
13 B. Etching and laitance remover.
14 C. Floor abrading work.
15 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
16 A. Section 02 4100 - Selective Demolition: Removal of existing concrete slabs.
17 B. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete floors.
18 C. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring: Sheet vinyl.
19 D. Section 09 6800 - Carpet: Carpet flooring.
20 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
21 A. General Contractor shall coordinate with Owner's separate flooring contractor for the delivery,
22 storage, and handling of the various finish flooring materials, installation materials and tools.
23 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
24 A. As estimated by supplier /installer, the length of time required for the removal, preparation, and
25 installation of finish flooring, base, and accessories, and the scheduling of the installation shall
26 be coordinated between the supplier /installer and the General Contractor and shall be included
27 in the General Contractor's schedule. Installation of the new flooring, base, and accessories
28 must be completed before the date of substantial completion.
29 PART 2 PRODUCTS
30 2.01 FLOOR PATCHING PRODUCTS
31 A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, Portland- cement -based
32 formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
33 1. Ardex - V900.
34 2. Raeco - R100.
35 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
36 B. Second floor and above: Cracks over 1/6" and all sawn control joints - Trowelable
37 Underlayments and Patching Compounds: 100% solids Epoxy -resin formulation provided or
38 approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
39 1. Ardex - EP 2000.
40 2. Raeco - Level Flex Underlayment.
41 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
42 2.02 FLOOR LEVELING PRODUCTS
43 A. Floor Leveling ( Underlayment): At areas required to meet flatness tolerances and to correct
44 defective surfaces provide self - leveling, Polymer Reinforced Underlayment product " Ardex
45 K -15" in quantities and layers of application necessary to achieve the level tolerance as
46 recommended by the flooring - product manufacturer.
47 1. Manufacturer: Ardex Engineered Cements, 400 Ardex Park Drive, Aliquippa PA 15001.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096005-1 NEW FLOORING PREPARATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. Additional Products:
2 a. Primer: Apply Ardex P -51 on new concrete.
3 2.03 ETCHING AND LAITANCE REMOVER
4 A. For floor surfaces scheduled to receive Resilient Flooring, furnish a 10% muriatic acid etching
5 and laitance remover solution, with supplementary rinsing and neutralizing agents, all as
6 specifically approved as a compatible product by the flooring product manufacturer.
7 2.04 FLOOR ABRADING WORK
8 A. If required in order to install the floor covering specified in the floor area subject to floor
9 abrading, provide floor abrading equipment designed to provide dry, dustless surface shot blast
10 abrading and utilizing an integral vacuum system, equal to abrading equipment as
11 manufactured by Wheelabrator Blastrac, Berlin NJ. All equipment, materials and methods shall
12 be in compliance with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
13 PART 3 EXECUTION
14 3.01 GENERAL
15 A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
16 provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work,
17 and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
18 B. The objective of subsurface preparation is to provide maximum chemical and mechanical bond
19 potential between the cured concrete subsurface and new cementitious floor underlayment.
20 C. The concrete must be made clean, dry, free of any oil, grease or other bond breaking
21 contamination.
22 D. The prepared concrete subsurface must be treated to provide an etched, porous, "toothy"
23 profile (substrate profile to be equal to #40 - #60 mesh graded sand or sandpaper); yet be
24 structurally and integrally sound.
25 3.02 PREPARATION
26 A. Voids: Fill large voids, cracks, depressions with trowel underlayment /patching compounds as
27 required to meet elevation of existing concrete slab. Follow manufacturer instructions for
28 preparation, mixing, and installation.
29 1. Preparation prior to installation of floor patching and leveling products:
30 a. The concrete floor slab shall be prepared so that the floor is smooth, flat and able to
31 receive specified floor finishes. Once the concrete floor slab is poured, it must be kept
32 clean, free of dust, dirt, paint, stains and tire marks - up until Punchlist.
33 2. All control joints, grooves, depressions, and surface cracks shall be filled with latex
34 patching or underlayment compound as recommended by the resilient flooring
35 manufacturer. Patching compound or underlayment shall be moisture -, mildew -, and
36 alkali- resistant.
37 3.03 INSTALLATION
38 A. Concrete slabs shall be prepared by the General Contractor by steel troweling to a smooth
39 surface free of ridges, waves and irregularities and shall be flat to within '/4 inch in a 10 foot
40 radius.
41 B. Slab Moisture Content: Because the adhesives used to install the scheduled floor coverings
42 over the concrete floor slabs is sensitive to elevated moisture vapor emission and pH levels, the
43 contractor shall as soon as possible, take the actions necessary to bring these slabs into the
44 acceptable levels, thereby avoiding unnecessary delays in the installation of the floor finishes.
45 1. Contractor shall perform moisture tests in accordance with ASTM F -1869. Perform three
46 (3) test locations for areas up to 1,000 square feet and add a test location for each
47 additional 1,000 square feet. Test to be placed no closer than five (5) feet from the nearest
48 wall. Test to be in place for 60 -72 hours. Testing to be done by a certified testing agency.
49 Test results to be forwarded to the Owner and Architect prior to installing floor leveling
50 underlayment or any floor covering.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096005-2 NEW FLOORING PREPARATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. All concrete slabs shall meet the following minimal requirements:
2 1. Moisture Vapor Rate: The allowable amount of moisture vapor emission from the concrete
3 slab substrate shall be acceptable up to, but not exceeding, 5 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft. per
4 24 hours.
5 2. Alkali (pH) Factor: The maximum allowable pH reading shall be in the range of 7.0 to 9.0
6 as required by the manufacturer of the flooring adhesive.
7 3. Readings which exceed either of the above listed test values shall become the
8 responsibility of the General Contractor who shall take corrective actions, i.e. additional
9 heat, dehumidification, acid wash, etc. to bring the slab into the acceptable level. This
10 action shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner.
11 3.04 FINAL CLEANING
12 A. Thoroughly rinse with clean water. Repeat this procedure as required to remove contamination
13 and all residue. Remove rinse water by forcing to appropriate drains or by power vacuum. Allow
14 to dry.
15 END OF SECTION
16
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096005-3 NEW FLOORING PREPARATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 09 6010
2 EXISTING FLOORING PREPARATION
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
5 A. As indicated in the Division 2 Section - Selective Demolition, the General Contractor shall
6 remove all existing finish flooring materials where new materials are scheduled to be installed.
7 General Contractor shall repair all damages incurred to the subfloors during the removal
8 process and all pre- existing damaged and deficient subfloor surfaces. All subfloor preparations
9 and repairs shall provide a clean surface free of any surface materials, oil, etc. that would
10 prohibit the adhesion of the new cementitious floor underlayment.
11 B. Coordination for, and preparation of, concrete floor slabs to receive carpeting and other floor
12 coverings to be installed.
13 1. The Contractor shall provide concrete floor preparation of concrete floors as specified in
14 this section and as needed for a complete and proper preparation to receive subsequent
15 floor surfacing.
16 2. Floor preparation as specified in this Section is intended where conditions require the use
17 of mechanical abrading equipment or chemical removers as supplementary methods of
18 floor preparation to receive scheduled finish floor materials.
19 C. Heavy duty floor cleaning.
20 D. Etching and laitance remover.
21 E. Floor abrading work.
22 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
23 A. Section 02 4100 - Selective Demolition: Removal of existing concrete slabs.
24 B. Section 03 5400 - Self- Leveling Underlayment: Leveling for concrete floors.
25 C. Section 09 6500 - Sheet Vinyl Flooring: Sheet vinyl and safety flooring.
26 D. Section 09 6800 - Carpet: Carpet flooring.
27 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
28 A. General Contractor shall coordinate with Owner's separate flooring contractor for the delivery,
29 storage, and handling of the various finish flooring materials, installation materials and tools.
30 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
31 A. As estimated by supplier /installer, the length of time required for the removal, preparation, and
32 installation of finish flooring, base, and accessories, and the scheduling of the installation shall
33 be coordinated between the supplier /installer and the General Contractor and shall be included
34 in the General Contractor's schedule. Installation of the new flooring, base, and accessories
35 must be completed before the date of substantial completion.
36 PART 2 PRODUCTS
37 2.01 SHOT BLASTING
38 A. Shot Blaster: US Filter /Blastral or equal.
39 2.02 FLOOR PATCHING PRODUCTS
40 A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, Portland- cement -based
41 formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
42 1. Ardex - V900.
43 2. Raeco - R100.
44 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096010-1 EXISTING FLOORING PREPARATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Second floor and above cracks over 1/6" and all sawn control joints - Trowelable
2 Underlayments and Patching Compounds: 100% solids Epoxy -resin formulation provided or
3 approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
4 1. Ardex - EP 2000.
5 2. Raeco - Level Flex Underlayment.
6 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
7 2.03 FLOOR LEVELING PRODUCTS
8 A. Floor Leveling ( Underlayment): At areas required to meet flatness tolerances and to correct
9 defective surfaces provide self - leveling, Polymer Reinforced Underlayment product " Ardex
10 K -15" in quantities and layers of application necessary to achieve the level tolerance as
11 recommended by the flooring - product manufacturer.
12 1. Manufacturer: Ardex Engineered Cements, 400 Ardex Park Drive, Aliquippa PA 15001.
13 2. Additional Products:
14 a. Primer: Apply Ardex P -51 on new concrete.
15 2.04 HEAVY DUTY FLOOR CLEANING
16 A. For floor surfaces requiring Floor Cleaning as part of the Concrete Floor Preparation - EXCEPT
17 at floor surfaces scheduled to receive Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) or Vinyl Sheet (SV) -
18 provide a heavy duty biodegradable citrus -based degreaser product equal to Crete - Clean,
19 manufactured by Curecrete Distribution, Springville, UT 800 - 998 -5664.
20 2.05 ETCHING AND LAITANCE REMOVER
21 A. For floor surfaces scheduled to receive Resilient Flooring, furnish a 10% muriatic acid etching
22 and laitance remover solution, with supplementary rinsing and neutralizing agents, all as
23 specifically approved as a compatible product by the flooring product manufacturer.
24 2.06 FLOOR ABRADING WORK
25 A. If required in order to install the floor covering specified in the floor area subject to floor
26 abrading, provide floor abrading equipment designed to provide dry, dustless surface shot blast
27 abrading and utilizing an integral vacuum system, equal to abrading equipment as
28 manufactured by Wheelabrator Blastrac, Berlin NJ. All equipment, materials and methods shall
29 be in compliance with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
30 PART 3 EXECUTION
31 3.01 GENERAL
32 A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
33 provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work,
34 and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
35 B. The objective of subsurface preparation is to provide maximum chemical and mechanical bond
36 potential between the cured concrete subsurface and new cementitious floor underlayment
37 (See Section 04 5400).
38 C. The concrete must be made clean, dry, free of any oil, grease or other bond breaking
39 contamination.
40 D. New concrete subsurfaces must be cured for at least 14 days, or longer, if required to reach full
41 design and low enough moisture content to permit overlayment.
42 E. The prepared concrete subsurface must be treated to provide an etched, porous, "toothy"
43 profile (substrate profile to be equal to #40 - #60 mesh graded sand or sandpaper); yet be
44 structurally and integrally sound.
45 3.02 PREPARATION
46 A. Voids: Fill large voids, cracks, depressions with trowel underlayment /patching compounds as
47 required to meet elevation of existing concrete slab. Follow manufacturer instructions for
48 preparation, mixing, and installation.
49 1. Preparation prior to installation of floor patching and leveling products:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096010-2 EXISTING FLOORING PREPARATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 a. The concrete floor slab shall be prepared so that the floor is smooth, flat and able to
2 receive specified floor finishes. Once the concrete floor slab is poured, it must be kept
3 clean, free of dust, dirt, paint, stains and tire marks - up until Punchlist.
4 2. All control joints, grooves, depressions, and surface cracks shall be filled with latex
5 patching or underlayment compound as recommended by the resilient flooring
6 manufacturer. Patching compound or underlayment shall be moisture -, mildew -, and
7 alkali- resistant.
8 B. Shot Blast: Shotblast, using steel or glass shot and self- contained abrasive blasting equipment,
9 such as Blastrac, preferred method of mechanical preparation. Blasting should be performed so
10 as to leave clean, "white" concrete with a uniform stipple finish. This method is generally limited
11 to horizontal surfaces not within 4 - 6 inches of walls, columns or other fixed obstructions.
12 Additional mechanical methods must be used to supplement preparation for areas not within
13 reach of the shotblasting equipment.
14 C. Diamond - grind, sand, or provide surface abrasion with heavy grit media to reach corners and
15 edges in conjunction with shotblasting.
16 3.03 INSTALLATION
17 A. Concrete slabs shall be prepared by the General Contractor by steel troweling to a smooth
18 surface free of ridges, waves and irregularities and shall be flat to within '/4 inch in a 10 foot
19 radius.
20 B. Slab Moisture Content: Because the adhesives used to install the scheduled floor coverings
21 over the concrete floor slabs is sensitive to elevated moisture vapor emission and pH levels, the
22 contractor shall as soon as possible, take the actions necessary to bring these slabs into the
23 acceptable levels, thereby avoiding unnecessary delays in the installation of the floor finishes.
24 1. Contractor shall perform moisture tests in accordance with ASTM F -1869. Perform three
25 (3) test locations for areas up to 1,000 square feet and add a test location for each
26 additional 1,000 square feet. Test to be placed no closer than five (5) feet from the nearest
27 wall. Test to be in place for 60 -72 hours. Testing to be done by a certified testing agency.
28 Test results to be forwarded to the Owner and Architect prior to installing floor leveling
29 underlayment or any floor covering.
30 C. All concrete slabs shall meet the following minimal requirements:
31 1. Moisture Vapor Rate: The allowable amount of moisture vapor emission from the concrete
32 slab substrate shall be acceptable up to, but not exceeding, 5 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft. per
33 24 hours.
34 2. Alkali (pH) Factor: The maximum allowable pH reading shall be in the range of 7.0 to 9.0
35 as required by the manufacturer of the flooring adhesive.
36 3. Readings which exceed either of the above listed test values shall become the
37 responsibility of the General Contractor who shall take corrective actions, i.e. additional
38 heat, dehumidification, acid wash, etc. to bring the slab into the acceptable level. This
39 action shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner.
40 3.04 FINAL CLEANING
41 A. Thoroughly rinse with clean water. Repeat this procedure as required to remove contamination
42 and all residue. Remove rinse water by forcing to appropriate drains or by power vacuum. Allow
43 to dry.
44 3.05 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
45 A. Prior to final acceptance of the floor preparation, the concrete shall be inspected by the
46 Architect, the General Contractor and the contractor to provide the cementitious floor
47 underlayment (Section 03 5400) as follows:
48 1. All parties must approve that the concrete slab is adequate for the installation of the
49 cementitious floor underlayment (Section 03 5400) - self - leveling floor underlayment.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096010-3 EXISTING FLOORING PREPARATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. Areas not accepted, approved, or conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
2 installation of cementitious floor underlayment (Section 03 5400) shall be shot blasted or
3 prepared until accepted and approved.
4 END OF SECTION
5
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096010-4 EXISTING FLOORING PREPARATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 09 6500
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient sheet flooring.
1. Resilient sheet flooring (SV).
B. Resilient base.
C. Installation accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs
and floors.
B. Section 03 5400 - SELF - LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT.
C. Section 09 6010 - Existing Flooring Preparation: Preparation of existing floor slabs.
D. Section 09 6005 - New Flooring Preparation: Preparation of new floor slabs.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM E 662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid
Materials; 2005.
B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;
2011.
C. ASTM F 970 - Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit;; 2006.
D. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004
(Reapproved 2014).
E. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012)e1.
F. ASTM F1913 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing; 2004
(Reapproved 2010).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan.
1. Provide for resilient sheet flooring.
D. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect
(Erickson McGovern Architects)'s initial selection.
E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,
and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re- waxing.
F. Resilient flooring manufacturer shall submit a Letter of Certification that the products specified
and installed do in fact either meet or exceed the static coefficient of friction of 0.5 for walking
surfaces, 0.6 for accessible routes and.08 for ramps.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Resilient sheet flooring:
1. Installer Qualifications: Installer of "abrasive sheet vinyl flooring" must be certified in
writing by manufacturer as qualified for the installation of the flooring material employing
heat - welded seams, and also must have completed a minimum of five projects of similar
size and scope.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096500-1 RESILIENT FLOORING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. Single- Source Responsibility for Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Obtain each type, color, and
2 pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering from a single source with resources to provide
3 products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying
4 progress of the Work.
5 3. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide sheet vinyl floor coverings with the following fire
6 performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method
7 indicated below by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or another testing and inspecting
8 agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
9 a. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648.
10 b. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662.
11 B. Resilient tile flooring:
12 1. Single- Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile
13 from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
14 appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
15 2. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floor tile with the following fire
16 performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method
17 indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
18 having jurisdiction.
19 a. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648.
20 b. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662.
21 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
22 A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end
23
B.
Deliver sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories to Project site in original
24
manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and
25
manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
26
C.
Move sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories into spaces where they will be
27
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
28
D.
Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened
29
cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification,
30
and shipping and handling instructions.
31
E.
Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will
32
be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
33
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
34
A.
Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) and 90 degrees F
35
(72 degrees C).
36
B.
Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a
37
temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter,
38
maintain conditions above 55 degrees F (13 degrees C).
39
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
40
A.
Install floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have
41
been completed.
42
B.
Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are
43
sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive.
44
1. Moisture Vapor Rate: The allowable amount of moisture vapor emission from the concrete
45
slab substrate shall be acceptable up to, but not exceeding, 5 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft. per
46
24 hours.
47
2. Alkali (pH) Factor: The maximum allowable pH reading shall be as required by the
48
manufacturer of the flooring adhesive. (See Part 2, Installation Accessories.)
49
3. Readings which exceed either of the above listed test values shall become the
50
responsibility of the General Contractor who shall take corrective actions, i.e. additional
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096500-2 RESILIENT FLOORING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 heat, dehumidification, acid wash, etc. to bring the slab into the acceptable level. This
2 action shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner.
3 1.09 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
4 A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
5 B. Warranty: The Application Contractor shall submit a written guarantee stating that all work and
6 conditions herein specified shall be guaranteed against any defects in materials and /or
7 workmanship (including adhesion) for a period of one (1) year from the date of "Final
8 Completion" and defective work which develops during guarantee period shall be replaced at
9 no additional cost to the OWNER.
10 PART 2 PRODUCTS
11 2.01 SHEET FLOORING
12 A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring - Type SV (Toilet and Health Room Vinyl Flooring): Homogeneous without
13 backing, with color and pattern throughout full thickness, and:
14 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1303, Type II, without backing, or ASTM F
15 1913.
16 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in
17 accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.
18 3. Total Thickness and Wear Layer Thickness: 0.085 inch nominal.
19 4. Sheet Width: 72 inch minimum.
20 5. Heat welded seams.
21 6. Integral coved base with cap strip.
22 7. Manufacturer: Mannington
23 8. Product: MD BioSpec
24 2.02 RESILIENT BASE
25 A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove.
26 1. Height: 4 inch (100 mm).
27 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick.
28 3. Finish: Satin.
29 4. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.
30 5. Manufacturers:
31 a. Burke Flooring; : www.burkemercer.com.
32 b. Roppe Corp; : www.roppe.com.
33 c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
34 2.03 ACCESSORIES
35 A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
36 B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring
37 manufacturer.
38 1. Adhesive for VCT: Product - Mannington Commercial V -11.
39 C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Metal.
40 1. Metal Edge Strips for resilient sheet flooring: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width
41 shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of sheet vinyl floor coverings, and in
42 maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
43 D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.
44 E. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096500-3 RESILIENT FLOORING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.01 EXAMINATION
3
A.
Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks
4
that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface
5
hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
6
B.
Prior to installation of any resilient flooring there shall be a Pre - installation Meeting (see
7
paragraph "Pre- Installation Meeting" of this Section).
8
C.
Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
9
work and are ready to receive resilient flooring.
10
D.
Cementitious Sub -floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient
11
flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.
12
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring
13
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
14
E.
Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
15
adhesive materials to sub -floor surfaces.
16
F.
Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring
17
installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710;
18
obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring
19
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
20
G.
Verify that required floor- mounted utilities are in correct location.
21
H.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
22
I.
Once the installation is commenced, the costs of corrections of any defects encountered that
23
are detrimental to the proper installation or appearance of the resilient flooring will be the
24
responsibility of the installer.
25
3.02 PREPARATION
26
A.
All gaps between floor and GWB and /or flooring and GWB shall be vacuumed clean before
27
application of any resilient flooring.
28
B.
Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other
29
defects with sub -floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
30
1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per floor covering manufacturer's
31
direction to fill cracks, holes, and depressions, to provide smooth substrate for acceptance
32
of finish flooring.
33
2. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
34
incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a
35
terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a
36
heavy duty wire brush.
37
3. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application
38
of adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions.
39
C.
Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
40
D.
Clean substrate.
41
E.
Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying
42
adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions.
43
3.03 INSTALLATION
44
A.
Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions.
45
B.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
46
C.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
47
D.
Fit joints tightly.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096500-4 RESILIENT FLOORING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
E.
Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
2
F.
Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate
3
flooring under centerline of door.
4
G.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where
5
indicated.
6
H.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce
7
tight joints.
8
3.04 SHEET FLOORING
9
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
10
B.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
11
C.
Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
12
D.
Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum
13
number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns
14
carefully at seams.
15
E.
Double cut sheet at seams.
16
F.
Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated.
17
G.
Finish seams in all sheet floorings by heat welding.
18
H.
Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline
19
of door.
20
I.
Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where
21
indicated. After installation of flooring, secure metal strips with stainless steel screws.
22
J.
Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall
23
junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal cap
24
strip.
25
1. At all scheduled sheet vinyl floors, provide cove sheet vinyl floor coverings up vertical
26
surfaces to form integral base of height indicated over cove support strip with top edge
27
butted against and covered by cap molding. 6 inch height, i.e., at columns, pilasters,
28
casework, and other permanent fixtures. Provide continuous sealant at top of cove base
29
between metal edge and finished wall. Provide at all finished wall surfaces.
30
K.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce
31
tight joints.
32
L.
Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern.
33
3.05 RESILIENT BASE
34
A.
Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches (45 mm) between
35
joints.
36
B.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
37
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
38
A.
Resilient sheet flooring:
39
1. Perform the following operations immediately after installing sheet vinyl floor coverings:
40
a. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended
41
by floor covering manufacturers.
42
b. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
43
c. Do not wash floor until after period recommended by floor covering manufacturer.
44
d. Damp mop floor to remove black marks and soil.
45
e. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
46
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096500-5 RESILIENT FLOORING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by floor
2 covering manufacturer.
3 f. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over sheet vinyl floor coverings. Place
4 plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are
5 being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.
6 g. Clean resilient sheet flooring and apply polish (if recommended by flooring
7 manufacturer) not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended
8 to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project.
9 h. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
10 END OF SECTION
11
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096500-6 RESILIENT FLOORING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 09 6800
CARPET
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. All Carpet (CPT) which is scheduled in the Finish Schedule.
B. Extent, location and details of each type of carpeting are indicated on drawings, in Finish
Schedule, and carpet data sheets included at the end of this section.
C. Work of this section includes furnishing and installation of carpeting, adhesives and
accessories.
D. Moisture Vapor Rate and Alkali (PH) Factor:
1. Manufacturer's Installation Subcontractor shall, by providing a bid for carpet, accept that
the specified product (carpet) will be able to be installed per the requirements set forth in
Part "B" of paragraph "Sequencing and Scheduling" below.
2. All warranties shall be provided as set forth in paragraph "Project Closeout" below.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
1.03 REFERENCES
A. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and
Rug Institute; 2002.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
C. Submit two, 18 inch ( mm) square samples of each type of carpet for each color specified.
1. 12" long samples of each type exposed edge stripping and accessory item.
2. 6" square samples of each type of carpet cushion.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years
experience.
C. Carpet Installers: In addition to following carpet manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives
and carpet installation, the installer shall also conform to all installation guidelines of the Carpet
and Rug Institute.
D. Single Source Responsibility: Provide material produced by a single manufacturer for each
carpet type.
E. Regulatory Requirements: Carpeting shall meet the requirements of Washington State
Barrier -Free Rules, Section 1106.7.2.
F. Carpet Dye Lots: All carpet of a single color group shall be provided from the same dye lot. If
quantity of material required for the job exceeds the manufacturer's maximum possible dye lot
size, carpet shall be provided in a manner to permit dye lot change in separate areas. (Do not
mix dye lots within a given space.)
G. Defective Carpet: If carpet received at the job site is found to have flaws or other defects and
be not of acceptable quality, set the defective carpet aside until verification of the quantity of
bad carpet is confirmed and recorded by the Architect.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096800-1 CARPET
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
2 A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with
3 identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot
4 number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well - ventilated
5 area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat,
6 blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping.
7 B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage,
8 and handling requirements.
9
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
10
A.
Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.
11
B.
Maintain minimum 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during
12
and 24 hours after installation.
13
C.
Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.
14
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
15
A.
Sequence carpet installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling
16
during remainder of construction period.
17
B.
When carpet is installed out of the normal construction sequence, the contractor shall be
18
responsible for protection of the carpet from damage caused by the ongoing construction
19
process and the grinding of dirt, etc. into the pile. If the carpet is damaged, it shall be replaced
20
at no cost to the Owner.
21
C.
Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
22
bond with adhesive.
23
1. Moisture Vapor Rate: The allowable amount of moisture vapor emission from the concrete
24
slab substrate shall be acceptable up to, but not exceeding, 5 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft. per
25
24 hours.
26
2. Alkali (pH) Factor: The maximum allowable pH reading shall be as required by the
27
manufacturer of the flooring adhesive. (See Part 2, Accessories.)
28
D.
Readings which exceed either of the above listed test values shall become the responsibility of
29
the General Contractor who shall take corrective actions, i.e. additional heat, dehumidification,
30
acid wash, etc. to bring the slab into the acceptable level. This action shall be accomplished
31
with no additional cost to the Owner.
32
1.09 MAINTENANCE
33
A.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of
34
installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum
35
condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials
36
and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.
37
1.10 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
38
A.
Extra Materials: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional requirements.
39
1. Provide a minimum of 5% of the total amount of each type and color of carpet used.
40
Furnish in full width roll from same production run as carpet installed.
41
B.
Package replacement materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels. If
42
more than one dye lot is necessary for a particular color, the extra material provided shall be
43
determined on a percentage basis proportional to the dye lot quantity. Individually label
44
packaged "dye lot carpet" as to dye lot and location used.
45
C.
Also include usable scraps of carpet properly packaged (paper wrapped) and identified. Usable
46
scraps are defined to include roll ends of less than 9' -0" length, and pieces of more than 3
47
square feet area and more than 8" wide.
48
D.
Warranty:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096800-2 CARPET
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
1. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer
2
and the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace carpeting which fails in materials,
3
workmanship, adhesion to substrate, or specified conditions within the specified warranty
4
period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner
5
may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
6
2. Warranty period is two (2) years after the date of Substantial Completion.
7
3. Provide additional ten (10) year warranty for carpeting wear surface.
8
PART 2
PRODUCTS
9
2.01 MANUFACTURERS / CARPET
10
A.
Carpet:
11
1. Collins & Aikman "Applause II" - All areas.
12
B.
Backing: "Powerbond ", vinyl backing.
13
C.
Roll Width: 6 feet.
14
2.02 ACCESSORIES
15
A.
Sub -Floor Filler: Latex type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
16
B.
Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.
17
1. Hot -melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for
18
buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and preventing pile loss at seams.
19
Both edges of seams to be sealed.
20
C.
Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material; releasable type.
21
1. Provide water - resistant, non - staining, from manufacturer and type as recommended by
22
carpet manufacturer, which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet.
23
D.
Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet, cushions, and other
24
carpeting products; selected by Installer to meet project circumstances and requirements.
25
PART 3
EXECUTION
26
3.01 EXAMINATION
27
A.
Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
28
work and are ready to receive carpet.
29
B.
Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
30
work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive carpet.
31
C.
Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances which would impair bonding
32
of adhesives to sub floor surfaces.
33
D.
Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for carpet installation by testing for moisture
34
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended
35
by carpet manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
36
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
37
materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Perform tests to
38
determine Moisture Vapor Rate and Alkali (pH) Factor levels as noted in Sequencing And
39
Scheduling paragraph of this Section.
40
a. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
41
Division 3 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
42
b. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any
43
kind.
44
E.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
45
F.
Once the installation is commenced, the costs of corrections of any defects encountered that
46
are detrimental to the proper installation or appearance of the carpet will be the responsibility of
47
the installer.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096800-3 CARPET
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.02 PREPARATION
2 A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and
3 other defects with sub -floor filler.
4 1. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are
5 incompatible with carpet adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a
6 terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a
7 heavy -duty wire brush.
8 2. All gaps between floor and GWB and /or flooring and GWB shall be vacuumed clean
9 before application of any carpet.
10 B. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by carpet manufacturer, prior to application of
11 adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions.
12 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
13
A.
Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104.
14
B.
Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
15
C.
Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:
16
1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main
17
traffic.
18
2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.
19
3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent
20
pieces.
21
4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
22
5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.
23
D.
Extend carpet under open bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings,
24
and into alcoves and closets of each space.
25
E.
Provide cut -outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by
26
protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.
27
F.
Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate per
28
manufacturer's recommendations.
29
G.
Expansion Joints: Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting; provide for
30
movement.
31
H.
Run carpet lengthwise in corridors.
32
I.
Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.
33
3.04 CLEANING
34
A.
Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum carpet using commercial
35
machine with face - beater element. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be
36
removed. Remove any protruding face yarn using sharp scissors.
37
B.
Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.
38
C.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
39
3.05 PROTECTION
40
A.
Provide protective methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting will be without
41
deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion.
42
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 096800-4 CARPET
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 09 9000
2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW CONSTRUCTION)
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
5 A. Extent of Painting:
6 1. As scheduled and indicated on the drawings, or unless noted otherwise, all surfaces on
7 the total exterior and interior of all buildings of this project shall be prepared, painted, and
8 finished as described in the following contents of this Section 09 9000, even if not noted
9 for specified in Room Finish Schedule. Exceptions to this rule are natural finishes of
10 materials specifically noted below in paragraph "Surfaces Not To Be Painted."
11 a. Where surfaces and materials have not been scheduled or noted for paint finish,
12 paint with similar material and number of coats as on similarly scheduled or noted
13 surface.
14 b. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to
15 shop - priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.
16 1) Coordinate with Gypsum Board Assemblies (drywall) contractor for application
17 of primer coat prior to the application of wall board texture. Primer coat prior to
18 texture is to be provide by this Section.
19 c. All metal vision panel frames for doors shall be painted, unless noted (paint is
20 required even if not noted on door schedules).
21 d. All metal decks, trusses, and joists shall be painted, unless noted (paint is required
22 even if not noted on finish schedules or drawings).
23 B. Accent Painting:
24 1. Approximately 15% or less of total area will consist of "medium to deep colors" which may
25 require one additional coat above those specified for custom or premium finishes. This
26 accent is in addition to any accent specified in graphics application.
27 C. Mechanical and Electrical: Shall be as specified in Divisions 21 through 28 with the exception of
28 the following items at the following locations:
29 1. Primary occupied spaces, i.e. classrooms, offices, corridors, toilets, assembly areas, etc.
30 a. Ductwork: All exposed ductwork and supports shall be painted to match ceiling
31 unless noted otherwise. One (1) prime and two (2) finish coats.
32 b. Electric Panels, Fuse Boxes, Equipment Boxes: Shall be heavily sanded to provide
33 tooth for application of 2 coats of industrial enamel to match the adjoining wall color.
34 c. Miscellaneous Items: Conduit, plug mold, wire mold, vents, grilles, miscellaneous
35 pipe and any other miscellaneous mechanical or electrical items. Minimum of 2 coats
36 of enamel or 1 primer and 1 finish. Color to match adjoining wall or ceiling color.
37 D. Surfaces Not To Be Painted:
38 1. Pre - Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when
39 factory- finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to)
40 roofing, brick, glass, plastic laminate toilet enclosures, acoustic materials, architectural
41 woodwork and casework, and finish mechanical and electrical equipment, including
42 sprinkler heads, light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets.
43 2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such
44 as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation
45 spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
46 3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized
47 aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials
48 will not require finish painting.
49 4. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical
50 and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices,
51 motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 099000-1 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 5. Do not paint over any code required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and
2 Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or
3 nomenclature plates.
4 E. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications.
5 1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included
6 under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and
7 similar items.
8 2. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural
9 woodwork, wood casework and shop- fabricated or factory -built mechanical and electrical
10 equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications.
11 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
12 A. Surface preparation.
13 B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
14 C. All labor, materials, tools and other equipment, services and supervision required to complete
15 all interior and exterior painting and decorating work as indicated on Finish Schedules and to
16 the full extent of the drawings and specifications.
17 D. Work under this contract shall also include, but not necessarily be limited to:
18 1. Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of painting, including
19 cleaning, small crack repair, patching, caulking, and making good surfaces and areas to
20 the limits defined under MPI preparation requirements.
21 2. Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation. in
22 accordance with MPI and wall covering manufacturer's requirements.
23 3. Specific pre- treatments noted herein or specified in the MPI Architectural Painting
24 Specification Manual.
25 4. Priming (except where pre - primed with an approved primer under other Sections of work)
26 and painting of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, ornamental metal and primed steel
27 equipment.
28 5. Priming and back - priming of wood materials as noted herein or specified in the MPI
29 Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
30 6. Painting of all semi - concealed areas (e.g. inside of light troughs and valances, behind
31 grilles, and projecting edges above and below sight lines).
32 7. Painting and finishing of all exposed to view elevator equipment and components (i.e.
33 doors and door frames) unless pre- finished.
34 8. Painting of exposed to view mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing) services and
35 equipment, (e.g., ducts, sprinkler piping, etc.), and electrical work to extent noted on Finish
36 Schedule unless pre- finished.
37 9. Re- painting of existing surfaces and finishes when adjacent to new painting and coating
38 work where applicable including surface preparation, prime and finish coats.
39 10. Provision of safe and adequate ventilation as required over and above temporary
40 ventilation supplied by others, where toxic and /or volatile / flammable materials are being
41 used.
42 11. Refer to drawings and schedules (e.g., Finish Schedule) for type, location and extent of
43 finishes required, and include all touch -ups and field painting necessary to complete work
44 shown, scheduled or specified.
45 12. This Section along with the drawings forms part of the Contract documents and is to be
46 read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts.
47 13. Providing Fire Resistant Coating (paint) to electrical and communication backer boards.
48 14. Provisions for 2 coat systems.
49 a. The first coat shall be applied at a 50% tinting of the color selected.
50 E. Records of Paints Used: Contractor shall retain in good condition all paint schedules, marked
51 plans and paint samples used for job quality and color control. These are to be turned over to
52 the Owner at the end of the job.
2015-19/ YCS Ed Center TI 099000-2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
1.
COLOR SCHEDULES which are provided to the Contractor are frequently, due to the
2
Contractor's preference of paint supplier, "crossed over" with colors being matched by
3
another paint supplier (other than the supplier whose colors were specified).
4
2.
Since it is not possible to predict what supplier and therefore which product numbers will
5
be used to complete a job, the color schedule (master) has extra blanks under each color
6
C.
for the insertion of product information which must be supplied by the paint contractor
7
when a scheduled color may have to be mixed in more than one product type to paint
8
1.05 DEFINITIONS
different surfaces.
9
3.
For example: Walls are scheduled to be painted color 'Y'. If metal louvers set in these
10
39
walls require a different product type other than the type scheduled for the walls, use the
11
40
blank space under "x" in the schedule to record the paint product and its number, thereby
12
41
facilitating the Owner's purchase of the proper product when maintenance is required.
13
4.
See sample "Paint Schedule" at end of this section.
14
43
a. The Contractor shall provide the a schedule in this format at the end of the project.
15
44
b. A copy of this format /schedule is available form Architect (Erickson McGovern
16
45
Architects) in an Excel format.
17
1.03 RELATED
SECTIONS
18
A. Unless otherwise noted, the following work or conditions are not included under this Section of
19
work:
48
20
1.
Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry.
21
2.
Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
22
writing by the Architect or consulting representative.
a. Coordinate with Gypsum Board Assemblies (drywall) contractor for application of
23
YCS Ed Center TI 099000-3 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
primer coat prior to the application of wall board texture. Primer coat prior to texture is
24
to be provide by this Section.
25
3.
Section 09 7200 - Wall Coverings.
26
4.
Division 22 and 23 - Mechanical (painting, stenciling, banding of mechanical systems).
27
5.
Division 26 - Electrical (painting, stenciling, banding of electrical systems).
►l-*� Kill EN*114:740l5s]*?
29
A.
Except as hereinafter specified, for materials and workmanship, conform to the "Architectural
30
Painting Specification Manual" hereinafter referred to as "MPI," as published by The Masters
31
Painters and Decorators Association.
32
B.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
33
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
34
C.
ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
35
2003.
36
1.05 DEFINITIONS
37
A.
Conform to MPI and ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
38
1.06 SUBMITTALS
39
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
40
B.
Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
41
C.
Samples: Submit three painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color
42
and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on index weight paper stock, 8
43
1/2x11 inch (_x_ mm) in size.
44
D.
Samples for wood surfaces: Samples for surfaces to be stained or clear finished shall be
45
submitted on no less than 6 inch lengths of material representative of the surface to be stained
46
and /or clear coated.
47
1. Three samples required.
48
E.
Glulams and other large items shall receive small sample patches of color in inconspicuous
49
areas at the jobsite before coating of entire surface if approved, unless approval is waived in
50
writing by the Architect or consulting representative.
2015-19/
YCS Ed Center TI 099000-3 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
F.
Submit two sets of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to commencement of work for
2
B.
review and for posting at job site as required.
3
G.
When painting occupied areas, submit work schedule for various stages of work for the
4
C.
Consultant's review and Owner's approval if requested.
5
H.
At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color
6
1.09 MOCK -UP
coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance. See Paint Record
7
See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock -up.
Requirements at the end of this Section.
8
I.
At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials as noted herein and
9
surfaces or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified paint or coating in colors,
obtain a signed receipt.
10
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
11
A.
This Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall
12
show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters
13
C.
throughout the duration of the work. When requested, Contractor shall provide a list of the last
14
three comparable jobs including, name and location, specifying authority / project manager,
15
start / completion dates and value of the painting work.
16
B.
Only qualified journeymen who have a Tradesman Qualification Certificate of Proficiency shall
17
be engaged in painting and decorating work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work
18
D.
under the direct supervision of a qualified journeyman in accordance with trade regulations.
19 C. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to the standards contained in the
20 latest edition of the Master Painters Institute (MPI) Architectural Painting Specification Manual
21 (hereafter referred to as the MPI.
22 D. Painting Manual as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having
23 jurisdiction.
24 E. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the Approved Product List
25 section of the MPI Painting Manual.
26 F. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL PAINT APPLICATION BE PERMITTED WITHOUT
27 SPECIFIED SAMPLE APPROVAL. ANY PRODUCT APPLIED WHICH IS NOT ACCORDING
28 TO SPECIFICATIONS AND SIGNED OFF FOR PROPER COLOR WILL BE SUBJECT TO
29 REMOVAL AND REPAINT AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.
30 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
31
A.
Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.
32
B.
Conform to the latest edition of Industrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by applicable
33
authorities having jurisdiction in regard to site safety (ladders, scaffolding, ventilation, etc.).
34
C.
Conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction in regard to the storage, mixing,
35
application and disposal of all paint related materials.
36
1.09 MOCK -UP
37
A.
See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock -up.
38
B.
When requested by the Architect, provide duplicate minimum 300 mm (12 ") square samples of
39
surfaces or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified paint or coating in colors,
40
gloss /sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Manual standards for review and approval.
41
When approved, samples shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on -site
42
surface with one of each sample retained on -site.
43
C.
When requested by the Architect, prepare and paint designated surface, area, room or item (in
44
each color scheme) to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing
45
selected colors, gloss / sheen, textures and workmanship to MPI Painting Manual standards for
46
review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and /or items shall become
47
acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on -site work.
48
D.
Mock -up may remain as part of the Work.
2015-19/
YCS Ed Center TI 099000-4 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
2 A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
3 1. Deliver all painting materials in sealed, original labeled containers bearing manufacturer's
4 name, brand name, type of paint or coating and color designation, standard compliance,
5 materials content as well as mixing and /or reducing and application requirements.
6 B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
7 code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
8 instructions for mixing and reducing.
9 C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a
10 maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by
11 manufacturer's instructions.
12 1. Store all paint materials in original labeled containers in a secure (lockable), dry, heated
13 and well ventilated single designated area meeting the minimum requirements of both
14 paint manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction and at a minimum ambient
15 temperature of 45° F (7° C). Only material used on this project to be stored on site.
16 D. Where toxic and /or volatile / explosive / flammable materials are being used, provide adequate
17 fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g.
18 no smoking) as required.
19 E. Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and
20 spontaneous combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that
21 constitute a fire hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed
22 and rated containers and removed from the site on a daily basis.
23 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
24
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
25
ranges
required by the paint product manufacturer.
26
1.
UNLESS specifically pre- approved by the specifying body, (Paint Inspection Agency) and
27
the applied product manufacturer, perform no painting or decorating work when the
28
ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 50° F (10° C) for both interior and
29
exterior work.
30
2.
Perform no painting or decorating work unless adequate continuous ventilation and
31
sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures
32
above minimum requirements for 24 hours before, during and after paint application.
33
Provide supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from
34
existing system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements.
35
3.
Perform no painting or decorating work when the relative humidity is above 85% or when
36
the dew point is less than 5° F (3° C) variance between the air / surface temperature.
37
4.
Perform no painting or decorating work when the maximum moisture content of the
38
substrate exceeds:
39
a. 12 % for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick /block).
40
b. 15% for wood.
41
C. 12 % for plaster and gypsum board.
42
5.
Conduct all moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except
43
test concrete floors for moisture using a simple cover patch test.
44
6.
Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
45
7.
Apply paint only to dry, clean, properly cured and adequately prepared surfaces in areas
46
where dust is no longer generated by construction activities such that airborne particles
47
will not affect the quality of finished surfaces.
48
8.
Perform no painting or decorating work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux (30 foot
49
candles) is provided on surfaces to be painted or decorated. Adequate lighting facilities
50
shall be provided by the General Contractor.
51 B. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 Ix) measured mid - height at substrate surface
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 099000-5 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.12 SCHEDULING
2
A.
Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades.
3
B.
Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building.
4
Obtain written authorization from Consultant / Owner for changes in work schedule.
5
C.
Painting in occupied facilities to be carried out during hours in accordance with Owner's
6
operating requirements (during silent hours)(on weekends). Schedule work such that painted
7
surfaces will have dried before occupants are affected.
8
D.
Phasing of work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 1000 - Summary.
9
1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS
10
A.
See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
11
B.
Supply 1 gallon (4 L) of each color used; store where directed.
12
1. At project completion provide 4 liters (1 gallon) of each type and color of paint from same
13
production run (batch mix) used in unopened cans, properly labeled and identified for
14
Owner's later use in maintenance. Store where directed.
15
PART 2
PRODUCTS
16 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
17 A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved:
18 1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.
19 2. Glidden Professional (ICI Dulux): www.icipaintsinna.com.
20 3. Parker Paint: www.parkerpaint.com.
21 4. Sherwin - Williams: www.sherwin - williams.com.
22 5. Rodda Paint: www.roddapaint.com
23 B. Unless otherwise specified conform to Standards of MPI for materials; this includes paint,
24 varnish, stain, enamel, lacquer, fillers and related paint products and materials not specifically
25 indicated, but required for prime, intermediate and finish coats.
26 C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
27 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
28 A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field - catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments:
29 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a
30 homogeneous coating.
31 2. For good flow and brushing properties.
32 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
B. Materials:
1. All materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners,
solvents, etc.) shall be in accordance with the MPI Painting Manual Approved Product
listing and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
2. Other paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, etc. shall be the highest quality product
of an approved manufacturer listed in the MPI Painting Manual and shall be compatible
with other coating materials as required.
3. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure
free of blemishes or sags.
4. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed
ratings designated by local Code requirements and /or authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Glass Reflective Beads (for pavement marking): of type suitable for application to a wet
paint surface for light reflectance. Apply beads at a minimum rate of 0.5 kg /I (5 Ibs /g) to a
white and /or yellow latex or alkyd zone / traffic marking paint of approved type as listed in
the MPI Painting Manual.
6. Slip Resistant Additive (SRA): rubber aggregate, clean /washed silica sand or ground
walnut chips (interior dry areas only) for use with or as a component part of paint (usually
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 floor / porch / stair enamel) on horizontal surfaces as required to provide slip resistance.
2 Where site applied, material to either mixed into paint (and mixed constantly to keep
3 material in suspension) or broadcast into first or prime coat as required.
4 C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
5 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the
6 following:
7 a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
8 Architectural Coatings.
9 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
10 Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
11 at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
12 D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
13 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds
14 (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
15 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di
16 (2- ethylhexyl) phthalate, di -n -butyl phthalate, di -n -octyl phthalate, 1,2- dichlorobenzene,
17 diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium,
18 isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene
19 chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methyl benzene), 1,1,1- trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
20 2.03 EQUIPMENT
21 A. Painting and Decorating Equipment: to best trade standards for type of product and application.
22 B. Spray Painting Equipment: of ample capacity, suited to the type and consistency of paint or
23 coating being applied and kept clean and in good working order at all times.
24 2.04 MIXING AND TINTING
25
A.
Unless otherwise specified herein or pre- approved, all paint shall be ready -mixed and
26
pre- tinted. Re -mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break -up of
27
lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity.
28
B.
Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
29
written instructions.
30
C.
Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do
31
not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water -based paints.
32
D.
Thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If
33
directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide
34
copy of instructions to Consultant.
35
2.05 FINISH AND COLORS
36
A.
Unless otherwise specified herein, all painting work shall be in accordance with MPI "Custom"
37
Grade finish requirements.
38
B.
Colors shall be as selected by the Architect from a manufacturer's full range of colors.
39
1. Color selection will be based on (five (5) base colors and (three) accent colors (with a
40
maximum of (one (1) deep or bright color). No more than (eight (8) colors will be selected
41
for the entire project and no more than (three (3) colors will be selected in each area. Note
42
that this does not include pre- finished items by others, e.g. flashings, windows, etc.).
43
2. Interior colors and /or patterns shall be consistent (throughout each unit) with two (2) or
44
three (3) separate schemes prepared. Allow for a minimum of three (3) exterior colors for
45
fascia, trims, doors and frames.
46
3. Walls shall be painted the same color within a given area.
47
4. Ceilings (except those having a spray textured coating) shall be painted (white) (the same
48
color as walls).
49
5. Except as noted herein or indicated on the Finish Schedule, walls and ceiling surfaces
50
shall be painted in accordance with the following criteria:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 099000-7 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 a. all areas (except as noted): washable latex eggshell finish over a prime / sealer coat.
2 b. laundry facilities / rooms, public wash / shower / bathrooms, residential kitchens and
3 bathrooms and ensuites: (washable latex) (alkyd) over appropriate prime /sealer coat.
4 c. public change / wash / shower rooms and institutional facility bathing and shower
5 rooms: tile -like finish for wet surfaces.
6 d. public and institutional facility food preparation and "sanitary" areas: tile -like finish for
7 dry surfaces.
8 6. Corridors shall be painted the same color on all floors with three (3) separate two (2) color
9 schemes prepared for doors and trim.
10 7. Designated rooms / spaces shall be painted using different colors or more than one color
11 than typical rooms in accordance with Finish Schedule requirements with a minimum of
12 two (2) colors required.
13 8. Doors, frames and trim shall be painted a different color than walls.
14 9. Window frames (unless pre- finished) including trim and sills shall be painted -
15 a. a different color than walls.
16 10. Unless otherwise noted all window frames, trim and sills shall be painted using a
17 semi -gloss finish.
18 11. Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware (e.g. door closers),
19 registers, radiators and covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted to
20 match adjacent surfaces (i.e. color, texture and sheen), unless otherwise noted or where
21 pre- finished.
22 2.06 GLOSS AND SHEEN RATING
23 A. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the
24 following MPI values:
25
Gloss Level Description Units @ 60 degrees Units @ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat finish 0 to 5 10 max.
G2 Velvet finish 0 to 10 10 t0 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin finish 20 to 35 35 min.
G5 Semi -Gloss finish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss finish 70 to85
G7 High -Gloss finish >85
26
27 B. Gloss level ratings of all painted surfaces shall be as specified herein.
28 2.07 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
29 A. Patching Material: Latex filler.
30 B. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
31 PART 3 EXECUTION
32 3.01 EXAMINATION
33 A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
34 B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
35 condition that may potentially affect proper application.
36 1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
37 acceptable to Applicator.
38 C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise
39 detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
40 D. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
41 conditions within any particular area.
42 E. Test shop - applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
2015-19/ YCS Ed Center TI 099000-8 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.02 PREPARATION
2
A.
Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
3
escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
4
1. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures,
5
and similar items in place and not to be finish - painted, or provide surface - applied
6
protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for
7
M.
complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of
8
each space or area, reinstall removed items.
9
B.
Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or
10
N.
repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
11
1. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so
12
that dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet,
13
O.
newly - painted surfaces.
14
C.
Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes.
15
D.
Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra - sodium phosphate
16
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
17
E.
Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or
18
alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri- sodium
19
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding
20
metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
21
F.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
22
defects after repair.
23
G.
Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex
24
patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high
25
alkali surfaces.
26 H. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit
27 adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer.
28 I. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure
29 water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately
30 following cleaning.
31 J. Copper Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination by steam, high pressure water, or
32 solvent washing. Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following cleaning.
33 K. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
34 solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
35
L.
Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt,
36
and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or
37
sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,
38
ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot
39
prime after repairs.
40
M.
Shop- Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer
41
and rust. Feather edges to make touch -up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent.
42
Prime bare steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop - primed item.
43
N.
Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
44
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
45
dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
46
O.
Interior Wood Items to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal
47
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has
48
dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25
49
percent with thinner.
2015 -19 /
YCS Ed Center TI 099000-9 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 P. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots,
2 pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after
3 prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
4 Q. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal
5 knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking
6 compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces.
7
3.03 APPLICATION
8
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
9
1.
Priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop - priming and surface treatment
10
specified under other sections of work.
11
2.
Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop - primed and touch -up
12
painted, unless otherwise indicated.
13
3.
Transition Coat: When a system is called for over a previous coating with which it is not
14
entirely compatible (by either its chemical type or condition), a special type of primer may
15
be required to assure good adhesion and "tying" the new system to the old.
16
4.
Prime Coats: Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and
17
which has not been prime coated by others.
18
a. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or
19
unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn - through or other
20
defects due to insufficient sealing.
21
5.
Spot Priming: Items that have been factory primed or shop primed and are damaged in
22
shipment or during the construction process may require spot priming where indicated in
23
paint schedule. Paint contractor shall verify that the spot primer specified is compatible
24
with the shop primer applied during the fabrication process.
25
6.
Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
26
7.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules" of the contract
27
documents.
28
8.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned,
29
retreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and
30
before subsequent surface deterioration.
31
a. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not
32
recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
33
moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause
34
lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
35
b. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's
36
recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if
37
not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.
38
c. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final
39
coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special
40
attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and
41
exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
42
d. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth
43
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
44
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will
45
not be acceptable.
46
e. For painting of cast concrete surfaces that may have areas of imperfection, (i.e.) form
47
lines, rock pockets, etc., either spray paint or brush out these rough areas to assure
48
total surface coverage.
49
f. Vary color of successive paint and enamel coats to a distinguishable difference but
50
similar to finish coat.
51
g. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
52
h. Spray Paint Application: Surfaces coated by spraying method shall be backrolled
53
immediately after application to redistribute paint film for a more consistent and even
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9000 - 10 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 coverage. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid
2 marks, or other surface imperfections.
3 i. Completed Work: Painter responsible for improper workmanship or misuse of
4 finishing materials; refinish at Painter's expense and leave in first class condition, as
5 approved by Architect. Surfaces damaged after painting and decorating is completed
6 shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor and repaired at General
7 Contractor's expense to condition approved by Architect.
8 j. Coating application prior to installation: For exterior wood siding, standing and
9 running trim, i.e. fascia, rake boards or other miscellaneous type of finish wood trim,
10 apply a coat or primer or stain, dependent upon specified finish, to all surfaces and
11 cut ends which will be concealed after installation.
12 k. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
13 surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime
14 coat only before final installation of equipment.
15 I. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat,
16 non - specular black paint.
17 m. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match
18 exposed surfaces.
19 n. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless
20 otherwise indicated.
21 o. For surfaces receiving 2 coats of stain, apply as follows: Initial application method at
22 contractor's discretion. However, the stain is then to be back brushed with flat iron
23 brushes to work stain well into the surface of the material. No substitute methods.
24 p. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass smooth surface
25 film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs,
26 brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
27 1) Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
28 B. Two (2) Coat Finish: For applications that are specified to receive (2) two finish coats, apply as
29 follows:
30 1. The first coat shall be applied at a 50% tinting of the color selected.
31 2. Architect or Owner shall be contacted between coats to verify and approve first
32 application.
33 3. The second coat shall be applied at a 100% tinting of the color selected.
34 C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.
35 D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
36 applied.
37 E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding
38 coat unless otherwise approved.
39 F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
40 to applying next coat.
41 G. Substrate defects shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting particularly after
42 the first coat of paint. Start of finish painting of effective surfaces (e.g. gypsum board) shall
43 indicate acceptance of substrate and any costs of making good defects shall be borne by the
44 painter including re- painting of entire defective surface (no touch -up painting).
45 H. Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and /or test all surfaces under adequate illumination,
46 ventilation and temperature requirements.
47 I. Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and /or until all environmental conditions
48 (heating, ventilation, lighting and completion of other subtrade work) are acceptable for
49 applications of products.
50 J. Apply paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual Premium Grade finish
51 requirements.
2015-19/ YCS Ed Center TI 09 9000 - 11 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
K.
Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified
2
applicators as noted under Quality Assurance.
3
L.
Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental
4
conditions encourage flash- rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer's paint
5
specifications require earlier applications.
6
M.
Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper
7
B.
consistency and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
8
N.
Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.
9
O.
Unless otherwise approved by the painting inspection agency, apply a minimum of four coats of
10
paint where deep or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results.
11
P.
Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects
12
E.
visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39 ").
13
Q.
Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer's directions
14
state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a following coat is applied.
15
R.
Prime coat of stain or varnish finishes may be reduced in accordance with manufacturer's
16
G.
directions.
17
S.
Paint finish shall continue through behind all wall mounted items (e.g. chalk and tack boards).
18 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
19
A.
Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all "unfinished" conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork
20
and other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent
21
surfaces, in the following areas:
22
1. Where exposed -to -view in all exterior and interior areas.
23
2. In all interior high humidity interior areas.
24
3. In all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.
25
B.
In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical
26
and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
27
C.
Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as
28
supplied by manufacturer of equipment.
29
D.
Do not paint over nameplates.
30
E.
Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers for a minimum
31
of 460 mm (18 ") or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one coat of matt
32
black (non - reflecting) paint.
33
F.
Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.
34
G.
Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
35
H.
Paint [yellow] or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification
36
requirements.
37 I. Backprime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical
38 equipment before installation (gray, semi - gloss)(to match adjacent wall surface). Leave
39 equipment in original finish except for touch -up as required, and paint conduits, mounting
40 accessories and other unfinished items.
41 J. Paint (exterior steel electrical light standards). Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation
42 equipment.
43 K. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
44 prior to finishing.
45 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
46 A. All surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9000 - 12 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following
2 defects are apparent to the Painting Inspection Agency inspector:
3 1. Runs, sags, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods.
4 2. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets,
5 corners and re- entrant angles.
6 3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.
7 4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the
8 weather.
9 5. Damage and /or contamination of paint due to wind blown contaminants (dust, sand blast
10 materials, salt spray, etc.).
11 C. Painted surfaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense of the
12 Contractor. Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas without
13 sufficient dry film thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs, sags of damaged paint shall be
14 removed by scraper or by sanding prior to application of paint.
15 D. Protection:
16 1. Protect all newly painted exterior surfaces from rain and snow, condensation,
17 contamination, dust, salt spray and freezing temperatures until paint coatings are
18 completely dry. Curing periods shall exceed the manufacturer's recommended minimum
19 time requirements.
20 2. Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of or limit or direct traffic away or around
21 work area as required.
22 3.06 CLEANING
23 A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
24 remove daily from site.
25 B. Clean -Up:
26 1. Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using
27 means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
28 2. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and
29 rags at end of each work day.
30 3. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered surfaces.
31 Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to
32 scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
33 4. Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus
34 materials and debris.
35 5. Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose
36 of same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
37 6. Clean equipment and dispose of wash water / solvents as well as all other cleaning and
38 protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint
39 removers / strippers in accordance with the
40 7. Safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
41 8. Repainting of Existing Finishes:
42 a. Refer to MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual and Section 09 9005 for repainting of
43 existing finishes.
44 b. Use finish coat of respective new surface paint system for minor repair of existing
45 finishes. Use system primer where existing finishes are damaged down to bare
46 surface.
47 C. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by
48 painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and
49 repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
50 1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
51 temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after
52 completion of painting operations.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9000 - 13 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
At completion of work of other trades, touch -up and restore all damaged or defaced
painted surfaces.
3 3.07 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
4 A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
5 1. Items fully factory- finished unless specifically noted.
6 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.
7 B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems.
8 C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.
9 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background
10 surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
11 2. Paint shop - primed items occurring in finished areas.
12 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are
13 visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.
14 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to
15 match face panels.
16 3.08 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS
17 A. Exterior Paint and Coating Systems:
18 1. Paint EXTERIOR surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual
19 requirements:
20 a. Concrete Vertical Surfaces:
21 1) EXT 3.1 C - Waterborne light industrial Coating.
22 (a) Coats
23 (1) Primer (finish system - DSD3) - Full prime coat. Product - #161
24 (2) Exterior W.B. Light Industrial Coating /2 Coats / Product-#163
25 b. Cementitious Composition Board Surfaces: (vertical surfaces, horizontal soffits).
26 1) EXT 3.3A - Latex finish.
27 (a) Coats:
28 (1) Primer / 1 Coat / Product - "Hardie - PrimePlus ".
29 (2) Semi Gloss Waterborne Finish / 2 Coats / Product #11.
30 The first coat shall be applied at a 50% tinting of the color selected.
31 Architect or Owner shall be contacted between coats to verify and
32 approve first application.
33 The second coat shall be applied at a 100% tinting of the color
34 selected.
35 c. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: (ferrous metals - includes traffic control
36 gates, metal decks, metal trusses, trellis, and joists)
37 1) EXT 5.1A - Quick dry enamel finish.
38 (a) Coats
39 (1) Alkyd Metal Primer (Quick Dry) / 1 Coat / Product - #76
40 (2) Alkyd Gloss Enamel Finish / 2 Coats / Product - #94
41 d. Galvanized Metal: (not chromate passivated) - For high contact / high traffic areas
42 (bollards, lintels, ladders, railings, miscellaneous. steel, pipes, etc.) - For low contact /
43 low traffic areas (overhead decking, downspout brackets, ducts, gutters, flashing,
44 etc.)
45 1) EXT 5.313 Alkyd finish.
46 (a) Coats:
47 (1) Latex Galvanized Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #26
48 (2) Alkyd Gloss Enamel -Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product - #94
49 e. Galvanized Metal: (doors and frames)
50 1) EXT 5.313 Alkyd finish.
51 (a) Coats:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9000 - 14 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
(1) Spot Prime
2
(2) Alkyd Anti - Corrosive Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #79
3
(3) Silicone Alkyd Enamel (with Industrial Base Solvent Colorant #844)
4
(G -5 - semi gloss) / 2 Coats / Product - #94
5
f.
Shop Primed Metal: (roof hatch and roof scuttles)
6
1) EXT 5.313 Alkyd finish.
7
(a) Coats:
8
(1) Spot Prime
9
(2) Cementitious Galvanized Metal Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #26
10
(3) Alkyd Gloss Enamel -Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product - #94
11
g.
Pre - Primed Metal: (flashing and gutters)
12
1) EXT 5.313 Alkyd finish.
13
(a) Coats:
14
(1) Spot Prime
15
(2) Cementitious Galvanized Metal Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #26
16
(3) Alkyd Gloss Enamel -Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product - #94
17
h.
Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, siding,
18
fencing, etc.)
19
1) EXT 6.2A - Latex finish (over alkyd primer).
20
(a) Coats:
21
(1) Solvent Based Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #5
22
(2) Semi Gloss Waterborne Finish / 2 Coats / Product #11
23
i.
Dressed Lumber: (doors, door and window frames, casings, battens, smooth fascias,
24
etc.)
25
1) EXT 6.3A - Latex finish.
26
(a) Coats:
27
(1) Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #6
28
(2) Semi Gloss Waterborne Finish / 2 Coats / Product #11.
29
The first coat shall be applied at a 50% tinting of the color selected.
30
Architect or Owner shall be contacted between coats to verify and
31
approve first application.
32
The second coat shall be applied at a 100% tinting of the color
33
selected.
34
j.
Wood Paneling: (plywood siding, soffits, etc.)
35
1) EXT 6.4K - Latex finish (over latex primer).
36
(a) Coats:
37
(1) Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #6
38
(2) Low Sheen Waterborne Finish / 2 Coats / Product #15.
39
The first coat shall be applied at a 50% tinting of the color selected.
40
Architect or Owner shall be contacted between coats to verify and
41
approve first application.
42
The second coat shall be applied at a 100% tinting of the color
43
selected.
44
2. Note The Following For Exterior Paint:
45
a.
Downspouts: Shall be painted out same color as their background. PVC downspouts
46
painting preparations: Fine sand to degloss and provide tooth. Provide one coat
47
primer, ICI Devoe, Devguard #4160, or equivalent and two finish coats 100% acrylic
48
satin enamel. (Tint primer coat similar to top coat for best hide).
49
b.
Paintout: All miscellaneous mechanical, vents, louvers, or other detail against brick
50
will receive a brick matching paint; all similar items against neutral walls shall paint
51
out as required USING APPROPRIATE PRODUCT FOR SURFACE TYPE. No metal
52
or other surfaces requiring special paint will be accepted if painted with improper
53
product (e.g. latex over unprimed metal).
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9000 - 15 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
c. Spot prime all factory or shop primed items damaged in shipment or installation with
primer compatible to existing primer and top coats.
B. Interior Paint and Coating Systems:
1. Paint INTERIOR surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual
requirements:
a. Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits)
1) INT 3.1 D - Alkyd finish.
(a) Coats:
(1) Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #50
(2) Semi Gloss Waterborne Finish / 2 Coats / Product #47
b. Concrete Masonry Units: (smooth and split face block and brick)
1) INT 4.2A - Latex finish.
(a) Coats:
(1) Latex block filler / 1 Coat / Product - #4
(2) Acrylic - Semi -Gloss Finish / 2 Coats / Product #141
c. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: (columns, beams, joists, etc.)
1) INT 5.1 E - Alkyd finish.
(a) Coats:
(1) Spot Prime
(2) Alkyd Metal Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #76
(3) Alkyd Enamel — Semi -Gloss Finish Coat / 2 Coats / Product #47
d. Galvanized Metal: (doors, frames, railings, miscellaneous. steel, pipes, overhead
decking, ducts, etc.)
1) INT 5.3C - Alkyd finish (over cementitious primer).
(a) Coats:
(1) Cementitious Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #26
(2) Alkyd — Semi -Gloss Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product #47
e. Metal: (doors and frames; vision panel frames)
1) INT 5.3A - Latex finish.
(a) Coats:
(1) Spot Prime
(2) Solvent Base Corrosion Resistant. Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #76
(3) Acrylic Enamel — Semi -Gloss Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product #141
f. Pre - Primed Metal: (miscellaneous. framing, smoke hatches, roof scuttle, steel
trusses, steel deck, etc.)
1) INT 5.3C - Alkyd finish (over waterborne primer).
(a) Coats:
(1) Spot Prime
(2) Alkyd Metal Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #76
(3) Alkyd Enamel —Gloss Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product #48
g. Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, etc.)
1) INT 6.2D - Latex finish (over latex primer).
(a) Coats:
(1) Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #39
(2) Acrylic Enamel — Semi -Gloss Finish/ 2 Coats/ Product #141
h. Dimension Lumber: (wood trusses and underside of decking, etc.)
1) INT 6.2J - Polyurethane varnish finish (over stain).
(a) Coats:
(1) Uniforming Sealer / 1 Coat / Product - #102 (see Note 1)
(2) Penetrating Semi - Transparent Stain / 1 Coat / Product - #90
(3) Fast Drying — Varnish Finish / 2 Coats / Product #56
i. Dressed (Stained) Lumber: (including, door and window frames, casings, molding,
running wood trim etc.)
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
09 9000 - 16
PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
1) INT 6.3D - Alkyd varnish finish (over stain).
2
(a) Coats:
3
(1) Solvent Base — Wood Stain / 1 Coat / Product - #90
4
(2) Note: See Section 09 9999 - Color Selections for any special required
5
stain colors.
6
(3) Solvent Base — Sealer / 1 Coat / Product - #102
7
(4) Quick- Drying — Varnish Finish / 2 Coats / Product #56
8
j. Glu -Lam Beams: (see Note 2)
9
1) INT 6.3D - Alkyd varnish finish (over stain).
10
(a) Coats:
11
(1) Solvent Base — Wood Stain / 1 Coat / Product - #90
12
(2) Solvent Base — Sealer / 1 Coat / Product - #102
13
(3) Quick- Drying — Varnish Finish / 2 Coats / Product #56
14
k. Dressed (Painted) Lumber: (including, door and window frames, casings, molding,
15
running wood trim etc.)
16
1) INT 6.3T - Latex finish (over latex primer)
17
(a) Coats:
18
(1) Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #39
19
(2) Acrylic Enamel — Semi -Gloss Finish/ 2 Coats/ Product #141
20
I. Wood Paneling and Casework: (MDO, partitions, panels, shelving, millwork, etc.)
21
1) INT 6AA - Latex finish (over alkyd sealer).
22
(a) Coats:
23
(1) Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #39
24
(2) Acrylic Enamel — Semi -Gloss Finish/ 2 Coats/ Product #141
25
2) INT 6AP - Pigmented fire retardant coating. (ULC rated).
26
Provide for electrical and communication backerboards.
27
(a) Coats:
28
(1) As required by Product used.
29
(b) Product (MPI #64):
30
(1) Benjamin Moore - 220 Latex Fire Retardant Paint.
31
(2) Columbia Paint CGI - Flame Control / Flat Intemescencent Fire
32
Retardant.
33
(3) ICI Paints - - Flame Control / Flat Intemescencent Fire Retardant.
34
(4) PPG - Speedhide / Fire Resistant Coating.
35
(5) Sherwin - Williams - - Flame Control / Flat Intemescencent Fire
36
Retardant.
37
m. Plaster and Gypsum Board Surfaces: (gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock type
38
material', etc., and textured finishes)
39
1) INT 9.213 - Latex finish (over latex sealer).
40
(a) Coats:
41
(1) Waterborne Primer Sealer / 1 Coat / Product - #50. Coordinate with
42
Gypsum Board Assemblies (drywall) contractor for application of
43
primer coat prior to the application of wall board texture. Primer coat
44
prior to texture is to be provide by this Section.
45
(2) Waterborne Primer Sealer / 1 Coat / Product - #50. Applied after
46
texture application.
47
(3) Acrylic — Semi -Gloss Finish / 2 Coats / Product #141
48
n. Plaster and Gypsum Board Surfaces: (gypsum wallboard with Epoxy Finish)
49
1) INT 9.2F - Waterborne epoxy (tile -like) finish.
50
(a) Coats:
51
(1) Bonding Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #17
52
(2) Waterborne Epoxy — Semi -Gloss Finish / 2 Coats / Product #115
53
2. Interior Schedule Notes:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9000 - 17 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 a. Note 1 - Uniforming Sealer: Three pounds cut clear shellac reduced nine parts
2 denatured alcohol to one part shellac. After all wood surfaces to be stained are totally
3 prepared, spread one uniform thin coat over all surfaces. (Do not over saturate
4 surface.)
5 b. General Note For Interior Paint:
6 1) Exposed Piping: All exposed piping including sprinkler piping shall be painted.
7 One coat Alkyd Rust - Inhibitive Primer and two coats Alkyd Enamel. Premium
8 Grade. Color as selected by Architect.
9 3.09 PAINT RECORDS REQUIREMENTS
10 A. The painting contractor shall maintain, keep current and in good condition through the duration
11 of the job, all drawings and schedules indicating specified products and their locations of
12 application. These records shall be returned to the Owner, through the Architect, at the end of
13 the job to facilitate future building maintenance.
14 B. Because the painting contractor may prefer to use a different paint manufacturer (requiring the
15 Architect's approval) from the one specified, he is required to fill out the PAINT PRODUCTS
16 SCHEDULE to indicate the alternate manufacturer and product number. (See sample schedule
17 following this Section).
18 C. Also, when a scheduled color is to be used in more than one paint type, i.e. on wood, metal or
19 concrete, the requested information shall be filled in on the PAINT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE in
20 the spaces provided in the Paint Record Schedule. (See sample schedule following this
21 Section).
22 D. See attached "Paint Record Schedule" following this Section.
23 END OF SECTION
24
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9000 - 18 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (NEW
CONSTRUCTION)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 09 9005
2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING STRUCTURES)
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
5 A. Extent of Painting:
6 1. All surfaces scheduled and indicated on the drawings shall be prepared, painted, and
7 finished as described in the following contents of this Section 09 9005. Exceptions to this
8 rule are natural finishes of materials specifically noted below in paragraph "Surfaces Not
9 To Be Painted."
10 a. Where surfaces and materials have not been scheduled or noted for paint finish,
11 paint with similar material and number of coats as on similarly scheduled or noted
12 surface.
13 b. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to
14 shop - priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.
15 B. Accent Painting:
16 1. Approximately 15% or less of total area will consist of "medium to deep colors" which may
17 require one additional coat above those specified for custom or premium finishes. This
18 accent is in addition to any accent specified in graphics application.
19 C. Surfaces Not To Be Painted:
20 1. Pre - Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when
21 factory- finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to)
22 roofing, brick, glass, plastic laminate toilet enclosures, acoustic materials, architectural
23 woodwork and casework, and finish mechanical and electrical equipment, including
24 sprinkler heads, light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets.
25 2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such
26 as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation
27 spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
28 3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized
29 aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials
30 will not require finish painting.
31 4. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical
32 and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices,
33 motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting.
34 5. Do not paint over any code required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and
35 Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or
36 nomenclature plates.
37 D. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications.
38 1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included
39 under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and
40 similar items.
41 2. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural
42 woodwork, wood casework and shop- fabricated or factory -built mechanical and electrical
43 equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications.
44 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
45 A. Surface preparation to existing structures.
46 B. Field application of paints to existing structures.
47 C. All labor, materials, tools and other equipment, services and supervision required to complete
48 all interior and exterior painting and decorating work as indicated on Finish Schedules and to
49 the full extent of the drawings and specifications.
50 D. Work under this contract shall also include, but not necessarily be limited to:
2015-19/ YCS Ed Center TI 099005-1 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
1.
Moisture testing of substrates.
2
2.
Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of painting, including
3
cleaning, small crack repair, patching, caulking, and making good surfaces and areas to
4
the limits defined under MPI preparation requirements.
5
3.
Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation. in
6
accordance with MPI and wall covering manufacturer's requirements.
7
4.
Specific pre- treatments noted herein or specified in the MPI Architectural Painting
8
Specification Manual.
9
5.
Priming (except where pre - primed with an approved primer under other Sections of work)
10
and painting of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, ornamental metal and primed steel
11
equipment.
12
6.
Priming and back - priming of wood materials as noted herein or specified in the MPI
13
Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
14
7.
Painting of all semi - concealed areas (e.g. inside of light troughs and valances, behind
15
grilles, and projecting edges above and below sight lines).
16
8.
Painting and finishing of all exposed to view elevator equipment and components (i.e.
17
doors and door frames) unless pre- finished.
18
9.
Painting of exposed to view mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing) services and
19
equipment, (e.g., ducts, sprinkler piping, etc.), and electrical work to extent noted on Finish
20
Schedule unless pre- finished.
21
10.
Provision of safe and adequate ventilation as required over and above temporary
22
ventilation supplied by others, where toxic and /or volatile / flammable materials are being
23
used.
24
11.
Refer to drawings and schedules (e.g., Finish Schedule) for type, location and extent of
25
finishes required, and include all touch -ups and field painting necessary to complete work
26
shown, scheduled or specified.
27
12.
This Section along with the drawings forms part of the Contract documents and is to be
28
read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts.
29
13.
Provisions for 2 coat systems.
30
a. The first coat shall be applied at a 50% tinting of the color selected
31
E. Records of Paints Used: Contractor shall retain in good condition all paint schedules, marked
32
plans and paint samples used for job quality and color control. These are to be turned over to
33
the
Owner at the end of the job.
34
1.
COLOR SCHEDULES which are provided to the Contractor are frequently, due to the
35
Contractor's preference of paint supplier, "crossed over" with colors being matched by
36
another paint supplier (other than the supplier whose colors were specified).
37
2.
Since it is not possible to predict what supplier and therefore which product numbers will
38
be used to complete a job, the color schedule (master) has extra blanks under each color
39
for the insertion of product information which must be supplied by the paint contractor
40
when a scheduled color may have to be mixed in more than one product type to paint
41
different surfaces.
42
3.
For example: Walls are scheduled to be painted color 'Y'. If metal louvers set in these
43
walls require a different product type other than the type scheduled for the walls, use the
44
blank space under "x" in the schedule to record the paint product and its number, thereby
45
facilitating the Owner's purchase of the proper product when maintenance is required.
46
4.
See sample at end of this section.
47 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
48 A. Unless otherwise noted, the following work or conditions are not included under this Section of
49 work:
50 1. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
51 a. Coordinate with Gypsum Board Assemblies (drywall) contractor for application of
52 primer coat prior to the application of wall board texture. Primer coat prior to texture is
53 to be provide by this Section.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 099005-2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
2. Section 09 7200 - Wall Coverings.
2
3. Division 22 and 23 - Mechanical (painting, stenciling, banding of mechanical systems).
3
4. Division 26 - Electrical (painting, stenciling, banding of electrical systems).
4
1.04 REFERENCES
5
A.
Except as hereinafter specified, for materials and workmanship, conform to the "Architectural
6
Painting Specification Manual" hereinafter referred to as "MPI," as published by The Masters
7
Painters and Decorators Association.
8
B.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
9
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
10
C.
ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
11
2003.
12
1.05 DEFINITIONS
13
A.
Conform to MPI and ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
14
1.06 SUBMITTALS
15
A.
See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
16
B.
Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
17
C.
Samples: Submit three painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color
18
and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on index weight paper stock, 8
19
1/2x11 inch (204 x 292 mm) in size.
20
D.
Samples for wood surfaces: Samples for surfaces to be stained or clear finished shall be
21
submitted on no less than 6 inch lengths of material representative of the surface to be stained
22
and /or clear coated.
23
1. Three samples required.
24
E.
Glulams and other large items shall receive small sample patches of color in inconspicuous
25
areas at the jobsite before coating of entire surface if approved, unless approval is waived in
26
writing by the Architect or consulting representative.
27 F. Submit two sets of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to commencement of work for
28 review and for posting at job site as required.
29 G. When painting occupied areas, submit work schedule for various stages of work for the
30 Consultant's review and Owner's approval if requested.
31 H. At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color
32 coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance. See Paint Record
33 Requirements at the end of this Section.
34 I. At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials as noted herein and
35 obtain a signed receipt.
36 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
37 A. This Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall
38 show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters
39 throughout the duration of the work. When requested, Contractor shall provide a list of the last
40 three comparable jobs including, name and location, specifying authority / project manager,
41 start / completion dates and value of the painting work.
42 B. Only qualified journeymen who have a Tradesman Qualification Certificate of Proficiency shall
43 be engaged in painting and decorating work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work
44 under the direct supervision of a qualified journeyman in accordance with trade regulations.
45 C. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to the standards contained in the
46 latest edition of the Master Painters Institute (MPI) Architectural Painting Specification Manual
47 (hereafter referred to as the MPI.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 099005-3 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 D. Painting Manual as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having
2 jurisdiction.
3 E. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the Approved Product List
4 section of the MPI Painting Manual.
5 F. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL PAINT APPLICATION BE PERMITTED WITHOUT
6 SPECIFIED SAMPLE APPROVAL. ANY PRODUCT APPLIED WHICH IS NOT ACCORDING
7 TO SPECIFICATIONS AND SIGNED OFF FOR PROPER COLOR WILL BE SUBJECT TO
8 REMOVAL AND REPAINT AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.
9 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
10 A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.
11 B. Conform to the latest edition of Industrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by applicable
12 authorities having jurisdiction in regard to site safety (ladders, scaffolding, ventilation, etc.).
13 C. Conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction in regard to the storage, mixing,
14 application and disposal of all paint related materials.
15 1.09 MOCK -UP
16 A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock -up.
17 B. When requested by the Architect, provide duplicate minimum 300 mm (12 ") square samples of
18 surfaces or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified paint or coating in colors,
19 gloss /sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Manual standards for review and approval.
20 When approved, samples shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on -site
21 surface with one of each sample retained on -site.
22 C. When requested by the Architect, prepare and paint designated surface, area, room or item (in
23 each color scheme) to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing
24 selected colors, gloss / sheen, textures and workmanship to MPI Painting Manual standards for
25 review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and /or items shall become
26 acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on -site work.
27 D. Mock -up may remain as part of the Work.
28 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
29 A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
30 1. Deliver all painting materials in sealed, original labeled containers bearing manufacturer's
31 name, brand name, type of paint or coating and color designation, standard compliance,
32 materials content as well as mixing and /or reducing and application requirements.
33 B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
34 code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
35 instructions for mixing and reducing.
36 C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 50° F (10° C) and a maximum of 85°
37 F (29.4° C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
38 1. Store all paint materials in original labeled containers in a secure (lockable), dry, heated
39 and well ventilated single designated area meeting the minimum requirements of both
40 paint manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction and at a minimum ambient
41 temperature of 50° F (10° C). Only material used on this project to be stored on site.
42 D. Where toxic and /or volatile / explosive / flammable materials are being used, provide adequate
43 fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g.
44 no smoking) as required.
45 E. Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and
46 spontaneous combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that
47 constitute a fire hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed
48 and rated containers and removed from the site on a daily basis.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 099005-4 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
2 A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
3 ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
4 1. UNLESS specifically pre- approved by the specifying body, (Paint Inspection Agency) and
5 the applied product manufacturer, perform no painting or decorating work when the
6 ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 50° F (10° C) for both interior and
7 exterior work.
8 2. Perform no painting or decorating work unless adequate continuous ventilation and
9 sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures
10 above minimum requirements for 24 hours before, during and after paint application.
11 Provide supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from
12 existing system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements.
13 3. Perform no painting or decorating work when the relative humidity is above 85% or when
14 the dew point is less than 5° F (3° C) variance between the air / surface temperature.
15 4. Perform no painting or decorating work when the maximum moisture content of the
16 substrate exceeds:
17 a. 12 % for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick /block).
18 b. 15% for wood.
19 C. 12 % for plaster and gypsum board.
20 5. Conduct all moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except
21 test concrete floors for moisture using a simple cover patch test.
22 6. Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
23 7. Apply paint only to dry, clean, properly cured and adequately prepared surfaces in areas
24 where dust is no longer generated by construction activities such that airborne particles
25 will not affect the quality of finished surfaces.
26 8. Perform no painting or decorating work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux (30 foot
27 candles) is provided on surfaces to be painted or decorated. Adequate lighting facilities
28 shall be provided by the General Contractor.
29 B. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 Ix) measured mid - height at substrate surface.
30 1.12 SCHEDULING
31 A. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades
32
B.
Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building.
33
Obtain written authorization from Consultant / Owner for changes in work schedule.
34
C.
Painting in occupied facilities to be carried out during hours in accordance with Owner's
35
operating requirements (during silent hours)(on weekends). Schedule work such that painted
36
surfaces will have dried before occupants are affected.
37
D.
Phasing of work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 1000 - Summary of
38
Work.
39
1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS
40
A.
See Section 01 7800 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
41
B.
Supply 1 gallon (4 L) of each; store where directed.
42
1. At project completion provide 4 liters (1 gallon) of each type and color of paint from same
43
production run (batch mix) used in unopened cans, properly labeled and identified for
44
Owner's later use in maintenance. Store where directed.
45
C.
Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
46
PART 2
PRODUCTS
47
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
48
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved:
49
1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.
50
2. Glidden Professional (ICI Dulux).
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 099005-5 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3. Parker Paint: www.parkerpaint.com.
2 4. Sherwin - Williams: www.sherwin - williams.com.
3 5. Rodda: www.roddapaint.com
4 B. Unless otherwise specified conform to Standards of MPI for materials; this includes paint,
5 varnish, stain, enamel, lacquer, fillers and related paint products and materials not specifically
6 indicated, but required for prime, intermediate and finish coats.
7 C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
8 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
9 A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field - catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments:
10 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a
11 homogeneous coating.
12 2. For good flow and brushing properties.
13 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
14 B. Materials:
15 1. All materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners,
16 solvents, etc.) shall be in accordance with the MPI Painting Manual Approved Product
17 listing and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
18 2. Other paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, etc. shall be the highest quality product
19 of an approved manufacturer listed in the MPI Painting Manual and shall be compatible
20 with other coating materials as required.
21 3. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure
22 free of blemishes or sags.
23 4. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed
24 ratings designated by local Code requirements and /or authorities having jurisdiction.
25 C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
26 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the
27 following:
28 a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
29 Architectural Coatings.
30 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
31 Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
32 at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
33 D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
34 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds
35 (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
36 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di
37 (2- ethylhexyl) phthalate, di -n -butyl phthalate, di -n -octyl phthalate, 1,2- dichlorobenzene,
38 diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium,
39 isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene
40 chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1- trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
41 2.03 EQUIPMENT
42 A. Painting and Decorating Equipment: to best trade standards for type of product and application.
43 B. Spray Painting Equipment: of ample capacity, suited to the type and consistency of paint or
44 coating being applied and kept clean and in good working order at all times.
45 2.04 MIXING AND TINTING
46 A. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre- approved, all paint shall be ready -mixed and
47 pre- tinted. Re -mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break -up of
48 lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity.
49 B. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
50 written instructions.
2015-19/ YCS Ed Center TI 099005-6 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do
2 not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water -based paints.
3 D. Thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If
4 directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide
5 copy of instructions to Consultant.
6 2.05 FINISH AND COLORS
7 A. Unless otherwise specified herein, all painting work shall be in accordance with MPI "Custom"
8 Grade finish requirements.
9 B. Colors shall be as selected by the Architect from a manufacturer's full range of colors.
10 1. Color selection will be based on (five (5) base colors and (three) accent colors (with a
11 maximum of (one (1) deep or bright color). No more than (eight (8) colors will be selected
12 for the entire project and no more than (three (3) colors will be selected in each area. Note
13 that this does not include pre- finished items by others, e.g. flashings, windows, etc.).
14 2. Interior colors and /or patterns shall be consistent (throughout each unit) with two (2) or
15 three (3) separate schemes prepared. Allow for a minimum of three (3) exterior colors for
16 fascia, trims, doors and frames.
17 3. Walls shall be painted the same color within a given area.
18 4. Ceilings (except those having a spray textured coating) shall be painted (white) (the same
19 color as walls).
20 5. Except as noted herein or indicated on the Finish Schedule, walls and ceiling surfaces
21 shall be painted in accordance with the following criteria:
22 6. All areas (except as noted): washable latex eggshell finish over a prime / sealer coat.
23 7. Laundry facilities / rooms, public wash / shower / bathrooms, residential kitchens and
24 bathrooms and ensuites: (washable latex) (alkyd) over appropriate prime /sealer coat.
25 8. Public change / wash / shower rooms and institutional facility bathing and shower rooms:
26 tile -like finish for wet surfaces.
27 9. Corridors shall be painted the same color on all floors with three (3) separate two (2) color
28 schemes prepared for doors and trim.
29 10. Designated rooms / spaces shall be painted using different colors or more than one color
30 than typical rooms in accordance with Finish Schedule requirements with a minimum of
31 two (2) colors required.
32 11. (Doors shall be painted a different color than door frames and trim with walls a different
33 color than either)(Doors, frames and trim shall be painted a different color than walls)(the
34 same color as walls). Unless otherwise noted all doors, frames and trim shall be painted
35 using a semi -gloss finish.
36 2.06 GLOSS AND SHEEN RATING
37 A. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the
38 following MPI values:
39
Gloss Level Description Units @ 60 degrees Units @ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat finish 0 to 5 10 max.
G2 Velvet finish 0 to 10 10 t0 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin finish 20 to 35 35 min.
G5 Semi -Gloss finish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss finish 70 to85
G7 High -Gloss finish >85
40
41 B. Gloss level ratings of all painted surfaces shall be as specified herein.
42 2.07 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
43 A. Patching Material: Latex filler.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 099005-7 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
B.
Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
2
PART 3
EXECUTION
3
3.01 EXAMINATION
4
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
5
B.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
6
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
7
1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
8
acceptable to Applicator.
9
C.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise
10
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
11
D.
Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
12
conditions within any particular area.
13
E.
Test shop - applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
14
F.
The degree of surface deterioration (DSD) shall be assessed using the assessment criteria
15
indicated in the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual. In general the MPI - DSD ratings and
16
descriptions are as follows:
CONDITION DESCRIPTION
DSD -0 Sound Surface (may include visual (aesthetic) defects
that do not affect film's protective properties).
DSD -1 Slightly Deteriorated Surface (may show fading; gloss
reduction, slight surface contamination, minor pin
holes scratches, etc.).
DSD -2 Moderately Deteriorated Surface (small areas of
peeling, flaking, slight cracking, staining, etc.).
DSD -3 Severely Deteriorated Surface (heavy peeling, flaking,
cracking, checking, scratches, scuffs, abrasion, small
holes and gouges).
DSD -4 Substrate Damage (repair or replacement of surface
required).
17
18
3.02 PREPARATION
19
A.
Prepare all exterior and interior surfaces for repainting in accordance with MPI Repainting
20
Manual requirements. Refer to the MPI Repainting Manual in regard to specific requirements
21
for the following:
22
1. environmental conditions.
23
2. pH testing.
24
3. acid etching.
25
4. rust stain removal.
26
5. mildew removal.
27
6. asphalt surfaces.
28
7. vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces.
29
8. clay and concrete masonry units.
30
9. structural steel and miscellaneous metals.
31
10. steel exposed to high heat.
32
11. galvanized and zinc coated metal.
33
12. aluminum and copper surfaces.
34
13. glue laminated beams and columns.
35
14. dimension and dressed lumber.
36
15. wood doors.
37
16. wood paneling and casework.
38
17. wood decks, floors, stairs and steps.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 099005-8 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
18. wood shingles and shakes.
2
19. stucco, plaster and gypsum board.
3
20. acoustical panels and tiles.
4
21. canvas and cotton coverings.
5
22. bituminous coated surfaces.
6
B.
Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
7
escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
8
1. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures,
9
and similar items in place and not to be finish - painted, or provide surface - applied
10
protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for
11
complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of
12
each space or area, reinstall removed items.
13
C.
Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or
14
repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
15
1. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so
16
that dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet,
17
newly - painted surfaces.
18
D.
Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes.
19
E.
Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra - sodium phosphate
20
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
21
F.
Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or
22
alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri- sodium
23
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding
24
metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
25
G.
Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
26
defects after repair.
27
H.
Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex
28
patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high
29
alkali surfaces.
30 I. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit
31 adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer.
32 J. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure
33 water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately
34 following cleaning.
35 K. Copper Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination by steam, high pressure water, or
36 solvent washing. Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following cleaning.
37 L. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
38 solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
39 M. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt,
40 and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or
41 sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,
42 ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot
43 prime after repairs.
44 N. Shop- Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer
45 and rust. Feather edges to make touch -up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent.
46 Prime bare steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop - primed item.
47 O. Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
48 knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
49 dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 099005-9 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 P. Interior Wood Items to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal
2 knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has
3 dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25
4 percent with thinner.
5 Q. Glue- Laminated Beams: Prior to finishing, wash surfaces with solvent, remove grease and dirt.
6 3.03 APPLICATION
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop - priming and surface treatment
specified under other sections of work.
2. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop - primed and touch -up
painted, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Transition Coat: When a system is called for over a previous coating with which it is not
entirely compatible (by either its chemical type or condition), a special type of primer may
be required to assure good adhesion and "tying" the new system to the old.
4. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and
which has not been prime coated by others.
a. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn - through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
5. Spot Priming: Items that have been factory primed or shop primed and are damaged in
shipment or during the construction process may require spot priming where indicated in
paint schedule. Paint contractor shall verify that the spot primer specified is compatible
with the shop primer applied during the fabrication process.
6. Prime coat to be applied prior to and after application of sprayed -on texture (see Section
09 2116).
7. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
8. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules" of the contract
documents.
9. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned,
retreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and
before subsequent surface deterioration.
a. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause
lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
b. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if
not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.
c. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final
coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special
attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and
exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
d. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will
not be acceptable.
e. For painting of cast concrete surfaces that may have areas of imperfection, (i.e.) form
lines, rock pockets, etc., either spray paint or brush out these rough areas to assure
total surface coverage.
f. Vary color of successive paint and enamel coats to a distinguishable difference but
similar to finish coat.
g. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
09 9005 - 10 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 h. Spray Paint Application: Surfaces coated by spraying method shall be backrolled
2 immediately after application to redistribute paint film for a more consistent and even
3 coverage. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid
4 marks, or other surface imperfections.
5 i. Completed Work: Painter responsible for improper workmanship or misuse of
6 finishing materials; refinish at Painter's expense and leave in first class condition, as
7 approved by Architect. Surfaces damaged after painting and decorating is completed
8 shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor and repaired at General
9 Contractor's expense to condition approved by Architect.
10 j. Coating application prior to installation: For exterior wood siding, standing and
11 running trim, i.e. fascia, rake boards or other miscellaneous type of finish wood trim,
12 apply a coat or primer or stain, dependent upon specified finish, to all surfaces and
13 cut ends which will be concealed after installation.
14 k. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
15 surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime
16 coat only before final installation of equipment.
17 I. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat,
18 non - specular black paint.
19 m. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match
20 exposed surfaces.
21 n. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless
22 otherwise indicated.
23 o. For surfaces receiving 2 coats of stain, apply as follows: Initial application method at
24 contractor's discretion. However, the stain is then to be back brushed with flat iron
25 brushes to work stain well into the surface of the material. No substitute methods.
26 p. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass smooth surface
27 film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs,
28 brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
29 1) Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
30 B. Two (2) Coat Finish: For applications that are specified to receive (2) two finish coats, apply as
31 follows:
32 1. The first coat shall be applied at a 50% tinting of the color selected.
33 2. Architect or Owner shall be contacted between coats to verify and approve first
34 application.
35 3. The second coat shall be applied at a 100% tinting of the color selected.
36 C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.
37 D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
38 applied.
39 E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding
40 coat unless otherwise approved.
41 F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
42 to applying next coat.
43 G. Substrate defects shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting particularly after
44 the first coat of paint. Start of finish painting of effective surfaces (e.g. gypsum board) shall
45 indicate acceptance of substrate and any costs of making good defects shall be borne by the
46 painter including re- painting of entire defective surface (no touch -up painting).
47 H. Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and /or test all surfaces under adequate illumination,
48 ventilation and temperature requirements.
49 I. Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and /or until all environmental conditions
50 (heating, ventilation, lighting and completion of other subtrade work) are acceptable for
51 applications of products.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9005 - 11 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
J.
Apply paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual Premium Grade finish
2
requirements.
3
K.
Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified
4
applicators as noted under Quality Assurance.
5
L.
Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental
6
conditions encourage flash- rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer's paint
7
specifications require earlier applications.
8
M.
Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper
9
consistency and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
10
N.
Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.
11
O.
Unless otherwise approved by the painting inspection agency, apply a minimum of four coats of
12
paint where deep or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results.
13
P.
Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects
14
visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39 ").
15
Q.
Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer's directions
16
state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a following coat is applied.
17
3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
18
A.
Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all "unfinished" conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork
19
and other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent
20
surfaces, in the following areas:
21
1. Where exposed -to -view in all exterior and interior areas.
22
2. In all interior high humidity interior areas.
23
3. In all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.
24
B.
In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical
25
and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
26
C.
Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as
27
supplied by manufacturer of equipment.
28
D.
Do not paint over nameplates.
29
E.
Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers for a minimum
30
of 460 mm (18 ") or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one coat of matt
31
black (non - reflecting) paint.
32
F.
Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.
33
G.
Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
34
H.
Paint [yellow] or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification
35
requirements.
36
I.
Backprime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical
37
equipment before installation (gray, semi - gloss)(to match adjacent wall surface). Leave
38
equipment in original finish except for touch -up as required, and paint conduits, mounting
39
accessories and other unfinished items.
40
J.
Paint (exterior steel electrical light standards). Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation
41
equipment.
42
K.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
43
prior to finishing.
44
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
45
A.
All surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected.
46
B.
Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following
47
defects are apparent to the Painting Inspection Agency inspector:
2015-19/
YCS Ed Center TI 09 9005 - 12 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1. Runs, sags, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods.
2 2. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets,
3 corners and re- entrant angles.
4 3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.
5 4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the
6 weather.
7 5. Damage and /or contamination of paint due to wind blown contaminants (dust, sand blast
8 materials, salt spray, etc.).
9 C. Painted surfaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense of the
10 Contractor. Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas without
11 sufficient dry film thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs, sags of damaged paint shall be
12 removed by scraper or by sanding prior to application of paint.
13 D. Protection:
14 1. Protect all newly painted exterior surfaces from rain and snow, condensation,
15 contamination, dust, salt spray and freezing temperatures until paint coatings are
16 completely dry. Curing periods shall exceed the manufacturer's recommended minimum
17 time requirements.
18 2. Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of or limit or direct traffic away or around
19 work area as required.
20 3.06 CLEANING
21 A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
22 remove daily from site.
23 B. Clean -Up:
24 1. Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using
25 means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
26 2. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and
27 rags at end of each work day.
28 3. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered surfaces.
29 Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to
30 scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
31 4. Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus
32 materials and debris.
33 5. Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose
34 of same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
35 6. Clean equipment and dispose of wash water / solvents as well as all other cleaning and
36 protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint
37 removers / strippers in accordance with the
38 7. Safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
39 C. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by
40 painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and
41 repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
42 1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
43 temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after
44 completion of painting operations.
45 2. At completion of work of other trades, touch -up and restore all damaged or defaced
46 painted surfaces.
47 3.07 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
48 A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
49 1. Items fully factory- finished unless specifically noted.
50 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.
51 B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems.
2015-19/ YCS Ed Center TI 09 9005 - 13 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.
2 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background
3 surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
4 2. Paint shop - primed items occurring in finished areas.
5 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are
6 visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.
7 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to
8 match face panels.
9 3.08 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS
10 A. Exterior Paint and Coating Systems:
11 1. Paint EXTERIOR surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual
12 requirements:
13 a. Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits)
14 1) REX 3.1 C - Waterborne light industrial coating.
15 (a) Coats
16 (1) Primer (finish system - DSD3) - Full prime coat. Product - #161
17 (2) Exterior W.B. Light Industrial Coating /2 Coats / Product-#163
18 b. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: (ferrous metals - includes traffic control
19 gates)
20 1) REX 5.1A - Quick dry enamel finish.
21 (a) Coats
22 (1) Alkyd Metal Primer (Quick Dry) / 1 Coat / Product - #76
23 (2) Alkyd Gloss Enamel Finish / 2 Coats / Product - #94
24 c. Galvanized Metal: (not chromate passivated) - For high contact / high traffic areas
25 (bollards, lintels, ladders, railings, misc. steel, pipes, etc.) - For low contact / low
26 traffic areas (overhead decking, downspout brackets, ducts, gutters, flashing, etc.)
27 1) REX 5.313 Alkyd finish.
28 (a) Coats:
29 (1) Latex Galvanized Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #26
30 (2) Alkyd Gloss Enamel -Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product - #94
31 d. Galvanized Metal: (doors and frames)
32 1) REX 5.313 Alkyd finish.
33 (a) Coats:
34 (1) Spot Prime
35 (2) Alkyd Anti - Corrosive Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #79
36 (3) Silicone Alkyd Enamel (with Industrial Base Solvent Colorant #844)
37 (G -6) / 2 Coats / Product - #94
38 e. Shop Primed Metal: (roof hatch and roof scuttles)
39 1) REX 5.313 Alkyd finish.
40 (a) Coats:
41 (1) Spot Prime
42 (2) Cementitious Galvanized Metal Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #26
43 (3) Alkyd Gloss Enamel -Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product - #94
44 f. Pre - Primed Metal: (flashing and gutters)
45 1) REX 5.313 Alkyd finish.
46 (a) Coats:
47 (1) Spot Prime
48 (2) Cementitious Galvanized Metal Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #26
49 (3) Alkyd Gloss Enamel -Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product - #94
50 g. Glue Laminated Beams, Columns, and Trusses: See note requirements below for
51 cleaning and abrasive blasting of exposed glu -lam units and trusses.
52 1) REX 6.1 L - Latex finish (over latex primer).
53 (a) Coats: (Note special preparation requirements)
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9005 - 14 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
(1) Solvent Based Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #5
2
(2) Semi Gloss Waterborne Finish / 2 Coats / Product #11
3
h.
Medium Density Overlay Plywood - MDO:
4
1) REX 6.2A - Latex finish (over alkyd primer).
5
(a) Coats:
6
(1) Solvent Based Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #5
7
(2) Semi Gloss Waterborne Finish/ 2 Coats/ Product #11
8
i.
Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, siding,
9
fencing, etc.)
10
1) REX 6.2A - Latex finish (over alkyd primer).
11
(a) Coats:
12
(1) Solvent Based Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #5
13
(2) Semi Gloss Waterborne Finish/ 2 Coats/ Product #11
14
j.
Dressed Lumber: (doors, door and window frames, casings, battens, smooth facias,
15
etc.)
16
1) REX 6.3A - Latex finish.
17
2) Coats:
18
(a) Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #6
19
(b) Semi Gloss Waterborne Finish / 2 Coats / Product #11.
20
The first coat shall be applied at a 50% tinting of the color selected.
21
Architect or Owner shall be contacted between coats to verify and approve
22
first application.
23
The second coat shall be applied at a 100% tinting of the color selected.
24
k.
Wood Paneling: (plywood siding, fascias, soffits, etc.)
25
1) REX 6.4K - Latex finish (over latex primer).
26
(a) Coats:
27
(1) Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #6
28
(2) Low Sheen Waterborne Finish / 2 Coats / Product #15.
29
The first coat shall be applied at a 50% tinting of the color selected.
30
Architect or Owner shall be contacted between coats to verify and
31
approve first application.
32
The second coat shall be applied at a 100% tinting of the color
33
selected.
34
2. Note The Following For Exterior Paint:
35
a.
Downspouts: Shall be painted out same color as their background. PVC downspouts
36
painting preparations: Fine sand to degloss and provide tooth. Provide one coat
37
primer, ICI Devoe, Devguard #4160, or equivalent and two finish coats 100% acrylic
38
satin enamel. (Tint primer coat similar to top coat for best hide).
39
b.
Paintout: All miscellaneous mechanical, vents, louvers, or other detail against brick
40
will receive a brick matching paint; all similar items against neutral walls shall paint
41
out as required USING APPROPRIATE PRODUCT FOR SURFACE TYPE. No metal
42
or other surfaces requiring special paint will be accepted if painted with improper
43
product (e.g. latex over unprimed metal).
44
c.
Spot prime all factory or shop primed items damaged in shipment or installation with
45
primer compatible to existing primer and top coats.
46
d.
Cleaning and abrasive blasting of exposed glu -lam units and trusses prior to
47
application of finishes (walnut blasting - see Sections 06 1325 and 06 1800):
48
1) Exposed Members:
49
(a) Prior to the applications of transparent finishes to glu -lam units and trusses,
50
the Contractor shall remove all scuffs, discoloration, and staining by use of
51
walnut blasting. Contractor shall field determine coarse sizes of walnut
52
shells to be used. Coarse shall progress from coarse to fine to achieve the
53
best results of all scuffs, discoloration, and staining removal.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9005 - 15 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
Painter /Finisher shall have final determination when all scuffs, discoloration,
and staining removal are complete.
(b) Upon completion, the glue - laminated units and trusses shall be cleaned so
as to remove all dust and foreign matter.
B. Interior Paint and Coating Systems:
1. Paint INTERIOR surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual
requirements:
a. Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits)
1) RIN 3.1 D - Alkyd finish.
(a) Coats:
(1) Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #50
(2) Semi Gloss Waterborne Finish / 2 Coats / Product #47
b. Concrete Masonry Units: (smooth and split face block and brick)
1) RIN 4.2A - Latex finish.
(a) Coats:
(1) Latex block filler / 1 Coat / Product - #4
(2) Acrylic - Semi -Gloss Finish / 2 Coats / Product #141
c. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: (columns, beams, joists, etc.)
1) RIN 5.1 E - Alkyd finish.
(a) Coats:
(1) Spot Prime
(2) Alkyd Metal Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #76
(3) Alkyd Enamel —Gloss Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product #48
d. Galvanized Metal: (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking,
ducts, etc.)
1) RIN 5.3C - Alkyd [insert gloss level] finish (over cementitious primer).
(a) Coats:
(1) Cementitious Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #26
(2) Alkyd — Semi -Gloss Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product #47
e. Metal: (doors and frames)
1) RIN 5.3A - Latex finish.
(a) Coats:
(1) Spot Prime
(2) Solvent Base Corrosion Resistant. Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #76
(3) Acrylic Enamel — Semi -Gloss Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product #141
f. Pre - Primed Metal: (misc. framing, smoke hatches, roof scuttle, steel trusses, steel
deck, etc.)
1) RIN 5.3C - Alkyd finish (over waterborne primer).
(a) Coats:
(1) Spot Prime
(2) Alkyd Metal Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #76
(3) Alkyd Enamel —Gloss Finish Coat/ 2 Coats/ Product #48
g. Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, etc.)
1) RIN 6.2D - Latex finish (over latex primer).
(a) Coats:
(1) Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #39
(2) Acrylic Enamel — Semi -Gloss Finish/ 2 Coats/ Product #141
h. Dimension Lumber: (wood trusses and underside of decking, etc.)
1) RIN 6.2H - Polyurethane varnish finish (over stain).
(a) Coats:
(1) Uniforming Sealer / 1 Coat / Product - #102 (see Note 2)
(2) Penetrating Semi - Transparent Stain / 1 Coat / Product - #90
(3) Fast Drying — Varnish Finish / 2 Coats / Product #56
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
09 9005 - 16 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
i.
Dressed (Stained) Lumber: (including, door and window frames, casings, molding,
2
running wood trim etc.)
3
1) RIN 6.3D - Alkyd varnish finish (over stain).
4
(a) Coats:
5
(1) Solvent Base — Wood Stain / 1 Coat / Product - #90
6
(2) Solvent Base — Sealer / 1 Coat / Product - #102
7
(3) Quick- Drying — Varnish Finish / 2 Coats / Product #56
8
j.
Glu -Lam Beams: (see Note 2)
9
1) RIN 6.3D - Alkyd varnish finish (over stain).
10
(a) Coats:
11
(1) Solvent Base — Wood Stain / 1 Coat / Product - #90
12
(2) Solvent Base — Sealer / 1 Coat / Product - #102
13
(3) Quick- Drying — Varnish Finish / 2 Coats / Product #56
14
2)
15
k.
Dressed (Painted) Lumber: (including, door and window frames, casings, molding,
16
running wood trim etc.)
17
1) RIN 6.3U - Latex finish (over latex primer)
18
(a) Coats:
19
(1) Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #39
20
(2) Acrylic Enamel — Semi -Gloss Finish/ 2 Coats/ Product #141
21
I.
Wood Paneling and Casework: (MDO, partitions, panels, shelving, millwork, etc.)
22
1) RIN 6AA - Latex finish (over alkyd sealer).
23
(a) Coats:
24
(1) Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #39
25
(2) Acrylic Enamel — Semi -Gloss Finish/ 2 Coats/ Product #141
26
m.
Plaster and Gypsum Board Surfaces: (gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock type
27
material', etc., and textured finishes)
28
1) RIN 9.2A - Latex finish (over latex sealer).
29
(a) Coats:
30
(1) Waterborne Primer Sealer / 1 Coat / Product - #50
31
(2) Acrylic — Semi -Gloss Finish / 2 Coats / Product #141
32
n.
Plaster and Gypsum Board Surfaces: (gypsum wallboard with Epoxy Finish)
33
1) RIN 9.2E - Waterborne epoxy (tile -like) finish.
34
(a) Coats:
35
(1) Bonding Latex Primer / 1 Coat / Product - #17
36
(2) Waterborne Epoxy — Semi -Gloss Finish / 2 Coats / Product #115
37
o.
Athletic sport court striping for resilient tile floors and resilient athletic flooring.
38
1) Endura Manufacturing Co. Ltd.
39
12425 - 149 St, Edmonton Alberta. Phone: 1- 800 - 661 -9930.
40
(a) Coats:
41
(1) Primer / 1 coat / Product - PrimeLock.
42
(2) Finish / 1 coat / Product - EX -2C SFC Topcoat (2.5 mils).
43
2. Interior Schedule Notes:
44
a.
Note 1 - Uniforming Sealer: Three pounds cut clear shellac reduced nine parts
45
denatured alcohol to one part shellac. After all wood surfaces to be stained are totally
46
prepared, spread one uniform thin coat over all surfaces. (Do not over saturate
47
surface.)
48
b.
Note 2 - Cleaning and abrasive blasting of exposed glu -lam units and trusses prior to
49
application of finishes (walnut blasting - see Sections 06 1325 and 06 1800):
50
1) Exposed Members:
51
(a) Prior to the applications of transparent finishes to glu -lam units and trusses,
52
the Contractor shall remove all scuffs, discoloration, and staining by use of
53
walnut blasting. Contractor shall field determine coarse sizes of walnut
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9005 - 17 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 shells to be used. Coarse shall progress from coarse to fine to achieve the
2 best results of all scuffs, discoloration, and staining removal.
3 Painter /Finisher shall have final determination when all scuffs, discoloration,
4 and staining removal are complete.
5 (b) Upon completion, the glue - laminated units and trusses shall be cleaned so
6 as to remove all dust and foreign matter.
7 c. General Note For Interior Paint:
8 1) Exposed Piping: All exposed piping including sprinkler piping shall be painted.
9 One coat Alkyd Rust - Inhibitive Primer and two coats Alkyd Enamel. Premium
10 Grade. Color as selected by Architect.
11 3.09 PAINT RECORDS REQUIREMENTS
12 A. The painting contractor shall maintain, keep current and in good condition through the duration
13 of the job, all drawings and schedules indicating specified products and their locations of
14 application. These records shall be returned to the Owner, through the Architect, at the end of
15 the job to facilitate future building maintenance.
16 B. Because the painting contractor may prefer to use a different paint manufacturer (requiring the
17 Architect's approval) from the one specified, he is required to fill out the PAINT PRODUCTS
18 SCHEDULE to indicate the alternate manufacturer and product number. (See sample schedule
19 following this Section).
20 C. Also, when a scheduled color is to be used in more than one paint type, i.e. on wood, metal or
21 concrete, the requested information shall be filled in on the PAINT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE in
22 the spaces provided below the "scheduled color /material" listed. (See sample schedule
23 following this Section).
24 D. See attached "Paint Record Schedule" following this Section.
25 END OF SECTION
26
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 09 9005 - 18 PAINTS AND COATINGS - (EXISTING
STRUCTURES)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 10 1400
SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Room and door signs.
1. ADA, ADAAG, and ANSI /ICC A117.1 compliant interior signage.
B. Interior directional and informational signs.
C. Building identification signs (Dimensional letters /numbers).
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.
B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
C. ICC A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009
(ANSI).
D. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002.
E. IBC - International Building Code, latest edition.
F. WAC 51 -50 - Washington State Building Code, Amendments to the IBC.
G. WSDOT - Washington State Department of Transportation.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI /ICC A117.1 and ADAAG.
B. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated
for this Project, with a record of successful in service performance, and sufficient production
capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work.
C. Single- Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one
source of a single manufacturer.
D. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs
and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers
may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design
concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
B. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results.
C. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by
manufacturer.
D. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: Provide high pressure plastic laminate engraving stock with face and core
plies in contrasting colors, in finishes and color combinations indicated or, if not indicated, as
selected from the manufacturer's standards.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 101400-1 SIGNAGE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Aluminum Castings: (Letters and Numbers) Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper
2 recommended by the sign manufacturer for the casting process used and for the use and finish
3 indicated.
4 C. Fasteners: (Panel Signs) Use nickel - plated tamperproof fasteners fabricated from metals that
5 are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface.
6 D. Anchors and Inserts: (Cast letters and dedication plaque) Use nonferrous metal or hot dipped
7 galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion
8 resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled in place anchors.
9 Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
10 2.02 PANEL SIGNS
11
A.
ADA-Com pliant Interior Sig nage with Raised Borders:
12
1. Style: As shown on Sign Schedule at the end of this Section or as shown on the Drawings.
13
Note that general room signs are Interchangeable Window Style with clear vision window
14
for owner installed information.
15
2. Quantities: As stated in schedule at end of this section and as specified in Interior Room
16
Sign Schedule, following this Section,
17
3. Sign Thickness: 1/8 inch thick or 1/4 inch thick as required.
18
4. Braille: White, raised tactile to meet ADA requirements.
19
5. Corners: Square.
20
6. Color of Background: As selected from manufacturer's standard paint colors.
21
a. Minimum of 20 colors shall be available.
22
7. Sign Sizes:
23
a. Restroom signs: as specified in Interior Room Sign Schedule, following this Section.
24
b. Room identification signs: as specified in Interior Room Sign Schedule, following this
25
Section.
26
B.
Graphics: Graphics as shown on the Drawings (Graphic Art - copy, EPS or TIFF file) available
27
from the Architect.
28
C.
Back Panels: Provide a blank panel sign at any location that a sign is placed on glass. Panel
29
shall be of same size and color as sign on opposite side of glass.
30
D.
Mounting: Screw applied (mechanically).
31
1. Use adhesive tape application at locations where screw application can not practically be
32
provided.
33
a. On glass locations.
34
2.03 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS
35
A.
Cast Letters and Numbers: Form individual and steel letters and numbers by casting. Produce
36
characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free
37
from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to
38
receive threaded mounting studs. Manufacturer to provide full size mounting template for
39
mounting to sign base material. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.
40
B.
Building Numbers:
41
1. Manufacturer: Gemini, Inc. or equal.
42
a. Metal: Aluminum.
43
b. Finish: Brushed.
44
c. Letter Style: Century Gothic.
45
d. Quantity: 1.
46
e. Letter Height: 8 inch ( mm)es.
47
f. Message: 16715.
48
1) Location: As directed by Architect or as shown on Drawings.
49
g. Color: Powder Coat Black.
50
C.
Building Letters:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 101400-2 SIGNAGE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1. Manufacturer: Gemini, Inc. or equal.
2 a. Metal: Aluminum.
3 b. Finish: Brushed.
4 c. Letter Style: Century Gothic.
5 d. Quantity: 1.
6 e. Letter Height: 6 inch ( mm)es.
7 f. Message: YELM EDUCATION CENTER.
8 g. Color: Powder Coat Black.
9 h. Location: As directed by Architect or as shown on Drawings.
10 2.04 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS
11 A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1
12 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting
13 requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.
14 B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not
15 including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas.
16 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified.
17 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) and Grade II
18 braille.
19 3. Character Height: 1 inch (25 mm).
20 4. Sign Height: 2 inches (50 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
21 5. Office Doors: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not the numbers shown
22 on the drawings; in addition, provide "window" section for replaceable occupant name.
23 6. Conference and Meeting Rooms: Identify with room numbers to be determined later, not
24 the numbers shown on the drawings; in addition, provide "window" section with sliding "In
25 UseNacant" indicator.
26 7. Service Rooms: Identify with room names and numbers to be determined later, not those
27 shown on the drawings.
28 8. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN ", room numbers to
29 be determined later, and braille.
30 C. Interior Directional and Informational Signs:
31 D. Building Identification Signs:
32 1. Use individual metal letters.
33 2. The Architect will provide final locations.
34 E. Plaque: See Allowance for details.
35 2.05 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA
36 A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as
37 background color:
38 1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
39 2.06 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS
40 A. Metal Letters:
41 1. Mounting: Tape adhesive.
42 2.07 FINISHES
43 A. Panel Signs (Plastic Laminate)
44 1. Tactile /Braille: The characters and background of signs shall be eggshell, non -glare finish.
45 Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background.
46 2. Room Designation Signs:
47 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors
48 a. Pictogram Signs:
49 b. Color: Blue face with white background per ADA requirements
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 101400-3 SIGNAGE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 c. Aluminum Finishes: (Numbers and Letters) Finish designations prefixed by "AA"
2 conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating
3 aluminum finishes.
4 4. Baked Enamel Finish: AA- M4xC12C42R1x (Mechanical Finish: Manufacturer's standard,
5 other non - directional textured; Chemical Finish: Chemical conversion coating, acid
6 chromate fluoride phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply
7 baked enamel in compliance with paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning,
8 conversion coating, and painting.
9 a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting modified acrylic enamel primer /topcoat system
10 complying with AAMA 603.8 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils,
11 medium gloss.
12 b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors.
13 5. Bronze Finishes: (Dedication Plaque) Finish designations prefixed by "CDA" conform to
14 the system established by the Copper Development Association for designating finishes.
15 a. Natural Satin Finish: (Raised surfaces) CDAM31O6x (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin
16 directional textured; Clear Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard air -dry clear
17 organic coating).
18 b. Statuary Finish: (Background surface) CDA- M31C55O6x (Chemical Finish: Sulfide
19 conversion coating of dark brown; Clear Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard
20 air -dry clear organic coating).
21 PART 3 EXECUTION
22 3.01 PREPARATION
23 A. Verify mounting heights and locations for interior signage will comply with referenced
24 standards.
25 B. Clean mounting locations of dirt, dust, grease or similar conditions that would prevent proper
26 installation.
27 3.02 INSTALLATION
28 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
29 1. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of
30 the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
31 B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.
32 1. Install signs level, plumb, without distortion, and in proper relationship with adjacent
33 surfaces using manufacturer's recommended standard mounting system.
34 C. Locate signs where indicated:
35 1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60
36 inches (1525 mm) above finished floor.
37 2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s instructions.
38 D. Wall- Mounted Panel Signs:
39 1. Screw and Silicone- Adhesive Mounting: Predrill signs as shown. Apply silicone adhesive
40 recommended by the sign manufacturer in method as recommended by silicone
41 manufacturer. Install tamperproof screws of length to penetrate a minimum of 3/4" into
42 wall blocking.
43 2. For locations where there is no wall blocking, i.e., existing walls, use a silicone adhesive
44 and a double -faced adhesive vinyl foam tape with application of each as recommended by
45 sign manufacturer.
46 E. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening
47 methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction,
48 and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing
49 and to locate holes for fasteners.
50 1. Flush Mounting: Mount letters with backs in contact with the wall surface.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 101400-4 SIGNAGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
We
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
2. Projected Mounting: Mount letters at the projection distance from the wall surface
indicated.
F. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove adhesive from exposed sign surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Clean signs after installation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
C. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
3.04 SIGN SCHEDULE
A. Provide (1) sign per room. Sign will include up to (12) 3/4" letters and (4) 3/4" numbers. Panel
shall be provided in 2 colors. Colors as selected by the Architect. Size: 6 "x6 ".
B. Signs not shown on the schedule: Provide the following signs or approved equal as noted
below:
1. Provide one (1) ADA toilet sign for each "Restroom" toilet room as shown the drawings.
Locate and mount in location directed by Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
a. Type: Similar to model - SUM HAD (6 "x9 "); manufactured by ADAunlimited;
www.adaunlimited.com.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
101400 -5
SIGNAGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 10 2800
TOILET, BATHROOM, AND UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, and utility rooms.
1. FOIC = Furnished by Owner and Installed by Contractor. Contractor shall provide all
backing per Section 06 1118- Rough Carpentry. Locations shall be as shown on the
drawings.
a. Toilet Paper Dispensers - TPD or TD.
b. Paper Towel Dispensers - PTD.
c. Soap Dispensers - SD.
2. FCIC = Furnished by Contractor and Installed by Contractor. Contractor shall provide all
backing per Section 06 1118 - Rough Carpentry. Locations shall be as shown on the
drawings.
a. Mirrors - MR.
b. Seat cover dispenser - SCD.
c. Grab bars - GB.
d. Sanitary napkin receptacle unit - SNR.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011 e1.
B. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and
attachment methods.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling
supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to WSBCC - Washington State Building Code Council - Chapter 51 -50 WAC -
Amendments to the International Building Code, Section 1106 - "Accessible Design and
Standards" and all sub - paragraphs for all toilet, bath, and laundry accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Product numbers listed herein are from the Bobrick line and are included to establish the level
of quality and type of accessory desired. Other manufacturers listed below which are of equal
or better quality are acceptable.
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.
2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete
with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
B. Keys: Provide keys for each accessory to Owner (Yelm Community Schools); master
key lockable accessories.
C. Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering,
protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
102800-1
TOILET, BATHROOM, AND UTILITY
ROOM ACCESSORIES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper - proof; security type.
E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
2.03 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Toilet Paper (Tissue) Dispenser (TPD):
1. Georgia Pacific Toilet Paper Dispenser - #56761.
B. Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD):
1. San Jamar - T800 crank towel dispenser - Model SANT800WH.
C. Soap Dispenser (SD):
1. Model: GOJO - FMX -12 dispenser, 1250 milliliters.
a. Stock # GOJ 5150 -06
b. Dove Grey
D. Mirrors (MR):
1. 3/4" x 3/4" satin finished stainless steel angle frame with welded corners and with first
quality tempered glass mirror.
a. Bradley #780 -2436 and 1830 or Bobrick #B -290.
E. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface - mounted, reloading by concealed opening at
base, tumbler lock.
1. Minimum capacity: 250 seat covers, each side.
a. Bobrick #8221.
b. No substitutions.
F. Grab Bars (GB):
1. Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 18 -gauge (.050 ")
and as follows:
2. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages.
3. Clearance: 1 -1/2" clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar.
4. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish.
5. Medium -Duty Size: Outside diameter 1 -1/4 ".
6. Configuration: As indicated, and required by Washington State rules and regulations for
barrier free design.
7. Bobrick #B -5806 x 36 and B -5806 x 48.
G. Sanitary Napkin Receptacle Unit (SNR):
1. Surface- Mounted Type: Fabricate of stainless steel with seamless exposed walls, tightly
self - closing top cover and locking bottom panel with continuous stainless steel piano
hinge.
a. Bobrick - Contura #B270.
b. No substitutions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site for timely installation.
B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on the
drawings.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 102800-2 TOILET, BATHROOM, AND UTILITY
ROOM ACCESSORIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.
2 D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as indicated on
3 drawings, and as follows:
4 1. Bottom of Mirrors: As shown on drawings.
5 2. Grab Bars at Barrier -Free toilets: As shown on drawings.
6 END OF SECTION
7
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 102800-3 TOILET, BATHROOM, AND UTILITY
ROOM ACCESSORIES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 12 2113
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Horizontal slat louver blinds.
B. Operating hardware.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of window treatment is horizontal blinds at the following locations:
1. See Schedule at end of this Section.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail
brackets.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Take field measurements to determine sizes required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Horizontal Louver Blinds Without Side Guides:
1. Hunter Douglas; : www.hunterdouglas.com.
2. Levolor Contract; : www.levolorcontract.com.
3. SWFcontract, a division of Spring Window Fashions, LLC.; : www.swfcontract.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Determine sizes by field measurement.
B. Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/4 inch ( mm).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work.
B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. See Section 06 1000.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners.
C. Isolate metal parts from concrete and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use tape or thick
coating or other means recommended by manufacturer to effect separation.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
122113-1
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.04 ADJUSTING
2 A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
3 3.05 CLEANING
4 A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.
5 3.06 SCHEDULE
6 A. All Exterior Windows
7 B. All Doors with glazing panels.
8 1. Provide bottom holders.
9 END OF SECTION
10
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 122113-2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 12 3450
2 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
5 A. Includes all factory fabricated modular casework as required by project drawings. Exposed
6 surfaces shall be laminated with decorative high pressure plastic laminate or hardwood veneer
7 (as shown on drawings). Semi exposed surfaces shall be overlaid with low pressure
8 thermofused melamine laminate.
9 1. Full overlay style with 3mm edge banding in a select range of PVC colors or hardwoods.
10 2. Music Instrument Casework.
11 a. Model number (numbering system) follows the Wenger Corporation numbering
12 system.
13 b. Wire frame doors.
14 3. Inclusions:
15 a. Base and wall cabinets.
16 1) Cabinets with shelving in gymnasium storage rooms shall be provided with 3/4"
17 raised lip on front face of shelf whether shown or not shown on the drawings.
18 b. Countertops:
19 1) Standard plastic laminate.
20 2) Special requirements for countertops:
21 (a) Radius corners (1 1/2' minimum) shall be provided on all outside corners on
22 all island countertops. In addition, radius corners shall be provided as
23 shown on drawings.
24 (b) Back and side splashes shall be provided for all countertops that abut
25 gypsum drywall, whether shown or not shown on the drawings.
26 4. Exclusions:
27 a. Sills at windows to be wood as shown on drawings (refer to Section 06 1000 - Finish
28 Carpentry for material and Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coating for the finishing
29 required).
30 b. Epoxy countertops and sinks, specified in Section 12 3653.
31 c. Prefinishing, priming, or painting, unless so specified.
32 d. Vinyl, rubber or carpet base.
33 e. Metal support brackets that are part of the building structure.
34 f. Blocking, furring or stripping to walls where required.
35 g. Mirrors, glass or glazing not part of the cabinet.
36 h. Electrical fixtures and telephone equipment.
37 1) Light fixtures in display casework.
38 i. Ceramic tile for countertops.
39 j. Sinks faucets and connections to such.
40 k. All wall framing that is part of building structure.
41 I. Work not directly associated with the casework.
42 B. All cabinets, designed, detailed, or modified to suit condition of installation, as specified herein,
43 indicated on the Drawings or required; as approved, Include all accessories and trim items,
44 standard with manufacturer's, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
45 1.02 COORDINATION
46 A. Coordinate with work of other trades.
47 1. Floor finishes and base specified in Division 9.
48 2. Mechanical work specified in Divisions 22 and 23.
49 3. Electrical work specified in Division 26.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 123450-1 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.03 REFERENCES
2
A. All materials shall conform to these requirements:
3
1.
NEMA LD -3 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Decorative, high pressure
4
plastic laminates.
5
a. Horizontal Grade.050" GP50
6
b. Postforming grade.042" PF42
7
c. Vertical Grade.028" = VG28
8
d. Cabinet Linear Grade.020 = CL20
9
e. Chemical Resistant Grade.036"
10
f. Low pressure thermofused polyester and melamine laminates- ALA (American
11
Laminators Association).
12
2.
PVC Edgebanding (polyvinyl chloride) on seamless rolls to be applied with automatic edge
13
banding machines using hot -melt adhesives. Product to be chip proof, flame and moisture
14
resistant.
15
3.
U.S. Dept. of Commerce Product Standards: PS -1 -74 Construction and Industrial Plywood
16
a. Particleboard - ANSI- A208.1 (American National Standards Institute).
17
b. Softwood plywood - U.S. Product Standards PS1.
18
c. Hardwood plywood - ANSI -HPVA (Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association).
19
d. Hardboard - ANSI -AHA 135.484 (American Hardboard Association).
20
4.
PVA Adhesive (polyvinyl acetate) White glue, Type III - ASTM -D31 10 (American Society
21
for Testing and Materials).
22
5.
Aliphatic Adhesive (carpenters glue) Type II - ASTM -D31 10 (American Society For
23
Testing and Materials).
24
6.
Solvent based contact cement - MMM -A -J1 30B.
25
7.
Workmanship complies with industry standards:
26
a. AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute).
27
b. WIC (Woodwork Institute of California).
28
8.
WSBCC - Washington State Building Code Council - Chapter 51 -50 WAC - Amendments
29
to the International Building Code (latest edition), Section 1106 - "Accessible Design and
30
Standards" and all sub - paragraphs.
31
9.
BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware
32
Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI /BHMA Al 56.9).
33
1.04 SUBMITTALS
34
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
35
B. Shop Drawings:
36
1.
Complete shop drawings submitted showing all casework, elevations, plans, cross
37
sections and installation details. Surface finishes will be noted along with information
38
about equipment being installed into casework requiring coordination of other trades.
39
2.
A complete keying schedule will be submitted with proposed keying for review by owner.
40
3.
Samples:
41
a. Samples of plastic laminate showing full line of color selections available shall be
42
provided. Also, samples of actual hardware or catalog cut sheets shall be submitted
43
on manufacturer's standards.
44
1) Plastic laminate colors shall be from laminate manufacturer's full -line of standard
45
colors.
46
2) Submit (full line of colors) 2" long minimum sample of drawer /door edge
47
treatment and shelf edge treatment.
48
3) Submit 6 "x6" sample of tackable surfacing material.
49
b. Half size sample cabinets shall be provided to show hardware, construction
50
techniques, and workmanship.
51
c. These samples may be retained for verification that project work is of the same
52
quality.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 123450-2 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. Certificate of Compliance: Manufacturer shall submit a written statement on company
2 letterhead indicating the degree of the products compliance with provisions of this specification.
3 Specific areas of non compliance shall be stated.
4 D. Coordinate with the separate mechanical and electrical sub - contractors for location, number,
5 size and shape of cutouts for mechanical and electrical fixtures and fittings installed under
6 separate contracts. Coordinate with Contractor for location of backing between studs in walls
7 required for casework installation and anchorage.
8 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
9 A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide all casework as manufactured by same company for
10 single responsibility.
11 B. Workmanship complies with industry standards:
12 1. AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute).
13 2. Field Measurements: Verify sizes and shapes of countertops prior to fabrication by field
14 measurements taken after base cabinets are installed.
15 3. Standards: Westmark Series 100, current specifications and standards shall be used as a
16 basis for comparing like products.
17 1.06 WARRANTY
18 A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements
19 B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Final Completion.
20 1. Provide a written warranty indicating that all new cabinets will be free of defects in
21 materials and workmanship for a period of one year after date of substantial completion
22 and that repairs /replacement of said defects shall be performed in a timely manner at no
23 expense to the Owner.
24 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
25 A. Protect wood cabinets and countertops during transit, handling and storage to prevent damage.
26 B. Store in a dry, clean and well ventilated space, protected from damage. Do not deliver materials
27 until temperature and relative humidity are stabilized and conditions are representative of
28 finished facility.
29 C. Job Conditions:
30 1. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation areas as required to maintain moisture
31 content of installed cabinet work within a tolerance range of the optimum moisture content
32 acceptable to cabinet manufacturer, from date of installation through remainder of
33 construction period.
34 1.08 CASEWORK DEFINITIONS
35
A. Exposed Portions:
36
1.
All surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed except interiors of open cabinets.
37
2.
Cabinet tops under 72" above finish floor, or over 72" above finish floor if visible from an
38
upper building level.
39
3.
Visible edges of cabinet ends, doors and drawer fronts.
40
4.
Sloping tops of cabinets that are visible.
41
5.
Exposed (visible surfaces) sides and face of cabinets.
42
6.
Exposed (open to view, no doors) shelves and shelving.
43
B. Semi - Exposed Portions:
44
1.
All surfaces visible when doors and drawers are open including interior faces of hinged
45
doors.
46
2.
Visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.
47
3.
Visible portions of bottoms, tops, and ends in front of sliding doors in closed position.
48
C. Concealed Portions:
49
1.
Toe space unless otherwise specified.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 123450-3 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. Sleepers.
2 3. Web frames, stretchers.
3 4. Security panels.
4 5. Underside of bottoms of cabinets less than 30" above the finished floor.
5 6. Flat tops of cabinets 72" or more above the finished floor, except if visible from an upper
6 building level.
7 7. The three non - visible edges of adjustable shelves.
8 8. The underside of countertops, knee spaces, and drawer aprons.
9 9. The faces of cabinet ends of adjoining units that butt together.
10 PART 2 PRODUCTS
11 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
12 A. Geothen Cabinets.
13 B. Nick's Specialty Cabinets
14 C. Bell Mont Cabinets
15 D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
16 2.02 CASEWORK STANDARDS /SPECIFICATIONS
17 A. Casework: Provide to conform generally to the detailed specifications issued by Westmark
18 Products, Inc., Series 100 complete with all fittings, accessories, and hardware described
19 therein for each unit, all complete in place. Include all floor and wall mounted and mobile
20 casework identified by Westmark numbers; use two braking casters on each mobile cabinet.
21 B. Westmark Products Specifications have been modified with the following Options:
22 1. Cabinet bases shall consist of 3/4 -inch exterior grade plywood stringers front and back
23 and sleepers in- between at 24 inches o.c. Bases shall be leveled and anchored to floor in
24 continuous lengths to ensure straight, level and true lines of casework.
25 2. Door /Drawer Pulls: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/4 -inch bent wire pulls. 3 -1/2 inches
26 x 1/4 inch solid brass with chrome finish.
27 3. Drawers: Provide for the front piece of the drawer box construction to be 3/4 inch plywood.
28 2.03 MATERIALS
29 A. Exposed Portions:
30 1. Exposed material shall be pattern and color as specified. If not specified, it shall be a non -
31 premium priced, high pressure standard pattern Iaminate.028" minimum thickness
32 meeting NEMA LD -3 standards. High pressure laminates shall be laminated with PVA
33 adhesive under 50 PSI pressure.
34 a. Optional laminate brands are Formica, Wilsonart and Nevamar.
35 b. Writing whiteboard laminate: Formica or Wilsonart markerboard laminate.
36 c. Wood grain patterns shall run vertically on doors, ends and fixed panels. Drawer
37 fronts and sink fronts shall run horizontally unless specified otherwise.
38 B. Semi - Exposed Portions:
39 1. Semi - exposed materials shall be one of the following at manufacturer's option, unless
40 otherwise specified. Color shall be consistent throughout semi - exposed surfaces with the
41 following color options: Almond, Folkstone Grey or White.
42 a. Low pressure thermofused melamine or polyester laminate meeting ALA standards.
43 Lamination is achieved through self- bonding of the resin under 300 PSI at 3201 F.
44 b. High pressure plastic Iaminate.028" thickness meeting NEMA LD -3 standards. Panels
45 shall be laminated with PVA adhesive under 50 PSI pressure.
46 2. Interior faces of cabinet doors, drawer fronts and finished ends shall be laminated with
47 high pressure plastic laminate. Color matched to cabinet interior.
48 3. Interior faces of tops, bottoms, ends, partitions, and shelves shall be overlaid with low
49 pressure thermofused melamine laminate.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 123450-4 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 4. Cabinet backs and drawer bottoms shall have factory applied coating to both faces.
2 Interior face to match cabinet interior color.
3 5. Small vertical or horizontal dividers shall be 1/4" thick tempered hardboard, brown color.
4 C. Concealed Portions, Cores, And Substrates:
5 1. Concealed materials shall be any species of sound, dry solid stock, plywood,
6 particleboard, medium density fiberboard, or a combination thereof.
7 2. All materials shall be securely glued with Type II adhesive meeting ASTM -D3110
8 standards.
9 3. Laminate core material shall be premium grade particleboard, 45 lb. density meeting
10 ANSI -208.1 standards in either fir or pine composition. Thicknesses shall be 7/16 ", 11/16 ",
11 3/4 ", 7/8" and 1".
12 D. Visible Edges, Exposed And Semi - Exposed:
13 1. Exposed edges of cabinet ends, doors and drawer fronts shall be edge banded with thick
14 3mm PVC. Colors shall be chosen from a select range to either complement or match the
15 face color.
16 2. Exposed edges of cabinet shelves, sub -tops, bottoms and partitions shall be edge banded
17 with.024" PVC to match cabinet interior.
18 3. Edges at underside of upper cabinets and drawer parts shall be edge banded with.024"
19 PVC to match cabinet interior.
20 4. Machine applied edge banding shall be applied after face laminates are applied.
21 2.04 HARDWARE:
22 A. Hinges:
23 1. Five knuckle, radius tips 2 3/4" x.095" fastened with 4 screws to end panel and 5 screws
24 to door panel with door opening of 270 degrees. Satin chrome or black finish standard.
25 2. Hinges: Hettich #4944.
26 B. Door and Drawer Pulls:
27 1. Door /Drawer Pulls: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/4 -inch bent wire pulls. 3 -1/2 inches
28 x 1/4 inch solid brass with chrome finish.
29 C. Drawer Slides:
30 1. Box drawer - single extension, almond epoxy finish with 75 lb. load rating. Features
31 positive in and out stops, stay close detent, one side captive and four nylon rollers.
32 a. Hettich #FR602L.
33 2. Paper drawers - full extension, zinc finish with 100 lb. load rating. Features positive in and
34 out stops, stay close detent and steel ball bearings.
35 a. Accuride #3832.
36 3. File drawers - full extension zinc finish with 150 lb. load rating. Features positive in and out
37 stops, stay close detent and steel ball bearings.
38 a. Accuride #4032.
39 D. Adjustable Shelf Support System:
40 1. Standard adjustable shelf support system into predrilled 5mm diameter holes 32mm (1
41 1/4 ") on centers.
42 a. Allen Field - HD double pin shelf lock.
43 1) Product no. 5553x.
44 b. Color: Clear or white, to be selected by Architect (Erickson McGovern Architects).
45 E. Adjustable Divider Clips:
46 1. Dividers in 1/4" and 1/2" thicknesses shall be adjustable on 32mm (1 1/4 ") centers with
47 "U" shaped A.B.S. plastic clip. The clips engage into predrilled 5mm diameter holes with a
48 slot for the dividers.
49 F. Catches:
50 1. Magnetic Type - 7 lb. pull rating with metal base plate and plastic housing to match
51 cabinet interior: Epco #1000.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 123450-5 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 G. Drawer Accessories:
2 1. Standard hanging file - PVC rails fitted to top of drawer sides. Both letter and legal size
3 files shall be available and provided as shown on the drawings. Rails shall be color
4 matched to cabinet interior.
5 2. Lateral hanging files - 1 " x 1/8" zinc plated steel flat bars adjustable for both letter and
6 legal size files.
7 3. Card sized index followers, zinc plated steel. - For use with card file systems: K & V
8 #475F.
9 4. Library card file drawer. - Drawer and front shall be black plastic injection molded with
10 metal follower and removable rod: Weber - Knapp #9446.
11 H. Locks:
12 1. Locks shall be a dead bolt type, constructed with solid brass cylinder and five pin
13 tumblers. Exposed finish is US26D satin chrome.
14 a. Provide the following locks where shown or called for, keyed and masterkeyed as
15 directed by Owner through Architect. Include nylon spacers to align face of lock flush
16 with face of door or drawer.
17 1) Drawer Locks:
18 (a) National Lock 8179 -26D 5 -Pin Tumbler.
19 (b) Olympus Lock 200 DW 5 -Pin Tumbler.
20 2) Door Locks:
21 (a) National Lock 8173 -26D 5 -Pin Tumbler.
22 (b) Olympus Lock 100 DR 5 -Pin Tumbler.
23 b. Standard keying:
24 1) Alike per room - provide 3 keys per room.
25 2) Different between rooms.
26 3) Master keyed - provide 6 keys.
27 2. Slide bolt used on inactive door when pair of doors require lock: Epco #910.
28 a. Provide 1/8" plate - 1 1/2" x 4" for inactive door stop if slide bolt is not accessible.
29 3. Sliding door - Plunger type lock: National Lock #C8142 -26D.
30 4. Sliding glass door - Ratchet type lock: National Lock #C8140.
31 I. Vent /Grille:
32 1. Doug Mockett "GT Series" Vent Grill — size 7 '/4" x 5 '/4" — color Grey.
33 2.05 CABINET COMPONENTS
34 A. Drawers (Wood Construction):
35 1. Drawer fronts shall be 3/4 inch plywood overlaid with high pressure plastic laminate on
36 both faces to equal 3/4" thickness. Inside color to match cabinet interiors with face color to
37 be selected. Edges shall be banded with 3mm PVC. Edge colors shall be chosen from a
38 select range to either complement or match the face color.
39 2. Drawer sides shall be 1/2" thick particleboard overlaid with thermofused melamine on two
40 sides to match cabinet interior. Top edges shall be banded with.024" PVC. Drawer parts
41 shall be joined together with 6mm x 25mm hardwood dowels 32mm on centers.
42 3. Drawer bottoms, sub - fronts and backs shall be 1/2" particleboard with factory applied
43 coating to both faces. Bottoms shall be tongued into sides, back and sub - front, glued and
44 clamped to produce a rigid square drawer. Interior face color to match cabinet interiors.
45 4. Drawer fronts shall be attached to the sub - fronts with minimum of four #8 x 1 " panhead
46 screws.
47 5. Drawers shall be mounted with positive "IN" and "OUT' stops to provide permanent and
48 quiet operation. Drawer fronts that impact cabinet body will not be allowed.
49 6. All drawers to have roller guides as specified above. Full depth security panel shall be
50 provided between drawers when individual drawer locking is required.
51 B. Doors:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 123450-6 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
1.
Doors shall be 11/16" thick particleboard overlaid with a high pressure plastic laminate on
2
both faces to equal 3/4" thickness. Inside color to match cabinet interiors with face color to
3
be selected.
4
2.
Edges shall be banded with 3mm PVC. Edge colors shall be chosen from a select range
5
to either complement or match the face color.
6
3.
Hinges shall be installed as follows:
7
a. Maximum Door Size: 24" x 36"
8
1) No. of Knuckles: 2
9
b. Maximum Door Size: 24" x 48"
10
1) No. of Knuckles: 3
11
c. Maximum Door Size: 24" x 84"
12
1) No. of Knuckles: 4
13
d. Maximum Door Size: 24" x 90"
14
1) No. of Knuckles: 5
15
4.
Sliding doors shall be installed on overhead metal track with nylon roller hangers and
16
continuous PVC bottom guide.
17
5.
Stile and rail glass doors shall have 3/4" thick door blank cut to provide 3" wide stiles and
18
rails with tall doors to have rails at mid point. 1/4" plate glass is fitted into cut -out and
19
stopped with removable PVC stops.
20
6.
Frameless sliding glass doors shall be 1/4" tempered glass with polished edges and fitted
21
with metal bottom channel and nylon rollers.
22
C. Cabinet Ends:
23
1.
Semi - exposed ends shall be 3/4" particleboard overlaid with thermofused melamine on
24
both faces.
25
2.
Exposed or finish ends shall be 11/16" thick particleboard overlaid with high pressure
26
plastic laminate on both faces to equal 3/4" thickness. Inside color to match cabinet
27
interiors with face color to be selected.
28
3.
Ends shall be drilled for adjustable shelf supports with 5mm diameter holes on 32mm (1
29
1/4 ") centers.
30
4.
Front edge shall be banded with 3mm PVC. Edge colors shall be chosen from a select
31
range to either complement or match the face color.
32
5.
Top & bottom edges of upper ends shall be banded with.024" PVC.
33
D. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms:
34
1.
Semi - exposed tops and bottoms shall be 3/4" particleboard overlaid with thermofused
35
melamine on both faces. Front edge shall be banded with.024" PVC.
36
2.
Exposed or finished tops and bottoms shall be 11/16" thick particleboard overlaid with high
37
pressure plastic laminate on both faces to equal 3/4" thickness. Inside color to match
38
cabinet interiors with exposed color to be selected.
39
a. At locations with attached coat hooks:
40
1) Exposed or finished tops and bottoms shall be 3/4" thick plywood (only - no
41
exceptions) overlaid with high pressure plastic laminate on both faces to equal
42
3/4" thickness. Inside color to match cabinet interiors with exposed color to be
43
selected.
44
3.
Front edging shall be banded with.024" PVC.
45
E. Fixed
and Adjustable Shelves:
46
1.
Standard shelf system shall be designed to support up to 50 lbs. per sq. ft. uniform shelf
47
loading while allowing no more than 2mm (.080 ") per lineal -foot deflection of unsupported
48
shelf span. Deflection is defined as the measured distance from a straight line that a shelf
49
will deflect under load. Industry standard is L/144" (the length of the shelf divided by 144 ")
50
as the standard for maximum acceptable shelf deflection.
51
2.
The following materials and thickness shall be used to provide this performance:
52
a. Shelves at cabinets up to 32" wide shall be 3/4" thick particleboard overlaid with
53
thermo -fused melamine on both faces.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 123450-7 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
b. Shelves at cabinets over 32" Up to 48" wide shall be 1 " thick Plywood overlaid
2
with high pressure plastic laminate on both faces.
3
c. Spans over 48" - not permitted.
4
3.
The front edge only of adjustable shelves inside cabinets shall be banded with.024" PVC.
5
4.
Adjustable shelves shall be supported on 4 shelf clips in cabinets up to 25" deep and 6
6
shelf clips in cabinets greater than 25" deep.
7
5.
Fixed shelves shall be 3/4" or 1 " thick particle -board overlaid with thermofused melamine
8
on both sides. Front edge banded with.024" PVC.
9
6.
Adjustable shelves for wall mounted standard shall be 1 " thick particleboard overlaid with
10
thermofused melamine on both faces. All four edges shall be edge banded with.024" PVC.
11
7.
See special front lip requirements for gymnasium storage rooms above.
12
F. Cabinet Backs:
13
1.
Semi - exposed backs shall be 1/2" particleboard with factory applied coating to both faces.
14
Interior face to match cabinet interior color. Semi - exposed edge shall be banded with.024"
15
PVC.
16
2.
Exposed or finish backs shall be 11/16" particle -board overlaid with high pressure plastic
17
laminate on both faces to equal 3/4" thickness. Exterior color to be selected.
18
3.
Removable backs shall be available at any location for service access as required by
19
project.
20
4.
Bottom edge of upper backs shall be banded with.024" PVC.
21
G. Partitions And Dividers:
22
1.
Vertical 1/2" and 3/4" partitions shall be particle -board overlaid with thermofused
23
melamine on both faces. Exposed edges shall be banded with.024" PVC.
24
2.
Small dividers shall be 1/4" tempered hardboard and supported by adjustable clips or
25
grooved into adjacent members. Edges shall be sanded.
26
H. Cabinet Bases:
27
1.
Cabinet bases shall consist of 3/4 -inch exterior grade plywood stringers front and back
28
and sleepers in- between at 24 inches o.c. Bases shall be leveled and anchored to floor in
29
continuous lengths to ensure straight, level and true lines of casework.
30
2.
Free standing cabinet shall have unit bases with cabinet ends running to the floor.
31
3.
Base and tall cabinets shall have individual unit bases with (4) adjustable leveling feet
32
each. Small cabinets, less than 18" wide or deep, will not have adjustable levelers.
33
I. Fillers And Soffit Panels:
34
1.
Panels shall be made of 11/16" particleboard overlaid with high pressure plastic laminate
35
on both faces to equal 3/4" thick and shall be fitted to adjacent surfaces.
36
2.
Exposed faces shall have laminate matching to adjacent cabinets.
37
J. Countertops:
38
1.
See special requirements for radius corners and for back and side splashes above.
39
2.
For countertops and backsplashes with sinks, or which are over built -in dishwashers,
40
revise the 3/4 inch composition board to a 3/4 inch plywood, touch sanded Exterior AC
41
Grade or moisture resistant (MR) medium density overlay (MDO). Extend plywood or
42
MDO a minimum of 2 ft. beyond each side of sink. Seal edges of plywood at sink cutouts.
43
Plastic laminate to be 1/16 inch nominal thickness.
44
3.
Decorative Laminate Countertops:
45
a. Plastic laminate shall be from Formica, Nevamar and Wilsonart with a standard
46
texture (suede) finish. One manufacturer for total project. The following colors listed
47
in the schedule are from Formica. The approval of Nevamar or Wilsonart will be
48
contingent upon color match as approved by Architect.
49
1) Color: See Section 09 9999 for color selection, sizes, and other selection
50
information.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 123450-8 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
b. Finished edges shall be trimmed with GP50 grade laminate applied after the top
2
surface. Overall thicknesses available shall be 3/4" to 1 1/2" with build -up added to
3
the substrate.
4
1) Style: 1 -1/2" thick edge with 90 degree formed laminate.
5
2) Wood Edge Band: Shall be solid maple with size and shapes as shown on
6
drawings.
7
(a) Clear Wood Finish: AWI - Transparent system TR -6 (catalyzed
8
polyurethane).
9
(1) Provide complete factory finish to comply with chemical and physical
10
resistance requirements. After installation, touch -up or refinish
11
damaged portions equal to original factory finish. Sand exposed and
12
semi exposed components using machine and hand methods.
13
Carefully sand finishes after each surface treatment. Apply finishes as
14
follows: Three (3) coats of highly chemical resistant finish, heat dried
15
and sanded between each coat to produce a smooth, satin luster free
16
of imperfections.
17
(b) Provide complete factory finish to comply with chemical and physical
18
resistance requirements. After installation, touch -up or refinish damaged
19
portions equal to original factory finish. Sand exposed and semi exposed
20
components using machine and hand methods. Carefully sand finishes
21
after each surface treatment. Apply finishes as follows: Three (3) coats of
22
highly chemical resistant finish, heat dried and sanded between each coat
23
to produce a smooth, satin luster free of imperfections.
24
3) Provide complete factory finish to comply with chemical and physical resistance
25
requirements. After installation, touch -up or refinish damaged portions equal to
26
original factory finish. Sand exposed and semi exposed components using
27
machine and hand methods. Carefully sand finishes after each surface
28
treatment. Apply finishes as follows: Three (3) coats of highly chemical resistant
29
finish, heat dried and sanded between each coat to produce a smooth, satin
30
luster free of imperfections.
31
c. Backsplashes and side splashes shall be 3/4" thick and 4" high unless otherwise
32
specified. Material and color to be the same as countertop deck.
33
d. Backsplashes and side splashes shall be factory assembled with waterproof sealant
34
and #6 x 2" screws at 6" on center.
35
e. Countertops shall be furnished in longest possible lengths. When joints are required
36
they shall be factory prepared with a minimum of four 1/4" joint bolts each. joints shall
37
be field assembled with waterproof sealant to insure stable and rigid construction.
38
f. No joints allowed within 24" of sinks, counter ends, or knee space areas.
__1 10 1:111 11111111 L 0 ] 101 4 : �' 1
40
A. Cabinet Construction:
41
1. Fabrication:
42
a.
Cabinets shall be assembled square and true using manufacturer's preferred
43
methods, materials and equipment.
44
b.
Align doors and drawers to show uniform gaps between all doors and drawers within
45
individual units.
46
c.
Fabricate all cases to sizes indicated on approved shop drawings to tolerances of +/-
47
21/2%.
48
d.
Verify all conditions and make all cut -outs required for mechanical, electrical and
49
other equipment or accessories built into casework.
50
e.
Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
51
passage through building openings.
52
f.
Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt
53
or moisture could accumulate.
54
g.
Fabricate each unit to be rigid and not dependent on building structure for rigidity.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 123450-9 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
h. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
2
i. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
3
cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
4
2.
Cabinet parts shall be assembled with one or more of the following methods: Tongue and
5
groove joints, wood dowels, Type II adhesive, screws and staples. Units shall be squared
6
and clamped to ensure strong joint assembly.
7
3.
Cabinet backs shall be applied with staples and screws to provide a strong and square
8
cabinet assembly.
9
4.
All hardware shall be securely screwed or press fitted into pre - drilled holes.
10
2.07 WORKMANSHIP
11
A. Casework Components:
12
1.
All components shall be accurately cut, edge banded, machined and processed to meet
13
standards as set forth by A.W.I. and W.I.C.
14
2.
Cabinet Assembly:
15
a. All components shall be neatly assembled and clamped together with Type II
16
adhesive, wood dowels, screws, staples and other fasteners to form a complete
17
system.
18
b. Complete cabinets shall be square, plumb and true.
19
c. All units shall be labeled with project name, model number, room number location
20
and item number for easy identification by the job -site installers.
21 PART 3 EXECUTION
22 3.01 EXAMINATION
23 A. Examine conditions under which products will be installed.
24 B. Verify adequacy of support framing.
25 C. Measure all areas for scribe fit.
26 3.02 INSTALLATION
27 A. Storage And Protection:
28 1. Casework is to be protected and stored under cover in a ventilated building not exposed to
29 extreme temperatures or humidity. Do not store casework in area with wet concrete,
30 masonry or plaster.
31 B. Workman:
32 1. Install casework with factory trained finish carpenters under direct supervision of
33 manufacturer's representative.
34 C. Attachment:
35 1. All casework items shall be securely anchored to building structure, except for those items
36 identified as "mobile" or "moveable" on drawings, which are to be adjusted to prevent any
37 rocking when sitting on finish floor.
38 2. Primary anchorage of base and wall cabinets shall be through the 1/2" thick cabinet back
39 into wall framing or blocking furnished under other sections. Additional anchorage will be
40 made into cabinet bases and adjacent side walls where they occur. Appropriate sized
41 anchor screws shall be used to best attach to the existing wall condition which will allow
42 each cabinet to be loaded to a capacity of 50 lb. per sq. ft. of shelf area.
43 3. For schools, hospitals and public buildings, all installations shall be in strict conformance
44 with seismic codes.
45 4. At free - spanning countertops or work surfaces, steel support brackets shall be provided at
46 a maximum spacing of 32 inches, or as shown on drawings. Support brackets shall be
47 designed to allow for knee space clearance and attach to wall framing for support.
48 D. Workmanship:
49 1. Erect casework straight, level, plumb and true.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 12 3450 - 10 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
2. Neatly scribe casework to walls, soffits and columns. Fillers to color match adjacent
2
surfaces and will not be permitted in excess of 1 1/2" wide, unless specifically requested
3
otherwise.
4
3. Joints are not permitted in continuous countertops over knee spaces or within 24 inches of
5
sinks or counter ends. joints, where approved, shall be tight, in perfect alignment, and not
6
allowing excessive deflection.
7
E.
Coordination:
8
1. Verify requirements and location from Architect or Owner before cutting holes for paper
9
slots and grommets.
10
2. Provide cutting and fitting as necessary to accommodate mechanical and electrical work
11
built into casework units.
12
3. Provide alterations to casework to keep devices accessible when they are covered by
13
casework. This includes mechanical and electrical switches, receptacles, panels, access
14
doors and other devices.
15
3.03 INSTALLATION OF TOPS
16
A.
Field Jointing: Where practicable, make in same manner as factory jointing using dowels,
17
splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Locate field joints as shown
18
on accepted shop drawings, factory prepared so there is no job site processing of top and edge
19
surfaces.
20
B.
Fastenings: Use concealed clamping devices for field joints, located within 6 inches of front, at
21
back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten in accordance with
22
manufacturer's instructions to exert a constant, heavy clamping pressure at joints.
23
C.
Workmanship: Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to
24
prevent any deflection. Provide flush hairline joints in top units using clamping devices.
25
D.
Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical service fixtures.
26
E.
Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of top, curb and splash with walls as
27
recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Use chemical resistant, permanently
28
elastic sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer.
29
3.04 ADJUSTING
30
A.
Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function
31
smoothly.
32
1. Adjust hinges so doors hang straight.
33
3.05 CLEANING
34
A.
Clean casework, countertops, shelves, and hardware.
35
3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
36
A.
Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity.
37
B.
Repair all damage done to premises as a result of installation.
38
C.
Remove all debris generated by this installation on a daily basis.
39
END OF SECTION
40
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 12 3450 - 11 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 12 4813
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Carpet mat.
1. With tapered edging.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Samples: Submit two samples, 12x12 inch (_x_ mm) in size illustrating pattern, color,
finish, edging.
C. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning instructions, stain removal procedures.
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Floor Mats:
1. Floor Mats:
a. Manufacturer:
1) Connexus by Matsinc.
b. Product:
1) Super Nop 52.
(a) Face Fiber: 100% Polypropylene
(b) Denier: Blended Heavy Deniers
(c) Fiber Lock: Double Loc Coating to lock in fibers
(d) Back Coating: Fire Retardant Latex
(e) Secondary Backing: All Weather Non -Skid Rubber
(f) Total Weight: 93 oz.
(g) Steiner Tunnel Test: ASTM E -84 Class B
(h) Treated with antimicrobial for fungus, mold, mildew resistance.
(i) Integral beveled edge strip for all locations that mat is shown to be placed
over VCT.
2) Distributed by Pacific Mat Co. (253) 395 -6287 or approved.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate mats in single unit sizes; fabricate multiple mats where indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that floor opening for mats are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean floor recess.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install walk -off surface after cleaning of finish flooring.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
124813-1
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND
FRAMES
Notice:
TACOMA OFFICE
6021 121h Street East, Suite 200
Tacoma, WA 98424
Phone (253) 922-0446
Fax (253) 922-0896
YELM SCHOOL DISTRICT - EDUCATION CENTER OFFICE TI
PERMIT /BID
BCE PROJECT NO. 215 - 144.00
JUNE 22, 2015
The following list of specifications and drawings represents those documents that were prepared under
the provisions of the Revised Code of Washington RCW 18.43, by BCE Engineers, Inc. of Tacoma,
Washington. The sealing of this specification and drawings list is provided in accordance with
Washington Administrative Code WAC196 -23 -020.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description No. of Pages
DIVISION 20 — MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
200000 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 13
DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS
220523
VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2
220529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 3
220719
PIPING INSULATIONS 3
22 1116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS 3
22 1117
CROSSLINKED POLYETHYLENE (PEX) PIPING SYSTEM 3
22 1119
PIPING SPECIALTIES 2
22 1300
SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM 3
223300
ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS 2
224000
PLUMBING FIXTURES 3
DIVISION 23 — HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) SPECIFICATIONS
230529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT 3
230548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 4
230593
AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING 3
230713
EQUIPMENT /DUCTWORK INSULATION 3
233113
STEEL DUCTWORK 5
233300
HVAC SPECIALTIES 3
233423
EXHAUST FANS 2
233700
AIR TERMINALS 2
237400
PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNIT 3
239000
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 1
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI TOC - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
SECTION 20 0000
2
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
3
PART1
GENERAL
4
1.01 GENERAL
5
A.
Includes, but not limited to, furnishing labor, materials, and equipment for completion of work
6
unless indicated or noted otherwise. See Division 01 for sequence of work.
7
B.
Work indicated on the mechanical plans and in the specifications that will not be performed by
8
this Mechanical Contractor (i.e. duct and pipe block -outs, penetrations through walls, floors, and
9
attic, wall patching, work indicated to be performed by other Contractors, etc) shall be
10
coordinated with the General Contractor prior to bid. The Mechanical Contractor is responsible
11
for identifying quantity, size, and type of work with the General Contractor. Work not coordinated
12
will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and shall not be charged as additional
13
cost to the Owner.
14
C.
All work included in Division 22 and 23 shall be the responsibility of a single Mechanical
15
Subcontractor.
16
D.
This Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits required by State and local authorities
17
governing the installation of the mechanical work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to contact
18
all utility organizations serving the building, prior to bid, and to include all charges for
19
inspections, installation of materials, equipment and connection of all required utilities.
20
E.
Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to
21
Division 26, prior to bid.
22
F.
Putting heating, ventilating, cooling, and exhaust systems into full operation and continuing their
23
operation during each working day of testing and balancing.
24
G.
Making changes in mechanical drive systems (pulleys, belts, VFD's, motor speed, etc) and
25
dampers or adding dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by Section 23
26
0593 and at no additional cost to Owner. All equipment shall be provided with a single point
27
electrical connection, unless otherwise indicated.
28
H.
The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as
29
if called for in both.
30
I.
The ductwork and accessibility to HVAC equipment shall take precedence over all other
31
equipment in the ceiling interstitial spaces or other mechanical areas including, but not limited
32
to, sprinkler piping, heating piping, domestic water piping and electrical conduit.
33
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
34
A.
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Section.
35
1.03 SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
36
A.
Access doors.
37
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
38
A.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
39
1. Perform work in accordance with applicable Codes.
40
2. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company
41
regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern.
42
B.
Product Approvals: See paragraphs elsewhere in this specification.
43
C.
Warranties:
44
1. In addition to guarantee specified in General Conditions, guarantee heating, cooling, and
45
plumbing systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to
46
construct system in accordance with Contract Documents.
47
2. In order to be protected, secure proper guarantees from suppliers and Subcontractors.
2015 -19 /
YCS Ed Center TI 200000-1 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3. Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment. Clearly record "start-up" date
2 of each piece of equipment on certificate. Include certificates as part of Operation &
3 Maintenance Manual.
4 D. Manufacture: Use domestic made pipe, pipe fittings, and motors on Project.
5 E. Identification: Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall
6 be in place when Project is turned over to Owner.
7 1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS
8
A. Codes and agencies having jurisdictional authority over mechanical installation.
9
1.
Washington State Energy Code -- Latest Approved Edition
10
2.
International Building Code -- Latest Approved Edition
11
3.
International Fire Code — Latest Approved Edition
12
4.
International Mechanical Code -- Latest Approved Edition
13
5.
Uniform Plumbing Code -- Latest Approved Edition
14
6.
Local Sewer and Water District Requirements
15
7.
State and County Department of Health
16
8.
Local Fire Marshal
17
9.
Puget Sound Air Pollution Control
18
10.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
19
11.
Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA)
20
12.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
21
1.06 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
22
A.
Site Inspection:
23
1. Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance of work of
24
this Division before submitting proposals for this work.
25
2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence
26
related to failure to examine site conditions.
27
1.07 DESIGN DRAWINGS
28
A.
Mechanical drawings are not shop drawings and are intended to show general arrangement of
29
piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of
30
other trades will permit.
31
B.
Consider architectural, structural and electrical drawings part of this work in so far as these
32
drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. Architectural
33
drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings.
34
C.
Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings,
35
and accessories which may be required. The Mechanical Contractor shall include in the bid a
36
sufficient quantity of offsets, fittings, and accessories for the size of the project, based upon the
37
contractor's experience, necessary to facilitate mechanical utility installation. No additional
38
costs shall be charged for additional offsets, fittings, and accessories required to install the
39
mechanical utilities shown on the design drawings. Investigate structural and finish conditions
40
affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and
41
accessories required to meet conditions.
42
1.08 PRE - CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION MEETING
43
A.
This Contractor is responsible to participate in coordination meetings with the General
44
Contractor and other subcontractors needing to coordinate special requirements (such as
45
electrical contractor, HVAC contractor, plumbing contractor, etc.)
46
B.
Coordination meetings shall consider elevations, required clearances, and routings of all trades
47
to assure that all trades can be installed without conflict.
48
C.
The outcome of this coordination shall allow each system (Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical, etc)
49
to be installed without further conflicts for space or locations.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-2 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
D.
Failure to coordinate with other trades and /or existing conditions that result in the removal and
2
re- installation of systems shall not be charged as additional costs.
3
1.09 ELECTRICAL
4
A.
All electrical work, conduit, boxes and devices in connection with control wiring as required to
5
install the control equipment as specified herein or shown on the drawings shall be furnished
6
and installed complete by the Division 26 Contractor.
7
B.
All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall conform to all
8
applicable portions of the Division 26 specifications and shall conform to all governing codes.
9
C.
All equipment shall be factory wired to a junction box for connection to electrical service.
10
D.
Where a piece of equipment specified includes an electric motor, the motor shall be furnished
11
and mounted by this Contractor. Motor starter, disconnect switches and wiring from the
12
electrical panel to the motor control devices and to the motor shall be provided by the Division
13
26 Contractor unless stated otherwise in the mechanical specification and /or on the mechanical
14
drawings.
15
E.
All motor controllers and equipment panels (including but not limited to packaged equipment,
16
custom control panels, custom air handler panels) shall comply with NEC (including, but not
17
limited to, marking on controllers and labeling requirements).
18
1.10 TEMPORARY HEATING
19
A.
Temporary heating for facility during construction phase shall not be supplied by the permanent
20
system installed under these specifications, unless all of the following are satisfied:
21
1. Product warranties shall be extended to account for construction use. Contractor shall
22
furnish certified document stating such extended warranties.
23
2. Contractor shall obtain letter of approval from the Owner stating that they understand
24
equipment expected life may be shortened due to severe usage.
25
3. Contractor shall be responsible for pressure cleaning all coils and vacuum cleaning all
26
ductwork prior to occupancy.
27
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION
28 A. Contractor is responsible for protection of all material, equipment and apparatus provided under
29 this Section from damage, water, corrosion, freezing and dust, both in storage and when
30 installed, until final project acceptance.
31 B. Provide temporary heated and sheltered storage facilities for material and equipment.
32 C. Completely cover motors and other moving machinery to protect from dirt and water during
33 construction.
34 D. Handle and protect equipment and /or material in manner precluding unnecessary fire hazard.
35 E. Equipment requiring rotation and /or lubrication during storage shall have records maintained
36 and witnessed on a monthly basis and forwarded to the Architect/Engineer prior to acceptance.
37 Provide recorded maintenance for the O &M Manual.
38 F. Material or equipment damaged because of improper storage or protection will be rejected.
39 G. Equipment finish that is damaged by handling, storage, etc. shall be corrected by the Contractor
40 at no additional cost to the Owner.
41 1.12 DEFINITIONS
42 A. Finished Spaces: Spaces used for habitation or occupancy where rough surfaces are
43 plastered, paneled, or otherwise treated to provide a pleasing appearance.
44 B. Unfinished Spaces: Spaces used for storage or work areas, such as fan rooms, mechanical
45 and boiler rooms, etc., where appearance is not a factor.
46 C. Concealed Spaces: Spaces out of sight. For example, above ceilings; below floors; between
47 double walls; furred -in areas; pipe and duct shafts; and similar spaces.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-3 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 D. Exposed: Open to view. For example, pipe running through a room and not covered by other
2 construction.
3 E. Outside: Open to view up to 5 feet beyond the exterior side of walls, above the roof, and
4 unexcavated or crawl spaces.
5 F. Conditioned Space: An area, room or space normally occupied and being heated or cooled for
6 human habitation by any equipment as defined by the extent of the building envelope insulation.
7 G. Replace: Existing mechanical equipment and components shall be demolished and discarded
8 from the project site or as directed otherwise. New mechanical equipment and components
9 shall be installed in the area where the existing mechanical equipment and components were
10 demolished or as indicated on the contract documents.
11 H. Removed: Existing mechanical equipment and components identified on the contract
12 documents shall be taken apart, taken down, and discarded from the project site unless directed
13 otherwise on plan. Removed items shall not be brought back to the project site for use or
14 reinstallation.
15 I. Reinstall: Existing mechanical equipment and components identified on the contract documents
16 that need to be taken down and installed in the same or new location.
18
ADA
Americans with Disabilities Act
19
A/E
Architect/Engineer
20
AFF
Above Finish Floor
21
AGA
American Gas Association
22
AMCA
Air Moving & Conditioning Association
23
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
24
APWA
American Public Works Association
25
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
26
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
27
ASTM
American Society of Testing & Materials
28
AWWA
American Water Works Association
29
BFF
Below Finish Floor
30
BHP
Brake Horsepower
31
BTU
British Thermal Unit
32
CFM
Cubic Feet per Minute
33
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
34
fpm
feet per minute
35
FS or
Federal Specifications
36
F.C.O
Flush Cleanout
37
F.D.
Floor Drain
38
FWH
Freeze Proof Wall Hydrant
39
GPM
Gallons per Minute
40
HP
Horsepower
41
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
42
IAQ
Indoor Air Quality
43
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
44
KW
Kilowatt
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-4 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 MBH
2 MSS
3 NEC
4 NEMA
5 NFPA
6 NPSH
One Thousand British Thermal Units per Hour
Manufacturers Standardization Society
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association
Net Positive Suction Head
OS &Y Outside Screw and Yoke
8
PDI
Plumbing and Drainage Institute
9
per
in accordance with
10
POC
Point of Connection
11
PSI
Pounds per Square Inch Gauge Pressure
12
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
13
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
14
SP
Static Pressure
15
SWP
Steam Working Pressure
16
UL
Underwriter's Laboratories
17
VFD
Variable Frequency Drive
18
VTR
Vent Thru Roof
19
w.g.
Water Gauge (inches of water)
20
W. P.
Working Pressure
21
WPL
Weatherproof Louver
22
WQA
Water Quality Association
23 Additional abbreviations are as listed on the drawings or elsewhere in these specifications.
24 1.14 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
25 A. General: Provide schedule of values per Division 01 and related project requirements:
26 1. Division 22 and 23 Breakdown: Provide schedule of values for each building, broken down
27 into labor and materials per specification section at a minimum. Further breakdown into
28 subcategories is at the option of the Contractor, except as noted below:
29 a. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements: Provide a subcategory for
30 "Mechanical Punchlist, Closeout and Owner Training ". The dollar value for this
31 subcategory shall be no less than 2.25% of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and
32 23 work (or as indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher. The contractor shall
33 receive payment upon completion of all Mechanical Punchlist and Closeout items and
34 Owner Training.
35 b. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements: Provide a subcategory for
36 "Pre- Construction Coordination Meeting." The dollar value for this subcategory shall
37 be no less than 1 % of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 work. Contractor
38 shall submit the meetings sign in sheet to the Engineer for review. The sign in sheet
39 shall include the printed and signed names of the General and all subcontractors who
40 attended the meeting. The contractor shall receive payment once the sign -in sheet
41 has been verified to meet the Pre - Instruction Coordination requirements of this
42 Section.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-5 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 c. Section 20 0000 — Commissioning HVAC System: The dollar value for
2 "Commissioning" shall in no case be less than 0.75% of the total dollar value of the
3 Division 22 and 23 work (or as indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher). The
4 contractor shall receive payment upon completion of all outstanding commissioning
5 items as identified by the commissioning agent, Engineer, and /or Owner.
6 B. The Contractor is advised that in addition to payments held out for retainage and project final
7 completion (i.e. "Mechanical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training "), as specified above and
8 in Division 01, the Owner reserves the right to withhold 10% of the funds for any of the above
9 categories until the systems (of that category) have been proven to operate as specified and
10 have been completely tested, adjusted, and balanced.
11 1.15 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
12 A. All material used on the project shall be new and free of defects. The Architect and /or Engineer
13 reserves the right to reject any material, the appearance of which has been damaged on the site
14 or in shipment. The material shall be of pre- approved equal quality to that which is specified.
15 Should the make and type of material differ from that specified, the Contractor may be required
16 to submit catalog and engineering data (samples if requested) necessary to make a comparison
17 and determine its suitability. The Contractor shall also bear the cost of all changes to any aspect
18 of the project (electrical, mechanical, building, etc.) made necessary by any approved
19 substitutions. Approved substitutions include those listed as approved manufacturers or
20 approved substitutions. Tentative approval of substitute material and equipment will be made
21 prior to bid only. Such request for approval shall be made two weeks in advance of the bid
22 opening to allow time to assess its suitability. Failure to obtain approval prior to bid shall require
23 the successful bidder to furnish materials and equipment only as specified herein (see
24 paragraph 2.01, this specification).
25 B. Equipment submittals shall be submitted per one of the following processes as selected by the
26 Architect/Engineer Representative and /or Owner:
27 1. Electronic Submittal Process:
28 a. The Contractor shall upload one complete PDF file of the Electronic Submittal
29 Package to the Architect's SharePoint Site for approval. The Electronic Submittal
30 package shall include the following:
31 b. All required submittals (i.e. equipment cut sheets, shop drawings, etc.) per each
32 specification section.
33 c. Table of contents identifying each specification section, submittal requirement of each
34 specification, and the manufacturer name and model number of each item submitted.
35 d. Index sheet for each specification section.
36 e. Submission of PDF files of individual specifications or equipment cuts will be
37 automatically rejected.
38 f. The Contractor shall complete and upload a Submittal Information Form, in Microsoft
39 WORD format, for the A/E team to review. The equipment submittal will not be
40 considered "Received" nor will a review be provided until both the Electronic Submittal
41 Package and Submittal information Form have been uploaded.
42 g. If the Electronic Submittal Process is not feasible for a particular submittal section (i.e.
43 samples, certain shop drawings, recorded videos, CD's, etc.), the Contractor shall
44 submit a request in writing to the A/E Representative to deviate from the Electronic
45 Submittal Process. If acceptable by the A/E Representative the Contractor shall
46 follow the Hard Copy Submittal Process for the submission.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-6 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
2.
Hard Copy Submittal Process:
2
a. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect, for approval, complete information on all
3
equipment and materials to be provided on the project. Provide copies as specified by
4
Division 1 and at a minimum provide six (6) copies of the manufacturer's catalog and
5
engineering data, shop drawings of shop fabricated equipment and instruction data for
6
each item included under this Section of the Specifications. The Contractor shall
7
submit a typed, signed list including all items to be furnished on the project. The
8
signature on the aforementioned list shall indicate that the Contractor has examined
9
the suitability of all material and equipment with respect to compliance with these
10
specifications. The Contractor's approval shall also indicate that physical dimensions
11
of the equipment have been verified with the installation requirements and were found
12
to cause no interference therewith. The submittal packages are as follows:
13
b. Furnish submittals in a hard -back, three -ring binder. The binder shall have tabs which
14
are indexed with a Table of Contents. The Table of Contents shall correlate an index
15
number for each individual specification number. If the equipment submittal is not
16
bound to the Engineer's satisfaction, it may be rejected.
17
3.
Review of submittal data by the Engineer or Architect does not relieve the Contractor of
18
responsibility for quantities, measurements, and compliance with the intent of all contract
19
documents.
20
4.
Furnish submittals generally according to the list below. Individual sections may contain
21
more specific submittal listing of the particular section labeled "Submittal Requirements."
22
Furnish on each particular section and the following equipment:
23
a. Pipe
24
b. Pipe Insulation
25
c. Duct Insulation and Lining
26
d. Hot Water Tanks
27
e. Plumbing Fixtures
28
f. Valves
29
g. Piping Specialties
30
h. HVAC Equipment
31
i. Temperature Control Equipment and Shop Drawings
32
j. Air Balance Contractor
33
5.
Any material found to be installed without prior approval will be required to be removed and
34
replaced with only specified material at Contractor's cost.
35
6.
Mechanical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using
36
AutoCADTm Revision 2015 software. These drawing files will be made available to the
37
Contractor for development of shop drawings and /or "As- Builts" for a fee of $30.00 per
38
sheet. Full payment to be made prior to release of drawing files.
39 1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
40 A. Bind Operation & Maintenance Manual for Mechanical Systems in three -ring, hard - backed
41 binder with clear plastic pocket on spine. Spine of each binder shall have following typewritten
42 lettering inserted:
43 OPERATION
44 AND
45 MAINTENANCE
46 MANUAL
47 FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
48 B. Provide master index at beginning of Manual showing items included. Use plastic permanent
49 tab indexes for Sections of Manual.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-7 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. First Section shall consist of name, address, and phone number of Architect, General
2 Contractor, and Mechanical, Plumbing, Sheet Metal, Refrigeration, Temperature control, and
3 Electrical Subcontractors. Also include complete list of equipment installed with name, address,
4 and phone number of each vendor.
5 D. Provide Section for each type of item of equipment.
6 E. Submit copies as specified by Division 01 and at a minimum provide three (3) copies of
7 Operation & Maintenance Manual to Architect for his approval.
8 F. Include descriptive literature (Manufacturer's catalog data) of each manufactured item.
9 Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each
10 specific item with applicable data underlined.
11 G. Include all warranties /guarantees including extended warranties.
12 H. Include all start -up logs.
13 I. Operating Instructions shall include:
14 1. General description of each mechanical system.
15 2. Step -by -step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment into
16 operation.
17 3. Provide schematic control diagrams for all systems. Each diagram shall show locations of
18 start -stop switches, insertion thermostats, room thermostats, thermometers, firestats,
19 pressure gauges, automatic valves, refrigeration accessories. Mark correct operating
20 settings for each control instrument on these diagrams.
21 4. Provide diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control
22 items such as firestats, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays.
23 5. Provide drawing of each temperature control panel identifying components on panels and
24 their function.
25 J. Maintenance Instructions shall include:
26 1. Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of mechanical equipment installed
27 in Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts
28 numbers and lists operation instructions of equipment, and maintenance and lubrication
29 instructions.
30 2. Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment,
31 location, and type and frequency of lubrication.
32 3. List of mechanical equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and name plate
33 data of each item together with number and name associated with each system item.
X 11F Ld9] L y i I L y i 16-1.4 If] k' I I► [r
35 A. General Requirements: The building systems shall be tested to ensure that control devices,
36 components, equipment, and systems are calibrated, adjusted, and operate in accordance with
37 the approved plans and specifications. This shall include the following:
38 1. Commissioning Plan
39 2. Systems Testing and Balancing
40 3. Controls Functional Performance Testing
41 4. Preliminary Commissioning Report
42 5. Post Construction Documentation
43 6. Final Commissioning Report
44 B. Commissioning Plan: A commissioning plan shall be prepared and shall include at a minimum
45 the following:
46 1. A detailed explanation of the design intent.
47 2. Equipment and systems to be tested.
48 3. Functions to be tested (for example, economizer control, discharge air temperature control,
49 etc.)
50 4. Conditions under which the test shall be performed.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-8 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
5. Measureable criteria for acceptable performance.
2
C.
System Testing and Balancing: Provide testing and balancing as specified in Sections 23 0593.
3
D.
Controls Functional Performance Testing: Functional testing shall demonstrate the correct
4
installation and operation of each component, system, and system to system intertie relationship
5
in accordance with the plans and specifications. This demonstration is to prove operation,
6
function, and maintenance serviceability for each of the commissioned systems. Testing shall
7
include all modes of operation, including:
8
1. All modes as described in the sequence of operation.
9
2. Performance of alarms.
10
3. Mode of operation upon a loss of power and restored power.
11
4. The HVAC control system shall be tested to ensure that control devices, components,
12
equipment, and systems are calibrated, adjusted, and operate in accordance with the plans
13
and specifications.
14
E.
Preliminary Commissioning Report: The preliminary commissioning report shall be provided to
15
the Owner. The Contractor is responsible to submit to the code official a signed letter by the
16
Owner acknowledging the acceptance of the preliminary commissioning report. The preliminary
17
commissioning report shall include test procedures and results, and shall identify the following:
18
1. Deficiencies found during testing which have not been corrected at the time of report
19
preparation and the anticipated date of correction.
20
2. Deferred tests which cannot be performed at the time of report preparation due to climatic
21
conditions. Include the climatic conditions required for testing and the anticipated date of
22
each deferred test.
23
3. Record of progress and completion of operator training.
24
F.
Post Construction Documentation: Provide Operation and Maintenance (O &M) data, as -built
25
record drawings, and owner training as specified in this section.
26
G.
Final Commissioning Report: Provide a complete report of test procedures and results and
27
submitted to the Engineer and the Owner. The report shall identify the following:
28
1. Procedures and results of all functional performance tests.
29
2. Disposition of all deficiencies found during testing, including details of corrective measures
30
used or proposed.
31
1.18 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
32
A.
The Contractor shall maintain an as -built set of prints that clearly identify all deviations from the
33
original design. The As -Built drawings shall be drafted per one of the following methods:
34
1. Draft all revisions on a separate dark layer, on the coordination drawing set. The
35
Contractor shall maintain a copy of the original coordination drawing set.
36
2. Draft all revisions on the design drawings with a red color pencil.
37
B.
This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items, change orders,
38
and Contractor revisions.
39
C.
Drawings shall show locations of all underground pipe and duct installed by this Contractor.
40
Underground pipes and ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations. All pipe, raceway,
41
manholes or lines of other trades shall be included.
42
D.
The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products actually
43
installed on project. This shall include, but not be limited to, air handlers, heat pumps etc.
44
1. Upon completion of the Division 22 and 23 Work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined
45
drawings and one set of neatly drafted as -built drawings on electronic media in ACAD 2007
46
format and PDF files to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-9 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
3 A. Any reference to the specifications or on the drawings to any article, device, product, material,
4 fixture, form or type of construction by manufacturer, name, make, or catalog number shall be
5 interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting
6 competition.
7 B. The manufacturer listed as Approved Manufacturers are approved to bid the project for the
8 items indicated without obtaining prior approval. Other manufacturers desiring to bid the project
9 require prior approval.
10 C. The listing of a manufacturer as an Approved Manufacturer does not necessarily mean that the
11 products of that manufacturer are equal to those specified. The listing is only an indication of
12 those manufacturers which may be capable of manufacturing, or have in the past manufactured,
13 items equal to those specified, and is intended to aid the Contractor in identifying
14 manufacturers.
15 D. Products provided by Approved Manufacturers shall be equal to or superior to the specified
16 manufacturer's item in function, appearance, and quality, and shall fulfill all requirements of the
17 plans and specifications. The Architect/Engineer shall be the final judge as to whether an item
18 meets these requirements or not. If a manufacturer is not certain that his product meets these
19 requirements or not, then the manufacturer shall submit data as required to obtain the Design
20 Consultant's approval prior to bid opening.
21 E. The approval of a manufacturer applies to the manufacturer only and does not relieve the
22 Contractor from the responsibility of meeting all applicable requirements of the plans and
23 specifications.
24 F. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs to other trades and all revisions required to
25 accommodate any products which are different from those specified or shown.
26 G. In reviewing a manufacturer for acceptance, factors considered include the following:
27 engineering data showing item's performance, proper local representation of manufacturer,
28 likelihood of future manufacturer's local support of product, service availability, previous
29 installation, previous use by Owner /Engineer /Architect and record, product quality,
30 availability /quality of maintenance and operation data, capacity /performance compared to
31 specified items, acoustics, items geometry/access utility needs, and similar concerns.
32 H. If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified capacities
33 and ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division.
34 I. If non - specified equipment is used and it will not fit job site conditions, this Division assumes
35 responsibility for replacement with items named in Specification.
36 2.02 ACCESS DOORS
37 A. This Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing flush mounted access doors in
38 walls, ceiling and floors and chases where the following equipment is concealed and is not
39 accessible through same.
40 1. Valves (shut off, balancing, control, trap primers, etc).
41 2. Dampers (control, balancing, fire, smoke, etc.).
42 B. Doors shall be UL listed 20 ga. cold rolled steel with concealed hinge, screwdriver operated lock
43 and prime coated. Furnish suitable for area mounted. Provide stainless steel access doors for
44 non - painted surfaces (i.e. tile, MDF)
45 C. Approved Manufacturers:
46 1. Milcor
47 2. Acudor
48 3. Greenheck
49 4. Nystrom
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-10 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.01 WORKMANSHIP
3 A. This Contractor shall provide completed systems with a neat and finished appearance. If, in the
4 judgment of the Engineer, any portion of the work has not been performed in a workmanlike
5 manner or is left in a rough, unfinished state, this Contractor will be required to remove, reinstall
6 or replace same and patch and paint surrounding surfaces in a manner acceptable to the
7 Engineer, without increase in cost to the Owner.
8 3.02 FINAL INSPECTION
9 A. Final Inspection:
10 1. Prior to acceptance of the mechanical work, the Contractor shall put all mechanical
11 systems into operation for a period of not less than 5 working days so that they may be
12 inspected by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's representatives.
13 2. The time of the final inspection shall be mutually agreed to by the Owner, Engineer, and
14 Contractor.
15 3. The Contractor shall furnish adequate staff to operate the mechanical systems during
16 inspection.
17 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING
18 A. Upon completion of the work, and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the
19 Authority(s) having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall demonstrate and instruct the Owner's
20 designated operation and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the
21 various mechanical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with
22 the Owner. The Contractor's representatives shall be Superintendents or Foremen
23 knowledgeable in each system and Supplier's Representative when so specified.
24 B. Scheduled instruction periods shall be:
25 HVAC System Controls 1 Hours
26 HVAC Equipment Maintenance 6 Hours
27 Plumbing Equipment 1 Hours
28 C. The contractor shall, at a minimum, include an Owner Training sign -in sheet in the O &M Manual
29 that indicates the start and end times of the training and the type of training provided. Owner
30 shall sign off on the Owner training sign -in sheet to be considered complete and satisfactory to
31 Owner.
32 D. Costs for time involved by Contractor shall be included in the bid.
33 3.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
34 A. Requirements: Final approval of mechanical installation will be recommended upon completion
35 of the following:
36 1. Completion of all punchlist items
37 2. Owner Training Sign -In sheet with Owner's signature
38 3. Permit Submittal
39 4. Valve Diagrams
40 5. Reproducible As -Built drawings delivered to Architect
41 6. Air Balance Report
42 7. Asbestos Free Statement
43 8. Guarantees
44 9. Equipment Manufacturer of all HVAC compressor units shall provide start -up logs.
45 3.05 PREPARATION
46 A. Existing Buildings:
47 1. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams,
48 columns, or trusses.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-11 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
2. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and
2
appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes by General
3
Contractor.
4
3. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to
5
permit installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work.
6
4. This work shall be scheduled such that utility services and /or existing systems for the
7
facility are not interrupted during normal operating hours, without prior written permission of
8
the Owner's representative. Work that is performed during normal operational hours shall
9
not interfere with the normal function of the facility's daily operation.
10
5. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all existing mechanical
11
equipment and utilities indicated to be removed on the drawings. The Mechanical
12
Contractor shall also be responsible for the removal and reinstallation of all existing
13
mechanical equipment and utilities that will interfere with installation and operation of any
14
new construction indicated or required and shall be responsible for the removal of all
15
existing mechanical equipment and utilities indicated to be abandoned that will interfere
16
with installation and operation of any new construction indicated or required. All
17
mechanical equipment (other than piping) to be removed shall remain the property of the
18
Owner, and shall be transported - stored - or disposed of, as directed by the Owner. This
19
will be at no cost to the Owner.
20
3.06 INSTALLATION
21
A.
Install mechanical equipment to permit easy access for normal maintenance, and so that parts
22
requiring periodic replacement or maintenance, (e.g., coils, sheaves, filters, motors, bearings,
23
etc.) can be removed. Relocate items, which interfere with access.
24
B.
Provide access doors in equipment, ducts, and walls /ceilings as required to allow for inspection
25
and proper maintenance.
26
C.
Valves, damper operators, and other devices which are manually adjusted or operated shall be
27
located so as to be easily accessible by a person standing on the floor. Any such items which
28
are not in the open shall be made accessible through access openings in the building
29
construction.
30
D.
Gauges, thermometers, instrumentation and other components which are installed to monitor
31
equipment performance, operating conditions, etc., shall be oriented so as to be easily read by
32
a person standing on the floor. Provide necessary brackets and hangers as needed.
33
E.
If circumstances at a particular location make the accessible installation of an item difficult or
34
inconvenient, the situation shall be discussed with the Architect/Engineer before installing the
35
item in a poor access location.
36 F. Belts, pulleys, couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts which may pose a
37 danger to personnel, shall be fully enclosed or guarded in accordance with OSHA regulations.
38 G. Dissimilar Metals: Provide separations between all dissimilar metals. Where not specified in
39 another way, use 10 mil black plastic tape wrapped at point of contact or plastic centering
40 inserts.
41 H. Provide offsets around all electrical panels (and similar electrical equipment) to maintain space
42 clear above and below panel to structure and clearance of 3.5 feet directly in front of panel,
43 except where indicated otherwise or required by NEC to be more. Such offsets are typically not
44 shown on the drawings, but are required per this paragraph.
45 I. Safety Protection: All ductwork, piping and related items installed by this Contractor that
46 present a safety hazard (i.e., items installed at/near head height, items projecting into
47 maintenance access paths, etc.) shall be covered (at hazardous area) with 3/4" thick
48 elastomeric insulation and 2" wide reflective red /white striped self - sticking safety tape.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-12 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 J. Equipment Access: Access to equipment is of utmost importance. Contractor shall apply extra
2 attention to the laying out of pipe and duct routings, and in coordinating all work. Poor access to
3 equipment will not be accepted. Contractor shall note that in essentially all areas, piping routed
4 in ceiling space needs to run in joist space, necessitating elbows /fittings /transitions at crosses
5 with other trades, at structural beams, and at all connections to mains and branches. Hatched
6 areas at HVAC units indicate equipment access areas. These (and all other) access areas shall
7 be clear of obstructions. The Mechanical Contractor is responsible to coordinate and ensure
8 that all trades stay clear of access areas for any Division 22 and 23 furnished equipment.
9 K. Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to
10 ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment
11 of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents.
12 L. Pipe Installation: Install piping in longest reasonable lengths. The use of short lengths of pipe
13 with multiple couplings where a single length of pipe could have been used is not acceptable.
14 3.07 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
15 A. Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance.
16 B. Clean exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, and fixtures, remove debris from site. Repair
17 damaged finishes and leave everything in working order.
18 C. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves.
19 3.08 PAINTING
20 A. Paint all exposed pieces of equipment if not factory finished or painted under the Architectural
21 Section of these specifications. Paint shall be one coat primer and two coats enamel color as
22 directed by the Architect.
23 3.09 REBATES
24 A. Furnish vendor invoices on heat pumps to Owner after installation for power company rebates.
25 3.10 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
26 A. It is our intent to provide a timely response for RFIs regarding Division 22 and 23 Work. To
27 further expedite this process, if a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of
28 the RFI, it is required this suggestion be supplied with the submitted RFI. If no suggestion is
29 given where one is possible, the RFI will be returned as incomplete. RFI's will be returned to
30 the Contractor within seven (7) business days from the time received by the Architect/Engineer
31 Representative.
32
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 200000-13 GENERAL MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 22 0523
VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, valve installation for all systems with domestic water.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General Conditions, Division 01
B. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 22 0719 — Piping Insulations
D. Section 22 1119 — Piping Specialties
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
3. ASME B31.0 for building service piping valves.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve material for potable -water service.
1.04 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Gate valves
2. Globe Valves
3. Ball valves
4. Butterfly valves
5. Check valves
6. Balancing valves
1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Valve Diagram
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide factory- fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated.
Provide valves of types and pressure rating indicated; provide proper selection as determined
by installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and
connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than
one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. Valves shall be of same make for all these
services.
2.02 BALL VALVES
A. General - Select with FULL port opening blow -out proof stem, rated not less than 600# W.O.G.
B. Comply with the following standards:
1. MSS SP -110 Ball Valves -THREADED, SOLDER JOINT
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 220523-1 VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. Valves:
2 1. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: 600# W.O.G., bronze two piece body, full port hard chrome
3 plated bronze ball, true adjustable packing nut ( "O" -ring only type stem seal not
4 acceptable), blow -out proof stem, lead free.
5 2. Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: 600# W.O.G., bronze two piece body, full port hard chrome
6 plated bronze ball, true adjustable packing nut ( "O" -ring only type stem seal not
7 acceptable), blow -out proof stem, lead free.
8 3. Threaded Ends 2 -1/2" and 3 ": 600# W.O.G., bronze three piece body, conventional port
9 type 316 stainless steel ball, true adjustable packing nut ( "O" -ring only type stem seal not
10 acceptable), blow -out proof stem, lead free.
11 4. Soldered Ends 2 -1/2" and 3 ": 600# W.O.G., bronze three piece body, conventional port
12 type 316 stainless steel ball, true adjustable packing nut ( "O" -ring only type stem seal not
13 acceptable), blow -out proof stem, lead free.
14 5. Grooved Ends: 2 -1/2" and 3 ": 600# W.O.G., bronze three piece body, conventional port
15 type 316 stainless steel ball, true adjustable packing nut ( "O" -ring only type stem seal not
16 acceptable), blow -out proof stem, lead free.
17 D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ball valves of one of the
18 following:
19 1. Nibco
20 2. Milwaukee Valve Company
21 3. Apollo (By Conbraco Industries)
22 2.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES
23 A. See Section 22 11 19.
24 PART 3 EXECUTION
25 3.01 INSTALLATION
26 A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements
27 B. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in
28 branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be
29 accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
30 C. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with
31 stems pointed downward for horizontal plane unless unavoidable.
32 1. Applications Subject to Shock: Install valves with bodies of metal other than cast iron
33 where thermal or mechanical shock is indicated or can be expected to occur.
34 2. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and
35 install valves with the following ends or types of pipe /tube connections:
36 a. Tube Size 2" and Smaller: Soldered -joint valves.
37 b. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: One of the following at installer's option:
38 1. Threaded Valves
39 2. Grooved -end Valves
40 3.02 VALVE DIAGRAM
41 A. Provide (2) Valve Diagrams showing the location of all valves relative to the floor plan of the
42 building. Each Valve Diagram shall be 11x17, hard laminated sheets. Each piping system shall
43 be in a unique color and a legend noting the system colors shall be placed on the first page.
44 Provide a non - laminated copy for the O &M Manual.
45 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 220523-2 VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 22 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes:
1. Pipe Hangers and Supports
2. Mechanical Equipment Anchors and Supports
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 22 0719 — Piping Insulations
D. Section 22 1119 — Piping Specialties
E. Section 22 2000 — Excavation and Backfill for Mechanical Underground Utilities
F. Section 23 0548 — Vibration and Seismic Control
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pipe Hanger Standards: (MSS) Manufacturers Standardization Society Standards SP -58 -2002,
SP -89 -2003, and SP -69 -2003.
B. All methods, materials, and workmanship shall conform to the International Building Code (IBC)
and International Mechanical Code (IMC), as amended and adopted by the authority having
jurisdiction.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Hangers.
B. Struts.
C. Anchors.
D. Shop drawings are required for all equipment supports and fabricated supports or assemblies.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Hangers and Supports: Elcen, Grinnell, B -Line Systems, Unistrut, Michigan, Tolco, PHD.
B. Anchors: Rawplug, Phillips, Hilti, Michigan.
2.02 GENERAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods: Threaded hot rolled steel, electro- ga Ivan ized or cadmium plated. Hanger rods
shall be sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation, hangers, and fluid) does
not exceed the following:
Nominal Rod Diameter Maximum Load
3/8 Inch
610 Pounds
1/2 Inch
1130 Pounds
B. Hanger Straps: Galvanized steel.
Straps shall be sized so that the total load does not exceed
the following:
Strap Size
Maximum Load
1" x 22 Gauge
230 Pounds
1" x 20 Gauge
290 Pounds
1" x 18 Gauge
380 Pounds
1" x 16 Gauge
630 Pounds
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
220529-1
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
C. Beam Attachments: Shall be of the following type:
MSS Type Elcen Figure No. Grinnel Figure No.
21 33,34 131
22 67 66
23 29A 87
28 95 292,228
30 95 229
2 D. Anchors: Masonry anchors shall be Phillips wedge anchors, Phillips "Red Head" or Rawl
3 "Saber- Tooth ".
4 E. Steel: Structural steel per ASTM A36.
5 F. Wood: Shall be fire treated.
6 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
7 A. All hangers used directly on copper pipe shall be copper plated or have a factory applied 1/16-
8 inch thick (minimum) plastic coating on all contact surfaces.
9 B. All other hangers, supports, and hardware shall be cadmium plated or galvanized.
10 C. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Shall be of the following type (numbers are 'MSS'):
Maximum System Temperature Insulated Pipe Type
60 to 120 Degrees 1, 3, 7, 9, 10
33 to 59 Degrees 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, E
11
D.
Vertical Pipe Supports: MSS Type 8 riser clamp ( Elcen Fig. 39 and 339; Grinnel Fig. 261 and
12
261 C).
13
E.
Trapeze Hangers: Shall be constructed of carbon steel angles, channels, or other structural
14
shapes with flat surface for point of support. Trapeze hangers shall be supported with hanger
15
rods suspended from concrete inserts or approved structural clips. Provide a steel washer plate
16
( Elcen Fig. 84 or equal) where hanger rod nuts bear on trapeze hanger.
17
F.
Insulated Pipe Supports and Insulation Shields:
18
1. Insulation material at pipe support shall consist of expanded perlite insert with flame
19
resistant jacket of nylon reinforced kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil cover on insulation,
20
with sheet metal shield. Expanded perlite shall have no more than 5% deformation at 100
21
psi and a thermal conductivity no more than 0.32 Btu /hr. /sq. ft. /degree F/1 -inch thick.
22
2. Expanded perlite insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and sized to
23
match pipe in which it is used on. See Section 22 0719 for insulation sizes.
24
3. Provide shield per Section 22 1119 Piping Specialties.
25
4. Manufacturer: Michigan Hanger Company, Model Nos. 1031 and 4031.
26
PART 3
EXECUTION
27
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
28
A.
Provide all necessary bolts, nuts, washers, turnbuckles, rod connectors, and any other
29
miscellaneous accessories required for the support and anchoring of all pipes, ducts, and
30
mechanical equipment.
31
B.
Install steel or wood backing in walls (anchored to studs) as required to provide support for
32
items hung from walls.
33
C.
Install concrete inserts and anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
34 D. All welded steel support assemblies shall have a power wire brush and primer paint finish
35 E. Maximum spans between piping supports may be significantly less than the maximum spans
36 allowed herein due to structural limitations of allowable loads on hangers. The most restrictive
37 criteria governs. Reference structural drawings.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 220529-2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
2 A. Pipe which is not run underground, shall be adequately anchored to the structure to prevent
3 sagging and to keep pipe in alignment.
4 B. All pipe supports shall be provided with a means of adjustment for the aligning and leveling of
5 the pipe after installation.
6 C. Installation and sizing of pipe supports and accessories shall be in accordance with the
7 manufacturer's recommendations and standard MSS SP -89 and MSS SP -69, UPC, and IMC.
8 D. Provide supports at each change in direction of piping; and on cast iron soil pipe at each branch
9 connection and at each side of concentrated loads.
10 E. Where mechanically coupled piping is used, a hanger shall be placed within 2 feet on each side
11 of couplings, with hanger spacing in no case to exceed the following:
Maximum Span Mechanically
Nominal Pipe Diameter Coupled Piping
3/ to 1 Inch 7 Feet
12 NOTE: Manufacturer's support instructions shall be used where it is more restrictive than the
13 above. Above is for rigid coupled piping systems. Follow manufacturer's requirements for
14 flexible piping systems, except that in no case are spacing to be more than the above.
15 F. Copper Tubing: Maximum spacing between supports:
Nominal Tubing Diameter Maximum Span Copper
'h Inch 5 Feet
3/ to 1 '/4 Inch 6 Feet
16 G. Three or more pipes running parallel may be supported on trapeze hangers provided the slopes
17 of such pipes allow use of common trapeze. Where trapeze width exceeds 24 inches, provide
18 three (3) hanger rod supports.
19 H. Provide additional supports at concentrated loads (such as valves, in -line pumps, etc.) on each
20 side of the load. Such supports are in addition to the ones otherwise required.
21 I. Vertical Piping Supports: Support piping at each floor line with pipe clamps and at intermediate
22 points as required to prevent excessive pipe movement and so as to comply with the maximum
23 spacings cited above. Support all pipe stacks at their bases with a concrete pier or suitable
24 hanger. For vertical pipe drops which occur away from a wall or similar anchoring surface,
25 provide angled bracing from nearest structure to provide rigid anchoring of pipe drop.
26 J. Insulated Pipe Supports and Insulation Shields: Protect insulated pipe at point of support with
27 pipe insert and shield as required by the following table:
Nominal Pipe Insulation Length Shield Length Minimum Shield
Diameter in Inches in Inches in Inches Gauge
'/2 to 2 6 6 20
28 Such supports shall be in place at the time of installing pipe.
29 K. Underground Pipe: Shall be evenly supported on approved bedding materials, as specified for
30 the type of piping being used.
31
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 220529-3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 22 0719
PIPING INSULATIONS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, insulating of piping and fittings per schedule in Part 3 of this
specification.
B. Insulation at Hangers: Insulation shall be continuous through hangers on all insulated systems.
Inserts at hangers are specified in Section 22 05 29 and are considered as part of the hanger
and support system. Inserts are required to be installed at the time of pipe installation and are
intended to be installed by the Contractor installing the pipe hangers /supports. See Section 22
0529.
C. The intent of this section is to meet or exceed the requirements of the most current version of
the Washington State Energy Code (WSEC). The stricter of this section and WSEC shall be
met.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements
B. Section 22 0529 — Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Equipment
C. Section 22 1116 — Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
D. Section 22 1117 — Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Piping System
1.03 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping insulation, jackets, and accessories.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. All insulation
B. Field Applied Jackets
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE INSULATIONS
A. Glass Fiber: Meeting ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' Value: 0.23 Btu- in /hr. Ft2 °F at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: AP -T PLUS White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and
bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or AP
Jacket with outward clinch expanding staples or vapor barrier mastic as needed.
4. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Manville
b. Armstrong
c. Knauf
d. Owens Corning
B. Elastomeric Insulation: Meeting ASTM C534; flexible, closed cell, cellular elastomeric, molded
or sheet.
1. "K" Value: 0.25 Btu- in /hr. Ft2 °F at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature of -70 degrees F. to 220 degrees F.
3. Maximum Flame Spread: 25.
4. Maximum Smoke Developed: 25/50 through 1" wall.
5. Maximum water vapor permeability, wet cup, perm -in .10.
6. Connection: Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 220719-1 PIPING INSULATIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 7. UV- Protection: Outdoor protective coating.
2 8. Shall have R -Value of 4.2 at 1 " and R =8 at 2 ".
3 9. The material shall be manufactured under an independent third party supervision testing
4 program covering the properties of fire performance, thermal conductivity and V\/VT.
5 10. Shall be fiber free, formaldehyde -free, and low VOC's.
6 11. Approved Manufacturers:
7 a. Armacell
8 b. Kflex
9 c. Aeroflex
10 C. Field Applied Jackets:
11 1. PVC Plastic: One piece molded type fitting covers and jacketing material, gloss white.
12 a. Connections: Tacks; Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
13 b. Manville Zeston 2000.
14 2. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz /sq yd (220 g /sq m), plain weave cotton treated with
15 dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
16 3. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016 inch (0.045 mm) thick sheet, (smooth /embossed) finish, with
17 longitudinal slip joints and 2 -inch (50 mm) laps, die shaped fitting covers with factory
18 attached protective liner.
19 4. Self- Adhering Jacketing: Material to be VentureClad [1579CW] with a white finish.
20 Jacketing material is to have a maximum flame spread /smoke developed index of 25/20
21 per UL 723, 1 0.0000 water vapor permeance rating per ASTM E -96, mold inhibitors
22 incorporated, and be UV stable.
23 PART 3 EXECUTION
24 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
25 A. Verify that piping has been tested for leakage in accordance with U.P.C. standards before
26 applying insulation materials.
27 B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry, and free of foreign material.
28 3.02 INSTALLATION
29 A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes, and
30 industry standards.
31 B. Continue insulating vapor barrier through penetrations except where prohibited by code.
32 C. Piping Insulation:
33 1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
34 2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
35 3. Provide insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient
36 temperature with vapor retardant jacket with self sealing laps. Insulate complete system.
37 4. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature, secure jackets with self
38 sealing lap or outward clinched, expanded staples. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at
39 equipment, flanges, and unions.
40 5. Insulated pipe supports and insulation shield shall be in place at each hanger and support
41 as required by Section 22 05 29 prior to insulating.
42 6. Insulate trap and hot water supply on ADA compliant lavatories. For rigid piping, insulate
43 with elastomeric foam insulation, 3/8" minimum thickness. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule
44 and Section 22 40 00 for ADA compliant lavatory for approved application.
45 7. Elastomeric Insulation Installation:
46 a. For PEX piping installation, elastomeric insulation shall be installed continuous
47 through stud framing and all penetration locations through walls, floors, and ceilings.
48 b. Elastomeric insulation with wall thicknesses greater than 1" shall not be installed in air
49 plenums.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 220719-2 PIPING INSULATIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 c. All elastomeric foam and sheet seams shall be sealed with adhesive per the insulation
2 manufacturer's recommendations.
General: Provide all fitting insulation covers for pipe fittings, grooved end couplings, and for
7
3 d. Install elastomeric insulation on all domestic hot water and recirculation water piping.
4 3.03 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
8
B.
Exposed Work: Provide "Zeston PVC" insulated fitting covers applied after pipe insulation is
PIPE SIZE
THICKNESS
INSULATION TYPE
INCH
INCH
Glass Fiber Insulation:
11
Domestic Hot Water, Aboveground
All Sizes
1"
Cold Water
All Sizes
1"
Elastomeric Insulation:
14
PEX Domestic Hot Water
All Sizes
1"
PEX Cold Water
All Sizes
Not Required
5 3.04 FITTINGS, VALVES, STRAINERS, FLANGES, HEADERS, AND EXPANSION COVERS
6
A.
General: Provide all fitting insulation covers for pipe fittings, grooved end couplings, and for
7
pipe flanges.
8
B.
Exposed Work: Provide "Zeston PVC" insulated fitting covers applied after pipe insulation is
9
installed. A pre -cut "Hi -Lo Temp" insulation insert, conforming to the UL 25/50 rating, shall be
10
snugly tucked around the fitting making sure the fitting is covered with the full thickness of
11
insulation.
12
1. All others provide covering in pad form, constructed as follows: Use 1 -inch thick Owens -
13
Corning Fiberglas TIW Glass Wool, Type I, non - oiled, fully enclosed on all sides and edges
14
within tight -weave canvas jacket. Attach Bergen hooks around edges of pad. Fit pad to
15
device with edges tightly butted and secure with copper wire laced between hooks. Provide
16
vapor seal where vapor seal is required for adjacent insulation.
17
C.
The one -piece UL 25/50 rated PVC fitting cover shall be snapped over the insulated fitting and
18
secured with tack fasteners, staples, or tape.
19
D.
Downspout Piping and Domestic Cold Water Piping: Zeston fitting covers, stapled, and
20
adhesive sealed to adjacent vapor barrier jacket, same as specified for exposed work.
21
E.
Gauge Lines: Insulate to the gauge shutoff valve.
22
3.05 PIPE HANGERS
23 A. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers
24
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 220719-3 PIPING INSULATIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 22 1116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, general piping installation procedures for domestic water systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 22 0529 — Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Equipment
C. Section 22 1119 — Piping Specialties
D. Section 22 1300 — Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping System
E. Section 22 2100 — Sleeves and Seals for Plumbing Equipment
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Pipe
B. Solder
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E814: Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops.
B. UL 1479: Through- Penetration Fire Stop Systems.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for potable water service.
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE (FOR POTABLE SYSTEMS)
A. Underground Piping (Inside Building Perimeter):
1. Type K Copper, ASTM B 88.
a. Approved Manufacturers:
1) Mueller
2) Cambridge
3) Nibco
4) Cerro
2. Fittings:
a. Solder type (all sizes)
B. Above Ground Piping:
1. Type L Copper, ASTM B 88:
a. Approved Manufacturers:
1) Mueller
2) Cambridge
3) Nibco
4) Cerro
2. Fittings:
a. Solder type (all sizes), or
1) Mechanical press type (all sizes):
a) Approved Manufacturers:
b) Viega ProPress
c) Nibco
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
22 1116 - 1 DOMESTIC WATERPIPE AND FITTINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
2) NSF 61 Mechanical couplings (2 -1/2" and larger):
2
a) Approved Manufacturers:
3
b) Victaulic
4
c) Prior approved equal.
5
2.02 CONDENSATE PIPING
6
A.
Schedule 40 PVC
7
B.
Type L Copper if installed in air plenum.
8
C.
Type L Copper if penetrating a firewall.
9
D.
Insulate per Section 22 0719.
10
PART 3
EXECUTION
11
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND FITTINGS
12
A.
Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely
13
control entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and
14
connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site.
15
This does not relieve this Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in
16
every respect.
17
B.
Properly make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage.
18
1. Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site and work into
19
place without springing or forcing.
20
2. Remove burr and cutting slag from pipes.
21
3. Make changes in direction with proper fittings.
22
C.
Install piping at such heights and in such a manner as to not interfere with removal of other
23
equipment, ducts, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings. Provide
24
accessible, ground joint unions in piping at connections to equipment.
25
D.
Coordinate installation of piping with all trades which are affected by installation to avoid
26
conflicts.
27
E.
Consult all drawings for location of pipe spaces, ducts, electrical equipment, ceiling heights,
28
door openings, window openings, and other details and report discrepancies or possible
29
conflicts to Architect/Engineer before installing pipe.
30
F.
Allow sufficient clearances for installation of pipe insulation in thickness specified. If
31
interferences occur, reroute piping to accommodate insulation.
32
G.
Make connections of dissimilar metals with insulating couplings. (di- electric unions). See
33
Section 22 1119 — Piping Specialties.
34
H.
Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of
35
system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or similar materials.
36
I.
Do not use reducing bushings, street elbows, or close nipples.
37
J.
T -drill procedure for connecting pipes will not be allowed.
38
K.
Wrought tees shall be used on all branch piping and branch to main connections.
39
L.
Bury water piping 6 inches minimum below bottom of slab and encase in 2 inches minimum of
40
sand.
41
M.
Solder for potable water pipes shall be of a lead free type and shall conform to current UPC
42
standards for solder and all local code requirements.
43
1. Approved Manufacturers:
44
a. Canfield
45
b. J.W. Harris
46
c. Aqua -Clean
47
N.
All piping in finished areas shall be installed concealed unless specifically noted otherwise.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 22 1116-2 DOMESTIC WATERPIPE AND FITTINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 O. Pitch all piping and provide drain valves so that all piping and equipment can be drained.
2 P. Provide escutcheons where pipe passes through walls, floors, or ceilings.
3 Q. Install all exposed piping parallel to the closest wall and in a neat, workmanlike manner.
4 3.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING TESTS AND STERILIZATION
5 A. Tests: As the work progresses each section of the water system shall be tested under a 100psi
6 hydrostatic test held for 2 hours without reduction of pressure (a pressure fluctuation of +/- 1 psi
7 is acceptable). If any leaks occur or piping or valves are found to be defective, same shall be
8 removed and new material installed, and the test made on that section again until all material is
9 found to be satisfactory. Such test shall be made in the presence of the Owner's
10 Representative.
11 B. Flushing and Chlorination: All piping shall be flushed to remove all dirt and foreign material.
12 After flushing, all piping shall be chlorinated in accordance with regulations of the Washington
13 State Health Dept. After the contact period, the chlorine shall be drained from the piping and
14 the piping flushed. The Contractor will take samples for bacteriological analysis. The water
15 analysis must be satisfactory before piping is acceptable.
16 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 22 1116-3 DOMESTIC WATERPIPE AND FITTINGS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 22 1117
CROSSLINKED POLYETHYLENE (PEX) PIPING SYSTEM
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to general PEX piping installation for domestic water systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 01
B. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 22 0529 — Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Equipment
D. Section 22 0719 — Piping Insulation
E. Section 22 1119 — Piping Specialties
F. Section 22 2100 — Sleeves and Seals for Plumbing Equipment
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Pipe
B. Fittings
C. Hangers
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM F877: Standard specification for cross - linked polyethylene (PEX) plastic hot and cold
water distribution systems.
B. ASTM F1960: Standard specifications for cold expansion fittings with PEX reinforcing rings for
use with cross - linked polyethylene tubing.
C. ANSI /NSF Standard 14: Plastic piping systems components and dedicated materials.
D. Uniform Plumbing Code: Approved.
1.05 SPARE PARTS
A. Two (2) crimping tools
B. 20 joint bands
C. 10 Tee fittings
D. 10 elbow fittings
E. 10 supply stops
F. 25 feet of each color of piping
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Rehau
B. Wirsbo
2.02 PIPE (FOR POTABLE SYSTEMS)
A. Cross - linked polyethylene (Engel)
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 22 1117 - 1 CROSSLINKED POLYETHYLENE (PEX)
PIPING SYSTEM
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND FITTINGS
3
A.
Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely
4
control entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and
5
connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site.
6
This does not relieve this Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in
7
every respect.
8
B.
Properly make adequate provisions for expansion and anchorage.
9
1. Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site and work into
10
place without springing or forcing.
11
C.
Install piping at such heights and in such a manner as to not interfere with removal of other
12
equipment, ducts, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings. Provide
13
accessible, ground joint unions in piping at connections to equipment.
14
D.
Coordinate installation of piping with all trades, which are affected, by installation to avoid
15
conflicts.
16
E.
Consult all drawings for location of pipe spaces, ducts, electrical equipment, ceiling heights,
17
door openings, window openings, and other details and report discrepancies or possible
18
conflicts to Architect/Engineer before installing pipe.
19
F.
Allow sufficient clearances for installation of pipe insulation in thickness specified. If
20
interferences occur, reroute piping to accommodate insulation.
21
G.
Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of
22
system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or similar materials.
23
H.
Pitch all piping and provide drain valves so that all piping and equipment can be drained.
24
I.
Provide stainless steel inserts at compression stop valves.
25
J.
All couplings, elbows, tees, reducing tees adapters and any other connecting devices shall be of
26
the same manufacturer as the PEX piping.
27
K.
Kinked tubing shall be reformed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation or cut out
28
and replaced.
29
L.
Fittings shall be plastic or brass
30
M.
Fittings shall be made by the manufacturers recommended installation tool. Installation tools
31
(with appropriate heads for each size of pipe on the project) shall be delivered to the Owner at
32
the completion of the job.
33
N.
900 direction turns and wall penetrations shall be provided with a bend support or elbow fitting.
34
O.
Support piping from structure, with fasteners appropriate for adjacent surfaces.
35
P.
Copper sweated and threaded connections are to be made prior to PEX connections.
36
Q.
Provide fire stop sealants at fire rated walls. Sealant must be compatible with PEX system.
37
R.
PEX piping is not to be installed where exposed to direct sunlight. Transition to copper as
38
required.
39
S.
Tubing ends shall be cut square and free of burrs or debris before connection is made.
40
T.
PEX tubing shall be fully seated against shoulder of fitting.
41
U.
Horizontal piping shall be supported every 32 ".
42
V.
Vertical piping shall be supported every 4'.
43
W.
Allow 1/8" to 3/16" of slack per foot of run for expansion and contraction.
44
X.
PEX tubing shall be installed to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not rigidly attach to
45
structure.
46
Y.
Provide sleeves where PEX piping passes through masonry walls.
2015-19/
YCS Ed Center TI 22 1117-2 CROSSLINKED POLYETHYLENE (PEX)
PIPING SYSTEM
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
Z. Protect tubing from nail /screw damage with suitable steel plate protectors.
2 AA. The minimum bend radius of PEX tubing is six times its diameter. Smaller radius turns shall be
3 provided with an elbow.
4 BB. Install all piping in a neat, workmanlike manner.
5 CC. Provide insulators where PEX piping passes through metal studs.
DD. Supply stops shall be provided with a pipe bracket support from adjacent structure, a pipe
clamp, tube talon, and a plastic or metal bend support. (Sioux Chief Universal Slider Bracket or
approved equal).
3.02 WATER PIPING TEST AND FLUSHING
10 A. Tests: As the work progresses each section of the water system shall be tested under a 125psi
11 hydrostatic test held for 24 hours without reduction of pressure. If any leaks occur or piping or
12 valves are found to be defective, same shall be removed and new material installed, and the
13 test made on that section again until all material is found to be satisfactory. Such test shall be
14 made in the presence of the Owner's Representative.
15 B. Flushing and Chlorination: All piping shall be flushed to remove all dirt and foreign material.
16 After flushing, all piping shall be chlorinated in accordance with regulations of the Washington
17 State Health Dept. After the contact period, the chlorine shall be drained from the piping and
18 the piping flushed. The Contractor will take samples for bacteriological analysis. The water
19 analysis must be satisfactory before piping is acceptable. All aerators are to be removed prior
20 to flushing at each fixture.
21 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 22 1117-3 CROSSLINKED POLYETHYLENE (PEX)
PIPING SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 22 1119
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish devices as indicated with complete installation procedures for systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 22 1116 — Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
D. Section 22 1117 — Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Piping System
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Strainers
B. Unions
C. Backflow Prevention Devices
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Trap Primer
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STRAINERS
A. Water Strainers: "Y" type, same size as the pipe in which they are installed, with bronze bodies
rated for 125 psi working pressure, and with removable cover and sediment basket. Basket
screen shall be stainless steel or monel, with a net free area of at least 3 times that of the
entering pipe. Provide with blowdown valve where shown on the drawings.
B. Air Strainers: Unless otherwise noted, air and gas line strainers shall be Y- pattern, iron body,
250 psi working pressure, with 40 mesh Monel screen packed with Everdur wool. Air line
strainers shall be fitted with brass blowoff cock.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong
2. Bell and Gossett
3. Apollo
4. Conbraco
5. Hoffman
6. Wheatley
7. Nibco
2.02 UNIONS
A. Dielectric Waterways: Inert, non - corrosive thermoplastic lining with zinc electroplated casing,
rated at 300 psi at 225 deg. F., conforming to ANSI /NSF 61. Type and size to match piping.
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Walter Vallett Company V -line
b. Clear Flow
B. Unions on Copper Pipe:
1. In 2 -Inch Pipe and Smaller: Wrought copper solderjoint copper to copper union.
2. In 2 -1/2 -Inch Pipe and Larger: Brass flange unions.
3. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Watts
b. Nibco
c. Mueller
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 22 1119 - 1 PIPING SPECIALTIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES
2 A. Double Check Valve
3 1. Backflow Prevention Devices
4 a. A Double Check Valve Assembly consist of two spring valves and rubber seat discs.
5 The check module seats and seat discs shall be replaceable. The Double Check
6 Valve Assemblies shall be constructed using Lead Free cast copper silicon alloy.
7 Lead Free Double Check Valve Assemblies shall comply with state codes and
8 standards, where applicable, requiring reduced lead content. The assembly shall also
9 include two resilient seating isolation valves; four top mounted, resilient seating test
10 cocks. The assembly shall meet the requirements of ASSE Std. 1015 and AWWA
11 Std. C510.
12 2. Approved Manufacturers:
13 a. Apollo Conbraco
14 b. Wilkins
15 c. Watts (LF 007)
16 PART 3 EXECUTION
17 3.01 INSTALLATION
18 A. Strainers: Install strainers as indicated. Provide plugged gate or ball valve in blow -off
19 connection on strainers, valve shall be same size as blow -off tapping.
20 B. Unions: Install unions in pipe connections to control valves, coils, regulators, reducers, all
21 equipment, and where it may be necessary to disconnect the equipment or piping for repairs or
22 maintenance; and as indicated.
23 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 22 1119-2 PIPING SPECIALTIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 22 1300
2 SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPING SYSTEM
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 GENERAL
5 A. Includes but not limited to:
6 1. Furnish and install soil, waste, and vent piping systems within building and connect with
7 outside utility lines 5 feet out from building, or as indicated.
8 2. Furnish and install acid waste piping system within building, or as indicated.
9 3. Perform excavating and backfilling required by work of this Section.
10 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
11 A. General Conditions, Division 01
12 B. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements
13 C. Section 22 0529 — Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Equipment
14 D. Section 22 1116 — Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
15 E. Section 22 2020 — Excavation and Backfill for Mechanical Underground Utilities
16 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
17 A. Pipe
18 B. Solvent Cement
19 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING
A. PVC Soil Waste and Vent Piping:
1. Each pipe of PVC pipe shall bear the manufacturers identification mark and shall be
certified by the manufacturer to have met the requirements of the latest ASTM
specifications.
2. Aboveground: All aboveground soil, waste and vent piping and fittings shall be type DWV
and comply with ASTM D 2665, ASTM D 2949, ASTM F 891, ASTM F 1488 and CSA
CAN/CSA-B181.2.
3. Belowground: All below ground soil, waste and vent piping and fittings shall be type DWV
and comply with ASTM D 2665, ASTM D2949, ASTM F891 and CSA CAN /CSA- B181.2.
4. Below Ground PVC Waste and Vent Piping Beyond 5' Outside Building: Shall be type
DWV and comply with ASTM D 2665, ASTM D 2949, ASTM D 3034, ASTM F 891, CSA B
182.2 and CSA CAN /CSA- B182.4.
5. Joints:
a. Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints on drainage pipe shall be made with an
elastomeric seal conforming to ASTM C 1173, ASTM D 3212 or CSA CAN /CSA -B602.
Mechanical joints shall not be installed in above - ground systems, unless otherwise
approved. Joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
b. Solvent Cementing: Joint surfaces shall be clean and free from moisture. A purple
primer that conforms to ASTM F 656 shall be applied. Solvent cement not purple in
color and conforming to ASTM D 2564, CSA CAN /CSA- B137.3, CSA CAN /CSA-
B181.2 or CSA CAN /CSA- B182.1 shall be applied to all joint surfaces. The joint shall
be made while the cement is wet and shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2855.
Solvent- cement joints shall be permitted above or below ground.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
22 1300-1 SOIL, WASTE, & VENT PIPING SYSTEM
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 c. Threaded Joints: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Schedule 80 or heavier
2 pipe shall be permitted to be threaded with dies specifically designed for plastic pipe.
3 Approved thread lubricant or tape shall be applied on the male threads only.
4 B. ABS Soil Waste and Vent Piping:
5 1. Each pipe of ABS pipe shall bear the manufacturers identification mark and shall be
6 certified by the manufacturer to have met the requirements of the latest ASTM
7 specifications.
8 2. Aboveground: All aboveground soil waste and vent piping and fittings shall be type DWV
9 and comply with ASTM D 2661, ASTM F 628, CSA B181.1.
10 3. Belowground: All belowground soil waste and vent piping and fittings shall be type DWV
11 and comply with ASTM D 2661, ASTM F 628, CSA B181.1.
12 4. Belowground ABS Waste and Vent Piping Beyond 5' Outside Building: Shall be type DWV
13 and comply with ASTM D 2661, ASTM D 2751 and ASTM F628.
14 5. Joints:
15 a. Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints on drainage pipe shall be made with an
16 elastomeric seal conforming to ASTM C 1173, ASTM D 3212 or CSA CAN /CSA -B602.
17 Mechanical joints shall not be installed in above - ground systems, unless otherwise
18 approved. Joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
19 b. Solvent Cementing: Joint surfaces shall be clean and free from moisture. A purple
20 primer that conforms to ASTM F 656 shall be applied. Solvent cement not purple in
21 color and conforming to ASTM D 2564, CSA CAN /CSA- B137.3, CSA CAN /CSA-
22 B181.2 or CSA CAN /CSA- B182.1 shall be applied to all joint surfaces. The joint shall
23 be made while the cement is wet and shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2855.
24 Solvent - cement joints shall be permitted above or below ground.
25 c. Threaded Joints: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Schedule 80 or heavier
26 pipe shall be permitted to be threaded with dies specifically designed for plastic pipe.
27 Approved thread lubricant or tape shall be applied on the male threads only.
28 PART 3 EXECUTION
29 3.01 INSTALLATION
30 A. Do not caulk threaded work.
31 B. Place cleanouts as follows:
32 1. Where shown on Drawings and near bottom of each stack and riser.
33 2. At every 90 degree change of direction for horizontal lines.
34 3. Every 100 feet of horizontal run.
35 4. Extended cleanout to accessible surface. Do not place cleanouts in carpeted floors. In
36 such locations, use wall type cleanouts.
37 C. Each fixture and appliance discharging water into sanitary sewer or building sewer lines shall
38 have seal trap in connection with complete venting system so gases pass freely to atmosphere
39 with no pressure or siphon condition on water seal.
40 D. Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Discharge vent pipe minimum 14 inches above roof.
41 Join lines together in fewest practicable number before projecting above roof. Set back vent
42 lines so they will not pierce roof near edge or valley.
43 E. Use torque wrench to obtain proper tension in cinch bands on above ground hubless cast iron
44 pipe. Butt ends of pipe against centering flange of coupling.
45 F. Flash pipes passing through roof with 4 lbs. per sq. ft. of sheet lead flashing (or as shown on the
46 plan) fitted snugly around pipes and caulk between flashing and pipe with flexible waterproof
47 compound. Extend lead up and turn in to pipe for min. 1' vent. Flashing base shall be at least
48 24 inches square.
49 G. Grade soil and waste lines within building perimeter 1/4 inch fall per ft. in direction of flow.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 22 1300-2 SOIL, WASTE, & VENT PIPING SYSTEM
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 H. Installation shall comply with all the latest local plumbing, building, and fire code requirements.
2 Solvent cement joints shall be made in a two -step process with primer manufactured for
3 thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564, test installation
4 with water.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Before piping is covered, conduct tests for leaks and defective work. Notify Architect prior to
testing. Correct leaks and defective work. Fill waste and vent system to roof level with water,
10 feet minimum, and show no leaks for two hours.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 22 1300-3 SOIL, WASTE, & VENT PIPING SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 22 3300
ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing specified system.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 22 0548 — Vibration and Seismic Control
D. Section 22 1116 — Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Water heaters.
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Water heaters
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. State
B. Lochinvar
C. Rhee m /Ruud
D. Bradford White
E. AO Smith
2.02 RESIDENTIAL HEATER
A. This water heater(s) shall be as scheduled and listed by Underwriter's Laboratories. Heater(s)
shall have a maximum working pressure of 150 psi with a separate 3/4" tapping for relief valve
installation and a rigidly supported anode rod for maximum cathodic protection. All internal
surfaces of the heater(s) exposed to water shall be glass -lined with an alkaline borosilicate
composition fused -to- steel. Electrical heating element(s) shall be low watt density incoloy
sheath, screw -in design. Element operation shall be double element, non - simultaneous (or
single element); (or double element, simultaneous). The controls shall include a thermostat
with each element and a high temperature cutoff. The jacket shall provide full size control
compartments for performance of service and maintenance through front panel openings and
enclose the tank with foam insulation. The drain valve shall be located in the front for ease of
servicing. Outer jacket shall be baked enamel finish. Heater(s) shall have an 8 or 10 year
limited warranty covering the tank, thermostats, high limit and heating elements for residential
installation; 3 years for commercial installation ( 2 years on EEC models) as outlined in the
written warranty. Fully illustrated instruction manual to be included. Heater(s) shall meet
ASHRAE Standard 90.lb -1990 for energy efficiencies and the minimum energy factor required
by the Federal "National Energy Conservation Act of 1987 ".
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
223300-1
ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE WATER
HEATERS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
3 A. Water heaters shall each have a relief valve sized to match heat input and set to relieve at 120
4 psi.
B. Install temperature - pressure relief valve on hot water heater and pipe discharge directly above
funnel of floor drain or as shown on plans.
C. Provide and install seismic bracing per S.M.A.C.N.A. zone 3.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 223300-2 ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE WATER
HEATERS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 22 4000
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing specified plumbing fixtures. Provide and
install soft flow aerators on all lavatories and sinks (service sinks not included). See 3.03 for
energy conservation devices.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 22 1116 — Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
D. Section 22 1117 — Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Piping System
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE (REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS)
A. Installation shall meet requirements of local codes and manufacturer's instructions.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. All plumbing fixtures in this section and called out on the plans.
B. Floor drains.
C. Clean outs.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Vitreous China And Cast Iron Fixtures:
1. American Standard
2. Mansfield
3. Kohler
4. Toto
5. Zurn
6. Sloan
B. Supply Stops:
1. Chicago Faucets "STB" Series, Loose Key
2. Engineered Brass Company (EBC) "LAH" Series, Loose Key
3. BrassCraft "KT" Series, Loose Key
C. Faucets:
1. Chicago Faucets
2. Zurn
3. Symmons
4. Toto
5. Speakman
6. Moen
7. Delta
D. Waste:
1. EBC
2. Just
3. Elkay
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
224000-1
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
E. Traps:
1. EBC
2. Just
3. Elkay
4. Dearborn Brass
2.02 FIXTURES
A. See Schedule on Drawings.
2.03 CLEANOUTS
A. Finish Floors:
1. Zurn ZN -1400
2. Smith #4023X
3. Wade #W -6000
4. Josam #56010
B. Resilient Flooring:
1. Zurn ZN- 1400 -X
2. Smith #4143
3. Wade #W- 6000 -T
4. Josam #56010 -12
C. Finished Wall:
1. Zurn Z -1468
2. Smith #4472
3. Wade #W8460R
4. Josam #58890
D. Exposed Drain Lines:
1. Zurn Z -1441
2. Smith #4402
3. Wade #W8560A
4. Josam #58510
E. General Purpose:
1. Zurn Z -1441
2. Smith #4402
3. Wade #W8550A
4. Josam #58500
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Installation: Install fixtures including traps and accessories with accessible stop or control valve
in each hot and cold water branch supply line.
B. Mounting: Verify mounting height with architectural elevations. Architectural elevations take
precedent over these heights.
1. ADA Fixtures:
a. Toilet: 17" to 19" to top of seat.
b. Lavatory: 29" minimum clearance under fixture, maximum of 33" to rim.
C. Make fixture floor connections with approved brand of cast iron floor flange, soldered or caulked
securely to waste pipe.
D. Make joints between fixtures and floor flanges tight with approved fixture setting compound or
gaskets.
E. Caulk between fixtures and wall and floor with white butyl rubber non - absorbent caulking
compound. Point edges.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 224000-2 PLUMBING FIXTURES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
F. Provide concealed arm supports for wall mounted china lavatories.
G. All exposed metal shall be chrome - plated brass.
H. Provide concealed heavy steel stanchion and supporting plate for lavatories and urinals.
I. All fixture mounting heights shall be verified or determined on site prior to installation.
Coordinate with architectural drawings.
J. On ADA water closets, provide flush valve handle or tank handle on side facing wheelchair turn
around.
K. All ADA lavatory P -trap and angle stop assemblies shall be insulated with institutional A.D.A.
insulator kit as manufactured by E.B.C. or equal. Abrasion resistant exterior cover shall be
smooth and have 1/8" wall minimum over cushioned foam insert. Fasteners shall remain
substantially out of sight. Use part 500RHS on offset P -trap if required.
L. Lavatory Faucets: Set hot water delivery temperature at 105 °F. Faucets without a mechanical
temperature limit stop shall be provided with a point of use thermostatic mixing valve.
3.02 ADJUSTING, CLEANING
A. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project.
B. Remove all manufacturers' labels tags, and protective plastic.
C. Clean all fixtures.
3.03 ENERGY CONSERVATION
A. Provide flow controls on all fixtures to limit flow as indicated:
Fixture Standard
Tank -type WC 1.6 gal. (6.0 liters) per flush
Lavatory Faucets (metered) 2.5 gal. (9.5 liters) per minute
Replacement Aerators 2.5 gal. (9.5 liters) per minute
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
END OF SECTION
224000-3
PLUMBING FIXTURES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 23 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes:
1. Pipe Hangers and Supports
2. Duct Hangers and Supports
3. Mechanical Equipment Anchors and Supports
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 01
B. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 23 0548 — Vibration and Seismic Control
D. Section 23 0719 — HVAC Piping Insulations
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All methods, materials, and workmanship shall conform to the International Building Code (IBC)
and International Mechanical Code (IMC), as amended and adopted by the authority having
jurisdiction.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Hangers.
B. Struts.
C. Anchors.
D. Shop drawings are required for all equipment supports and fabricated supports or assemblies.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Hangers and Supports: Elcen, Grinnell, B -Line Systems, Unistrut, Michigan, Tolco, PHD.
B. Anchors: Rawplug, Phillips, Hilti, Michigan.
2.02 GENERAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods: Threaded hot rolled steel, electro- ga Ivan ized or cadmium plated. Hanger rods
shall be sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation, hangers, and fluid) does
not exceed the following:
Nominal Rod Diameter Maximum Load
3/8 Inch 610 Pounds
1/2 Inch 1130 Pounds
B. Hanger Straps: Galvanized steel. Straps shall be sized so that the total load does not exceed
the following:
Strap Size Maximum Load
1" x 22 Gauge 230 Pounds
1" x 20 Gauge 290 Pounds
1" x 18 Gauge 380 Pounds
1" x 16 Gauge 630 Pounds
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230529-1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING & EQUIPMENT
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
C. Beam Attachments: Shall be of the following type
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230529-2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING & EQUIPMENT
MSS Type Elcen Figure No. Grinnel Figure No.
21 33,34 131
22 67 66
23 29A 87
28 95 292,228
30 95 229
2
D.
Anchors: Masonry anchors shall be Phillips wedge anchors, Phillips "Red Head" or Rawl
3
"Saber- Tooth ".
4
E.
Steel: Structural steel per ASTM A36.
5
F.
Wood: Shall be fire treated.
6
2.03 DUCT
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
7
A.
Hangers: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
8
B.
Vertical Duct Supports at Floor: 1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2" x 1/8" (minimum) galvanized steel angle and to
9
support ducts, as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 4 -6. For ducts
10
over 30 inches wide, provide riser reinforcing with hanger rods between the riser support and
11
riser reinforcing.
12
C.
Vertical Duct Supports at Wall: 1 -1/2" x 1/8" (minimum) strap or 1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2" x 1/8"
13
(minimum) angle bracket and as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure
14
4 -7.
15
D.
Hanger Attachments to Structure: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard
16
Figures 4 -1, 4 -2, 4 -3 to suit building construction and as allowed on structural drawings. Where
17
C- clamps are provided, retainer clips shall be used. Friction beam clamps shall not be used.
18
E.
Hanger Attachments to Ducts: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards
19
Figure 4 -4.
20
PART 3
EXECUTION
21
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
22
A.
Provide all necessary bolts, nuts, washers, turnbuckles, rod connectors, and any other
23
miscellaneous accessories required for the support and anchoring of all pipes, ducts, and
24
mechanical equipment.
25
B.
Install steel or wood backing in walls (anchored to studs) as required to provide support for
26
items hung from walls.
27
C.
Install concrete inserts and anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
28
D.
All welded steel support assemblies shall have a power wire brush and primer paint finish.
29
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
30
A.
Provide anchors and supports for all ductwork.
31
B.
Rectangular Duct: Supports and hangers shall be of size and spacing as shown in SMACNA
32
HVAC Duct Construction Standards for the appropriate class of duct. (Hangers maximum
33
allowable loads shall not be as shown in SMACNA Tables but shall be as specified in these
34
specifications.)
35
C.
Round Duct: Supports and hangers shall be of size and spacing as shown in SMACNA HVAC
36
Duct Construction Standards for the appropriate class of duct.
37
D.
Maximum Hanger Spacing (provided duct gauge and reinforcement comply with SMACNA
38
Standards for such spacing):
Duct Area Maximum Spacing
Up to 4 sq. ft. (27" Diameter) 8 Feet
4.1 to 10 sq. ft. (28" to 42" Diameter) 6 Feet
10.1 sq. ft. and up (43" Diameter and up) 4 Feet
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230529-2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING & EQUIPMENT
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 E. Provide supports at each change in direction of duct. Locate hangers at inside and outside
2 corners of elbows, or at each end of fitting, on each side.
3 F. Provide additional supports at each side concentrated loads (such as modulating dampers, duct
4 heaters, sound attenuators, etc.)
5 3.03 CEILING AIR TERMINALS /SERVICES
6 A. Ceiling mounted air terminals or services weighing less than 20 pounds shall be positively
7 attached to the ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the same carrying
8 capacity as the main runners.
9
B.
Terminals or services weighing 20 pounds but not more than 56 pounds in addition to the above
10
shall have two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service to the ceiling
11
system hangers or to the structure above. These wires may be slack.
12
C.
Terminals or services weighing more than 56 pounds shall be supported directly from the
13
structure above by approved hangers.
14
D.
All air terminals that use side inlet "plenums" or have fire dampers shall be supported directly
15
from the structure with approved hangers (regardless of total weight).
16
3.04 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS
17
A.
Provide anchoring and supports for all mechanical equipment.
18
B.
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning equipment where suspended from structure shall be
19
supported per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards or as shown on the drawings.
20
C.
Roof mounted equipment shall be installed on roof curbs provided with the equipment (unless
21
indicated otherwise). Such equipment shall be anchored to the curb, with the curb anchored to
22
the building structure.
23
D.
Equipment shall be supported and anchored in such a way so that no equipment vibration is
24
transmitted to the building structure.
25
E.
Added supports and bracing shall be provided per Section 23 0548.
26
F.
Provide curbing as shown on drawings and as required to support all mechanical equipment.
27
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230529-3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING & EQUIPMENT
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
SECTION 23 0548
2
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
3
PART1
GENERAL
4
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5
A.
This section includes, but not limited to vibration isolation and seismic restraint installation for all
6
equipment, ductwork, and piping as described here -in.
7
B.
Seismic Restraints shall be bidder - designed. Seismic Design Criteria are to be established per
8
the International Building Code and ASCE 7 -05 along with Project Structural drawings.
9
C.
Items not included in this specification shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of
10
providing seismic bracing that meets all the criteria required by the referenced codes and in
11
accordance with the seismic design guidelines and the project structural drawings.
12
1.02 REFERENCED CODE AND STANDARDS
13
A.
The latest adopted versions of the following codes and standards apply to this section.
14
1. International Building Code (IBC)
15
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA -13)
16
3. Seismic Restraint Manual — Guidelines for Mechanical Systems (SMACNA)
17
4. ASCE 7 -05, American Society of Civil Engineers "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
18
Other Structures"
19
5. Applicable Project Structural Drawings for Seismic Design Criteria
20
6. Applicable Manufacturer's Seismic Design Guides for proprietary listed seismic bracing and
21
mounting hardware
22
7. Where there is a conflict in requirements between these guidelines and above mentioned
23
codes the more stringent parameters shall prevail.
24
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
25
A.
General Conditions, Division 1
26
B.
Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements
27
1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA
28
A.
Occupancy Category of Structure (I -IV) per IBC or ASCE 7 -05
29
B.
Component Importance Factor (Ip) per ASCE 7 -05
30
C.
Mapped Acceleration Parameters (S1 and (Ss) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
31
D.
Site Class (A— F) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
32
E.
Site Coefficient (Fa) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
33
F.
Site Coefficient (F„) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
34
G.
Seismic Design Category (A — D) based on Short Period Response Accelerations per IBC and
35
Project Structural Drawings
36
H.
Seismic Design Category (A— D) based on 1- Second Period Response Acceleration per IBC
37
and Project Structural Drawings
38
I.
Amplification Factor ap per ASCE 7 -05
39
J.
Response Modification Factor Rp per ASCE 7 -05
40
1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
41
A.
Seismic Control:
42
1. Periodic Special Inspections: The mechanical contractor shall provide a list of
43
components /systems requiring periodic special inspections per IBC.
2015 -19 /
YCS Ed Center TI 230548-1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. Special Certification Requirements: Each contractor responsible for the construction of a
2 "Designated Seismic System" for active mechanical equipment that must remain operable
3 following the design earthquake, or components with hazardous contents certified by the
4 manufacturer to maintain containment following the design earthquake shall submit a
5 Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for review and approval by the Registered Design
6 Professional responsible for the design of the system. This information shall then be
7 submitted to the AHJ.
8 3. All brace or restraint components, mounting devices, snubbers and anchors.
9 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
10 Not Applicable
11 PART 2 PRODUCTS
12 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
13 Not Applicable
14 2.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
15 A. General:
16 1. All seismic hangers and components shall be domestically made. Products designed
17 domestically and fabricated in a foreign country are prohibited.
18 2. Products not permitted include: powder actuated anchors, gas actuated anchors, or
19 anchors requiring epoxy.
20 3. Only Steel or Ductile Iron components shall be provided. No Cast Iron or Cast Aluminum
21 components are allowed.
22 4. Steel shall be per ASTM A36; hangers and other devices shall be as shown in "SMACNA
23 Seismic Restraint Manual" or approved manufacturers seismic design guidelines.
24 B. Seismic Bracing (rigid and cable):
25 1. Approved Manufacturers:
26 a. Tolco
27 b. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT)
28 c. Mason Industries
29 d. Cooper B -Line
30 e. Kinetics Noise Control
31 f. AFCON
32 g. Gripple
33 h. PHD
34 i. Unistrut
35 j. Anvil or prior approved equal.
36 C. Seismic Anchorages (for wood, steel and concrete):
37 1. Approved Manufacturers:
38 a. Hilti
39 b. ITW Ramset/Red Head
40 c. ITW Buildex
41 d. Mason Industries
42 e. Tolco, AFCON
43 f. Simpson Strong -Tie
44 g. Powers Fasteners, Inc. or prior approved equal.
45 D. Flexible Connectors:
46 1. Approved Manufacturers:
47 a. Mason Industries
48 b. Metraflex
49 c. Victaulic
50 d. Kinetics Noise
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230548-2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT) or prior approved equal.
2 E. Pipe Hanger Components:
3 1. Approved Manufacturers:
4 a. Tolco
5 b. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT)
6 c. Mason Industries
7 d. Cooper B -Line
8 e. Kinetics Noise Control
9 f. AFCON
10 g. Gripple
11 h. PHD
12 i. Unistrut
13 j. Anvil or prior approved equal
14 PART 3 EXECUTION
15 3.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION
16
A.
Motorized equipment shall be mounted on or suspended from spring vibration isolators either
17
integral or external to the equipment. Floor mounted or suspended isolators.
18
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, resilient mounts for motorized equipment shall be of the type and
19
size to provide maximum ten percent transmissibility. Use unhoused, free - standing stable steel
20
springs which are preferred over housed spring assemblies. The horizontal stiffness of the
21
spring shall be approximately equal to its vertical stiffness. The Spring deflection shall be
22
selected based on the equipment power range (HP), speed range (RPM), and static deflection
23
of the supporting structural floor. For large equipment such as fans the steel spring static
24
deflection of the supporting structural floor. It is a specific recommendation that whenever a
25
steel spring is used, two pads of ribbed waffle - pattern neoprene be used in series with the
26
spring.
27
C.
The design of vibration dampening shall consider lateral load as well as vertical load and be
28
suitably snubbed against earthquake forces.
29
D.
A list of isolators accompanied by certified transmissibility ratings for the required duty shall be
30
submitted for each item of equipment.
31
E.
Unless noted otherwise, all vibration isolating equipment shall be of the same make and shall be
32
submitted as one group.
33
F.
Inertia bases shall be provided for all equipment with rotating or reciprocating parts when such
34
equipment is located above occupied spaces and for equipment where the motor is separate
35
from equipment. Bases shall be constructed of welded steel angles and channel frame filled
36
solid with structural concrete with #4 rebar at 6 inches on center spanning short dimensions.
37
3.02 SEISMIC BRACING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
38
A.
Support and bracing from the structure to pipes, ducts and mechanical equipment shall conform
39
to the plumbing & HVAC industry standard SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual, Guidelines for
40
Mechanical Systems" or approved manufacturer's listed seismic assemblies.
41
B.
Provide snubbers for all equipment that is supported on isolators and weighing over 400 lbs.
42
including base. Provide minimum of four snubbers for equipment weighing less than 2,000 lbs.,
43
and eight snubbers for heavier equipment.
44
C.
Curb - mounted rooftop units shall be provided with suitable bracing on four sides connecting unit
45
with curb to prevent excessive movement in a seismic event. The contractor is responsible for
46
proper seismic attachment of the rooftop curb to building structure.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230548-3 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.03 INSTALLATION
2 A. Installation of seismic restraints shall be as follows:
3 1. Upon completion of installation of all seismic restraint materials and before start up of
4 restrained equipment, all debris shall be cleaned from beneath all protected equipment,
5 leaving equipment free to contact snubbers.
6 2. All external utility connections to restrained equipment shall be designed to allow
7 differential seismic motion without damage to the equipment or utility connections.
8 3. Adjust isolators and restraints after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at its
9 operating weight, following manufacturer's written instructions.
10 4. After equipment installation is completed, adjust limit stops following manufacturer's written
11 instructions so they are out of contact during normal operation.
12 5. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
13 6. Torque anchor bolts according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions to resist
14 seismic forces.
15 7. Install vertical braces to stiffen hanger rods and prevent buckling per seismic restraint
16 manufacturer's design. Clamp vertical brace to hanger rods. Requirements apply equally to
17 hanging equipment. Do not weld vertical braces to rods.
18 3.04 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
19 A. When required continuous or periodic special inspections of the equipment and systems
20 designated on the list provided by the mechanical contractor shall be performed in accordance
21 with the IBC and ASCE 7 -05. The owner shall reserve the right to employ an approved special
22 inspector.
23 B. Per the IBC, the registered design professional in responsible charge may designate members
24 of the A &E team to act as special inspectors provided those personnel meet the qualification
25 requirements of the IBC to the satisfaction of the building official.
26 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230548-4 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
SECTION 23 05 93
AIR SYSTEM TESTING & BALANCING
1 SECTION 23 0593
2 AIR SYSTEM TESTING & BALANCING
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 GENERAL
5 A. Includes, but not limited to, testing, balancing and adjusting of air heating, cooling and exhaust
6 systems.
7 1.02 RELATED SECTION(S)
8 A. General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this section.
9 B. Division 23 shall make changes in pulley, belts, and dampers as required for correct balance as
10 recommended by Air Testing & Balancing Agency at no additional cost to Owner.
11 C. Division 23 shall repair leaks in ductwork at no additional cost to Owner.
12 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS)
13 A. Perform testing and balancing in complete accordance with the Associated Air Balancing
14 Council (AABC), National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or National Balancing
15 Council (NBC) standards and procedures.
16 B. Air Testing & Balance Agency shall perform tests specified, compile test data, and submit
17 copies of complete test data to Contractor for forwarding to Architect/Engineer for evaluation
18 and approval.
19 1.04 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED BY THIS SECTION
20 A. Company information including Washington State Contractors' license
21 B. Key personnel and resumes.
22 C. AABC, NEBB, or NBC certifications.
23 D. Provide reference of five (5) completed jobs of similar size and complexity.
24 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
25 A. Final air balance report shall be bound in the O & M Manual or provided under a separate
26 volume.
27 B. Preliminary air balance report shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval.
28 Preliminary report shall note all finished measured data.
29 C. Final Test Data:
30 1. Provide project name, name and telephone number of balancing firm, GC, MC, Architect,
31 and Engineer in the cover (or first page) of report.
32 2. Provide a summary of air balance findings regarding airtightness of each ducted systems,
33 deficiencies of equipment to meet design requirements, deficiencies of space pressure
34 relationships, etc.
35 3. Cover sheet shall have a statement from the site project manager that reads, "The air
36 system testing and balancing report contained here in is true and factual based on actual
37 field measurements and adjustments. I have personally performed or witnessed a
38 minimum of 5% of the airflow tests."
39 4. Each page of test report to have a unique page number.
40 5. Provide fan curve or chart of each fan in system.
41 6. Provide final approved test report in PDF format on CD. Provide one more CD than hard
42 copies of test report.
43 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (QUALIFICATIONS)
44 A. Mechanical Contractor shall procure services of an independent Air Testing & Balance Agency,
45 which specializes in testing, and balancing of heating, ventilating, and cooling systems to
46 balance, adjust, test air - moving equipment, air distribution, and exhaust systems.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230593-1 AIR SYSTEM TESTING & BALANCING
SECTION 23 05 93
AIR SYSTEM TESTING & BALANCING
1
B.
Agency shall be approved in writing by Consultant.
2
C.
Instruments used by Agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained good working order.
3
D.
If requested, conduct tests in presence of Architect/Owner /Engineer.
4
1.07 SEQUENCING
& SCHEDULING
5
A.
Mechanical Contractor shall award test and balance contract to approved agency upon receipt
6
of his contract to proceed to allow Agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other
7
Sections involved and comply with completion date.
8
B.
Begin air testing and balancing upon completion of air cooling, heating, and exhaust systems
9
including installation of all specialties and devices.
10
C.
Mechanical Contractor shall put heating, ventilating, and cooling systems and equipment into
11
full operation and continue their operation during each working day of testing and balancing.
12
PART 2
PRODUCT
13
Not
applicable
14
PART 3
EXECUTION
15
3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
16
A.
Testing Procedure: Air Testing & Balancing Agency shall perform following tests and balance
17
system in accordance with following requirements at design conditions of supply and a minimum
18
outside air CFM (not 100% return or 100% economizer).
19
1. Test, adjust, and record fan rpm to design requirements.
20
2. Test and record motor amperes at design conditions.
21
3. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply duct and obtain design cfm at fans. (systems of
22
1000 CFM or greater)
23
4. Test and record system static pressures: suction, discharge, and clean filters (if applicable;
24
for systems of 2000 CFM or greater)
25
5. Test, adjust, and record system for design cfm air.
26
6. Test, adjust, and record system for design cfm outside air.
27
7. Test, adjust, and record each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design
28
requirements.
29
8. On a floor plan, identify each diffuser, grille, and register to location and area using a
30
designation symbol unique to that page.
31
9. Identify and list size, type, and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers, and testing
32
equipment. Use manufacturer's rating on equipment to make required calculations.
33
10. In readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers, include required cfm and test cfm
34
after adjustments.
35
11. In cooperation with Division 23, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to
36
operate as specified, indicated, or noted.
37
12. Adjust diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts.
38
13. Identify at each volume damper with permanent mark, the position of actuator handle once
39
final balance has been achieved.
40
14. Measure and record all pressure differential relationships as identified by the controls
41
diagrams (i.e. labs, kitchen, pharmacy, art rooms, building pressure, etc). These
42
measurements are to be taken when all HVAC is running after full balance has been
43
completed. Note the measured reference points to determine the pressure differential.
44
15. For any spaces with exhaust and supply to them where design airflows cannot be obtained,
45
the systems shall be adjusted to produce a negative pressure to the adjacent space (i.e.
46
workrooms, restrooms, labs, nurse rooms, etc.)
47
16. When reconciling supply, return, outside, and exhaust air quantities, priority shall be placed
48
on outside air quantities (typically, return air quantities noted on plans are for duct sizing
49
only).
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230593-2 AIR SYSTEM TESTING & BALANCING
SECTION 23 05 93
AIR SYSTEM TESTING & BALANCING
1 17. Where duct pressure sensors are noted in controls diagrams (i.e. variable volume systems)
2 adjust system to its minimum pressure point that still achieves full airflow to all terminals.
3 Record this setpoint in test report and provide data to controls contractor.
4 18. For variable volume systems, adjust sheave package to produce maximum airflow (or
5 diversity as applicable) at 60 Hz with simulated filter loading. If maximum airflow cannot be
6 obtained at 60 Hz, increase frequency until maximum airflow is obtained as allowed by the
7 equipment manufacturer and maximum motor amperes. Record final values.
8 19. Verify that all gravity backdraft dampers are moving freely, open in proper direction, and
9 are unbound.
10 20. After balancing system, measure terminal CFM when system is in 100% economizer. If
11 supply is greater than design, coordinate with controls contractor or MC to provide damper
12 stops to provide design CFM during 100% economizer.
13 B. Final Inspection & Adjustments:
14 1. Balancing agency shall be represented at final inspection meeting by qualified testing
15 personnel with balancing equipment and two copies of air balancing test report.
16 a. Architect may choose and direct spot balancing of one zone. Differences between the
17 spot balance and test report will be justification for requiring repeat of testing and
18 balancing for entire building.
19 b. Rebalancing shall be done in presence of Architect and subject to his approval.
20 c. Spot balance and rebalance shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner.
21 2. System shall be completely balanced and all reports submitted to Architect prior to prefinal
22 inspection.
23 3. Where equipment supplied to job site provides over 5% more air than schedule
24 requirements, rooms supplied by that equipment shall have their supply air quantities
25 increased by the ratio of actual total air quantity supplied to minimum air quantity required
26 by schedule.
27 3.02 BALANCING FIRMS (APPROVED)
28 A. Hardin and Sons
29 B. Testing and Commissioning Services
30 C. MTW Design Services
31 D. Airtest Company, Inc.
32 E. American Air Balance Company
33 F. Advanced Mechanical Services, Inc.
34 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230593-3 AIR SYSTEM TESTING & BALANCING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 23 0713
2 EQUIPMENT /DUCTWORK INSULATION
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 GENERAL
5 A. This section describes the insulation requirement to meet or exceed the 2012 Washington State
6 Energy Code. Lining installation is per 23 3113.
7 1.02 RELATED SECTION(S)
8 A. General Conditions, Division 1
9 B. Section 20 0000 - General Mechanical Conditions
10 C. Section 23 3113 - Steel Ductwork
11 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
A. Wrap Insulation
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. See individual Sections.
2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Manville Corporation Owens Corning, Knauf Insulation or approved equal.
B. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket (Wrap Insulation): Manville, Microlite Type 75 meeting ASTM
C553, Type 1, Class B -2; flexible blanket.
1. 'K' ('ksi') Value: 0.27 at 75 °F (0.040 at 24 °C) installed.
2. Density and R- value:
a. R -3.3: 1.0" inch of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. glass fiber blanket.
b. R -5.3: 2.0" inches of 0.75 lb/cu. Ft. or 1.5 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. glass fiber
blanket.
c. R -7: 3.0 inches of 0.75 lb/cu. Ft. or 2.0 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. glass fiber
blanket.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK, aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and laminated to
fire - resistant kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and /or outward cinched
expanded staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed.
C. Rigid Fiber Glass Board: Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB; rigid.
1. `K' (`ksi') Value: ASTM C 177, 0.22 at 75 °F mean temperature.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 °F.
3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK or PSK
conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II.
4. Securement: Secured in place using adhesive and mechanical fasteners spaced a
minimum of 12" on center with a minimum of 2 rows per side of duct. Insulation shall be
secured with speed washers and all joints, breaks and punctures sealed with appropriate
pressure- sensitive foil tape, or glass fabric and vapor retarder mastic.
5. Density and R- value:
a. R -4.5: 1.0" of 6.0 B /cu.ft.
b. R -6.8: 1.5" of 6.0 B /cu.ft.
c. R -9.1: 2.0" of 6.0 Ib. /cu.ft.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
230713-1 EQUIPMENT /DUCTWORK INSULATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 D. Duct Insulation Protection:
2 1. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016 inch (.045 mm) thick sheet, smooth /embossed finish, with
3 longitudinal slip joints and 2 -inch (50 mm) lamps.
4 2. Manville Insulkote ET, a non water -vapor retarder, non - burning, weatherproof coating for
5 use over insulation where "breathing" is required.
6 3. Manville Zeston 2000 jacketing, UV resistant polyvinyl chloride covering with joints secured
7 and sealed with Manville Perma -Weld Adhesive.
8 4. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz /sq. yd. (220 g /sq. m.), plain weave cotton treated
9 with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
10 5. Self- Adhering Jacketing: Material to be VentureClad [1579CW] with a white finish.
11 Jacketing material is to have a maximum flame spread /smoke developed index of 25/20
12 per UL 723, 1 0.0000 water vapor permeance rating per ASTM E -96, mold inhibitors
13 incorporated, and be UV stable.
14 2.03 DUCTWORK LINING
15 A. See Section 23 3113 - Steel Ductwork.
16 PART 3 EXECUTION
17 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
18 A. Verify that ductwork has been tested for leakage in accordance with SMACNA standards before
19 applying insulation materials.
20 B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry, and free of foreign material.
21 C. External Ductwork Insulation:
22 1. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature with vapor retardant
23 jacket. Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor
24 retardant adhesive.
25 2. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature with or without vapor
26 retardant jacket. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
27 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations except
28 where prohibited by code.
29 4. The underside of ductwork 24 inches or greater shall be secured with mechanical fasteners
30 and speed clips spaced approximately 18 inches on center. The protruding ends of the
31 fasteners should be cut off flush after the speed clips are installed, and then, when
32 required, sealed with the same tape as specified above.
33 D. For installation of lining insulation, see Section 23 3113
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 230713-2 EQUIPMENT /DUCTWORK INSULATION
1 3.02 INSULATION SCHEDULE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
A. Provide wrap insulation and duct liner for the duct systems indicated per the following table (R-
value indicates the thickness to be provided as defined in Section 23 0713 for wrap insulation
and Section 23 3113 for liner)-
DUCT TYPE AND LOCATION
LINER
WRAP
Within Conditioned Space:
- Supply Air
R - 3.3
Not Required
- Return Air
R - 3.3
Not Required
- Primary Air
Not Required
R — 3.3
- Relief Air
Not Required
R — 3.3"
- Transfer Air
R -3.3
Not Required
- Exhaust Air
R -3.3
Not Required"
- Outside Air
I Not Required
R - 7'
Table Footnotes:
1 Where duct is exposed to view, provide wrap with paintable duct insulation protection.
2 Building level insulation is required from backdraft/motorized damper to louver or roof
hood. See plans for additional details. Coordinate with GC for insulation.
B. For purposes of the Insulation Schedule above, the following defines the duct systems:
1. Supply Air: Air that has passed through mechanical conditioning device, such as a furnace,
coil, evaporative section, heat recovery device, etc. that is distributed to the conditioned
space.
2. Return Air: Air from the conditioned space to an air handler.
3. Primary Air: See Section 23 3113 — Steel Ductwork.
4. Relief Air: Air from the conditioned space to the outdoors or to a large semi - conditioned or
non - conditioned space.
5. Transfer Air: Air from one conditioned space to another conditioned space.
6. Exhaust air: Air from a space moved by a fan to directly outside. Also, air downstream of a
heat recovery device to directly outside.
7. Outside Air: Air from the outside to a mechanical conditioning device such as a furnace,
coil, evaporative section, heat recovery device, etc.
22 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
230713-3 EQUIPMENT /DUCTWORK INSULATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 23 3113
STEEL DUCTWORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing above - ground ductwork and related items
specified below and shown on Drawings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
B. Section 20 0000 - General Mechanical Conditions
C. Section 23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment
D. Section 23 0713 - Equipment/Ductwork Insulation
E. Section 23 3300 - HVAC Specialties
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Duct liner
B. Volume dampers
C. Duct Sealers
D. Turning vanes
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct Sizes: All duct dimensions shown are inside clear dimensions. Where inside duct lining is
specified or indicated, duct dimensions are to the inside face of lining.
B. Low Pressure System: Velocities less than 2,000 fpm and static pressure in duct 2 inches w.g.
or less.
C. Medium Pressure System: Velocities greater than 2,000 fpm or static pressure in duct up
through 6 inches w.g.
D. High Pressure System: Velocities greater than 2,000 fpm or static pressure in duct over 6
inches w.g. and up to 10 inches w.g.
E. Primary Duct System: Any duct between an air handler and a terminal (capable of heating
and /or cooling) in a variable air volume or induction terminal system.
F. Gauges: Steel sheet and wire are U.S. Standard Gauge; aluminum sheet is Brown and Sharpe
Gauge.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
2.02 DUCTS
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal, except as indicated. Fabricate of zinc - coated lock- forming quality steel sheets meeting
requirements of ASTM A 527 -85, "Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the
Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality ", with G 60 coating.
B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of 1 -1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where
not possible, provide turning vanes.
C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 30° divergence and 45° convergence.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233113-1 STEEL DUCTWORK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
D. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches (200 mm) and smaller
with crimp in direction of airflow.
2.03 DUCT JOINTS
A. General: Duct with sides or diameter up to and including 36 inches shall be as scheduled
below.
Max. Side
Required Minimum
Type of Transverse
Bracing
Inches
Metal Gauges Steel,
Joint Connections
Required
U.S. Standard Gauge
Seam Gauge
Gauge
Under 13"
26
S- drive, pocket or bar
None
28
24
slips on 7 - 10" centers
28
13" to 24"
24
S- drive, pocket or bar
None
26
24
slips on 7 -10" centers
22
B. Proprietary duct connections may be used on other sizes, Ductmate, WDCI, or equal.
2.04 ROUND DUCT
A. Fabricate of zinc - coated lock- forming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A 527-
85, "Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock
Forming Quality ", with G 60 coating.
B. Gauae Selection Table:
Duct
Maximum 2" w.g.
Static Positive
Maximum 2" w.g.
Static Negative
Diameter
in Inches
Spiral Seam
Longitudinal
Spiral
Seam
Longitudinal
Gauge
Seam Gauge
Gauge
Seam Gauge
3 thru 8
28
28
28
24
9 thru 14
28
26
26
24
15 thru 26
26
24
24
22
27 thru 36
24
22
22
20
37 thru 50
22
20
20
18
51 thru 60
20
18
18
16
61 thru 84
18
16
16
14
12 C. Provide insulation where required by the Insulation Schedule in Section 23 0713 -
13 Equipment/Ductwork Insulation.
14 2.05 DUCT LINER
15 A. Densities and R- value:
16 1. R -3.3: 1.0 inch of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. duct liner.
17 2. R -5.3: 1.5 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. duct liner.
18 3. R -7: 2.0 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft. duct liner
19 B. Duct Liner:
20 1. 'K' ('ksi') Value: ASTM C518, 0.25 at 75 °F (0.036 at 24 °C).
21 2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 or higher based on "Type A mounting ".
22 3. Maximum Velocity on Mat or Coated Air Side: 5,000 ft/min (25.4 m/sec).
23 4. Adhesive: UL listed waterproof type.
24 5. Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically fastened.
25 6. Approved Manufacturers:
26 a. Manville Linacoustic (Mat Faced)
27 b. Permacote (meeting ASTM C1071)
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233113-2 STEEL DUCTWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2.06 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
2
A.
Provide flexible equipment connections between ductwork and equipment. See Section 23
3
3300 - HVAC Specialties.
4
2.07 VOLUME DAMPERS
5
A.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
6
Flexible, and as indicated.
7
B.
Fabricate splitter dampers of same material and gage as duct to 24 inches (600 mm) size in
8
either direction, and two gages heavier for larger sizes, secured with continuous hinge or rod,
9
operated with minimum 1/4 -inch (6 mm) diameter rod.
10
C.
Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9 -1/2 x 30 inch (240 x 760 mm).
11
D.
Fabricate multi -blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch
12
(300 x 825 mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized
13
channel frame with suitable hardware.
14
E.
Except in round ductwork 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter and smaller, provide end bearings.
15
F.
Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers. Where width
16
exceeds 30 inches (750 mm), provide regulator at both ends.
17
2.08 DUCT HANGERS
18
A.
See Section 23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment.
19
2.09 DUCT SEALANT AND ADHESIVES
20
A.
Duct Sealant technical makeup shall be water based, solvent -free and of the synthetic latex
21
family. Sealants shall be UL 181 Listed, meet all SMACNA pressure and seal classes and be
22
rated to ± 15 inches water gauge. Sealants shall have flame spread of 0 and smoke
23
development of 0 when tested in accordance to ASTM E -84. They shall be formulated to
24
withstand working temperatures of -25 °F to +200 °F. All sealants shall exceed 500 hours under
25
ASTM C -732 (Artificial Weathering) and pass ASTM C -734 (Low Temperature Flexibility after
26
Artificial Weathering). All sealants shall be of an elastomeric nature, have a minimum weight of
27
12 pounds and a minimum solids content by weight of 66% ± 2 %. Sealants shall be resistant to
28
cracking, peeling, mold and mildew. Sealants shall also have excellent water and UV
29
resistance. Sealants shall meet FDA, USDA and EPA standards as well as meet NFPA 90A
30
and 90B requirements. Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1010 or DP 1020 duct sealant
31
or equal.
32
B.
Solvent based duct sealant VOC shall be less than or equal to 50 g/I and be UL 723 Classified
33
with a flame spread of 0 and a smoke development of 0. Sealant shall have passed 1000 hours
34
of QUV accelerated outdoor aging testing. Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1090 duct
35
sealant or equal.
36
1. All traverse joints, longitudinal seams and penetrations in duct systems shall be sealed with
37
duct sealant of the type specified. Spiral lockseams are not longitudinal seams and do not
38
require duct sealant. All sealant shall be applied per the manufactures' recommendations.
39
Joints that are not fully welded shall be sealed. For spiral and flat oval duct slip
40
connections; coat both the female and male ends. The slip connections should then be
41
brushed over with an additional coat 2 to 3 inches wide 20 to 40 mils thick.
42
2. All conditioned air supply ducts, return ducts and fresh air intakes shall have all joints and
43
seams sealed or welded, except spiral seams round and flat oval ducts, which are exempt.
44
3. Seal sealants and joint sealants shall not be used as a substitute for good workmanship.
45
No ductwork will be covered or installed until inspected and pressure tested if necessary.
46
C.
Gaskets for TDC, TDF and applied flange connections shall meet all SMACNA pressure and
47
seal classes. The gasket shall meet UL 723, ASTME E -84, NFPA 90A and 90B requirements
48
as well as FDA, USDA and EPA standards. The tape shall be 5/8 inches by 3/16 inches and
49
applied according to the manufactures' directions. Expanded or extruded foam gaskets are not
50
acceptable. Gasket shall be Design Polymerics DP 1040 Butyl Gasket Tape or equal.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233113-3 STEEL DUCTWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
D. Exterior Ductwork: Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1090, or equal.
2 2.10 TURNING VANES
3 A. Turning vanes may be either Contractor or factory fabricated. Factory fabricated vanes shall be
4 Barber Colman "Airturns" or approved.
B. Vanes and runners shall be fabricated of minimum 24 gauge galvanized.
C. Turning vanes shall comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. For duct widths
less than 19 inches, vanes may be single wall construction; for widths greater than 19 inches,
vanes shall be double wall "airfoil" type.
D. Turning vanes shall be equally spaced, parallel to each other, and securely attached to runners.
10 E. For elbows where the inlet and outlet dimensions are not the same, modify vane shape or angle
11 to provide optimum turning.
12 PART 3 EXECUTION
13 3.01 INSTALLATION
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
A. Ducts:
1. Straight and smooth on inside with joints neatly finished unless otherwise directed.
2. Duct panels through 48 -inch dimension having acoustic duct liner need not be crossbroken
or beaded.
3. Crossbreak unlined ducts and duct panels larger than 48 inch or bead 12 inches on center.
4. Securely anchor ducts to building structure with screws.
5. Brace and install ducts so they shall be free of vibration under all conditions of operation.
6. Round, horizontal ducts shall be hung with bands, which extend the entire perimeter of the
duct.
7. Ducts shall be braced and guyed to prevent lateral or horizontal swing.
8. Ducts shall not bear on top of structural members.
9. Make duct take -offs to branches, registers, grilles, and diffusers as detailed on Drawings.
10. Ducts shall be large enough to accommodate inside duct liner. Dimension shown on
Drawings are net clear inside dimensions after duct liner has been installed.
11. Properly flash where ducts protrude above roof.
12. Install internal ends of slip joints in direction of flow. Make joints airtight using specified
duct sealer.
13. Cover horizontal and longitudinal joints on exterior ducts two layers of Hardcast tape
installed with Hardcast HC -20 adhesive according to Manufacturer's recommendations.
14. Ducts installed on mechanical space floor or walkway where ducts may be subject to
abuse shall have Ductmate /35 or (heavy) SMACNA "J" type connection on all joints.
15. Contractor shall obtain a signed statement from kitchen Contractor verifying ceiling height
and hood configuration prior to hood ductwork fabrication.
16. Provide duct transitions to equipment openings.
B. Duct Liner:
1. Adhere insulation to sheet metal with full coverage of a UL listed adhesive.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners as indicated by SMACNA or
manufacturer. Pin length should be as recommended by the liner manufacturer.
3. All exposed edges of the fibrous type liner must be factory or field coated. For systems
operating at 4000 fpm or higher, a metal nosing must be installed in all liner leading edges.
4. Repair fibrous type liner surface penetrations with UL listed adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct
size to allow for insulation thickness.
6. Provide duct liner for all return air ducts unless specifically excluded in Section 23 0713.
7. Provide acoustic duct liner for duct indicated on plan and Section 23 0713.
8. Provide liner for all supply duct unless specifically excluded from Section 23 0713.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
233113 -4
STEEL DUCTWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
9. Provide ductliner for first 10' in and out of all exhaust fans (excluding dishwasher, kitchen
2
fume, and particulate fans).
3
C.
Turning Vanes:
4
1. Install turning vanes in all square duct turns, and at locations shown on drawings.
5
2. Securely attach turning vane runners to ductwork.
6
D.
Flexible Connections: See Section 23 3300 - HVAC Specialties.
7
E.
Dampers:
8
1. Provide each take -off with an adjustable volume damper to balance that branch.
9
2. Anchor dampers securely to duct.
10
3. Install dampers in main ducts within insulation.
11
4. Dampers in branch ducts shall fit against sheet metal walls, bottom and top of duct, and be
12
securely fastened. Cut duct liner to allow damper to fit against sheet metal.
13
F.
Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers: Install and anchor securely.
14
G.
Adjustable Lock Splitter Dampers:
15
1. Dampers in equipment rooms shall be complete with locking quadrant.
16
2. Other dampers shall have concealed ceiling damper regulator with plate.
17 H. Painting of Ductwork: Paint ductwork visible through registers, grilles, and diffusers flat black
18 I. Ductwork Leakage Criteria:
19 1. All transverse joints and longitudinal seams shall conform to SMACNA's Class A sealing
20 requirements as defined on page 1 -6 of the 1985 SMACNA Manual, First Edition.
21 2. Constant Volume Systems /Supply Ductwork
22 a. Allowable Leakage — per SMACNA
23 3. Constant Volume Systems /Return Ductwork
24 a. Return Ductwork — per SMACNA
25 J. Ductwork Leakage Testing:
26 1. Duct leakage testing is required for all duct systems operating at 3" water column or
27 greater AND for low pressure ductwork (i.e. operating at less than 3" water column) for up
28 to 300 feet of duct as selected by the Engineer.
29 2. Installed ductwork shall be tested prior to installation of access doors, take -offs, insulation,
30 etc.
31 3. All leak testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer or representative of the Engineer. The
32 Contractor shall give the Engineer 72 hours notice prior to testing. Any testing not
33 witnessed by the Engineer or his /her representative, shall be considered invalid and will be
34 redone.
35 4. Ductwork (i.e. medium and high pressure) shall be tested in accordance with the
36 requirements outlined in the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual "High Pressure
37 Duct Leak Test ".
38 5. Duct leakage, in excess of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual, shall be repaired
39 and have the test re- performed until the leakage rate is within acceptable levels.
40 NOTE: It is recommended that the first 100' -300' of ductwork installed be tested to
41 ensure the quality of the workmanship at an early state.
42 K. Duct Cleanliness Criteria: Unless otherwise specified, the delivery, storage, and installation of
43 all un -lined ductwork shall comply with the intermediate duct cleanliness level of SMACNA Duct
44 Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines. All lined and acoustic duct shall comply with the
45 advanced level.
46 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233113-5 STEEL DUCTWORK
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 23 3300
2 HVAC SPECIALTIES
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 SUMMARY
5
A.
Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing specified material as described in Contract
6
Documents.
7
B.
Filters used in air handling units and heat pumps.
8
C.
Flexible ductwork from supply air branch duct runouts to diffusers where indicated on drawings.
9
D.
Furnishing and installing fire dampers, ceiling radiation, and fire /smoke dampers at penetrations
10
of fire rated walls, floors, and ceiling membranes, at ducts, registers, grilles, or louvers as
11
indicated on drawings. Installation shall be complete with sleeves, angles, and all other
12
accessories as required by UL installation instructions, local codes, and reviewing authorities.
13
E.
Section Includes:
14
1. Filters and filter housing.
15
2. Flexible connections.
16
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
17
A.
General Conditions
18
B.
Division 01
19
C.
Section 20 0000 - General Mechanical Requirements
20
D.
Section 23 3113 - Steel Ductwork
21
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
22
A.
Filters
23
B.
Flexible ductwork
24
C.
Flexible equipment connections
25
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
26
A.
Filters (Summary list including equipment tag and size and quantity of filter per unit.)
27
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCES
28
A.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
29
1. Bear the AMCA seal and UL label, NSF approved.
30
1.06 SPARE PARTS
31
A.
Deliver with O &M Manuals six fusible links of each type used on the project where replaceable
32
link -type dampers are furnished.
33 PART 2 PRODUCTS
34 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
35 A. See individual Sections.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233300-1 HVAC SPECIALTIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
i� %1YaJI %1 =I K
2
A.
2" MERV 8:
3
1. General: 30% efficient filters as specified herein shall be medium efficiency, pleated panel
4
type, disposable filters; Farr 30/30 or approved and shall have an average efficiency of 25-
5
30% atmospheric and 90 -92% arrestance by ASHRAE Standard 52 -76 unless instructed
6
otherwise.
7
2. Filter Housings: Shall be sized to fit furnished unit or duct to be installed in and provide
8
minimum filter sizes to obtain a maximum filter velocity of 300 fpm.
9
3. Resistance: Initial resistance of a 24 "x24 "x2" filter handling 2000 CFM shall not exceed
10
0.31" w.g.
11
4. Duct Holding Capacity: Shall be no less than 60 grams per square foot of face area at 1.0"
12
w.g.
13
5. Size: Filters shall be 2" deep (unless indicated otherwise), with number and sizes
14
indicated, or as required to give minimum nominal face area as scheduled on drawings.
15
6. Provide a filter pull strap for all multiple filter sets longer than 24 inches.
16
7. Approved Manufacturers:
17
a. Farr Co.
18
b. Airguard
19
c. Purolator
20
d. Eco -Air
21
2.03 FILTER HOUSINGS - FAN COIL UNITS
22
A.
Shall be fabricated and furnished as part of the fan coil units.
23
2.04 TEMPORARY AIR INLET FILTERS
24
A.
Type: Glass fiber or synthetic material blanket type filter media. Inlets and outlets shall be
25
MERV 8 and unit shall be same as final.
26
B.
Capacity: Shall have an average arrestance no less than 64 %; dust holding capacity of 172
27
grams.
28
C.
Size: Minimum 1" thick cut to size as required to cover inlets.
29
2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
30
A.
Formable, flexible, circular duct shall have a fiberglass scrim (or equivalent) and retain its cross -
31
section, shape, rigidity, and shall not restrict air flow after bending.
32
B.
Normal 1 -1/2 inches thick, 3/4 lb/cu ft density fiberglass insulation with airtight, see - through
33
polyethylene or polyester core, sheathed in seamless vapor barrier jacket factory installed over
34
flexible assembly.
35
C.
Assembly including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet Class 1 requirements of NFPA 90A
36
and be UL 181 rated, with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or
37
under.
38
D.
Approved Manufacturers:
39
1. Wiremold
40
2. Flexible Air Movers Inc.
41
3. J.P. Lamborn
42
4. General Flex Corp.
43
5. Young & Co. Mfg 165
44
6. Thermaflex'GKM'
45
7. Cleavaflex
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233300-2 HVAC SPECIALTIES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2.06 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
2 A. General: 30 oz. closely woven UL approved glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fire
3 retardant, waterproof, airtight, resistant to acids and grease, and withstand constant
4 temperatures of 250 °F.
5 B. Approved Manufacturers:
6 1. Ventglas by Ventfabrics
7 2. DuroDyne MFN
8 PART 3 EXECUTION
9 3.01 EXAMINATION
10 A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural
11 rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers.
12 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
13 3.02 INSTALLATION
14 A. Filters and Filter Housing:
15 1. Contractor to install temporary filters to provide temporary sealing of all duct systems
16 during the construction period to prevent the entry of dirt, dust and debris into the duct
17 systems. These systems that are operated during the construction period shall have
18 temporary filters installed over all inlets and filters installed in the air handling equipment.
19 Filters installed in equipment shall be same type as final filters required for the units.
20 Temporary air inlet type filters shall be taped over all inlets to completely filter all air drawn
21 into the systems.
22 2. Contractor to provide and install four (4) complete sets of all filters as scheduled below:
23 a. At equipment start-up.
24 b. Prior to balancing system.
25 c. Three (3) months after building occupancy.
26 d. During the one year warranty to be scheduled with Owner.
27 3. Construct and install filter housings to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Provide sheet
28 metal blanks, felt, rubber, and /or neoprene seals as necessary.
29 4. Furnish Owner with schedule of filter sizes for each air handler, heat pump, furnace, and
30 fan coil unit.
31 B. Flexible Equipment Connections:
32 1. Provide insulated flexible equipment connections between ducts and vibrating equipment.
33 Fans which are internally isolated with spring isolators do not require flexible connections,
34 unless indicated on the plans.
35 2. Install flexible connections with sufficient slack to permit 2 inches of horizontal or vertical
36 movement of ducts or equipment at connection point without stretching the flexible
37 material.
38 3. Where installed exposed to weather, provide a galvanized "hat" channel protecting top and
39 vertical stretches of flexible connector from sunlight and weather.
40 C. Flexible Ductwork:
41 1. Install duct in fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using ten foot maximum
42 lengths.
43 2. Make duct connections by coating exterior of duct collar for 3 inches with duct sealer and
44 securing duct in place over sheet metal collar with 1/2 inch wide metal cinch bands and
45 sheet metal screws. Tape exterior of flex to duct ahead of damper.
46
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233300-3 HVAC SPECIALTIES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 23 3423
EXHAUSTFANS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing specified material as described in Contract
Documents.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Section.
B. Section 20 0000 - General Mechanical Conditions.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCES (REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES)
A. Bear AMCA seal, UL 507 (for continuous operation), and UL 705 (volume control by speed
control on direct drive units).
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Exhaust Fans
B. Fan curves showing system curve, and a fan curve with the maximum operation point with
maximum motor size (limited by maximum shaft speed of and /or surge point).
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THIS SECTION
A. Exhaust Fans
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. See individual Sections.
2.02 ROOF MOUNTED (DOWN BLAST) EXHAUST FANS
A. General:
1. Direct drive or have adjustable pitch V -belt as noted on plans.
2. Wheels shall be backward curved and housing shall be removable or hinged aluminum.
3. Isolate motor with vibration dampeners.
4. Provide quiet type back -draft dampers.
5. Provide insulated pre- fabricated metal roof curb shall be for flat or sloped roof as required
with 12" minimum height. Furnish with 4" wide flashing all around with cant strip.
6. Fan shall be factory painted with acid resistant coating on fan exterior; color as selected by
Architect.
7. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Breidert
b. Carnes
c. Cook
d. Greenheck
e. Jenn
f. Penn Barry
g. Twin City Fans
2.03 SPEED CONTROL
A. Use manufacturer's recommended speed control, which varies speed from 50 to 100% of full
speed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor fan units securely to structure or curb.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233423-1 EXHAUST FANS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Extend all internal wiring to box on exterior of unit.
2 C. Factory mount speed control on outside of case on in -line fans, including wall propeller fans,
3 and underneath weather casing for rooftop fans.
4 D. Install motorized damper no closer than 12" from fan.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233423-2 EXHAUST FANS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 23 3700
AIR TERMINALS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install complete, all air terminals described in Contract Documents.
2. Ceiling diffusers with damper.
3. Louvers connected to ductwork.
4. Roof hoods.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
B. Section 20 0000 - General Mechanical Conditions.
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Grilles, registers, and diffusers
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. See individual Sections.
2.02 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS (GRD)
A. Shall be as scheduled on drawings.
B. Provide the various grilles, registers and diffusers shown on the plans and of the various types
herein before specified. All terminals with prime -coat finish shall be installed before the walls
and ceiling is painted, in order that they may be finish painted by the General Contractor. Those
with factory finish or aluminum construction shall be installed after the walls and ceilings are
painted. All air terminals located in shower, toilet rooms, locker and dressing rooms shall be of
aluminum construction w /baked off -white finish. All other Air Terminals shall be of a standard
steel construction; wall- mounted terminals shall be prime coat finish; ceiling diffusers, exhaust
and return air terminals shall have factory - applied baked enamel finish, color as selected by
Architect.
C. Approved Manufacturers: (subject to submittal approval):
1. Anemostat
2. Nailor
3. Kees
4. Krueger
5. Price
6. Titus
7. Tuttle & Bailey
8. Shoemaker (except 700MA)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The interior of duct connection including opposed blade damper and all visible duct interiors at
connection shall be painted matte black.
B. Each air terminal shall be installed with a spun rubber gasket between the flange and the frame
or wall.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233700-1 AIR TERMINALS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
C. Each air terminal with flexible duct connection shall have a square -to -round transition adapter
box.
3 D. Anchor securely into openings.
4 E. All air terminals that supply air, which are not required to have an OBD, shall be provided with a
5 volume damper.
6 F. Provide round neck to flex duct reducers as required.
7 G. All outlet and inlets exposed to the weather shall be adequately flashed and installed in a
8 manner to assure complete weatherproofness.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 233700-2 AIR TERMINALS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 23 7400
2 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 SUMMARY
5 A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing packaged units as shown on Contract
6 Documents.
7 B. Related Section(s):
8 1. General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Section.
9 2. Section 20 0000 - Mechanical General Requirements.
10 3. Section 23 3300 - HVAC Specialties.
11 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
12 A. Qualifications:
13 1. Air - Cooled Condensing Unit Section shall be rated according to ARI Standards.
14 2. Air delivery of units certified in accordance with standard test code for centrifugal fans
15 adopted by AMCA.
16 3. All units shall be designed for outdoor use.
17 4. Furnace sections shall be AGA approved.
18 B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Each unit shall be UL labeled.
19 1.03 WARRANTY
20 A. This Contractor shall warrant the systems to be free from defects in material, equipment and
21 workmanship under normal use and service and any time within one (1) year from date of final
22 acceptance, with repair or replacement without cost to the Owner, any material, equipment or
23 workmanship found to be defective. The date of final acceptance shall be recorded on a
24 warranty certificate for each unit. The certificate is to be included in Operation & Maintenance
25 Manual. See Section 20 0000.
26 B. All systems and control equipment shall be inspected and serviced or adjusted as required for
27 optimum and satisfactory performance a minimum of four (4) times during the next twelve (12)
28 months after the date of final acceptance. The first inspection shall be made approximately thirty
29 (30) days after final acceptance and the final inspection shall be made during the eleventh
30 month thereafter.
31 C. At the end of the first year, the Contractor shall present a service contract to the Owner which
32 would cover the following warranty and filter replacement:
33 D. In addition to the above one -year warranty, all motor compressors furnished under this Contract
34 shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and
35 service for an additional four (4) years.
36 E. This Contractor shall warrant the heat exchanger to be free from defects in material, equipment,
37 and workmanship for ten (10) years from the date of final acceptance.
38 1.04 REFERENCES
39 A. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air Conditioning and Air - Source Heat Pump Equipment.
40 B. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
41 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
42 Not Applicable.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 237400-1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
3 A. Carrier
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
WN
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
B. Lennox
C. Trane
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General: Units shall be completely factory assembled and tested and fully charged with non -
ozone depleting refrigerant. Units shall include the following:
1. Refrigerant Coils
2. Condenser Fans and Motors
3. Interconnected Wiring
4. Prewired Control Panel
5. Filter Section. Also, see Section 23 3300 HVAC Specialties.
6. Factory installed 100% modulating economizer cycle including motorized dampers,
controls. Include barometric relief or powered relief as noted on schedule.
7. Corrosion resistant, all- weather cabinet with down flow through curb configuration.
8. Unit shall have an efficiency rating equal to or better than that scheduled.
9. Cooling units shall be operable down to 35 °F outdoor temperature.
10. Heat pump unit shall be operable down to 0 °F outdoor temperature.
11. Supplemental Electric Heaters
B. Refrigerant Coils: Constructed of copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum plate fins.
C. Cabinets: Galvanized, weatherproof and coated inside and outside with corrosion - resistant
paint.
D. Roof Curb: Shall be factory furnished to mate with unit. Curb height not to exceed 14 inches.
E. Refrigerant shall meet the latest EPA requirements.
F. Air - Cooled Condensing Unit Section:
1. Unit shall contain a strainer - dryer.
2. Furnish unit with time delay or cycle protection to prevent short cycling.
G. Compressor:
1. Hermetic or semi - hermetic type mounted on vibration isolators.
2. Equip with crankcase heater.
H. Condenser Fan: Axial flow type propeller fan.
I. Refrigerant Lines: Shall have:
1. Flexible connections.
2. Suction and liquid line service valves.
J. Fan Section:
1. Centrifugal Fan - One or more.
a. Double inlet.
b. Double width forward curved Class I.
c. Constructed and tested in accordance with AMCA requirements.
K. Dampers:
1. Motorized dampers shall be Class IA and have a leakage rate of no more than 4 cfm /sq.ft.
at 1.0 inch w.g.
2. Non - motorized dampers shall have a leakage rate of no more than 20 cfm /sq.ft. at 1.0 inch
W. g.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 237400-2 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
0
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
A. Provide PVC P -trap on condensate discharge.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 237400-3 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 23 9000
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Limited To: Demolition and maintaining existing systems.
B. Related Sections: General Conditions, Division 1 and Section 20 0000 apply to this Section.
1.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all existing Mechanical
equipment including, but not limited to piping, fixtures, HVAC equipment, ductwork in areas
shown on the drawings and indicated thereon.
B. The Mechanical Contractor shall also be responsible for the removal and /or relocation of all
Mechanical equipment that will interfere with installation and operation of any new construction
indicated or required.
C. Any existing equipment to which modifications are made under this contract shall be painted
and labeled in accordance with specifications for new materials.
D. All Mechanical equipment (other than piping) to be removed shall remain the property of and
shall be transported, stored, or disposed as directed by the Owner. This will be at no cost to the
Owner.
24 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
239000-1
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
Notice:
TACOMA OFFICE
6021 121h Street East, Suite 200
Tacoma, WA 98424
Phone (253) 922-0446
Fax (253) 922-0896
YELM SCHOOL DISTRICT - EDUCATION CENTER OFFICE TI
PERMIT /BID
BCE PROJECT NO. 215 - 144.00
JUNE 22, 2015
The following list of specifications and drawings represents those documents that were prepared under
the provisions of the Revised Code of Washington RCW 18.43, by BCE Engineers, Inc. of Tacoma,
Washington. The sealing of this specification and drawings list is provided in accordance with
Washington Administrative Code WAC196 -23 -020.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION DESCRIPTION
DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NO. OF PAGES
260000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
11
260005
ELECTRICAL— EXISTING SYSTEMS
2
260519
WIRES AND CABLES
2
260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING
2
260532
OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
2
260533
RACEWAY
4
260534
METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS
3
262416
PANELBOARDS
3
262419
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
2
262726
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
2
262813
FUSES
1
262816
DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES
1
264300
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) / SURGE
PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)
5
265000
LIGHTING
4
DIVISION 27 — COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATIONS
270000 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 28
270528 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 8
272000 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE 12
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI TOC - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 26 0000
2 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 GENERAL
5 A. Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and related work in other
6 Divisions for all work in Division 26. See Division 1 for sequence of work.
7 1.02 WORK INCLUDED
8 A. It is the intention of this division of the specifications and the accompanying drawings to
9 describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and
10 successful operation all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide
11 a complete electrical system, together with such other miscellaneous installations and
12 equipment hereinafter specified and /or shown in the plans. The work shall include all materials,
13 appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the plans, but which are
14 necessary to make a complete working installation of all electrical systems shown on the plans
15 or described herein. Equipment and devices furnished and installed under other divisions of this
16 specification (or by the Owner) shall be connected under this division. The drawings and
17 specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as if called for in
18 both.
19 B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor is acknowledging that he has made a thorough examination
20 of the Contract Documents, existing site and building conditions, and has determined that these
21 documents do sufficiently describe the scope of construction work required under this Contract.
22 1.03 SCOPE OF BASIC BID
23 A. Included in Division 26 work is all work and related items necessary to provide all electrical
24 installations except as specifically excluded. In general, this includes all labor, equipment, tools,
25 etc., to complete the electrical work.
26 1.04 RELATED WORK
27 A. Temporary Power and Lighting - See Section 01 5100
28 B. Mechanical Control Wiring — See Division 23
29 C. Cutting and Patching - See Division 01
30 1.05 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
31 A. The work shall comply with the latest edition of the applicable Standards and Codes of the
32 following:
33 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
34 NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
35 NEC National Electrical Code
36 - -- State Electrical Code
37 NESC National Electrical Safety Code
38 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
39 NFPA National Fire Protection Association
40 U. L. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
41 IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Associated
42 CBM Certified Ballasts Manufacturers
43 - -- Federal, State and Local Building Codes
44 ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260000-1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
B.
If any conflict occurs between Government adopted Code Rules and this specification, the
2
codes are to govern. Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit
3
work not conforming with governing codes. Also, this shall not be construed as relieving the
4
Contractor from complying with any requirements of the plans and specifications which may be
5
in excess of, but not in conflict with, requirements of the Governing Codes.
6
1.06 PERMITS & FEES
7
A.
The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws,
8
ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. The Contractor shall arrange for
9
inspection of work by the inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance in
10
their work of inspection.
11
B.
The Contractor shall consult with and follow the requirements of the local fire and power utilities
12
serving the area and shall coordinate his work with them.
13
C.
Utility connection and hook -up charges for power shall be paid by the Owner directly to the
14
utility. The Electrical Contractor is required to provide any and all coordination necessary to
15
support the utility connection, file for application of service (or assist the Owner in filing for
16
application of service) and coordinate dates for service with the utilities.
17
1.07 DEFINITIONS
18
A.
When "Provide" is used, it shall be interpreted as "furnishing and installing complete in operating
19
condition ".
20
B.
When "Drawings" is used, it shall be interpreted as "all Contract Drawings for all Disciplines ".
21
C.
When "Contractors" is used, it shall be interpreted as the Electrical Contractor.
22
1.08 INTENT OF DRAWINGS
23
A.
The electrical drawings are intended to serve as working drawings for general layout. The
24
equipment layout is diagrammatic and unless specifically dimensioned or detailed, does not
25
indicate all fittings, hardware or appurtenances required for a complete operating installation.
26
B.
Anything shown on the drawings but not covered in the specifications, or anything covered in
27
the specifications but not shown on the drawings, shall be as if covered in both. In case of
28
conflict between the drawings and specifications, the Engineer will select the method to be
29
used. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all measurements before proceeding with
30
the work.
31
C.
Wiring diagrams are not intended to indicate the exact course of raceways or exact location of
32
outlets. Raceway and outlet locations are approximately correct and are subject to revision as
33
may be necessary or desirable at the time of installation. Precise location in every case shall be
34
subject to the Engineer's approval.
35
1.09 PROTECTION
36
A.
The Contractor shall store and guard all equipment before installation and shall protect same,
37
and replace any equipment that has been damaged prior to final acceptance. See Division 01
38
for detailed requirements.
39
1.10 HOUSEKEEPING
40
A.
All electrical materials shall be kept stored in an orderly fashion protected from heat, cold, and
41
the weather.
42
B.
All marred surfaces shall be refinished and painted after installation.
43
C.
All debris shall be removed from premises during work, as directed, and at completion of job.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260000-2 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.11 TEMPORARY USE
2
A.
Temporary or interim use of any and all portions of the electrical system shall be under the
3
supervision of the Electrical Contractor.
4
B.
Temporary power and lighting for use during construction shall be provided per the
5
requirements of the Division 01 specifications.
6
1.12 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
7
A.
The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to any reference drawings, an as -built set of prints, on
8
which all deviations from the original design shall be drafted in a neat, legible manner with red
9
colored pencil. This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items,
10
change orders, and Contractor revisions. The Contractor is responsible to revise panel
11
schedules and load calculations as required.
12
B.
Drawings shall show locations of all concealed raceway runs larger than 1", giving the number
13
of conductors and size of raceway. Underground ducts shall be shown with cross section
14
elevations. All pipe, raceway, manholes or lines of other trades shall be included.
15
C.
The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products actually
16
installed on project. This shall include, but not be limited to, lighting fixtures, baseboard heaters,
17
etc.
18
D.
Upon completion of the Division 26 Work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined drawings and
19
one set of neatly drafted as -built drawings on electronic media in AutoCAD R -2013 format and
20
mylar to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner.
21
E.
See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems.
22
1.13 WARRANTY
23
A.
Provide a written warranty that the Division 26 work is free from mechanical and electrical
24
defects. Contractor shall replace and repair, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, any parts of the
25
installation which may fail within a period of 12 months after the certificate of final acceptance,
26
provided that such failure is due to defects in material or workmanship, or failure to follow the
27
specifications and drawings.
28
B.
See Section 27 0000 for additional requirements of low voltage systems.
29
1.14 INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS
30 A. Operation and maintenance data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 23
31 B. Manuals shall contain shop drawings, wiring diagrams, operating and maintenance instructions,
32 replacement parts lists, and equipment nameplate data for all equipment and systems installed
33 under the project. Signal equipment submittals shall contain step -by -step circuit description
34 information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each
35 mode of operation. Manuals shall contain original brochures supplied by manufacturers. Xerox
36 copies of originals will not be accepted.
37 C. Each type of device provided shall be identified in the O & M Manual using the same
38 identification as shown on the drawings and specifications. The information included must be
39 the exact equipment installed not the complete "line" of the Manufacturer. Where sheets show
40 the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly
41 identified on such sheets. Parts lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original
42 parts manufacturer. Relabeled and /or renumbered parts information as reassigned by
43 equipment supplier is not acceptable. The following information shall be provided for each
44 device:
45 1. Manufacturer's name, address and phone number.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260000-3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. Local supplier's name, address and phone number.
2 3. Complete parts lists including quantities and manufacturer's part numbers.
3 4. Installation instructions.
4 5. Recommended maintenance items including maintenance procedure and recommended
5 interval of maintenance listed in hours of operation, calendar unity or other similar time unit.
6 D. The O & M Manual shall be assembled as detailed in Section 01700. As a minimum, the
7 following sections shall be broken out:
8 1. Light Fixtures
9 2. Lamps and Ballasts - referenced to each fixture type
10 3. Panelboards
11 4. Motor Controls
12 5. Telecommunication System
13 6. Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems
14 7. SPD
15 E. Wiring Diagrams for each system shall be complete for the specific system installed under the
16 Contract. "Typical" Line Diagrams will not be acceptable unless properly marked to indicate the
17 exact field installation.
18 1.15 WORK NOT INCLUDED
19 A. Indicated motors, controls, and equipment as described in other divisions shall be furnished by
20 other trades, but shall be moved, set and wired to electrical controls and power supply by the
21 Electrical Contractor.
22 B. Work to be included under this Contract shall be defined on drawings and in these
23 specifications. Any details beyond these limits are meant only to give installation clarity to that
24 portion which is a part of this Contract.
25 1.16 INSTRUCTION PERIODS
26 A. Upon completion of the work and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the
27 authority(s) having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall demonstrate and instruct the Owner's
28 designated operation and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the
29 various electrical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the
30 Owner. The Contractor's representatives shall be superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in
31 each system and suppliers representatives when so specified.
32 B. Scheduled Instruction periods shall be:
33 a. Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems 2 hours
34 b. Data Network 2 hours
35 C. Costs for time involved by Contractor shall be included in the bid.
36 1.17 COMPLETION OF WORK
37 A. Upon completion of the Division 26 work, the Contractor shall comply with requirements of
38 Section 01 7000 for project closeout.
39 B. Arrange for and obtain all required inspections and certificates pertaining to the Division 26 work
40 and deliver the certificates to the Engineer in triplicate.
41 C. Prior to or at the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall, as outlined in detail in the
42 specifications, complete the delivery of all the following items:
43 1. Completion Letter
44 2. Certificate of Final Inspection, in triplicate form.
Electrical Inspector COMPLETION OF WORK
26 0000 — 1.17
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260000-4 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
2
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
3. Warranty to Owner (with copy
for Engineer
4. Marked Set, Electronic Media
Set on CD in AutoCAD R-
2013 Format, and Mylar Set
of " As- Built" Electrical
Drawings
5. Motor Current Readings
6. Phase Current Readings
7. OHMIC Test Readings
8. Certificate of Feeders Torque
Results
9. Wiring diagrams,
Maintenance Manuals,
Operation Instructions, and
Brochures (5 sets minimum)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 0000- 1.13
GENERAL AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
26 0000— 1.12
GENERAL, TESTS
26 0519 — 3.03(D)
GENERAL, TESTS
26 0519 — 3.03 (E)
GENERAL, TESTS
26 0519 — 3.03 (B)
WIRES AND CABLES
260519
GENERAL, INSTRUCTIONS & MANUALS —
26 0000— 1.14
* Secure delivery instructions from Architect for delivery to Owner.
1.18 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS
A. This Contractor shall submit to the Architect as described in Section 01 6000. When shop
drawings are submitted electronically, they shall be submitted as described in Paragraph B
below.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect electronic shop drawings in PDF format. Electronic
Shop Drawings that are submitted without following the format as outlined below will be returned
for corrections without any further review.
1. A separate PDF file shall be submitted for each Division including All submittal items for
that Division as outlined below:
a. Division 26 — Electrical
b. Division 27 — Telecommunications
2. The contractor shall provide either a digital or hardware method of transporting the
electronic submittal to the Architect. Files larger than 10Megabytes shall not be sent via
email and shall be transferred via an FTP or similar file transfer protocol, PC compatible
CD or PC compatible Thumb Drive. Divisions shall not be broken up into separate files for
transfer via email.
3. Each Specification PDF shall be submitted with the following format and salient attributes:
a. Cover page including:
1. Project Title as indicated on the plans
2. Project Location including Address, City, State, Country
3. Prime Contractor name, phone number, and email address
4. Sub - Contractor name, phone number, and email address
5. Specification Division Number and Title
b. Index Page outlining each specification section included in the submittal. This list shall
be linked to a corresponding Specification Section Divider for each section. This link
shall enable the reviewer to jump to a specification section by clicking the item in the
list.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
260000-5 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
c.
Specification Section Divider: Shop Drawings shall be divided by specification section
2
and each section shall begin with a Divider Page outlining the Specification Number,
3
Title, and a list of Submittal Items for the section. In the upper right hand corner of the
4
divider page, a Link shall be provided returning the reviewer to the Index Page.
5
d.
Each Submittal Item listed on the Specification Section Divider shall be linked to the
6
specific item being submitted. Each Submittal Item shall be hi- lighted Yellow with a
7
Note Reference to the specific paragraph giving the submittal requirements.
8
e.
Each page of the submittal shall be numbered in the Bottom Right corner of the page.
9
Page numbering shall be Roman Numerals for all pages before the First Specification
10
Section. Each Specification Section page shall be numbered with the Specification
11
Section number, a dash, and the page number in the Specification Section.
12
f.
Specification items shall be specifically hi- lighted as they apply to the project rather
13
than hi- lighting an entire product family. Items that do not apply to this project shall be
14
crossed out with a Red X.
15
g.
The PDF file shall be not be Protected to prevent printing, selecting of text within the
16
document, or extracting of pages from the document.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
C. Shop drawings shall be submitted complete, at one time and each item indexed with dividers
and separated per specification section and shall be, but not limited to the items of equipment
listed below:
1. All panelboards, showing breaker arrangement with circuit numbers, relays, and panel
skirts.
2. Motor starters and controls designating where items are intended to be used and
equipment being controlled.
3. SPD
4. Disconnect Switches
5. Fuses
6. Lighting Fixtures (Complete)
7. Lighting Fixture Lamps and Ballasts referenced to fixture types
8. Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems
9. Wiring Devices
10. Back Boxes
11. Coverplates
12. Raceways and Connectors
13. Copper Wire
14. *Telecommunication System
15. * *All Specialty Systems not listed above **
16. Any other items requested by Engineer.
*See Section 27 00 00 for further requirements.
D. Within 10 working days after the date of the letter rejecting any items of equipment, lighting
fixtures, or materials as not in accordance with the specifications, Contractor shall submit a new
list of items he proposes to furnish and install in place of those items rejected. If the Contractor
fails to submit this new list within the above specified time, or if any items on this second list are
rejected as not being in accordance with these specifications, the Engineer may select the items
which the Contractor shall furnish and install without change in Contract price or time of
completion.
E. The acceptance of a manufacturer's name or product by the Engineer does not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in all details
with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be solely responsible
for submitting materials at such a time to allow a minimum of two weeks for Engineer's review.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
260000-6 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
F.
Electrical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCADTM
2
Revision 2012 software. These drawing files will be made available to the Contractor for
3
development of shop drawings and /or "As- Builts" for a fee of $20.00 per sheet.
4
1.19 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
5
A.
Provide Schedule of Values per Division 01 and related project requirements.
6
B.
Division 26 Breakdown: Provide schedule of values for the following categories (as a
7
minimum):
8
1. Electrical Mobilization
9
2. Electrical Submittals
10
3. Electrical General Project Management, General Design, General Coordination
11
4. Branch Circuit Materials Rough -in
12
5. Branch Circuit Materials Rough in — Labor
13
6. Branch Circuit Trim — Materials
14
7. Branch Circuit Trim — Labor
15
8. Service Materials
16
9. Service Materials — Labor
17
10. Feeder Materials
18
11. Feeder Materials - Labor
19
12. Panelgear, Disconnects, Starters
20
13. Panelgear, Disconnects, Starters — Labor
21
14. Light Fixtures
22
15. Light Fixtures — Labor
23
16. Data System
24
17. Systems Equipment — Labor
25
18. Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training
26
C.
The dollar value for "Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training" shall in no case be less
27
than 2% of the total dollar value of the Division 26 work (or as indicated in Division 01,
28
whichever is higher).
29
D.
The Contractor is advised that in addition to payments held out for retainage and project final
30
completion (i.e. "Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training "), as specified above and in
31
Division 01, the Owner reserves the right to withhold 10% of the funds for any of the above
32
categories until the systems (of that category) have been proven to operate as specified and
33
have been completely tested and adjusted.
34 PART 2 PRODUCTS
35 2.01 COMPETITIVE PRODUCTS
36 A. Any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type
37 of construction by name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a
38 standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in such
39 cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of
40 construction which in the judgment of the Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that
41 specified. However, any manufacturer not listed as an accepted Bidder for a specific item must
42 be submitted for acceptance in writing in accordance with Section 01 6000 .
43 2.02 MANUFACTURER/EQUIPMENT PRIOR APPROVALS
44 A. Any manufacturer /equipment not listed as an approved substitute for a specified item must be
45 submitted for acceptance in accordance with Section 016000, in writing, with detailed
46 information to include:
47 1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260000-7 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
2. Complete Physical and Technical Data
2
3. Wiring Diagrams
3
4. Detailed reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the appropriate
4
Specification Section and all applicable Specification item numbers within that Section
5
5. Complete type written index cross referencing all proposed substitutes and specified items
6
6. Detailed reference to specified items (written or highlighted) noting equal quality and
7
performance of proposed substitute equipment
8
7. Other descriptive data, as required by the Engineer
9
B.
If substitute material is determined to be acceptable by the Engineer, it will be included in a
10
subsequent Addenda prior to bidding. The acceptance of a manufacturer's name or product by
11
the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and
12
equipment which comply in all details with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
13
C.
Only materials which are specified or published in addenda as acceptable shall be used.
14
2.03 MATERIALS
15
A.
All materials must be of the quality herein specified. All materials shall be new, of the best
16
quality and free from defects. They shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation and
17
operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed.
18
B.
Each type of material shall be of the same make and quality. The materials furnished shall be
19
standard products of the manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment
20
and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design.
21
C.
All materials shall be U.L. or E.T.L. listed for the purpose for which they are used.
22
D.
Equipment in compliance with U.L. standards but not bearing their label is not acceptable. If the
23
manufacturer cannot arrange for labeling of an assembled unit at the factory the unit shall be
24
field evaluated per the Washington State Administrative Code (WAC) and the electrical
25
inspector's requirements.
26
2.04 COMPLETE SYSTEM
27
A.
All the systems mentioned shall be complete and operational in every detail except where
28
specifically noted otherwise. Mention of certain materials in these specifications shall not be
29
construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing
30
all labor required to provide a complete and operable system.
31
2.05 NAMEPLATES
32
A.
Provide nameplates constructed of plastic (black on white) laminated material engraved through
33
black surface material to white sublayer (attach with screws on NEMA 1 enclosures).
34
EXCEPTION (1): Emergency distribution system component labeling - white letters on red
35
background. Exception (2): Series rated systems shall be yellow background with white letters.
36
1. Panelboard Labels: Refer to Section 26 2416
37
2. Switch and Receptacle Labels: Refer to Section 26 2726
38
3. Motor Starter and Disconnect Labels: Refer to Section 26 2816
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260000-8 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.01 GENERAL
3 A. Careful consideration shall be given to clearances under and over beams, pipes and ducts, to
4 provide proper headroom in all cases. Check drawings to determine heights of all suspended
5 ceilings and size of pipe shafts where raceway and wire -ways shall run. Coordinate installation
6 of Division 26 wiring and equipment with Division 23 and other trades. Where insufficient room
7 for proper installation appears, obtain clarification from Engineer before any installation is
8 begun.
9 B. Cutting and Patching:
10 1. Obtain permission from the Architect and /or Owner's Representative prior to cutting.
11 Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the
12 minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills except where space
13 limitations prevent the use of such drills.
14 2. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be
15 repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled
16 labor experienced in that particular building trade.
17 3.02 COORDINATION
18 A. The Contractor is responsible for accomplishing Division 26. The work shall coordinate with that
19 of the other Contractors and /or other trades doing work in the building and shall examine all
20 Drawings, including the several Divisions of Mechanical, Structural, Civil and Architectural, for
21 Construction Details and necessary coordination. Specific locations of construction features
22 and equipment shall be obtained from the Contract Documents, field measurements, and /or
23 from the trade providing the material or equipment. No extra costs will be allowed for failure to
24 obtain this information.
25 B. All conflicts shall be reported to the Engineer in writing before installation for decision and
26 correction. Special attention is called to the following items:
27 1. Door swings to the end that switches will be located on "Strike" side of the door.
28 2. Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all
29 electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear from
30 and in proper relation to these items.
31 3. Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and
32 equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items.
33 4. Type and height of ceiling.
34 5. All device measurements referenced on drawings or specifications are to be centered of
35 device unless noted otherwise.
36 C. The Contractor will not be paid for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination or
37 interference with other Contractors or trades. This includes, but is not limited to, removing,
38 replacing, relocating, cutting, patching, and finishing.
39 3.03 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
40 A. It is our intent to provide a timely response for RFIs regarding Division 26 Work. To further
41 expedite this process, where a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of the
42 RFI, it is required this suggestion be supplied with the submitted RFI. If no suggestion is given
43 where one is possible, the RFI will be returned as incomplete.
44 3.04 CLEANING AND PAINTING
45 A. All equipment, whether exposed to the weather or stored indoors shall be covered to protect it
46 from water, dust and dirt.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260000-9 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. After installing, all metal finishes shall be cleaned and polished, cleaned of all dirt, rust, cement,
2 plaster, grease and paint.
3 C. All equipment with a primer coat of paint shall be given two (2) or more coats of a finish enamel
4 and scratched surfaces be refinished to look like new. Markings, identification and nameplates
5 shall be replaced.
6 3.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
7 A. Provide identifying engraved bakelite nameplate on all equipment, including pull boxes, to
8 clearly indicate its use, area served, circuit identification, voltage, and any other useful data.
9 B. Each auxiliary system, including communications, shall be clearly labeled to indicate its function.
i[1 �1111v I] ATlI_rI Cs] i
11 A. Deviation from the shop drawings in construction or installation of equipment shall not be made
12 unless Shop Drawings showing proposed deviations are submitted to and approved by the
13 Engineer. If any equipment is furnished under this or other divisions with current, voltage or
14 phase ratings that differ from those shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall notify the
15 Engineer in writing immediately and shall not connect said equipment until instructed as to
16 required changes by the Architect. No extension of time will be granted as a result of such
17 changes.
18 3.07 WIRING METHODS
19
A.
All low voltage wiring shall be in Raceway with Junction Boxes and Fittings where concealed in
20
walls, in inaccessible ceiling space, or where exposed in finished or unfinished areas.
21
B.
All branch circuit wiring shall be installed in raceway with junction boxes and fittings.
22
C.
Provide access panels as needed for pull boxes and equipment located above ceiling or behind
23
walls.
24
D.
Any low voltage cables that are not terminated at both ends shall be tagged and labeled per
25
code.
26
E.
See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems.
27
3.08 PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ELEMENTS
28
A.
Must be made such as to retain that rating.
29
3.09 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
30
A.
Provide hangers, brackets, and suspension rods and supplementary steel to support equipment.
31
B.
Hangers provided under other divisions shall not be used for support of Division 26 equipment
32
unless permitted by Architect /Engineer.
33
3.10 PAINTING
34
A.
Painting in general will be covered under another division of this specification, except items
35
furnished under Division 26 that are scratched, marred in shipment or installation, shall be
36
refinished by the Division 26 Contractor.
37
3.11 WORKMANSHIP AND OBSERVATION
38
A.
Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent workers shall be employed
39
under the supervision of a competent foreman. All completed work shall represent a neat and
40
workmanship like appearance.
41
B.
All work and materials shall be subject to observation at any and all times by representatives of
42
the Engineer.
2015-19/
YCS Ed Center TI 260000-10 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS
2 A. Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the lateral and vertical support of conduit
3 and electrical equipment, as required by the International Building Code.
4 B. Conduits that cross seismic separations shall be installed with flexible connection suitable to
5 accommodate conditions. Secure raceways on each side of a separation and provide a
6 minimum of 36" length of flexible conduit to span separation.
7 3.13 CABLE AND WIRING ROUTED UNDERGROUND OR UNDERSLAB
8 A. All cables and conductors, both line voltage and low voltage, routed underground or underslab
9 shall be U.L. listed for installation in wet locations per NEC and WAC codes.
10 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260000-11 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 26 0005
2 ELECTRICAL — EXISTING SYSTEMS
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
5 A. Portions of the existing electrical lighting, power and signal systems are to be removed as
6 detailed on the drawings.
7 PART 2 PRODUCTS
8 2.01 EXISTING MATERIALS
9 A. Existing materials which are a part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner.
10 2.02 EXISTING MATERIALS RE- INSTALLED
11 A. Existing materials and equipment that are removed as a part of the work or stored in surplus
12 may be re- installed as a part of the new system subject to approval of condition suitability by the
13 Architect/Engineer. The requirements of the specifications (i.e. installation, warranty, testing,
14 etc.) shall apply as if the materials were new, supplied by the Contractor.
15 2.03 EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE RE- INSTALLED
16 A. In coordination with the Architect /Engineer, these materials shall be made available for his
17 inspection and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected for
18 retention shall be delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner and turned over
19 to him. Take reasonable care to avoid damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to
20 conform to this requirement, he shall purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement
21 materials of like kind and quality.
22 B. All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be disposed of by the
23 Contractor. This shall include, but not be limited to, removal of PCB type ballasts and
24 fluorescent lamps which shall be disposed of in accordance with EPA requirements.
25 PART 3 EXECUTION
26 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS
27 A. Examine the structure, building, and conditions under which Division 26 work is to be installed
28 for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
29 work until deficiencies encountered in installation have been corrected. Report any delay or
30 difficulties encountered in installation of Division 26 work which might be unsuitable to connect
31 with work by other divisions of this specification. Failure to report conditions shall constitute
32 acceptance of other work as being fit and proper for the installation of Division 26 work.
33 B. Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Existing circuits of equipment
34 shall remain energized. Circuits which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition shall
35 have circuits, wiring, and power restored back to original condition.
36 3.02 DEMOLITION
37 A. Switchboards, panelboards, signaling systems, other electrical equipment free standing (or
38 surface mounted), raceway (exposed) and conductors no longer in service as a result of this
39 Contract shall be removed. Unused raceways or sleeves shall be cut flush at ceiling, floor or
40 wall and filled with grout.
41 3.03 NEW DEVICES IN REMODEL AREAS
42 A. Provide surface mounting for devices on existing walls. Where existing boxes are indicated to
43 be reused, extend box as necessary and provide new devices and plates.
44 3.04 EXISTING PANELBOARD
45 A. Any modifications made to existing panels must be incorporated into the existing circuit index on
46 the panel. If more than three circuits are modified a new typewritten index incorporating the
47 changes to the existing index shall be installed in the existing panel.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260005-1 ELECTRICAL — EXISTING SYSTEMS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Listing shall match circuit breaker arrangements, typically with odd numbers on the left and
2 even numbers on the right. Room numbers used shall be final room numbers used in the
3 building as verified with the Owner.
4 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260005-2 ELECTRICAL — EXISTING SYSTEMS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 26 0519
2 WIRES AND CABLES
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
5 A. Provide all wire, cable, and terminations complete.
6 PART 2 PRODUCTS
7 2.01 WIRE AND CABLE (COPPER, 600 -VOLT)
8 A. Interior and Above Grade: All wires to be Type THW or RHW. Type THWN/THHN or XHHW
9 wire may be utilized at Contractors option, subject to code requirements. Wire and cables shall
10 be brought to project in original containers bearing the underwriters label. Provide Type AVA
11 wire where conductors are subject to temperature above 167 Degrees F.
12 2.02 SPLICES
13 A. Above Grade: Solderless type only. Preinsulated "twist -on" type (limited to size #10 and
14 smaller). Bolt on compression type with application of preformed insulated cover, heat
15 shrinkable tubing or plastic insulated tape acceptable for all sizes.
16 2.03 TERMINATIONS
17 A. Compression set, bolted or screw terminal.
18 B. Conductors #12 and smaller shall utilize eye or forked tongue type compression set terminator
19 when termination is to a bolted or screw set type terminal block or terminal cabinet.
20 2.04 PLASTIC CABLE TIES
21 A. Nylon or Equivalent, locking type.
22 PART 3 EXECUTION
23 3.01 GENERAL
24 A. Install all wiring in Raceway unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise.
25 3.02 WIRE SIZE
26 A. No. 12 AWG minimum for power and lighting circuits.
27 B. Provide solid wire for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and
28 larger (600) volts.
29 3.03 TESTS
30 A. In addition to the factory testing of all equipment and cable, the Contractor shall test all wiring
31 connections for continuity and ground before any fixtures or other loads are connected. Tests
32 shall be made with a 500V minimum DC "Megger" type tester. If tests indicate faulty insulation
33 (less that 2 megohms), such defects shall be corrected and tested again. Contractor shall
34 provide all apparatus to make tests and shall bear all expenses of required testing. Routine
35 operation tests shall be made on all pieces of equipment to demonstrate that working parts are
36 in operating condition. Results of all tests shall be recorded and submitted to the Architect. The
37 Contractor shall immediately replace all parts, which fail to pass the test.
38 B. All circuits both in and out of the building shall test out free of grounds, short circuits and other
39 defects.
40 C. Check and record catalog number and ampere size of controller overload heaters installed,
41 nameplate full -load amperes, and actual operating amperes of each motor. IMPORTANT:
42 Submit recorded data in triplicate to the Engineer. Check proper load balance on the electrical
43 system, direction of rotation, lubrication, and overload protection of all motors before placing in
44 operation.
45 D. Provide a log of ampere reading for all panels from phase to neutral for 4 wire panels and from
46 phase to phase for 3 wire panels. These readings shall be taken with all loads activated.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260519-1 WIRES AND CABLES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
E. The final test of all equipment shall be made on dates designated by the Architect /Engineer and
all readings shall be made in his presence.
F. Feeders shall be checked to ensure all phases are energized before connecting to their
respective motors. Each motor shall rotate in the proper direction for its respective load. Prior
to rotation test, all bearings shall be inspected for proper lubrication.
G. Minimum megger test for equipment shall be as follows:
Equipment Maximum Minimum Test
Voltage Rating Resistance
1,000 -Volts or less 2 Megohms
H. Provide certification of torque values for feeder and service entrance conductors per equipment
manufacturer's recommendation.
3.04 CONDUCTOR SIZES, REFERENCED ON PLANS
A. Copper, type THW or RHW unless noted.
3.05 PULLING
A. Use no mechanical means for pulling No. 8 AWG conductors and smaller. Powdered soap
stone or approved spray cream shall be the only lubricant used.
3.06 STRIPPING INSULATION
A. Do not ring the cable, always pare or pencil.
3.07 TAPING
A. If used shall be half lapped synthetic tape.
3.08 CONDUCTORS IN PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS
A. Conductors in panels, switchboards, and terminal cabinets shall be neatly grouped and formed
in a manner to "Fan" into terminals with regular spacing.
3.09 CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Provide conductor support devices as required by code in vertical cable runs.
3.10 RACEWAY SIZES REFERENCED ON DRAWINGS
A. Raceways are sized for copper, type THW, unless otherwise noted. Size all Raceways per
code unless specifically noted to be larger on the drawings.
30 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
260519 -2
WIRES AND CABLES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. A grounding system shall be provided for neutral ground and equipment ground as required by
code.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Copper, code size, with physical protection where subject to damage. Bare or green insulated.
2.02 GROUND RODS
A. 3/4" x 8' -0" copper clad steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide all grounding for electrical systems and equipment as required by codes and as
specified herein.
3.02 GROUND RODS
A. Provide as shown and /or required. Connect the ground conductor to each rod.
3.03 SIZE OF GROUND WIRE
A. As required by code. Where ground wire is exposed to physical damage or is used outside of
building, protect with conduit.
3.04 GROUND CONNECTION OF WATER PIPING
A. Metal internal piping shall be grounded, as part of this Contract. This includes jumpers for
dielectric fittings.
3.05 GROUND CONNECTION OF BUILDING STEEL
A. Structural metal shall be grounded, as part of this Contract.
3.06 CONNECTION TO THE GROUND BUS
A. Provide connections in accordance with the codes; including but not limited to raceway systems,
switch board/pane lboard frames, service neutral, separately derived systems, electrically
operated equipment and devices. No device or equipment shall be connected for electrical
service which has a neutral conductor connected to a grounding conductor or to the frame
within the device or equipment.
3.07 METHOD OF CONNECTION
A. Make all ground connections and ground cable splices by thermal welding. Grounding lugs,
where provided as standard Manufacturer's items on equipment furnished, may be used.
3.08 FLEXIBLE RACEWAY
A. Shall not be used for grounding. Install separate ground conductor in all flexible raceway.
3.09 PVC RACEWAY
A. Install separate ground conductor in all PVC raceway as required per code.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260526-1 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
3.10 TESTS
2 A. Measure the OHMIC value of the Electric Service Entrance metallic "System Ground" with
3 reference to "Earth Ground" using the "Multiple Ground Rod Fall -In- Potential" method and
4 suitable instruments. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms. If this
5 resistance cannot be obtained with the ground system shown, notify the Architect immediately
6 for further instructions. Provide OHMIC test results to Engineer.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260526-2 GROUNDING AND BONDING
1
2
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 26 0532
OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
5 A. Provide outlet and pull boxes to enclose devices, permit the pulling of conductors and for wire
6 splices and branches.
7 PART 2 PRODUCTS
8 2.01 INTERIOR WIRING
9 A. General: Outlet and pull boxes shall be pressed drawn steel, zinc coated with plaster ring
10 where applicable. Welded boxes not allowed. Four -inch size minimum. Large pull boxes shall
11 be fabricated sheet steel, zinc coated or baked enamel finish, with return flange and screw
12 retained cover.
13
B.
Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same Manufacture and to match Raceway. Boxes to
14
accommodate standard devices and device plate.
15
C.
Install pull boxes so as to be accessible after completion of building construction.
16
D.
Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized octagonal 4 inch, 1 -1/2 inch deep (without fixture stud),
17
2 -1/8 inches deep (with fixture stud).
18
2.02 EXTERIOR
WIRING
19
A.
Above Grade: Outlet and junction boxes shall be cast or malleable iron or shall be cast of
20
corrosion resistant alloy compatible with Raceway to which it is connected. Pull boxes shall be
21
fabricated of heavy gauge steel and hot dipped galvanized. All boxes shall have gasketed
22
covers.
23
B.
Exterior outlet boxes shall be weather resistant and rain tight, with appropriate covers, gaskets
24
and screws.
25
PART 3
EXECUTION
26
3.01 ANCHORING
27
A.
All boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joints.
28
Boxes must be so attached so that they will not "Rock" or "Shift" when devices are operated.
29
3.02 FLUSH MOUNTING
30
A.
Except for surface mounted boxes or boxes above accessible ceilings, all boxes shall have front
31
edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling.
32
3.03 ELECTRICAL
OUTLETS
33
A.
General: Coordinate the work of this section with the work of other sections and trades. Study
34
all Drawings that form a part of this Contract and confer with various trades involved to eliminate
35
conflicts between the work of this section and the work of other trades. Check and verify outlet
36
locations indicated on Architectural Drawings, door swings, installation details, layouts of
37
suspended ceilings and locations of all plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment.
38
B.
Centered on Built -In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recessed or similar features, or
39
where outlets are centered between such features, such as between a doorjamb and a cabinet,
40
make these outlet locations exact. Relocate any outlets which are located off center.
41
C.
Vertical and Horizontal Relationships: Where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be
42
at the same elevation or one above the other, align them exactly on centerlines horizontally or
43
vertically. Relocate as directed all such outlets (including lighting, receptacle, power signal and
44
thermostat outlets) which are not so installed, at no additional cost to Owner.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260532-1 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 D. Device Outlet Height: Measure from the finished floor.
2 *Switches 4 Feet, Set Vertically, to Top of Box
3 *Receptacles, 18 Inches, Set Vertically to Centerline
4 Telecommunications
5 Other As Noted or as Directed by Architect
6 * Heights may vary. See Drawings for additional information
7 E. Ceiling Location: For acoustical material locate outlet either at the corner joint or in the center of
8 a panel, whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the same room in the
9 same panel location.
10 F. Installed In Sound Walls: Boxes installed in sound walls shall not be installed back to back. All
11 boxes shall be separated by one stud space and shall be interconnected with flex conduit with a
12 90° loop.
13 3.04 ELECTRICAL WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK AND CASEWORK
14 A. Provide as shown and /or specified. Provide templates, where required, to other trades for
15 drilling and cutting to insure accurate location of electrical fixtures (outlets and devices) as
16 verified with the Architect. Provide all wiring, devices, plates and connections required by said
17 fixture.
18 3.05 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT
19 A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the Specifications, or by others.
20 Provide outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve such equipment. An outlet
21 box is required if the equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space
22 to accommodate circuit wiring used. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination.
23 3.06 BLANK COVERS
24 A. Provide blank covers or plates over all boxes not covered by equipment.
25 3.07 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES
26 A. Pull and junction boxes shall be installed as shown, and to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit
27 the number of bends within code requirements. Boxes shall be permanently accessible and
28 shall be placed only at locations approved by the Architect.
29 B. In suspended ceiling spaces, boxes shall be supported from the structure independently from
30 ceiling suspension system.
31 C. The Drawings do not necessarily show every pull or Junction Box required. The Contractor is
32 permitted to provide boxes deemed necessary by him for his work when installed in accordance
33 with these Specifications.
34 3.08 BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES
35 A. Device Boxes Containing Multiple Devices and Wiring Rated Over 150 Volts to Ground and
36 Over 300 Volts Between Conductors are permitted only with steel barrier manufactured
37 especially for the purpose of dividing the box into separate compartments for each device
38 having exposed live parts.
39 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260532-2 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 26 0533
RACEWAY
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide Raceway System complete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (GRS)
A. General: Hot dipped galvanized.
B. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit.
Erickson couplings, watertight split couplings (O.Z. type or equivalent) permitted. Running
thread or set screw type fittings not approved.
2.02 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)
A. General: Hot Dipped galvanized.
B. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit.
Erickson couplings, watertight split couplings (O.Z. type or equivalent) permitted. Running
thread or set screw type fittings not approved.
2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. General: Hot dipped galvanized.
B. Fittings: Raintight; steel or malleable iron type using a split corrugated compression ring and
tightening nut or stainless steel locking disc. Steel set screw fittings are acceptable for dry
locations. Indenter, drive -on and pressure cast or die cast type set screw are not acceptable.
2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC, LFMC)
A. Dry Locations:
1. General: Galvanized flexible steel for dry locations only.
2. Fittings: Malleable iron or steel, Thomas and Betts "squeeze" type or equal.
B. Damp and Wet Locations:
1. Liquid Tight: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) weatherproof cover over flexible steel conduit.
2. Fittings: Thomas and Betts "liquid tight" or equal.
2.05 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Formed steel or aluminum type. Standard factory finish. Where color choice is available,
consult Architect /Engineer for selection prior to ordering.
2.06 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT
A. Permitted only in specified locations.
B. Fittings copper free cast aluminum.
2.07 STEEL & ALUMINUM TELE -POWER POLES
A. The Tele -Power Pole channel shall be steel, ivory baked enamel finish with cross section of
30TP -4V -3 "x2.75" with two separate compartments. One compartment is to be factory wired
with two duplex 20A, 125V NEMA 5 -20R grounding type specification grade receptacles, and
ivory colored to match the pole finish.
B. The harness is to be single circuit (2 conductor plus ground) with #12 AWG solid type THHN
conductors, factory assembled to the receptacles. 6" conductor leads are to be furnished for
termination to the overhead wiring system.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260533-1 RACEWAY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. The second compartment is to be for field installation of data network cabling. A
2 12" removable cover section in this compartment must be provided to assemble and mount
3 communications connectors. This section must be removable without dismantling or removing
4 the Tele -Power Pole after installation. The cover section is to have four knockouts for modular
5 voice -data jacks
6 D. The Tele -Power Pole shall be 10' -5" long.
7 E. Fittings:
8 1. A full complement of fittings for the Tele -Power Pole shall be available including, but not
9 limited to, entrance end fitting for top of the electrical channel, ceiling trim plate, pole -
10 mounting bracket, Velcro carpet gripper pad, and adhesive pad. (In air handling spaces, an
11 entrance end fitting must be furnished for the communications channel.)
12 F. Add -On Device Covers:
13 1. The Tele -Power Poles must be UL Listed for field modifications, changes and additions of
14 receptacles, devices and circuits. Field installed device plates shall be available to add
15 duplex, single 1.40" and 1.59" diameter, and rectangular -type receptacles. These plates
16 must be ivory in color to match the Tele -Power Pole.
17 2. Add -on communication covers must be available to mount workstation device faceplates,
18 inserts, and specialty mounting bezels. The power pole manufacturer will provide a
19 complete line of connectivity outlets and multi -media modular inserts for UTP, fiber optic,
20 coaxial, and other cabling types.
21 3. UTP inserts shall feature a unique recessed area for port labeling and shall be able to
22 accommodate designation icon buttons or icon labels. Custom label capabilities shall be
23 available using templates that can be downloaded from the Internet.
24 PART 3 EXECUTION
25 3.01 GENERAL
26 A. Install Raceway concealed in construction unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or
27 specifically approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer.
28 B. Cut Raceway ends square, ream and extend maximum distance into all couplings and
29 connectors.
30 C. Provide and install manufactured end caps on all Raceway ends during construction to prevent
31 the entrance of water or dirt. Tape, as a cover, not permitted.
32 D. Swab out all Raceways before pulling wires.
33 E. All elbows for GRS and PVC Raceway shall be factory radius bends. For all other Raceway,
34 use factory radius bends of 1 -1/4" and larger diameter.
35 F. Raceway shall not penetrate sheet metal ducts unless permission is granted by
36 Architect/Engineer. All sleeves shall be provided for Raceway installation.
37 G. Provide 2 - 3/4" C.O. stub into accessible ceiling space from all recessed panelboards or
38 systems terminal boxes.
39 3.02 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
40 A. All Connections shall be watertight. Install for all Raceways in concrete or where subject to
41 damage.
42 3.03 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
43 A. Intermediate metal conduit is permitted as a substitute for galvanized rigid steel conduit except
44 where GRS is required by code.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260533-2 RACEWAY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.04 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
2 A. Install for wiring in masonry, frame construction, furred ceilings and above suspended ceilings.
3 May be used for exposed work in unfinished areas where not subject to damage. Where
4 construction involves masonry work, surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units
5 are to remain unplastered or uncovered in complete construction.
6 3.05 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT
7
A.
May be used in lieu of galvanized rigid steel conduit where Raceway is run above grade or
8
inside of buildings; rigid aluminum conduit not permitted where Raceways are encased in or
9
attached to concrete or are below grade.
10
3.06 STEEL & ALUMINUM TELE -POWER POLES
11
A.
Mechanical Security
12
1. All raceway systems shall be mechanically continuous and connected to all electrical
13
outlets, boxes, device mounting brackets, and cabinets, also in accordance with
14
manufacturer's installation sheets.
15
B.
Electrical Security
16
1. All metal raceway shall be electrically continuous and bonded in accordance with the
17
National Electric Code for proper grounding.
18
C.
Raceway Support
19
1. Raceway shall be securely supported at intervals not exceeding 5' [1.5m] or in accordance
20
with manufacturer's installation sheets.
21
D.
Completeness
22
1. All Tele -Power Pole Systems shall be installed complete in accordance with the
23
manufacturer's installation sheets. All unused openings shall be closed.
24
3.07 SEALING OF RACEWAY PENETRATIONS
25
A.
Exterior Wall Surfaces Above Grade: Seal around all penetrations with caulking approved by
26
Engineer. For concrete construction above ground level, cast Raceway in wall or core drill wall
27
and hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement.
28
B.
Roofs: Provide mopped, lead, roof jack where Raceway penetrates roof membrane.
29
C.
Fire Rated Floors, Walls, Ceiling /Roofs: Concrete or masonry, seal around Raceway
30
penetration with Dow Corning 3 -6548 silicone RTV foam or approved equal. Plaster or gypsum
31
wallboard, seal around Raceway penetration with plaster, fire tape per local Fire Marshal's
32
requirements.
33
3.08 SEALING OF RACEWAYS
34
A.
Seal interior of all Raceways which pass through buildings roofs, floors or through outside walls
35
of the building, above or below grade. Seal on the end inside the building using duct sealing
36
mastic, non - hardening compound type, specially designed for such service to maintain the
37
integrity of the seal of the wall, floor or roof. Pack around the wires in the Raceways.
38
3.09 HANGARS FOR RACEWAYS
39
A.
In suspended ceiling spaces Contractor may, at his option, attach 1/2" or 3/4" EMT Raceways to
40
the ceiling suspension system where such system is structurally suitable on independent wire
41
secured at both ends; in which case, provide clips manufactured for the purpose.
42
B.
When more than two Raceways will use the same routing, group together on a patented
43
channel support system (such as Unistrut).
44
3.10 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
45
A.
Install parallel to building surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, floor). Fasten to surface as recommended
46
by Manufacturer. Mount so Raceway is in the least obvious location. Shall be used in lieu of
47
conduit in finished areas.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260533-3 RACEWAY
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
3.11 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
2 A. Flexible conduit shall be used only for connection to motors and equipment subject to vibration
3 with 90 degrees loop minimum to allow for isolation and for lay -in fluorescent fixtures above T-
4 Bar ceilings. For fixture installations, one end of flex must terminate in rough -in junction box.
5 Flex conduit shall not be installed over 6' long or used to connect from fixture to fixture. Use
6 liquid tight for pumps, equipment which is regularly washed down, and equipment in damp
7 locations. Provide ground wire.
3.12 PULL CORDS
A. Nylon type shall be included in all installed empty Raceway.
10 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260533-4 RACEWAY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 26 0534
METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide Metal Clad (Type MC) Cable for power, control and lighting systems.
B. Provide wiring connections and terminations.
1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. UL 1569. Products shall be tested, approved and labeled /listed by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc.
1.03 USES PERMITTED
A. MC Cable is permitted to be used for 20amp lighting and power circuits where routing is above
grade, concealed and the installation meets the requirements of NEC 330.
B. MC Cable shall NOT be used for homerun circuits from the fixture, receptacle, or equipment to
the panelboard. Hard conduit must be used from the panelboard to the nearest accessible
ceiling space to the panelboard.
C. MC Cable shall not be used for HVAC equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABLE ASSEMBLY
A. Metal clad cable assemblies shall consist of 2, 3 or 4 current carrying conductors and an
equipment ground conductor.
B. Conductors: Solid Copper conductor, No. 12 AWG minimum or No. 10 AWG maximum.
Installation methods shall be as specified under Part 3 - Execution.
C. Insulation: Conductor insulation shall be rated 600 volt, Type THHN, 90 °C dry.
D. Fillers: Fillers shall be non - hygroscopic and non - wicking.
E. Binder: Core binder shall be corrugated polyester.
F. Sheath: The metal sheath shall be galvanized steel or aluminum. The metal sheath shall be
extruded onto the cable or applied longitudinally, then wrapped and welded. The sheath shall
then be corrugated for greater flexibility.
G. Jacketing: When PVC jacketing is required, the jacket shall be flame- retardant PVC with a
temperature range of -40 °C to 90 °C.
H. Equipment Grounding Conductor: The equipment ground wire shall be of the same construction
as specified in 2.02.A and 2.02.13 and be at a minimum the same size as the current carrying
conductors. The insulation color shall be green.
2.02 FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be UL listed and identified for such use with metal clad continuous corrugated
sheath cable, with or without PVC jacketing, as is appropriate for the installation.
B. Connectors shall be of steel or malleable iron and shall be a squeeze type clamp connector with
a locknut for non - jacketed metal clad cable. Compression gland type connectors shall be used
for jacketed metal clad cable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION — POWER AND LIGHTING SYSTEMS WIRING
A. All wiring shall be installed in compliance with the latest version of the National Electrical Code
and all other applicable codes and standards as indicated elsewhere in these specifications.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260534-1 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND
FITTINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
B.
Use of metal clad cable shall be permitted only for lighting, equipment and receptacle branch
2
circuits. Metal clad cable shall not be permitted in locations designated to be hazardous Class I,
3
II or III.
4
C.
Metal clad cable shall be permitted only for motor circuits where the motor being served is less
5
than 'h HP and rated for 120V, single phase. Metal clad cable is not permitted for HVAC
6
equipment and controls.
7
D.
Metal clad cable shall only be installed concealed within walls and above ceiling interstitial
8
spaces. Where there is no ceiling interstitial space, metal clad cable may not be used.
9
E.
Bends in corrugated sheath metal clad cable shall be made so that the cable will not be
10
damaged. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than seven
11
(7) times the diameter of the metallic sheath.
12
F.
Metal clad cable is not permitted to connect branch circuits to fumehoods, gas storage cabinets,
13
or chemical storage cabinets.
14
G.
No metal clad cable shall be installed in ventilation ducts or plenums.
15
H.
Conductors in Enclosures: Provide neat and workmanlike installation with conductors tied with
16
T &B Ty -Rap, Virginia Plastics, or equal, nylon wire ties in terminal cabinets, gutters and similar
17
locations.
18
3.02 FITTINGS
19
A.
Fittings used for connecting metal clad cable to boxes, light fixtures or other equipment shall be
20
UL listed and identified for such use.
21
B.
Cable preparation for installation of fittings shall follow manufacturer's instructions. The
22
manufacturer's specialized tools shall be used for preparing cable ends for installation of fittings.
23
C.
The cable end shall be cut square to ensure flush seating of the cable into the fitting. Fitting
24
securement screws shall be properly torqued. Cable ends shall be fitted with insulating
25
bushings intended for the type of metal clad cable being installed.
26
D.
For jacketed metal clad cable, the outer jacket shall be removed to the length specified by the
27
fitting manufacturer's instructions. Remove oils or solvent by- products from the outer jacket of
28
the cable. The cable end shall be cut square to ensure flush seating of the cable into the fitting.
29
The fitting gland nut shall be properly torqued to the manufacturer's specifications.
30
3.03 ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT
31 A. Metal clad cables shall be run parallel with walls or structural elements. Vertical runs shall be
32 plumb; horizontal runs level and parallel with structure, as appropriate. Groups shall be racked
33 together neatly with both straight runs and bends parallel and uniformly spaced.
34 B. Metal clad cables shall be securely fastened in place at intervals of not more than six feet, with
35 suitable clamps or fasteners of approved type, and all vertical conduits shall be properly
36 supported to present a mechanically rigid and secure installation.
37 C. Metal clad cable installed parallel to framing members, such as studs, joist, or rafters, shall be
38 supported so that the nearest outside surface of the cable is not less than 1 -1/4 inches from the
39 nearest edge of the framing member. Where this distance cannot be maintained, the cable
40 shall be protected by a steel plate, sleeve, or equivalent that is at least 1/16 -inch thick.
41 D. Maintain at least 6 -inch clearance between metal clad cables and other piping systems.
42 Maintain 12 -inch clearance between metal clad cables and heat sources such as flues, steam
43 pipes, and heating appliances.
44 E. No metal clad cable shall be fastened to other conduits or pipes or installed so as to prevent the
45 ready removal of other pipes or ducts for repairs.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260534-2 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND
FITTINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 F. Individual metal clad cables hung from roof structure or structural ceiling shall be supported by
2 split -ring hangers and wrought -iron hanger rods. Where three (3) or more metal clad cables are
3 suspended from the ceiling in parallel runs, use steel channels, Kindorf, Unistrut or equal, hung
4 from 1/2 -inch rods to support the conduits. The conduit on these channels shall be held in place
5 with metal clad cable clamps designed for the particular channel that is used.
6 G. Secure metal clad cable support racks to concrete walls and ceilings by means of cast -in -place
7 anchors; die -cast, rustproof alloy expansion shields; or cast flush anchors. Wooden plugs,
8 plastic inserts, or gunpowder driven inserts shall not be used as a base to secure conduit
9 supports.
10 H. Metal clad cable shall be supported immediately on each side of a bend and not more that one
11 (1) foot from an enclosure where a run of metal clad cable ends.
12 I. Use of cable tray:
13 1. The sum of the cross - sectional areas of all cables shall not exceed the maximum allowable
14 cable fill area allowed by NEC Tables 392.9, 392.9(E) and 392.9(F).
15 2. Cables shall be installed in a single layer with a maintained spacing of not less than one
16 cable diameter between cables.
17 3. Ampacity of cables installed in cable tray shall meet the requirements of NEC 392.11.
18 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTS
19 A. General: The electrical installation shall be inspected and tested to ensure safety to building
20 occupants and operating personnel and conformity to Code
21 B. Measure and record insulation resistance of all power and control wiring including insulation
22 resistance of all equipment:
23 1. The insulation resistance of each circuit phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground shall be
24 measured. For circuits rated less than 600 volts, the resistance shall not be less than 2
25 megohms.
26 2. Systems rated above 240 volts shall be tested with a 1000 -volt Megohmeter. Circuits rated
27 240 volts and below shall be tested with a 500 -volt Megohmeter. The D.C. potential shall
28 be applied for thirty (30) seconds.
29 C. The contractor shall record test readings and submit certified test to the Engineer for review and
30 acceptance approval before energizing respective circuits.
31 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 260534-3 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND
FITTINGS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
SECTION 26 2416
2
PANELBOARDS
3
PART1
GENERAL
4
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
5
A.
Provide all panelboard equipment, complete; dead front type.
6
PART 2
PRODUCTS
7
2.01 PANELBOARD
TYPE
8
A.
Panelboards shall be rated at proper voltage and current for intended use with busbars of
9
copper or aluminum. Panels shall be 3- phase, 4 -wire, 100% neutral, unless noted otherwise.
10
Where aluminum is utilized, all lugs shall be of an approved compression type. Provide multiple
11
lugs where conductors in parallel or "feed through" are shown on the Drawings.
12
B.
Conductor Connectors shall be bolted to busbars using Grade 5 bolts and Belleville washers.
13
Feeder conductor connectors shall be rated for 75 Degree C. wire when 75 Degree C. wire is
14
indicated. Where aluminum conductors are utilized for feeders or branch circuits the connectors
15
shall conform with Section 26 0519.
16
C.
Panelboards shall have a separate ground bus bonded to the panelboard frame.
17
D.
Where 120 -Volt, 15- or 20 -Amp breakers are intended for switching loads they shall be of type
18
rated for switching duty labeled "SWD."
19
2.02 ACCEPTABLE
MANUFACTURERS
20
A.
General Electric
21
B.
Square -D
22
C.
Seimens
23
D.
Cutler- Hammer
24
2.03 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
25
A.
The following interrupting capacity, 10,000 AIC Symmetrical shall be considered minimum.
26
Other ratings shall be as specified on panel schedules shown on the Drawings. Series rating of
27
breakers is not allowed.
28
B.
Mount breakers in all panelboards so that breaker handles operate in a horizontal plane. Bolt in
29
type only. Provide common trip on all multiple pole breakers.
30
C.
Where noted, provide spare breakers, complete for future connection of wiring circuits. Where
31
"Space" is indicated for breakers, provide all bussing and breaker mounting hardware in the
32
panelboard, provide steel knockouts in dead front metal closure of unused part of panel. If any
33
steel knockouts are removed, provide breakers in such spaces or approved coverplates. Open
34
spaces are not permitted.
35
D.
For multi -wire branch circuits, provide approved breaker handle ties where required by NEC
36
210.4.
37
2.04 CABINET FOR EACH PANELBOARD
38
A.
Flush or surface, as indicated; tight closing doors without play, when latched. Where two
39
cabinets are located adjacent to each other in finished areas, provide matching trim of the same
40
height. Where a remote controlled switch or contactor is mounted in any panelboard, mount on
41
same frame as panelboard interior with screw retained access door in dead front shield;
42
common door over circuit breakers and remote controlled device. Where flush mounted,
43
provide (2) 3/4" conduits to accessible ceiling space for future expansion.
44
B.
All conduits for future expansion shall stub into a junction box, where located above grade, and
45
shall be sealed in the panel.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 262416-1 PANELBOARDS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
C.
Provide cabinets of sufficient dimensions to allow for future expansion and addition of circuit
2
breakers within the panelboards as indicated on panel schedules.
3
D.
Provide cabinet front with full- height hinged door. One door over the interior and an additional
4
hinged dead front cover over interior and wireway (door -in- door). Full- height front cover hinged
5
to box with concealed trim clamps. Provide flush door locks.
6
E.
Provide lock for each cabinet door. All Electrical Distribution Equipment Locks shall be keyed
7
identically. Key system shall match existing. Supply Owner with minimum six keys.
8
F.
Fasten panelboard front with machine screws with oval counter -sunk heads, finish hardware
9
quality, with escutcheons or approved trim clamps. Clamps accessible only when dead front
10
door is open are acceptable. Surface mounted panelboards with fronts greater than 48 inches
11
vertical dimension shall be hinged at right side in addition to hinged door over dead front.
12
G.
Finish: Provide factory prime coat for cabinets to be located in finished areas. Where cabinets
13
are located in unfinished areas, standard lacquer or enamel finish, gray or blue -gray color, shall
14
be substituted for factory prime coat.
15
2.05 SYSTEM
OF NUMBERING AND BUS ARRANGEMENT
16
A.
Shall be as shown on the Panel Schedules on the Drawings.
17
2.06 PANELBOARD
NAMEPLATE
18
A.
Provide engraved and filled (or color layer - engraved through outer layer) plastic nameplate
19
with 'h -inch high characters (for panel name); attached with screws to each NEMA 1 panelboard
20
front. White on black, include voltage, phases, wires and minimum A.I.C. Rating in 3/8 -inch
21
characters.
22
B.
Nameplate color shall be:
23
1. Normal System: White letters on black
24
PART 3
EXECUTION
25
3.01 MOUNTING
26 A. Secure in place with top of cabinet at 6-0 ", unless otherwise noted. Top of cabinet and trim
27 shall be level. Firmly anchor cabinets directly or with concealed bracing to Building Structure.
28 When panels are not located in or directly on a wall, provide a support frame of formed steel
29 channel which is anchored to the floor and Ceiling Structure. Interiors shall not be installed until
30 Structure is totally enclosed. Where panels are mounted adjacent to each other, the top edges
31 shall be at the same height.
32 3.02 CIRCUIT INDEX
33 A. For each branch circuit panelboard provide a typewritten index listing each circuit in the
34 panelboard by number with its proper load designation. Mount with a transparent protective
35 cover inside cabinet door. Listing shall match circuit breaker arrangements, typically with odd
36 numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. Room numbers used shall be final room
37 numbers used in the building as verified with the Owner, and not room number assigned on
38 Plans.
39 3.03 CABINET PAINTING
40 A. Cabinets furnished as prime painting shall be field painted to match color of adjacent wall. (See
41 Division - Painting).
42 3.04 SPACE
43 A. Verify space available with equipment sizes and Code Required Working Clearances prior to
44 Submittal of Shop Drawings.
45 3.05 GROUNDING
46 A. Provide separate ground busbar for all panels supplying isolated ground circuits.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 262416-2 PANELBOARDS
El
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
3.06 FEED THROUGH AND DOUBLE LUGS
A. Provide feed through or double lugs with amperage equal to the incoming feeder amperage
unless shown as larger.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 262416-3 PANELBOARDS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 26 2419
2 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
5 A. Work under this section includes all requirements for motor controls to be furnished under the
6 electrical portion of the work on all electrical motor driven equipment. Individually mounted
7 starters shall be provided by Division 26 Contractor. Motor controls shall conform to NEMA
8 Standards for each specific purpose.
9 B. The Division 26 Contractor shall furnish all motor controllers not included with equipment
10 furnished under other divisions of these specifications or by Owner. The Division 26 Contractor
11 shall install all motor controllers including all controllers not factory assembled into equipment
12 furnished under other divisions of these specifications or by Owner.
13 1.02 MOTOR VOLTAGE INFORMATION
14 A. Voltages available are 240 Volt, 1 Phase, and 115 Volt Single Phase.
15 B. Circuits are designed (in general) for motors as follows:
16 1. Smaller than 1/2 H.P. - 115 Volts, Single Phase 1/2 H.P. and larger - 200 Volts, 1 Phase
17 C. Verify motor sizes and voltages provided under other divisions and notify General Contractor
18 immediately if any discrepancies are noted.
19 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
20 A. Provide motor protection switches of the appropriate NEMA size. For units not using NEMA
21 rating, use equivalent NEMA size.
22 PART 2 PRODUCTS
23 2.01 MOTOR STARTERS
24 A. Magnetic Motor Starters: Unless noted otherwise, shall be full voltage non - reversing with three
25 overloads sized to suit nameplate amperes of motor served, motor "On" and "Off' pilot lights,
26 "Hands- Off - Auto" switch, and auxiliary contacts for interlocking.
27 B. Combination Motor Starter /Disconnect: Shall be fused switch type with all features of
28 Paragraph A above. In addition, provide disconnect switch auxiliary contacts for disconnection
29 of externally powered control circuits where applicable. Fuses shall be sized in accordance with
30 motor manufacturer's requirements.
31
C.
Manual Starters: Shall be toggle switch or push- button type, lockable in the "Off' position, with
32
overload relays, pilot light and enclosure pursuant to Paragraph D below. Manual starters shall
33
only be used where specifically shown or called out on the drawings and only for single phase,
34
fractional horsepower motors.
35
D.
Enclosures: All motor controllers shall be contained in an enclosure suitable for the
36
environment in which the controller is mounted, and shall be weatherproof when exposed to
37
weather.
38
E.
Overload Devices: Shall be melting alloy or bimetallic type. One overload shall be provided for
39
each phase. Provisions shall be made for resetting the overload devices from outside the
40
starter enclosure. Provide ambient compensated overload devices only when the motor is at a
41
constant temperature and the controller is subject to a separate, varying temperature.
42
Automatic reset overload devices are not permitted.
43
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
44
A.
Square D
45
B.
Allen Bradley
46
C.
General Electric
47
D.
Cutler- Hammer
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 262419-1 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
E. Siemens
2.03 NAMEPLATES
A. Pursuant to Section 26 0000, Paragraph 2.05, provide nameplates permanently attach (with
screws on NEMA 1 enclosures) on each controller, nameplates with the following information:
Load served, voltage, phase, short circuit rating, panel /circuit number and where applicable fuse
size and type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FINISHED AREAS
A. In finished areas, mount motor protection switches flush and install suitable coverplates.
3.02 HEATERS
A. Install heaters co- related with full -load current of motors provided.
3.03 OVERLOADS
A. Set overload devices to suit motors provided.
3.04 SUPPORTS
A. Securely mount to equipment, wall or acceptable mounting frame.
3.05 CONNECTION TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ON ROOFS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate all roofing penetrations with the general contractor and roofing
contractor to assure that the roofing warranty is maintained.
B. Attachment of conduits to the roof to serve mechanical equipment and devices shall comply with
Section 26 0533.
3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE RATINGS
A. The Division 26 00 00 Contractor shall verify that the nameplate ratings of the mechanical
equipment, when they arrive on site, are consistent with the ampacity called out on the
drawings. The Contractor shall bring any discrepancies to the Engineers attention prior to
installation of conduit and wiring.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
END OF SECTION
262419 -2
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
SECTION 26 2726
2
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
3
PART1
GENERAL
4
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
5
A.
Provide all wiring devices and plates.
6
B.
No push -in, friction, spring type terminals allowed.
7
C.
All devices color shall be ivory, unless otherwise noted.
8
PART 2
PRODUCTS
9
2.01 ACCEPTABLE
MANUFACTURERS
10
A.
Hubbell
11
B.
Pass & Seymour
12
C.
Leviton
13
D.
Cooper
14
2.02 SWITCHES
15
A.
"Industrial Specification Grade ", quiet type, rated 277 volt, 20 amp, unless noted, with plastic
16
handle. Single pole, double pole, 3 -way, or locking type as required. Meets Fed. Spec. WS -896
17
Provide matching styles and colors in other devices as required for the conditions of installation.
18
Hubbell CS1221, Cooper CSB120, Leviton 1221, and P &S 20AC1
19
B.
Interchangeable type shall be rated same as above.
20
C.
0 -10V Dimmer Sensor Switch: Provide wall mount passive infrared sensors switches that
21
automatically control the lights in an area. The sensor shall be programmed for occupancy or
22
vacancy mode. The dimmer shall control 0 -10V electronic fluorescent ballasts or LED driver
23
load types. The sensor shall have 180 degree sensor field of view. The switch shall adjustable
24
time out and adjustable settings for auto -on light level. Lutron Maestro Series: MS- Z101 -XX.
25
D.
LED Dimmer: LED 0 -10V dimmer switch shall be compatible with supplied LED board and
26
driver. Dimmer switch shall have a vertical slide with a positive "on /off' button. Dimmer shall
27
have high and low end, field adjustable trim setting. Provide with power pack for the 0 -10V
28
control. Lutron "Diva" Series.
29
E.
Timer Switch: Provide electronic light timer switch where indicated on drawings. The timer
30
switch shall be connected to the room lighting and fan. The timer switch shall be programmable
31
for time -out from 5 minutes to 2 hours. Set timer for standard 20 minutes time -out period, time
32
scrolls up, flash off, beeper on. Manufacturer: Watt Stopper — Inteli- switch Digital Time Switch.
33
F.
Motor rated switches: Switches serving as motor disconnecting means shall be horsepower
34
rated with overload relays and meet requirements as stated above. See manual starters in
35
Section 26 2419, `Motor Controllers'.
36
G.
Device plates shall be Hubbell and Cooper Type 302 stainless steel.
37
2.03 RECEPTACLES
38
A.
"Industrial Specification Grade ", Duplex NEMA 5 -20R configuration (20 -Amp, 120 -Volt) unless
39
shown otherwise. Must have "rivetless ground" contact manufactured as an integral component
40
of the external ground screw terminal. Meets Fed Spec. WC -596 Hubbell HBL5362, Cooper
41
5362, P &S 5362A, and Leviton 5362.
42
B.
Ground -Fault Circuit - Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: NEMA 5 -20R. Hubbell GF201LA, and
43
Cooper VGF20, for 20 Amp, 125 -Volt AC. Provide GFI receptacles where required by code.
44
C.
Weather Resistant (WR) / Ground Fault Circuit - Interrupter (GFCI) Outdoor Duplex Receptacles:
45
NEMA 5 -20R. Hubbell GFTR201 or equal, for 20 Amp, 125 -Volt AC.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 262726-1 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 D. Special Purpose Receptacles: For special purpose receptacles, see drawings for voltage,
2 amperage, and phase. Provide with matching plug delivered to the Owner.
3 2.04 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
4 A. Provide occupancy sensor switches for control of lighting in large areas as shown on the
5 drawings. Sensors shall be ceiling mounted to provide adequate coverage. Occupancy sensor
6 shall be "Sensor Switch" Model CM- PDT -R, complete with power pack PP- 20 -20P, Auxiliary
7 Relay SP- 20 -20P and associated mounting hardware. Sensors shall be wired and installed per
8 manufacturer's direction to maintain switching and circuits shown on drawings. Where multiple
9 sensors are located in an individual room, sensors shall be wired parallel with the relays such
10 that either sensor will provide input to turn all lights on and reset time delay.
11 2.05 DEVICE PLATES
12 A. Interior: Plates for receptacles other than NEMA 5 -20R shall have ampere rating, voltage and
13 phase engraved in the plate. Plates for recessed boxes shall be Hubbell and Cooper Type 302
14 stainless steel. Attachment screws shall match finish of plate. Plates for surface mounted
15 boxes shall be of pressed stainless steel with size to fit exactly the box used.
16 B. Exterior: Intermatic # WP1010MC, for vertical mount and # WP1010HMC for horizontal mount,
17 or equivalent for receptacles. Metal cover shall be raintight while -in -use.
18 PART 3 EXECUTION
19 3.01 MOUNTING
20 A. Rigidly fasten each device to the outlet box at proper position with the wall to bring receptacle
21 flush with plate or switch handle the proper distance through the plate.
22 3.02 ORIENTATION
23 A. Set Switches vertical with handle operating vertically, up position "ON ".
24 B. Set Receptacles vertical with ground slot down.
25 3.03 DEVICE PLATES
26 A. Shall be stainless steel for each new wiring device and for each telephone and signal equipment
27 outlet, except where equipment mounted thereon covers the outlet box completely.
28 B. Provide new covers on existing outlet boxes being reused.
29 3.04 DIMMER SWITCHES
30 A. Provide a separate neutral for each phase.
31 B. Fluorescent dimmer switches require a 4 square backbox per switch.
32 3.05 RECEPTACLE GROUNDING
33 A. Provide bare bonding wire between receptacle grounding terminal and box. Plaster ear screws
34 connecting frame to the box will not be acceptable for grounding.
35 3.06 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITY ACCESS
36 A. Comply with all requirements of Washington State Americans with Disability and NEC 2014
37 codes.
38 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 262726-2 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 26 2813
2 FUSES
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
5 A. Provide all fuses as required. Provide three (3) spare of each size and type required. Fuses
6 shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. This measure prevents fuse
7 damage during shipment of the equipment from the manufacturer to the jobsite or from water
8 that may contact the fuse before the equipment is installed. Final tests and inspections shall be
9 made prior to energization of the equipment. This shall include a thorough cleaning, tightening,
10 and review of all electrical connections and inspection of all grounding conductors. All fuses
11 shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer.
12 PART 2 PRODUCTS
13 2.01 MAINS, FEEDERS, AND BRANCH CIRCUITS
14 A. Circuits 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN LOW -PEAK Dual -
15 Element Fuses LPN -RK (250 volts) or LPS -RK (600 volts). All dual - element fuses shall have
16 separate overload and short - circuit elements. Fuse shall incorporate a spring activated thermal
17 overload element having a 284 °F. melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short -
18 circuit clearing chamber. The fuse must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10
19 seconds and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000
20 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1 to maintain the Engineered
21 protection of the system components.
22 B. Motor Circuits: All individual motor circuits with full load amperes ratings (FLA) of 480 amperes
23 or less shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW -PEAK Dual- Element Fuses LPN -RK (250 volts)
24 or LPS -RK (600 volts). Larger H.P. motors shall be protected by BUSSMANN Type KRP -C
25 Low -Peak Time -Delay Fuses of the ratings shown on the drawings. All other motors, (such as
26 1.0 service factor motors) shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW -PEAK Dual- Element Fuses
27 LPN -RK (250 volts) or LPS -RK (600 volts) installed in ratings of approximately 115% of the
28 motor full load current except as noted above. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1 Dual Element
29 Time Delay or Class L.
30 2.02 SPARE FUSES
31 A. Spare fuses shall be provided with a minimum of three of each ampere rating.
32 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
33 A. Bussman
34 B. Little Fuse
35 PART 3 EXECUTION
36 3.01 FUSES
37 A. Install in all fusible devices provided under this Contract
38
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 262813-1 FUSES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 26 2816
DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provided all disconnects, fused and unfused, required by code for equipment furnished under
this and other divisions of these specifications and as shown on the drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. General Electric
B. Square -D
C. Siemens
D. Cutler- Hammer
2.02 DISCONNECTS
A. Switch shall be heavy -duty type, shall be quick -break and shall be horsepower rated. Switch
shall have blades as required to open all ungrounded conductors and shall be single throw
unless noted.
B. Enclosure shall have interlocking cover to prevent opening door when switch is closed. Door
interlock shall include a defeating scheme, shall be padlockable in the "Off' position.
C. Enclosure shall be suitable for environment in which mounted. All exterior enclosures shall
have a minimum raintight rating.
2.03 FUSED SWITCHES (OR FUSED DISCONNECTS)
A. Shall be as above with addition of fuse space and clips to accept only fuses as noted in Section
262813.
B. Fuses shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer's requirements of protected equipment.
2.04 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates on all enclosures and include the following information: Load served,
voltage, phase, panel and circuit number. Construct and attach in accordance with Section 26
0000, Paragraph 2.05.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUPPORTS
A. Secure solidly to wall or approved mounting frame. Disconnects supported only by Raceway
are not acceptable.
3.02 SPLICES
A. Wiring space within enclosure shall not be used as a junction box.
35 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
262816-1 DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
SECTION 26 4300
2
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) / SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)
3
PART1
GENERAL
4
1.01 DESCRIPTION
5
A.
This Section describes the materials and installation requirements for transient voltage surge
6
suppressors (TVSS), alternatively called Surge Protective Devices (SPD). TVSS /SPD devices
7
are used for the protection of all AC electrical circuits from the effects of lightning induced
8
currents, substation switching transients and internally generated transients resulting from
9
inductive and /or capacitive load switching.
10
B.
This specification also describes the mechanical and the electrical requirements for the TVSS
11
devices. The TVSS shall be suitable for application in both category A, B and C environments
12
as described in ANSI /IEEE C62.41- 2002.
13
C.
The TVSS shall be of parallel design and provide individual protection components connected
14
Line to Ground and Line to Line for Delta and High Resistance Grounded systems and Line to
15
Ground, Line to Neutral and Neutral to Ground for Wye and Single Phase distribution systems.
16
D.
Systems not providing discreet protection components in the above configuration will be
17
rejected. A schematic diagram showing the configuration and technology of all internal
18
connected components must be provided with submittals.
19
E.
The TVSS devices will be used both near electrical service entrance locations and at locations
20
distant from service entrance locations (Panels, MCC's, Equipment Disconnects, etc.). For the
21
purposes of this specification it should not be assumed that on Wye systems a neutral to ground
22
bond will not be located electrically close to the suppressor location, thus discreet Neutral to
23
Ground Suppression and Filter components are required.
24
F.
The Manufacturer /Vendor shall furnish all of the necessary TVSS /SPD products and related
25
hardware (i.e. flush mounting kits, mounting brackets, etc.) as required for the installation of the
26
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) / Surge Protective Devices (SPD) System
27
suitable for the application.
28
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
29 A. General Electrical Requirements
30 B. Raceways, Boxes, and Fittings
31 C. Wire and Cable
32 D. Low Voltage Motor Control
33 E. Grounding
34 1.03 SUBMITTALS
35 A. The vendor /manufacturer shall submit 3 copies of all related TVSS Specifications, product data,
36 electrical and mechanical shop drawings, installation requirements /instructions, maintenance
37 manuals (if applicable) and performance /warranty information requested in this document for
38 the actual proposed TVSS /SPD device(s) to Project Engineer. All information shall be submitted
39 in a three ring binder indexed by response and test. Project Engineer reserves the right to
40 select or reject any vendor response or product.
41 B. In order for TVSS device to be considered for this project, all responses to information
42 requested in this specification must be provided in writing and must reference each specification
43 section and sub - section. Written submittal responses shall be signed by manufacturer's VP of
44 Engineering. Attach information as necessary to provide compliance with specification response
45 requirements. If a manufacturer can not fully comply with a section of the specification, this must
46 be stated in the response and the reason for non - compliance shall be provided.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 264300-1 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
(TVSS) / SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND PERFORMANCE
2 A. Each complete suppression unit shall be UL1449 3rd Edition Listed as a Transient Voltage
3 Surge Suppressor. UL 1449 test data for TVSS devices proposed, including UL let through
4 voltage classification shall be provided with submittal. Units shall bear suppressed voltage
5 rating issued by UL.
6 B. Engineer reserves the right to have an employee or a representative designated by firm witness
7 any testing required by this document. Vendor /manufacturer shall provide written notice of intent
8 to test and shall coordinate testing with Engineer, should Engineer desire to witness tests.
9 C. Performance & Durability Testing. Units shall be tested by an independent test agency in
10 accordance with test procedures outlined in ANSI /IEEE C62.45, NEMA LS1 & UL1449.
11 D. Manufacturers Qualifications: Only firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of TVSS
12 products for category C locations (ANSI /IEEE C62.41.1- 2002), and whose products have been
13 providing satisfactory service for not less than five years, shall be considered. A customer
14 reference list, with a minimum of five contact names and current phone numbers shall be
15 provided with the submittals. All manufacturer qualifications shall be provided as part of the
16 submittal.
17
E.
The successful manufacturer /vendor shall assign a technical contact person for TVSS
18
application, installation and warranty questions. This contact shall be available to provide a
19
response to a technical question within a maximum of two business days.
20
F.
The Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject any or all submittals, to request additional
21
information as deemed necessary or to request submittals for a different unit that may be
22
deemed more appropriate for this installation.
23
1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS
24
A.
UL compliance and labeling: Listed per UL 1449, Third Edition.
25
B.
TVSS and Enclosures proposed and submitted shall be safety agency listed for all intended
26
installations, meeting or exceeding all of the following: NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 12 & 13.
27
C.
TVSS device shall be designed to allow installation in accordance with latest adopted version of
28
the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Codes (NESC) and applicable
29
OSHA 1910 requirements.
30
D.
NEMA LS1 (latest revision)
31
E.
IEEE Standard C62.41.1, IEEE Standard C62.41.2 & IEEE Standard C62.45 (latest revisions)
32
PART 2
PRODUCTS
33 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
34 A. The TVSS shall be compatible with the electrical system voltage, current, system configuration
35 and intended applications.
36 B. The TVSS maximum continuous operation voltage (MCOV) shall be capable of sustaining 115%
37 of the nominal RMS voltage (with the associated peak voltage of 1.414 *RMS) continuously
38 without degradation and heating.
39 C. The TVSS shall only use clamping components connected in parallel with the supply to limit the
40 surge voltages.
41 D. Arc Discharge components, such as Gas Tube Arresters shall not be used as the sole
42 protection component in any protection mode. Gas Tube Arresters may be used in conjunction
43 with other components, such as MOV's and SAD's to provide protection. Where Gas Tube
44 Arresters are installed, the circuit shall be specifically designed to prevent power follow current.
45 E. Internal Fusing — If provided, shall be component level style:
46 1. Component Level Fusing
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 264300-2 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
(TVSS) / SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
Each Metal Oxide Varistor, or other primary suppression component, shall be
individually fused for safety and performance to allow the SPD to withstand the full
rated single pulse peak surge capacity per mode without the operation or failure of the
fuses. Overcurrent fusing that limits the listed peak surge current of the SPD is not
acceptable. Replaceable cartridge type per phase or per mode overcurrent fusing is
not acceptable.
For arc quenching capability, minimization of smoke and contaminates in the event of
a failure, and to ensure the safest possible design, all surge components, current
carrying paths and fusing shall be packed in fuse grade silica sand.
Fusing shall be present in every mode, including Neutral -to- Ground.
The fusing shall be capable of interrupting up to a 200kA symmetrical fault current
with 600VAC applied, providing a listed 200kAIC Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)
without additional over - current protection.
F. Status Indication & Monitoring: The suppressor shall include individual Phase Status LEDs, a
red Service Required LED, an integrated Audible Alarm with silence button and Form C dry
contacts (N.O. or N.C.) for remote monitoring capability. The form C contacts must be rated a
minimum of 65VDC /150VAC with a load of 30WDC /60VA AC, and must be isolated and
insulated from the ground plane and the power system to prevent Surges from reaching the
monitoring system. The system shall provide insulation and isolation against any impressed
voltages. Contacts shall be designed to change state upon device failure or loss of power.
G. The protection should be housed in the appropriate NEMA rated, heavy duty powder coated
steel enclosure. This enclosure must provide complete protection against personnel hazards
and damage to equipment should a failure of the TVSS protection device occur. This enclosure
shall also be designed to allow connection of the TVSS device without sharp bends in the
conductors and lead lengths of less than 18" from the TVSS Lugs (or enclosure opening for
devices with leads attached) to the final point of attachment to the power system for the
application (assuming connection point is 12" from the exterior of the enclosure).
H. Manufacturer shall provide a comprehensive warranty that provides for unlimited full
replacement of a suppressor that is damaged or that fails to meet manufacturers published
specifications and specifications provided within, without pro- rating value. Warranty shall
provide coverage for a minimum period of 20 years for individual units (standard warranty) and.
Series SPDs shall be covered for 10 years. These Unlimited Replacement Warranties cannot
exclude system overvoltages or direct lightning strike events. Warranty shall not require any
factory or third party testing. Warranty shall apply to installed unit(s) for the duration of the
warranty period no matter who owns the facility or equipment. All warranty information and
copies of warranty documents must be provided with this response.
1. All replacements shall be of same make, model and configuration as original unit unless
otherwise requested or approved by customer.
2. The manufacturer /vendor shall provide a warranty replacement unit at the facility within 5
days of receipt of written notification that the TVSS unit has failed, at no cost to the
customer.
3. If the manufacturer /vendor requires inspection of the installed unit to validate warranty
claim, the manufacturer /vendor must visit the site where the failed TVSS device(s) are
located within 3 days of notification. This visit will be performed at no cost to customer.
This section does not modify the requirement for the TVSS replacement to be within 5 days
of written notification as described in section G, above.
4. The replacement unit shall be sent to the facility without shipping, handling, examination or
other fees.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
264300-3 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
(TVSS) / SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
I.
Complete, comprehensive installation instructions shall be provided for the TVSS systems
2
proposed. Installation instructions must provide for compliance with latest adopted NEC
3
requirements and UL listing requirements, while not degrading performance of TVSS device as
4
tested. Provide copies of installation instructions for the models proposed with the specification
5
response. Successful vendors /manufacturer shall provide a complete, comprehensive
6
installation checklist.
7
J.
If manufacturer claims TVSS device to have filtering capabilities, provide complete information
8
on filtering performance of TVSS device with specification response. This information must
9
include attenuation across a stated frequency range. If the TVSS is a UL 1283 listed device, the
10
manufacturer shall provide all performance specifications for filter attenuation.
11
K.
Provide complete enclosure dimensions (H *W *D) and cutsheets indicating dimensions including
12
locations of terminations and wire entry locations with specification response.
13
L.
Provide UL Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR). Minimum ratings shall be 200kAIC without
14
additional /external over - current protection.
15
M.
Manufacturer shall make available metal flush plates for distribution and branch panel SPDs.
16
The flush plate shall provide for a clean architectural finish and be utilized where the attached
17
panel is mounted flush.
18
N.
Manufacturer must have knowledgeable local representation and distribution within 100 miles of
19
the project location and must be willing to provide technical support, warranty claim support,
20
and installation support for the project.
21
O.
Successful manufacturer /vendor must be capable of supplying TVSS for project within 20 days
22
of receipt of order for orders of 25 units and less for models submitted in response to this
23
specification.
24
2.02 SECONDARY
SUPPRESSORS FOR MCC, DISTRIBUTION & BRANCH PANELS
25
A.
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors shall be installed at all service entrances of each building
26
and as shown on the riser / one -line diagram. Suppressors shall be listed in accordance with
27
UL 1449 3rd Edition, Standard for Safety, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
28
B.
For 3- phase, 4 -wire plus ground configurations, suppressors shall provide suppression and filter
29
elements between each phase conductor and the system neutral, each phase conductor and
30
the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground.
31
C.
The minimum single impulse current rating (as per NEMA LS -1) shall not be less than 120,000
32
amperes per phase (60KA per mode). Provide proof of compliance by supplying certified test
33
results from independent test lab with submittals.
34
PART 3
EXECUTION
35
3.01 GENERAL
36 A. Suppressors shall be installed per the manufacturer's installation instructions and the
37 requirements of: the NEC, the local authority having jurisdiction and the project engineer.
38 B. Size overcurrent protective device and conductors per manufacturer's recommendations and
39 NEC requirements.
40 C. Project Engineer or their appointed representative may perform inspection of the installed
41 suppressors and reserves the right to require corrections to the installation to comply with
42 manufacturer's installation requirements and project specifications.
43 D. The SPD /TVSS supplier must provide on -site installation training for the electrical contractor.
44 3.02 SECONDARY SUPPRESSORS FOR MCC, DISTRIBUTION & BRANCH PANELS
45 A. Install one secondary suppressor at each MCC, Distribution Panel, Branch Panel & Sub -Panel
46 location as indicated on the drawings.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 264300-4 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
(TVSS) / SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
B. Provide a 30 Amp circuit breaker (with a safety clip to ensure the circuit breaker cannot be
inadvertently turned off) in the panel being protected as over - current protection for the wire and
as a disconnecting means for the SPD (or as specified by the manufacture).
C. Grounding for all non -IG installations: Suppressor's ground lead shall be bonded to the panel
enclosure with a small ground lug as close as possible to the TVSS mounting point. Conduit
between the TVSS /SPD and the switchboard must provide secure electrical /mechanical
connections.
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 264300-5 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
(TVSS) / SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 26 5000
2 LIGHTING
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
5 A. Provide the lighting system complete and operational.
6 B. Recessed fixtures installed in fire - resistive ceiling construction shall have the same fire rating as
7 the ceiling or shall be provided with fireproofing boxes having materials of the same fire rating
8 as the ceiling.
9 1.02 FIXTURE SCHEDULE MANUFACTURER'S SERIES NUMBERS
10 A. Are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the number, size, wattage or the
11 type of lamp, ballast or special requirements as specified hereinafter.
12 1.03 SUBMITTALS
13 A. Shall be neatly and clearly marked to indicate the fixtures, lamps and ballasts fully comply with
14 contract documents. When substitute fixtures are submitted (if permitted) the data shall clearly
15 cross reference (written or highlighted) that the substitute fixture complies with every detail of
16 the specified fixture. Fixtures not fully complying with contract documents are not permitted.
17 PART 2 PRODUCTS
18 2.01 METAL PARTS
19 A. Interior Fixtures: Steel or aluminum with 300 °F, baked enamel finish, brushed aluminum with
20 baked acrylic clear lacquer finish, or stainless steel with a brushed finish, manufacturer's
21 standard color unless specified otherwise.
22 B. Exterior Fixtures: Corrosion resisting metal, a (non- ferrous, stainless steel or special finish) and
23 in all cases suitable for outdoor service without tarnishing or other damage due to exposure;
24 manufacturer's standard colors unless specified otherwise; cadmium plate all metal parts
25 concealed by canopies, including screws, plates and brackets. All exposed fasteners shall be
26 tamperproof.
27 2.02 LIGHT TRANSMITTING COMPONENTS
28 A. Virgin acrylic or polycarbonate plastic (0.125 -inch thick overall minimum), UV stabilized or glass.
29 Shall be contained in a captive metal frame that remains attached to the fixture when door is in
30 open position.
31 2.03 SPECIAL PARTS
32 A. Adapters, Plates, Brackets and Anchors: Provide where required by construction features of the
33 building to suitably mount lighting fixture. All such appurtenances and mounting methods shall
34 be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to fabrication and installation.
35 B. Low Voltage Transformers: Provide and install where required to power individual or linear runs
36 of low voltage light fixtures.
37 2.04 LAMPS
38 A. General Electric, Sylvania or Philips. All lamps supplied shall be by the same manufacturer.
39 B. Provide for each fixture in the exact number and type for which the fixture is designed or as
40 noted.
41 C. Fluorescent Type:
42 1. Bi -pin, T -8 rapid start; color temperature of 3500 K; CRI 82; average life of 36,000 hours
43 per 3 hour start.
44 2. Bi -pin, T -5 high output; color temperature of 3500 K; CRI 82; average life of 30,000 hours
45 per 3 hour start.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 265000-1 LIGHTING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
D.
Compact Fluorescent Type:
2
Sylvania "Quicktronic" or equivalent programmed rapid start.
1. Twin tube, double twin tube, triple tube; 4 -pin, amalgam, color temperature of 3500 K; CRI
3
Ballast factor of 98% or greater.
82; average life of 20,000 hours. (Sylvania — Dulux).
4
"A" sound rating.
2. Biax; 4 -pin, color temperature of 3500 K; CRI 82; high lumen output. (Sylvania — Dulux);
5
Electronic pre -heat starting.
average life of 20,000 hours.
6
E.
Solid -State Lighting: Fixtures shall have a lumen maintenance life expectancy (L70) of > 50,000
7
Five Year Warranty.
hours, a CRI of > 82, and a CCT of 3500K. Each solid -state fixture model shall be tested in
8
for T8 fluorescent lamps:
accordance with IES LM -79.
9
2.05 SOCKETS
10
A.
Porcelain, medium base except where mogul base lamps are standard for the fixture specified.
11
2.06 BALLASTS -FLUORESCENT (ELECTRONIC)
12
A.
Tested and approved for lamp type employed and approved by Lighting Design Lab
13
40
specification committee.
14
B.
Acceptance Manufacturers:
15
42
1. Advance
16
43
2. Magnetek
17
44
3. Motorola
18
45
4. Osram /Sylvania
19
C.
UL and CBM labels.
20
D.
Low temperature and /or outdoor application. Provide ballasts suitable for low temperature
21
48
where outdoors or space ambient is expected to be below 50 °F.
22 E. Electronic ballasts shall be high power factor, greater than 95% and total harmonic distortion
23 (THD) less than 20 %. Provide for operation with T -8, T -5 and CFL lamps. "A" sound rating.
24 Neutral wire to be used in lighting circuit associated with electronic ballasts shall be #10 AWG
25 CU.
26 F. All ballasts shall be fused (see Section 26 28 13, Fuses).
27 G. All ballasts shall be provided with a UL listed factory pre - installed ballast disconnect
28
H. Ballasts for T5 fluorescent lamps:
29
1.
Sylvania "Quicktronic" or equivalent programmed rapid start.
30
2.
Ballast factor of 98% or greater.
31
3.
"A" sound rating.
32
4.
Electronic pre -heat starting.
33
5.
The ballast shall operate at 40 - 60 Khz without visible flicker.
34
6.
Five Year Warranty.
35
I. Ballasts
for T8 fluorescent lamps:
36
1.
Advance "Centium" Series or Equivalent programmed rapid start.
37
2.
Ballast factor of 98% or greater.
38
3.
"A" sound rating for 265 MA. (T8 lamps).
39
4.
The ballast shall operate at a frequency below 30 Khz or above 40 Khz without visible
40
flicker.
41
5.
Shall be designed for use with occupancy sensors by providing up to 30,000 lamp starts.
42
The ballast shall heat the lamp cathodes to 650 degree C with no glow current before
43
applying arc voltage to the lamp.
44
6.
Electronic ballast harmonic distortion and current shall be less than 10% THD.
45
7.
Where fluorescent light fixtures are to be located outside, the ballast shall be capable of 0
46
degree F. lamp ignition.
47
8.
Five Year Warranty.
48
J. Ballasts
for 5 to 30 Watt Compact Fluorescent Lamps:
49
1.
Motorola "Gold" Edition rapid start or Equivalent.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 265000-2 LIGHTING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
2. Electronic, 4 -pin.
2
3. Ballast factor of 98% or greater.
3
4. "A" sound rating.
4
5. The ballast shall operate at a frequency below 30 Khz or above 40 Khz without visible
5
flicker (high frequency operation).
6
6. Electronic ballast harmonic distortion and current shall be less than 10% THD.
7
7. Minimum starting temperature —5 degree F / -20 degree C.
8
8. Five Year Warranty.
9
2.07 HANGING FOR PENDANT FIXTURES
10
A.
Rigid type, with not less than 5 thread engagement at each end, consisting of iron pipe, with
11
brass or aluminum tubing casing, or painted tubing not less than 0.040 inches thick.
12
B.
Aircraft cable, stainless steel, sized appropriately by manufacturer for weight and seismic zone.
13
C.
Provide a canopy for each fixture hanger except where fixture conceals the outlet box directly
14
without a canopy.
15
D.
Provide a safety chain for all glass pendant fixtures and for all fixtures mounted in gymnasiums.
16
2.08 EXIT
SIGNS
17
A.
Fronts: Cutout stencils made of minimum #20 gauge sheet steel or sheet aluminum with red
18
glass or plastic back of the cutout. Mount fronts either on concealed hinges or pull -out type with
19
chain catch. Removable cutout arrows shall indicate direction of travel.
20
PART 3
EXECUTION
21
3.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES - GENERAL
22
A.
Size and mounting height from finished floor to bottom of fixture as indicated on the drawings.
23
Verify mounting provisions prior to the ordering of fixtures. Fixtures shall be UL listed for the
24
location, and application in which they are installed.
25
B.
Ceiling fixtures shall be coordinated with and suitable for installation in, on or from the ceiling as
26
shown. Installation and support of fixtures shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 and
27
manufacturer's recommendations.
28
C.
Recessed fixtures installed in seismic areas shall be installed utilizing specially designed
29
seismic clips.
30
D.
Suspended fixtures installed in seismic areas shall have 45° swivel hangers and shall be
31
located with no obstructions within the 45° range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture
32
shall be capable of 45° swing.
33
3.02 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES
34
A.
Install lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are completed.
35
Prior to final acceptance, remove all lamps, reflectors and diffusers, wash, rinse and reinstall.
36
3.03 SUPPORT
OF FLUORESCENT AND LED FIXTURES
37
A.
Recessed Troffer Type: For fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide
38
integral tabs, which rotate into position after fixture is lifted into the ceiling cavity. Provide two
39
safety chains secured to structural members above suspended ceiling. Circuit connection shall
40
be through use of 60 -inch flexible conduit from a rigidly supported junction box. For plaster or
41
GWB ceilings, provide a plaster frame compatible with light fixture.
42
B.
Recessed Downlight Type: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling, with the recessed portion of
43
the fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. For fixtures supported by a ceiling
44
suspension system, provide two safety chains secured to structural members above suspended
45
ceiling.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 265000-3 LIGHTING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 C. Surface and Pendant Mounted Type:
2 1. Where mounted on accessible ceilings, hang from structural members by means of hanger
3 rods through ceiling or as approved.
4 2. Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixture, provide
5 additional framing to support as required. Fixtures shall be supported from structure with
6 seismic bracing independent of ceiling.
7 3. For Pendant Mount Type: Provide a unistrut channel for mounting fixtures entire fixture
8 length unless light fixture is designed specifically for supporting itself. Provide 3/8 -inch
9 thread rod secured to structural members for support of unistrut channel.
10 4. Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of
11 irregularities in the ceiling. Where fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between
12 sections.
13 3.04 LOCATION
14 A. Mount to the dimensions shown on the drawings. Mount at quarter points where no dimensions
15 appear. Architect shall specify mounting locations where no dimensions appear and quarter
16 point mounting is impractical or not indicated on the drawings.
17 B. Refer to details, mechanical drawings, and coordinate with mechanical Contractor for equipment
18 and ductwork mounted in ceilings to prevent conflict with light fixtures prior to installation. If
19 conflicts cannot be resolved with the Mechanical Contractor, notify Arch itect/Engineer.
20 3.05 FIXTURE TENTING
21 A. Contractor shall coordinate ceiling types with architectural drawings and specifications and
22 provide equivalent fire rated enclosures above all light fixtures which penetrate rated ceilings.
23 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 265000-4 LIGHTING
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 SECTION 27 0000
2 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
5 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary
6 Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
7 B. WSSP Requirements: The work of this Section is part of the overall requirements to comply
8 with the required minimum Washington Sustainable School Protocol (WSSP) requirements.
9 Comply with Section 01 8113 — WSSP Requirements; refer to WSSP Scorecard in Section 01
10 8113 for WSSP edition and Credit identification.
11 C. Environmental Protection Requirements: The work of this Section is part of the overall
12 requirements to comply with the Environmental Protection, Hazardous Materials, and Green
13 Procurement Requirements. Comply with Section 01 5700 — Environmental Protection.
14 1.02 SCOPE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
15 A. The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a
16 workmanlike manner. In this context "good quality" means the work shall meet industry
17 technical standards and quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a
18 portion of the work performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds. The Installing
19 Vendor /Contractor shall make all corrections as needed, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
20 B. Provide system documentation and Owner training as specified below.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
C. An important item of the construction process for this project is the Pre - Construction Kick Off
Meeting, which shall take place PRIOR to Submittal of equipment data sheets.
1. The General Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of the meeting.
2. The Owners representative and the Owners IT Department representative will be present
for the meeting.
3. The General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, and a representative from EACH Section
shall attend this coordination meeting.
4. The estimated time is approximate and shall be extended for each Installing Vendor as
necessary.
5. EACH Installing Vendor shall submit their list of coordination items through the
Construction Channels a minimum of 14 Days in advance of the meeting for Owner review.
a. Review EACH specific Section for the sub - section titled "Coordination" for a minimum
list of items to be discussed during the Pre - Construction Kick Off Meeting
D. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, General
Requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully functional system for EACH specific
Low Voltage Section listed below includes, but is not limited to the following sections;
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
270000-1
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Pre - Construction
Kick Off Meeting
Estimated
Submit
time for
Questions
EACH
14 Days in
Section
Advance
1.
I Section 26 0000
Electrical General Conditions
30
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
270000-1
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 E. Applicable Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
2 following standards:
3 1. International Building Code (latest edition).
4 2. International Fire Code (latest edition).
5 3. NEC (National Electrical Code) (latest edition).
6 4. Telecommunications Architectural Standards - In Washington State Government (latest
7 edition).
8 5. ANSI -J- STD -607 -A Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
9 Telecommunications.
10 F. EACH Installing Vendor for their Section shall possess a current and valid Washington State 06
11 Electrical Low Voltage License.
12 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
13 A. Device or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings represents the intent of the system. If
14 additional equipment (that may not be shown) is required to make a fully functional system, then
15 provide such equipment as required.
16 B. Each specification section that is governed by these specifications shall be provided, installed,
17 commissioned, and warranted by a local Installing Vendor that meet the following requirements
18 for the equipment manufacturer that is being submitted for:
19 1. All equipment for EACH Specification Section shall be provided and installed by a single
20 supplier.
21 2. Have installed a minimum of three (3) Systems within the past five (5) years.
22 3. Maintain a 24 hour emergency service program using Manufacturer Trained technicians,
23 shall respond to service calls within 24 hours during and after the warranty period.
24 4. The Installing Vendor shall be Manufacturer Approved to purchase the equipment, have a
25 local office staffed with Manufacturer Certified installers that are capable to maintain,
26 service, and warrant the equipment being installed, who are full -time employees and are
27 capable of programming, testing, inspecting, maintaining, warranting, inventorying parts for
28 the life of the system, and shall be located within a 100 -mile radius of the project site.
29 5. Offices that require staff from another "Branch Office and /or Company Office" outside of
30 this radius, are not acceptable.
31 C. Prior to completion of the installation, the Installing Vendor shall provide:
32 1. A preventative maintenance agreement, which shall at the Owners option, become
33 effective at the end of the warranty period.
34 2. A proposal for off -site monitoring services (for systems that are applicable).
35 1.04 DOMESTIC PRODUCTS
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-2 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Pre - Construction
Kick Off Meeting
Estimated
Submit
time for
Questions
EACH
14 Days in
Section
Advance
Low Voltage System General
2.
Section 27 0000
15
Requirements
3.
Section 27 2000
Data and Voice Infrastructure
30
1 E. Applicable Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
2 following standards:
3 1. International Building Code (latest edition).
4 2. International Fire Code (latest edition).
5 3. NEC (National Electrical Code) (latest edition).
6 4. Telecommunications Architectural Standards - In Washington State Government (latest
7 edition).
8 5. ANSI -J- STD -607 -A Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
9 Telecommunications.
10 F. EACH Installing Vendor for their Section shall possess a current and valid Washington State 06
11 Electrical Low Voltage License.
12 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
13 A. Device or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings represents the intent of the system. If
14 additional equipment (that may not be shown) is required to make a fully functional system, then
15 provide such equipment as required.
16 B. Each specification section that is governed by these specifications shall be provided, installed,
17 commissioned, and warranted by a local Installing Vendor that meet the following requirements
18 for the equipment manufacturer that is being submitted for:
19 1. All equipment for EACH Specification Section shall be provided and installed by a single
20 supplier.
21 2. Have installed a minimum of three (3) Systems within the past five (5) years.
22 3. Maintain a 24 hour emergency service program using Manufacturer Trained technicians,
23 shall respond to service calls within 24 hours during and after the warranty period.
24 4. The Installing Vendor shall be Manufacturer Approved to purchase the equipment, have a
25 local office staffed with Manufacturer Certified installers that are capable to maintain,
26 service, and warrant the equipment being installed, who are full -time employees and are
27 capable of programming, testing, inspecting, maintaining, warranting, inventorying parts for
28 the life of the system, and shall be located within a 100 -mile radius of the project site.
29 5. Offices that require staff from another "Branch Office and /or Company Office" outside of
30 this radius, are not acceptable.
31 C. Prior to completion of the installation, the Installing Vendor shall provide:
32 1. A preventative maintenance agreement, which shall at the Owners option, become
33 effective at the end of the warranty period.
34 2. A proposal for off -site monitoring services (for systems that are applicable).
35 1.04 DOMESTIC PRODUCTS
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-2 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
A. Products shall comply with the requirements of the "Buy American Act - Construction Materials
Under Trade Agreements ", current adopted edition.
1.05 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. In addition to the "Substantial Completion" requirements, when applied to EACH of the
specification sections identified in "Scope and Related Documents" listed elsewhere in this
specification, this shall be defined as follows;
1. The stage in the progress of the Work, where the Work or designated portion is sufficiently
complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Owner can utilize the
Work for its intended use.
2. ALL of the requirements listed in "Testing & Complete System Functionality" shall be met.
Once all conditions have been met, this shall be deemed Substantial Completion. These
requirements shall be completed on or before the Substantial Completion date listed in the
Contract Documents.
1.06 DOCUMENTATION
A. Document Format:
1. All documents shall be generated on a PC. Provide these documents electronically, with
the As -built Documentation, where applicable.
a. Data sheets, installation manuals, technical documents, brochures, and user manuals
may be in PDF format.
b. Power Point Presentation(s) shall be in MS -Power Point.
c. Test Forms and other project specific documents shall be in an editable format, either
MS -Word or MS- Excel.
d. Drawings and details shall be in AutoCADTm 2004 or newer.
24 1.07 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
A. Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be provided for EACH Low Voltage System Specification
Section Number and shall contain, but not be limited to the items listed below:
B. Submittals — Prior to installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor /Contractor shall provide
the Architect with seven (7) copies of submittals for approval. Provide the following:
1. A complete materials list of the quantity of each device, the manufacturer, model number,
and description of the equipment for each individual system component or device that will
be provided. This list shall precede the data sheets.
a. Each System component or device data sheet shall have and indicating arrow next to
each component or device that is being submitted.
C. Additional Shop Drawing Requirements:
1. For additional shop drawing requirements, refer to EACH Low Voltage System
Specification Section Number, in addition to what is listed below.
D. Shop Drawings — Prior to installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor /Contractor shall
provide the Architect with seven (7) copies of submittals for approval.
1. Shop Drawing Requirements: The Installing Vendors Complete and Full Size set of Shop
Drawings shall be issued in the following format:
a. They shall be clear and legible.
b. The same sheet size as the Contract Drawings (i.e. 30" x 42 ").
c. A minimum of 1/8" text height shall be used for all text, symbol text, and subscript text.
d. Scale of Drawings:
1. Site Plan Drawings shall be the same scale as issued in the Contract
Documents.
2. Floor Plan Drawings shall be 1/8 " =V -0 ", unless directed to do otherwise.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
270000-3
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
2
3
4
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
e. The Electrical Legend, Wire Legend, Load and Battery Calculations, Riser Diagram,
Sequence of Operation info, Wiring Details, and Mounting Details shall precede the
Site Plans and Floor Plans.
f. All sheets, including the cover, shall include a Title Block along the edge of each of
the drawings, that when the drawings are rolled up, the following information shall be
visible;
1. The System specific sheet number.
2. Project Name, specification Section Number and Section Title name.
3. Floor Name, area, and /or section of the building (use the name of the area and /or
floor description that is on the Contract Drawings).
g. Architectural information on the Contract Drawings, shall be included on the Installing
Vendor Shop Drawing, including, but not limited to; Match Lines, Grid Lines, Grid
Bubbles, Key Plan, and Enlarged Floor Plans.
h. Electrical information on the Contract Drawings shall be included on the Installing
Vendor Shop Drawing, including, but not limited to; all applicable General Notes and
applicable Construction Notes for each of the Floor Plans. Where Enlarged Plans are
shown on the Contract Drawings, include this in Installing Vendor Shop Drawings to
show the room and ALL equipment within the room, to help facilitate and coordinate
the installation of the Low Voltage equipment for all systems.
Cover Sheet: The first page of the shop drawings shall be a cover sheet to include the
following items;
a. Owners Project information:
1. Site Information
a. Name of site, address, city, and zip code of where the installation shall take
place.
b. Installing Vendors Project information:
1. Business name.
2. Local office address of the Installing Vendor.
3. Primary contact person name, phone number, and email address who is
responsible for the long -term management of the Owners System.
c. Provide a "Sheet Index ", which assigns a sheet number and unique name for each
sheet that is included in the shop drawing submittal package. As part of the sheet
index, list every sheet that is part of the system shop drawing package. On the left
side of the Sheet Index, provide two columns - "Included" and "Not Included ". Include
a check box, and provide a check in each box for all sheets that are included or not
included, in each submittal.
1. Each sheet shall have a System Specific Sheet Number, and shall match the
Contract Drawing sheet numbering system. (i.e. E4.02 shall be FA -4.02 [for Fire
Alarm], E4.02 shall be LAN -4.02 [for Local Area Network]).
Legend Information: From Left to Right, provide the following information for EACH device:
a. Use the symbol on the Legend of the contract drawings.
b. List the manufacturer's name.
c. List the manufacturer's model number.
Provide a logical description of the device.
a. Provide the back box requirements and related information. At a minimum, this shall
include;
1. The height, width, and depth of each required back box for each symbol on the
legend.
2. If the device is a back box or comes with a back box (IE: control panel, power
supply, enclosure, etc.) then provide the height, width, and depth of the
dimensions.
3. Indicate if this device back box is going to be installed flush, semi - flush, or
surface mounted.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
270000-4
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
5. Provide a Wire Legend listing the cable manufacturer, model number, cable rating, size of
conductors, quantity of conductors, and color of each conductor. Use the format in the
Sample "Wire Legend ", as it applies to each system (see the Sample at the end of this
specification). Provide a cable identification naming scheme (as defined within these
specifications).
a. The Wire Legend shall include the Cable Manufacturer and Model Number for EACH
of the following types of cables (as applicable to the project):
1. Conduit/Raceway Cable
2. Open Cabling
3. Wet Rated Cable
4. Aerial Rated Cable
5. EACH cable and EACH cable type shall have a different letter designation.
6. Load and Battery Calculations: For EACH control Panel, Power Supply, and /or Amplifier
for EACH System, at a minimum show the following Amp Draw, Circuit, and Battery
calculations;
a. The total Amp Draw load in stand by or non - active mode.
b. The total Amp Draw load with all devices active and in a maximum load condition.
c. Provide the spare power information that is available for future additional devices
and /or equipment.
1. Include the quantities of spare circuits that are available (where applicable).
d. Circuit calculations:
1. The quantity of each device per circuit.
2. The Amp Draw per device per circuit (where applicable [this is not applicable to
addressable devices that receive their power from an addressable data loop.
Simply include the maximum amount of devices than can be placed on each
addressable loop and the amount of addressable devices that are included on
each addressable loop for this project]).
3. The total Amp Draw load per circuit.
4. The cable length distance of each circuit.
5. The gauge size of wire used for each circuit.
6. The total line loss for each circuit.
7. Factor the line loss and Amp Draw to show the actual voltage available at the
end of each circuit (after the last device).
8. Include in the design layout, the requirements of "Spare Capacity" in Part 2 of this
specification (where applicable).
e. Battery Back Up:
1. All Batteries shall be sized to provide at least 20% spare capacity. Include this
information in all calculations.
2. For Fire Alarm, include all calculations that are required by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
f. Uninterruptible Power Supply(s) (UPS):
1. For systems that include a UPS, provide the maximum load (allowed by the UPS
manufacturer) that EACH UPS is capable of providing, and list each item and its
maximum load that will be connected to the UPS. Include the total load of all
equipment connected to the UPS, and list the spare capacity available.
7. Riser Diagram: Provide a System One -Line Riser Diagram that shows the entire system.
List the following:
a. List the head -end equipment and IP addressed devices. Show the connection to the
"Cloud" WAN, where applicable.
1. Show each location (the MDF and EACH designated IDF separately).
2. Show each cable types, sizes, and quantities between the MDF and each
designated IDF location.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
270000-5
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
0
N
10.
11
12.
13.
14.
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
3. Show EACH device in the MDF and each designated IDF location (Control
Panel, CPU, DVR, Server, Power Supply and Terminal Cabinet [where
applicable]) for each applicable system, the room name that each major system
component is located in, and show the connection to the headend equipment.
4. Show all field devices with their respective room names and /or room numbers
and connections to their associated equipment.
5. Show all field devices with their respective address point (where applicable).
For the Fire Alarm System ONLY, provide a detailed Sequence of Operation matrix that
meets or exceeds industry standards, and shows how the System will work. This includes,
but is not limited to:
a. All Inputs and /or Actions:
b. All Outputs and /or Controls:
Provide all Mounting Details and mounting heights for:
a. All head -end equipment.
b. Rack(s) (where applicable).
c. Device(s).
Detailed Wiring Information:
a. Show each individual conductor color for all wiring on the point -to -point wiring
diagrams for each device.
b. Show complete scale drawings of equipment, devices, wiring diagrams, and
terminations of:
1. Each Control Panel, CPU, DVR, etc.
2. Power Supply and /or amplifier
3. Rack equipment (where applicable).
4. EACH device type
5. EACH Terminal Cabinet (where applicable)
Rack Layout (where applicable).
a. Show the intended equipment layout within the Rack(s).
b. Show blank filler plates in spaces where equipment is not installed.
c. Indicate the rack unit size of each device or filler plate in the rack.
1. If rack equipment is installed on the rear side of the rack, show rear view of the
rack also.
The matrix as defined in the `System Device Naming Matrix' of each system specification
(where applicable).
On the shop drawings, include a letter signed by the System designer that is responsible
for the design depicted in the submittals and on the shop drawings. The letter shall state
that the equipment and shop drawings design conform to national, state, local codes as
adopted by the local authority having jurisdiction, and meet or exceed all of the
performance requirements as outlined in the specifications.
a. Designers shall provide the following:
1. Provide a "signature" line and signature of the designer.
2. Provide a "printed name" line, below [or to the right] of the signature line and the
printed name of the designer.
3. Provide a "date" line, below [or to the right] of the printed name line and date of
the design.
b. For Fire Alarm Shop Drawings, include the above information and the system shall be
designed by one of the following (provide a copy of the supporting documentation):
1. NICET Level III Certified Designer
2. Registered Professional Engineer.
Label and Labeling:
a. On the drawings, label each Rack, Control Panel, CPU, DVR, Power Supply(s), and
Terminal Cabinet(s) in a logical numeric sequence. (i.e. for Fire Alarm Power
Supplies, list them as FAPS -1, FAPS -2, etc).
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
270000-6
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 b. Cables: Generate an alpha- numeric label for each cable type and cable run.
2 c. For projects with multiple sites, all labeling shall be consistent for all sites.
3 15. Show floor plan layout of devices and the anticipated routing of cable runs in parallel with
4 all structural framing in a neat and orderly fashion.
5 16. EACH device at EACH location shall be shown on EACH floor plan. The cabling for EACH
6 device shall be shown from EACH device to the device that it shall be connected to. EACH
7 cable(s) shown on the floor plan shall be identified as described in the "Wire Legend"
8 portion listed within this specification.
9 a. Floor Plans: Show all system related devices and all equipment that the system
10 specific shop drawings will interface to, on each of the floor plans. Provide Cabling for
11 each device and the related wire type (as shown on the "Wire Legend ") shown for
12 each of the device(s). Where multiple devices are on the same circuit or an
13 addressable data cable is used, show all devices and their related cable(s).
14 17. EOL Supervision:
15 a. Indicate on the floor plan drawings where EACH of the End -Of -Line Resistor(s) is
16 located (where applicable).
17 18. Addressable Device information:
18 a. Show each device address next to each device (where applicable), and clearly
19 displaying this information so that it is not confusing as to which address belongs to
20 which device. For non - addressable devices that will be connected to an addressable
21 module, show the device address next to each device and the addressable module
22 that it will be connected to.
23 b. List the System Address Point(s) using a logical numbering sequence for the devices
24 on a single run.
25 c. Maintain the "Spare Capacity" requirements listed elsewhere in the specifications
26 (where applicable).
27 d. Include the complete Dip Switch and /or Rotary Addressing Scheme (used to set the
28 device address for each addressable point) on the drawings.
29 19. Illuminated Graphic Map(s) (where applicable) — Prior to ordering or installation of any
30 equipment, the Installing Vendor /Contractor shall obtain written approval by the Architect.
31 Provide the Architect with seven (7) copies of submittals for approval. These shall be
32 submitted with the Shop Drawings, but not be bound with the Shop Drawings submittal.
33 a. Provide the actual full size scale drawing and artwork that will be provided to the
34 Owner for a final product.
35 b. The Drawing submittal shall be in color.
36 20. All drawing submittals shall be a complete and full set of the system. If drawings are
37 required to be re- submitted, a full and complete set must be re- submitted. Partial system
38 drawing sets will be rejected and the Installing Vendor /Contractor shall reissue a full set of
39 drawings. Any re- submittal(s) shall be provided at the Installing Vendor /Contractors
40 expense.
41 21. The Installing Vendor /Contractor is responsible for assuring that the conduit size, wire
42 quantity, wire size, and wire type is suitable for the equipment supplied. The Installing
43 Vendor /Contractor shall review the proper installation method(s) for each type of
44 device /equipment with the manufacturer's representative, and the AHJ, Prior to Rough -In.
45 22. Provide shop drawings that are usable for trouble- shooting purposes showing
46 equipment/device locations, conduit routing, junction boxes and connection wiring of entire
47 system.
48 E. Contract drawings shall not be used as Shop Drawings.
49 F. The Shop Drawings shall be system specific. For example: only Fire Alarm equipment and
50 connections to other equipment that will be interfaced to the Fire Alarm, shall be shown on the
51 Fire Alarm drawings.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-7 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 G. Floor plans for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCADTM software.
2 These drawing files will be made available to the Installing Vendor /Contractor for development
3 of Shop Drawings and /or As Builts for a fee of $20.00 per sheet.
4 1.08 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS
A. If the requirements of this section, related sections or the Project Drawings exceed those of the
governing codes and regulations, then the requirements of this section, related sections, and
the Drawings shall govern. However, nothing in this section, related sections or the Drawings
shall be construed to permit work not forming to all governing codes and regulations.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS — CIVIL PLANS
10 A. The Installing Vendor /Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the
11 drawings, and shall consult the civil plans to determine site conditions in the various areas.
12 PART 2 PRODUCTS
iK�41[1Z■ Lyi I_1I =10 F-11 %
14 A. Provide all equipment as defined in each specification and on the drawings
15 B. All equipment, panels, power supplies, and devices shall be manufactured under the
16 appropriate category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the UL label.
17 C. All equipment for each system shall bear the UL label. Partial or pending listings shall not be
18 acceptable. It shall be the Installing Vendor's responsibility to insure that these requirements
19 are met, and replace any and all equipment up to and including the entire system, if these
20 requirements are not met.
21 D. EACH of the specified Low Voltage Systems identified in PART 1 of these specifications
22 including the design, devices and /or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings, represent that
23 based on various equipment manufacturers. Any changes resulting from differences between
24 the specified product and other manufacturers or substitute manufacturers, shall be the
25 responsibility of the Installing Vendor.
26 1. Substitutions of the specified equipment and /or supplier will be considered provided that
27 sufficient documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and
28 or supplier qualification meets the requirement of these specifications. Any request for
29 substitution shall be submitted by the Installing Vendor in writing so as to be received by
30 the Architect not later than (10) days prior to the bid due date. Equipment that is approved
31 by the Engineer will be issued by addendum prior to the bid date.
32 E. Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined.
33 2.02 CONDITION OF MATERIAL
34 A. All equipment shall be new, in un- opened boxes, and be the most current model available for
35 each component and /or device that is provided for this project. For products that use firmware,
36 the most current version available shall be downloaded and installed at each component and /or
37 device, prior to any programming being performed. Outdated or used equipment, as
38 determined by the Architect, shall be removed and replaced by the Installing Vendor /Contractor
39 at no cost to the Owner.
40 B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers'
41 recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams,
42 schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation. All materials
43 shall be in working order as intended by the manufacturer, at the completion of the project.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-8 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2.03 WIRE GUARDS
2
A.
Provide at locations where designated on the drawings. Provide wire guards to protect the
3
device from damage. At a minimum, all field devices located in the Gymnasium(s) and
4
Multipurpose Room(s) shall have Wire Guards installed.
5
B.
Provide and install wire guards that are sized appropriately to protect each device at locations
6
indicated on the drawings, but will not interfere with the operation of any device, and that the
7
device shall operate as intended by the manufacturer after the wire guard has been installed.
8
C.
Wire guards shall be made using 7 gauge welded steel and be chrome plated.
9
1. Use Space Age Electronics, HSG Series or PSG Series, or approved equal. Size as
10
required.
11
2.04 TERMINAL CABINETS, TERMINAL STRIPS, AND ENCLOSURES
12
A.
On -Site System Information Binder and Enclosure: EACH Specification Section identified on
13
the first page of this specification shall have an Information Binder that shall be housed in a
14
System Information enclosure. The enclosure shall have a hinged door with the text "(Section
15
Title here) Information ", with each specific system name silk screened onto the enclosure
16
door, and shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories "UL" label. A "T- Turn" cam lock shall be
17
used to keep the enclosure door closed, and a key shall NOT be required to open the
18
enclosure. Use the following Space Age Electronics model number, or approved equal.
19
1. All Systems (other than Fire Alarm): Model # YD9048DBXAA. Verify with the Architect the
20
color of the enclosure(s) prior to ordering the enclosure. There shall be no additional
21
charge to the Owner, for changes to the color of the enclosure.
22
2. For the Fire Alarm: Model # YD9049DBXAA shall be Red in color, have a hinged door,
23
and have "Fire Alarm System Documentation" silk screened on the enclosure door.
24
B.
Terminal Cabinets (TC):
25
1. See EACH Specification for Terminal Cabinet requirements (where applicable).
26
C.
Terminal Strips:
27
1. See EACH Specification for Terminal Strip requirements (where applicable).
28
D.
Enclosures:
29
1. Each Systems Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), TC(s), and other metal enclosures shall
30
have the following:
31
a. Use key operated locks to secure the enclosure (keyed so that a single key can lock
32
and unlock all enclosure locks for the entire system), and provide ten (10) keys.
33
b. Use some form of wire management that uses permanently secured fasteners (no
34
double back tape), and uses reusable and adjustable Velcro style cable straps, which
35
shall be installed approximately every four inches within each enclosure.
36
2.05 LABELS AND LABELING
37
A.
The alpha- numeric labeling shall be developed by the Installing Vendor.
38
B.
Label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion of a sequential manner.
39
C.
The Installing Vendor proposed alpha- numeric labeling that is intended to be used to identify all
40
components of the system shall be submitted for approval by the engineer, with the submittal of
41
equipment data sheets.
42
D.
All labeling information shall be recorded on the as -built drawings and all test documents shall
43
reflect the appropriate labeling scheme.
2015 -19 /
YCS Ed Center TI 270000-9 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 E. Phenolic name plates shall be used for identification of the Racks, Control Panel(s), Power
2 Supply(s), Terminal Cabinet(s), and other appurtenances of each system in a logical numeric
3 sequence. Use an alpha- numeric name of each device for each location (created by the
4 Installing Vendor) to identify the equipment on the Shop Drawings.
5 1. The size of the plate shall be two- inches high by approximately eight- inches wide.
6 Different colors of backgrounds may be used for each System (but Red shall only be used
7 for Fire Alarm).
8 2. The text color shall be White Letters that are 3/4 -inch high and are 1/2 -inch in width.
9 F. Labeling of Cables must be provided in the following locations: EACH System Control Panel,
10 Power Supplies, Terminal Cabinets, Terminal Strips, Racks, other system related
11 appurtenances, and all junction boxes. Label all cables as shown on the Installing Vendors
12 Shop Drawings.
13 G. All label printing shall be machine generated using indelible ink ribbons or cartridges, self -
14 laminating labels shall be used on cable jackets, appropriately sized to the outside diameter of
15 the cable, and placed within view at the termination point on each end.
16 1. Temporary Labels: Shall consist of the following:
17 a. Using a fine point permanent style marker, Sharpie® or equivalent, to write directly
18 onto the outer jacket of the cable or use temporary tags.
19 b. The Installing Vendor /Contractor shall take all precautions to use care when pulling
20 the cable to insure the integrity of the temporary label.
21 c. Remove all temporary labels and tags, prior to installing the permanent label.
22 2. Permanent Labels: Labels shall be produced using an electronic labeler. Cabling shall be
23 marked with a permanent, electronic printed label with a self - laminating clear wrapping to
24 cover the printed label, and shall be secured to the outer jacket of the cable.
25 3. Provide Brady Model XSL- 116 -427 or approved equal.
26 2.06 SYSTEM CABLES
27 A. All cable(s) shall be new
28 B. All cable types shall be rated to meet all code requirements for site conditions, including, but not
29 limited to; underground, wet, plenum, and aerial requirements as mandated per N.E.C. and
30 local AHJ requirements. The Installing Vendor shall be responsible for insuring that all cables
31 meet all national codes, state codes, local codes, AHJ requirements, and each equipment
32 manufacturer's requirements, for a reliable, fully functional, and warrantable system, as
33 intended. Do not exceed the wiring distance limitation of the equipment, device(s), cable(s)
34 and /or conductor(s) as recommended by the manufacturer of either the equipment and /or the
35 cables for each installation application:
36 1. Use the manufacturer recommended cables for EACH application and as required by Code
37 (i.e. Raceway, Open Cabling, Wet and /or Aerial).
38 2. All cables shall be stranded, unless otherwise noted and /or recommended otherwise in
39 writing by the manufacturer.
40 a. CAT5 through CAT7 cables are excluded.
41 3. See PART 3 of this section, and of each System specification for more information.
42 2.07 PROOF OF DELIVERY FORM
43 A. When providing Equipment to the Owner, the Installing Vendor shall provide the following
44 transmittal document and obtain the necessary signatures.
45 1. The Installing Vendors Transmittal Document is defined as:
46 a. Company logo.
47 b. Name.
48 c. Address.
49 d. Telephone number.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-10 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 e. Delivery date.
2 f. Installing Vendors representative name that is making the delivery.
3 g. Quantity of each item.
4 h. Manufacturers Name and Model Number.
5 i. The exact same description of the device (as used on the shop drawings).
6 j. Provide a "signature" line for the Owners representative.
7 k. Provide a "printed name" line, for the Owners representative.
8 I. Provide a "date" line, below for the Owners representative.
PART 3 EXECUTION
10 3.01 WORK ENVIRONMENT
11
A.
General:
12
1. The Installing Vendor /Contractor shall have implemented an OSHA approved safety plan
13
at their place of business, and is a daily practice for all staff.
14
a. Avoiding an injury is the primary concern for this project. Use OSHA industry
15
standards to avoid accidents.
16
2. Coordination with Other Trades:
17
a. It is the responsibility of the Installing Vendor /Contractor to coordinate with all trades
18
for this project. Maintain all requirements for; project schedule deadlines, rough in,
19
installation, programming, training, and insuring that the Owner receives a fully
20
functional system as defined in this specification.
21
3.02 APPROVED EQUIPMENT AND PERMITS
22
A.
No equipment shall be delivered to the job site until shop drawings have been reviewed and
23
approved by the Architect.
24
B.
An approved set of shop drawings shall be continuously available at the job site during
25
construction, for review by the Architect.
26
C.
Obtain all permits as required, prior to installation of any equipment. They shall be continuously
27
available at the job site during construction, for review by the Architect.
28
3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION — GENERAL
29
A.
Open Cable installation methods are acceptable for this project when they are above accessible
30
ceilings or in attic spaces, provided that all requirements identified in this specification are met.
31
B.
All cable types shall be rated to meet all code requirements for site conditions, including, but not
32
limited to; underground, wet, and aerial requirements as mandated per N.E.C. and local
33
AHJ requirements.
34
C.
Do not exceed the wiring distance limitation of the equipment, device(s), cable(s) and /or
35
conductor(s) as recommended by the manufacturer of either equipment and /or cables for each
36
installation application. The Installing Vendor /Contractor shall be responsible for insuring that
37
all cables meet all equipment manufacturers' requirements for a reliable, fully functional, and
38
warrantable system, as intended.
39
D.
Wiring insulation shall be one of the types required by NEC 725 -16.
40
E.
Cable Supports: Clamps, "D- Rings ", "J- Hooks ", Hangers, and Velcro tie -wraps are all
41
acceptable ways to support cable. However, installation of these supports must be done with
42
care so as not to cause crushing or distortion of the cable, nor cause tighter bends than the
43
minimum radius permitted for each type cable.
44
1. See each specific Section requirements that shall be applied to this project in addition to
45
these requirements.
2015 -19 /
YCS Ed Center TI 270000-11 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 F. Allowable Cable Bend Radius and Pull Tension: In general, all cables cannot tolerate sharp
2 bends or excessive pull tension during installation. The minimum radius bend shall be ten (10)
3 times the cable outer diameter with no tensile load applied, and twenty (20) times the cable
4 outer diameter with a maximum tensile load of 25ft/lbs applied during installation. The Installing
5 Vendor /Contractor is responsible for maintaining the cable manufacturers Bend Radius and Pull
6 Tension at all times. Corrections to cable installation shall be made to the satisfaction of the
7 Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.
8 G. Service Loops and Cable Management:
9 1. Comb all wires for the duration of the cable run so they are neat, orderly, do not have
10 excessive slack, and are not tangled, prior to any service loop, continuing through any
11 service loop, continuing into EACH Enclosure(s) and /or System Rack(s).
12 a. Provide a 10' -0" service loop of EACH device cable (a minimum of 2' -0" above the
13 accessible ceiling (within 5' -0" of plan view) above EACH device.
14 b. For ceilings that are open to structure, do NOT provide a service loops, except for the
15 following locations;
16 1. MDF Rooms.
17 2. IDF Rooms.
18 3. Electrical Rooms.
19 4. Storage Rooms.
20 5. Designated system equipment locations that are NOT in view of the public.
21 6. Prior to rough -in, obtain Architects approval.
22 2. Cable Management shall be used to bundle all cables of like kind, separated by system
23 type.
24 3. See Systems Plywood Backboard Cabling, listed elsewhere in this specification for more
25 information.
26 H. The Installing Vendor /Contractor shall insure that communications cable is installed with care,
27 using techniques which prevent kinking, sharp bends, scraping, cutting, deforming the jacket, or
28 other damage. During inspection, evidence of such damage will result in the material being
29 declared unacceptable. The Installing Vendor /Contractor shall replace all unacceptable cabling
30 at no additional expense to the Owner.
31 I. The Installing Vendor /Contractor shall order and install the exact cables as specified on the
32 Installing Vendors Shop Drawings. If at any time during the installation and through the
33 warranty period, it is discovered that any cable other than what is called for on the Installing
34 Vendors drawings has been installed, the Installing Vendor /Contractor shall remove all effected
35 cables and shall provide and install the correct cable, as required. The Installing
36 Vendor /Contractor shall also provide the staff to monitor the building during the cable
37 replacement period until the System is fully operational to the satisfaction of the Architect,
38 without any additional cost to the Owner.
39 J. All horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 4' -0" intervals with UL approved
40 devices. At no point shall cables rest on, be tied to or otherwise secured to electrical conduit,
41 plumbing, ventilation ductwork, accessible ceiling and /or light fixture hangers, or any other
42 equipment. Cable shall be secured to building supports or wire hangers (at the structures
43 ceiling) specifically designed to support cables and /or to additional blocks or anchors
44 specifically installed for this purpose.
45 K. All open cabling and /or conduit shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the structure.
46 Open cable installations shall use insulated mounting supports or rings approved for such use.
47 Wiring shall be installed near or on structural members as to minimize risk of physical damage
48 by other trades or maintenance personnel servicing the equipment.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-12 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 L. Installing open cabling and /or conduit on an exposed area of wall that could have been installed
2 in a less conspicuous manner, especially where art or murals are to be painted is NOT
3 acceptable. Any installation that does not meet this requirement will be required to be removed,
4 and to patch and paint to match adjacent surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect. Then
5 install the conduit, fasteners, and wire as required by the project, at no additional cost to the
6 Owner in an acceptable manner that meets with the Architects approval. Obtain direction from
7 the Architect prior to rough -in, for areas that need clarification.
8 1. In some cases, it may be more aesthetically appealing to install conduit down the wall to
9 the floor and either through the floor or along the floor, to be less conspicuous. Contact the
10 Architect for further clarification.
11 M. Conduit type and areas where conduit will be required for this project are:
12 1. Provide EMT metal raceway in the following areas:
13 a. Always conceal conduits within walls and /or ceiling spaces wherever possible.
14 b. Where required by code. Provide conduit in all areas required by Code, but no less
15 than the following locations.
16 c. To Accessible ceiling spaces. Provide conduit from the device to accessible ceiling
17 space where:
18 1. Devices are wall mounted.
19 2. Are located on hard lid ceiling.
20 3. In an inaccessible area. An inaccessible area is defined as less than 2' -0" from
21 an accessible ceiling tile.
22 d. Unoccupied areas exposed to view. Unoccupied areas are defined as places that
23 staff or the public will be in the room or area for only a few minutes, with the exception
24 of service /maintenance personnel.
25 1. This includes, but is not limited to:
26 a. Mechanical rooms
27 b. Electrical rooms
28 c. Storage rooms
29 d. Utility Room
30 e. Janitorial Closet
31 f. Other unoccupied rooms
32 2. Install conduits to an accessible ceiling space, as defined above.
33 3. Consult with the Architect for further clarification.
34 2. Provide conduit, junction boxes, couplers, connectors, cabling and terminations as
35 recommended by the manufacturer and as required by code.
36 3. Fill Requirements: Conduit, conduit sleeves, raceways, floor boxes, device boxes, mud
37 rings, etc., shall be furnished and installed per the Division 26 requirements. Maintain all
38 Conduit Code Fill Requirements, and provide no less than an additional 40% spare
39 capacity for future growth.
40 4. Conduit and Raceway Usage: All communications cable shall be dedicated for
41 communications purposes, and not to be shared with other electrical wiring when required
42 by code. Obtain written approval from EACH of the manufacturers if more than one
43 system type is going to be installed in a single conduit.
44 a. Fire Alarm Cabling shall be in a separate, dedicated raceway (where indicated on the
45 drawings).
46 5. Pull Cords: Provide Nylon type pull cords in EACH Conduit raceway.
47 6. Provide surface mounted raceway in the following areas (For Retrofit/Remodels or as
48 directed by the drawings or Architect):
49 a. Occupied areas exposed to view. Occupied rooms. Generally, occupied areas are
50 defined as places that staff or the public will be in the room or area for more than a
51 few minutes.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-13 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Administrative areas.
b. Office space(s).
c. Other occupied rooms.
b. Install conduits to an accessible ceiling space, as defined above.
c. Size conduit(s) as required.
d. Consult with the Architect for further clarification.
7. Surface mounted conduits of any kind may only be installed after every attempt has been
made to conceal wiring and /or conduits specified within this document. Obtain prior
approval from the Architect, before installing surface -mount conduit.
8. Prior to installation, contact the Architect if these instructions are not clear, or field
conditions require further clarification of the intent of the installation.
N. Cable Lubricants: Lubrications specifically designed for installing cables may be used to reduce
pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. After installation, exposed cable
and other surfaces must be cleaned of lubricant residue.
1. Recommended Products:
a. Dyna -Blue.
b. American Polywater.
O. Horizontal Cabling:
1. Horizontal cable terminations shall be made at the appropriate patch panel and labeled as
noted on the Outlet Schedule. At each outlet box, a sufficient length of spare cable shall
be provided for terminating outlet devices such that the outlet can be easily removed and
inspected. In addition, each cable shall be terminated as indicated below:
a. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations
made in the TIA/EIA -568 -C document, manufacturer's recommendations and /or best
industry practices.
b. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than 4 times the
outside diameter of the cable.
c. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.
P. Systems Plywood Backboard Cabling:
1. Cable shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling, floor, or corners to insure that
adequate backboard space is available for current and future equipment and for cable
terminations. Cables shall NOT be tie - wrapped to existing electrical conduit, existing
cables, or other equipment. Minimum bend radius shall be observed.
2. Install cables via the shortest route directly to the nearest edge of the backboard from the
mounted equipment or block. Lace, Plastic or Velcro tie wrap all similarly routed cables
together, and attach to the outside edge(s) of the backboard vertically and /or horizontally,
then route via "square" corners over a path that will offer minimum obstruction to future
installations of equipment and /or other cables.
3. See "Service Loops and Cable Management" listed within this specification for additional
information.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
270000-14
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.04 SYSTEMS PLYWOOD BACK BOARD(S)
2
A.
Systems plywood back board(s) shall be used to mount enclosures of any kind, to any wall or
3
surface. The systems plywood backboard shall be securely fastened to the walls to
4
accommodate no less than ten times the total weight of the equipment to be mounted. The
5
systems plywood backboard shall be a minimum of 3/4 ", APA exterior grade Douglas Fir A -C,
6
and fire retardant with a flame spread rating not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM
7
E -84. Provide the systems plywood backboard from the floor up to ceiling height (not exceeding
8
12' -0 ") on all walls shown, unless otherwise noted. The entire backboard shall be painted with
9
three (3) coats of fire retardant paint (the color shall match the adjacent surface). EACH
10
enclosure, when mounted, shall bear a minimum of 150 pounds weight on the enclosure.
11
B.
Mounting of equipment shall be logically placed, and shall be located at the top, bottom, left, or
12
right portion of the systems plywood backboards to accommodate future growth of the system.
13
Under no circumstances will the equipment be allowed to be mounted in the middle of the
14
backboards.
15
3.05 GROUNDING
16
A.
Ground all equipment per the Manufacturers recommendations, per Division 26 and as required
17
by Code.
18
B.
Provide grounding and bonding per ANSI - STD -J- 607 -A.
19
C.
Provide (1) #3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1" conduit from the Main
20
Electrical Room MDB Ground Busbar to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) Telecommunication
21
Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB).
22
D.
Provide (1) #3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1" conduit between the MDF
23
Room TMGB and EACH designated Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) location shown on
24
the drawings and terminate on the Telecommunication Grounding Busbar (TGB).
25
E.
Provide (1) #3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1" conduit between the EACH
26
designated Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) location shown on the drawings and terminate
27
on the Telecommunication Grounding Busbar (TGB).
28 F. See Section 27 2000 "TMGB and TGB (Telecommunication Grounding Busbars)" for additional
29 Grounding requirements.
30 3.06 DEVICE RELOCATIONS
31 A. Device location may be changed prior to installation, within 15' -0" without extra charge, if so
32 desired by the Architect.
33 3.07 INSTALLATION
34 A. Provide all equipment, wiring, conduit, and outlet boxes required for the installation of a
35 complete, fully functioning, operating system in accordance with applicable local, state, national
36 codes, AHJ requirements, the manufacturer's recommendations, these plans and specifications.
37 All circuits not in conduit must be wired with UL listed power limited cable under NEC 725,
38 Class II wiring. Plenum cable shall be utilized in all return air plenum ceilings.
39 1. Color coded wires shall be used throughout.
40 2. Wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code Article 725.
41 B. Provide 120vac wiring and connections to the Control Panel(s), EACH Amplifier(s), CPU(s),
42 DVR(s), and Power Supply(s) as required for a fully functional system, while maintaining all of
43 the design requirements described elsewhere within each system specifications. At a minimum,
44 this shall include the following;
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-15 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1. Multiple Power Supplies and /or the Control Panel(s) may be placed on the same circuit,
2 while maintaining all code mandated load calculations, but shall be on circuit(s) that is
3 dedicated for EACH System.
4 a. Consult with the Architect to verify load calculations meet all code requirements.
5 b. Install 120 VAC wiring and conduit as specified in Division 26.
6 c. Show on the As -Built drawings, the location of each panel board that is being used to
7 power any System equipment, and list each panelboard circuit for each system (at the
8 panel board). (i.e. Panelboard "x ", circuit 12= FAPS -3; Circuit 14= IACP.)
9 C. Maintain all fire wall ratings, as required
10
D.
Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely
11
coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
12
E.
EACH manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on -site supervision of the
13
installation for EACH of the systems equipment for the duration of the project. This includes
14
programming, training, and the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it
15
was designed.
16
F.
Install wire guards at locations as shown on the drawings and as described elsewhere within
17
these specifications.
18
G.
Every attempt shall be made to avoid running telecommunications close to (less than 2' -0 ")
19
and /or parallel to other communication cables in the building, all lighting, and conduits
20
containing 120vac (or greater). This shall be to avoid interference with any other service or
21
system, operation, or maintenance purposes such as access boxes, ventilation- mixing boxes,
22
access hatches to air filters, switch or electrical outlets, electrical panels, fire alarm equipment,
23
clock systems, and lighting fixtures. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above or below any
24
conduit and /or riser. Route cables in such a manner to allow other cables to enter the conduit
25
and /or riser without difficulty at a later time by maintaining maximum distance from these
26
openings. Maintain all recommended distances from other cables, as required by the
27
manufacturer. Install cable to whichever of these two requirements are more stringent.
28
H.
Room numbers shown on plans are architectural designs numbers for construction purposes.
29
These numbers are NOT to be used for programming. Final system programming shall reflect
30
the final room numbering plan and actual room signage, unless directed to otherwise in writing
31
or as specified in another specification section. Update the As -Built Drawings to reflect the final
32
room numbering plan and actual room signage.
33
3.08 MOUNTING HEIGHTS, LOCATIONS, AND SETTINGS
34
A.
Install all equipment as recommended by the Manufacturer.
35
B.
The installation of EACH device, enclosure, and /or control panel shall be installed so that the
36
Maintenance Staff will be able to access, test and /or replace any component of the system. If
37
this installation does not meet this requirement to the satisfaction of the Architect, it will not be
38
accepted. The Installing Vendor /Contractor shall be required to remove the item, patch and
39
paint the area to the satisfaction of the Architect, and reinstall the device, enclosure, or control
40
panel as required to make the system easily maintainable and acceptable, at no additional cost
41
to the Owner.
42
C.
Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), and Locations:
43
1. Mount Control Panel(s), Power Supplies, and Enclosures (provide quantities as required)
44
with approximately two inches of separation between the enclosures.
45
2. Each enclosure, when mounted, shall meet the following criteria;
46
a. Conduit shall not enter any enclosure or panel, except where conduit entry is
47
approved by the manufacturer.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-16 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 b. Chase nipple the enclosures together. At a minimum, use two (2) 1'/2" conduits. Size
2 and /or provide additional conduits as required. Provide conduits between enclosures
3 to accommodate an additional 100% conduit fill while maintaining all NEC
4 requirements. Avoid installing chase nipples where batteries are to be installed
5 (contact the manufacturer and /or the Installing Vendor prior to drilling any holes). Any
6 chase nipples installed where batteries are to be located will be rejected, and require
7 the reinstallation as specified, up to and including installing new enclosures.
8 c. The bottom of the chase nipples shall be a minimum of two- inches above the location
9 where any batteries are to be installed.
10 d. EACH enclosure door shall be able to open no less than 105°.
11 e. The top of each enclosure shall be mounted at the same height of 60- inches above
12 the finished floor and shall be level.
13 f. If changes to the above requirements are preferred, contact the Architect for approval
14 prior to rough -in.
15 D. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling /floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in
16 place (IE: devices shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and
17 supports shall be able to support the no less than four times the weight of the equipment and /or
18 device.
19 E. Rack Equipment: EACH Rack shall be securely attached to the floor and /or wall using the
20 manufacturer's recommended mounting hardware.
21 F. See each system specification for additional mounting information.
22 3.09 FLUSH MOUNT AND SURFACE MOUNT EQUIPMENT AND ENCLOSURE LOCATIONS
23 A. Prior to rough -in, consult the Architect for clarification for Flush Mount and Surface Mount
24 locations.
25 B. Flush mounted equipment and enclosures shall be installed in areas where the rooms are
26 finished such as Administrative Areas, Offices, Work Rooms, Break Room and Corridors.
27 Provide the appropriate finish work around each enclosure as required. This type of equipment
28 includes, but is not limited to the following:
29 1. Enclosures: Typically are Control Panels, Power Supplies, etc.
30 a. Provide the manufacturers flush mount Trim Rings, Adapters, and /or Brackets for this
31 type of equipment.
32 C. Surface mounted equipment and enclosure shall be installed in areas where the rooms are
33 NOT finished such as Electrical Rooms, MDF /IDF Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, or Utility Rooms.
34 Unless otherwise noted, this equipment shall be installed on the Systems Plywood Back
35 Boards. This type of equipment includes, but is not limited to the following:
36 1. Enclosures: Typically are Control Panels, Power Supplies, etc.
37 2. Punch Blocks: Typically are used with Telephone PBX and Intercom equipment.
38 3. Wall Mounted and Floor Mounted Racks.
39 3.10 NUMBERING AND LABELING
40 A. Phenolic Plates:
41 1. Install phenolic plates at each of the Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), Terminal
42 Cabinet(s), and Rack(s).
43 a. All phenolic plates shall be secured to each enclosure with rivets.
44 b. Install each plate 1" from the top of the enclosure, and be centered on the door.
45 Relocate as required to avoid interfering with equipment or components within the
46 enclosure or that may prevent the enclosure door from closing properly. The location
47 of the phenolic plates shall be consistently installed in the same location on each
48 system enclosure, at EACH location.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-17 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
B. Terminal Cabinets:
2
1.
Label each termination point on the inside of EACH enclosure door. All information shall
3
be legible, as defined by the Architect.
4
C. Addressable Devices /Address Point Labels (where applicable):
5
1.
Install the Address Label for each addressable device on or near the device. Verify with
6
the Architect, prior to installation.
7
2.
Clean the surface from dust, grease, or lubricants as recommended by the manufacturer of
8
the label.
9
3.
The addressable label shall be able to be viewed by the general public when standing on
10
the ground.
11
a. Prior to Installation, coordinate with the Owner's Representative for exact location of
12
how and /or where to mount the address label for EACH device type to fulfill this
13
requirement, prior to installation.
14
4.
Provide the following address label format:
15
a. The background shall be clear (see through).
16
b. The text shall be Black in color, and a minimum of '/2" tall.
17
c. Use Brothers or P -Touch models to produce the label.
18 3.11 WIRING
19 A. For consistency of wiring throughout the entire system equipment, if specific conductor colors
20 are not called out in EACH system specification, then the following colors shall apply:
21 1. Red is ( +) Positive voltage or data bus ( +) positive.
22 2. Black is ( -) Negative voltage or data bus ( -) negative.
23 3. White is common.
24 4. Green is normally open or normally closed.
25 B. Wiring within EACH enclosure shall have the outer jacket of the cable removed to within three -
26 inches of the cable entering the enclosure. Individual conductors from each jacketed cable
27 shall be spirally twisted to keep them together, until they are routed into each appropriate
28 individual terminal. Route all conductors parallel with the walls of the enclosure, make 90° turns
29 within the enclosure, and always keep a two -inch minimum spacing from any circuit board
30 and /or terminals.
31 1. Labeling of Cables.
32 a. Prior to installing any label, clean each cable with the appropriate cleaner to remove
33 any pulling compound residue, grease, oil, dirt, etc. in order for the label to properly
34 adhere to the cable jacket.
35 b. The Label shall indicate the Device or Outlet and the area or wing of the building that
36 the cable is being routed from. The Label shall also indicate the MDF Room or
37 designated IDF location that the cable is being routed to.
38 c. Each label shall be located on each cable that enters any enclosure or junction box,
39 and shall be easily visible and readable.
40 d. The cable numbering system shall be consistent with shop drawings.
41 C. End -of -Line (EOL) Resistors: Each device that is capable of being supervised by the Control
42 Panel and /or Power Supply shall be supervised. Install equipment and /or program as required.
43 1. Indicate on the As -Built drawings where EACH of the End -Of -Line Resistors is located.
44 2. Each End -of -Line Resistor shall be installed at the last device on each circuit. Locating the
45 EOL in the Control Panel and /or Power Supply is NOT acceptable.
46 D. The telephone dialer connections and Ethernet WAN connections shall be made by the
47 Installing Vendor. Coordinate with the Owner for scheduling the Owners IT Department to
48 supervise all terminations and connections.
49 E. All wiring routed under slab or underground shall be suitable for wet locations.
2015-19/ YCS Ed Center TI 270000-18 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 F. The Installing Vendor /Contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of
2 EACH enclosure after completion of the installation, and prior to any testing being performed.
3 G. All circuits shall be identified in accordance with table below and all labels shall include wire
4 type, quantity and circuit number. Wire code shall match approved shop drawings wire code.
5 Table
6
Example: C2HX3
7
C = Signal Circuit Wire
8
2 = Signal circuit number
9
H = LCD Keypad wire
10
X = Addressable initiating device circuit wire
11
3 = Addressable initiating device circuit number
12 3.12 SPLICE CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS
13 A. All references to splices are for cables that are 50 volts or less
14 B. A continuous cable run without any splices is the preferred method. When a splice is required
15 the following information shall apply.
16 1. Cable splices are only allowed in accessible, dry locations, in a junction box or terminal
17 cabinet suitable for the purpose. The only exception is for field devices that have wire
18 leads (i.e. Pigtail) and require a connection of two wires at the device.
19 a. Each cable end that is spliced must be labeled, as specified. (i.e.: At the splice point,
20 "From FACP in MDF Room XXX" on one cable, and "To the East Wing RCAP" on the
21 other cable).
22 C. All splices shall be performed in one of the following methods:
23 1. Wire nuts shall NOT be used on this installation, will be deemed unacceptable, and shall
24 be removed and installed as outlined below.
25 2. In Junction Boxes:
26 a. Either one of the following Splice Methods are acceptable:
27 1. Use the Tool -less Terminal Strip, Model Number SS000470 (Black) or
28 SS000471 (White), and SS000465 (the Back Box Bracket) for use with extra
29 deep 4S boxes. This equipment is manufactured by Space Age Electronics.
30 2. Use Model DC -100 -S Blue Dolphin Connectors (with Sealant), Manufactured by
31 Dolphin Components Corporation, on all splice connections that are size 18
32 gauge or less. The rubber coated outer jacket of the inch -long connector shall
33 contain non - curing sealant that fills the crimp cavity when crimped. Strip the
34 color coded outer jacket of each individual conductor that is going to be crimped,
35 approximately 1/8-inch shorter than the length of the crimp connector, so that
36 when the conductors are inserted all of the way in the connector, no bare wires
37 (or any strands of wire) are exposed or visible out of the connector.
38 3. In Terminal Cabinets:
39 a. In Terminal Cabinet(s) with each conductor to be landed on a separate terminal.
40 b. Indicate on the Shop Drawings and As- Builts, the locations of EACH Terminal
41 Cabinet.
42 c. Maintain the "Spare Capacity" requirements, as specified.
43 4. At Field Devices (where the device has wire leads and not a terminal strip).
44 a. Use Model DC-1 00-S Blue Dolphin Connectors as described above.
45 5. Spare or unused conductors shall be:
46 a. Landed on terminal strips.
47 b. Shall have the Blue Dolphin Connectors crimped on the end of each conductor.
48 1. Field devices with pigtails shall have a Blue Dolphin Connectors crimped on the
49 end of any unused conductor(s).
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-19 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 D. All conductors, if spliced, shall be ONLY spliced to the same gauge size and color of conductor.
2 Changing of gauge size or color at any point within any cable run is strictly prohibited, and all
3 cables will be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner, and to the satisfaction of the
4 Architect.
5 1. If the field device has wire leads, then wire as necessary at the device for proper operation.
6 Indicate the color code change on the shop drawings per point wiring diagrams. Update
7 any and all changes to the drawings, for accurate as- builts.
8 3.13 ON -SITE SYSTEM INFORMATION BINDER ENCLOSURE
9 A. The Installing Vendor shall install the wall mount enclosure that is labeled "(Section Title here)
10 information ". The enclosure shall be located in the administrative area or the MDF room. Verify
11 the exact location with the Architect, prior to installation.
12 B. The enclosure shall have a Site specific manual, in a "D" style 3 -ring binder with an 18 -inch
13 heavy -duty chain securely fastened to the inside of the enclosure.
14 C. See "As -Built Documentation" for more information.
15 3.14 TESTING & COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY (SPECIFICALLY FOR THE FIRE ALARM
16 SYSTEM ONLY)
17 A. The installing vendor shall notify the Architect a minimum of five (5) business days in advance
18 of testing.
19 B. The warranty shall NOT begin until the following conditions have been met:
20 1. Fire Alarm System Testing:
21 a. The Installing Vendor shall provide two -way communication devices for their own
22 staff, each Owners Representative, and the Architect, so that all parties can
23 communicate as required to perform all tests.
24 b. Completely fill out the 2007 Edition NFPA Fire Alarm System Record of Completion
25 document.
26 c. Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Record
27 of Completion.
28 d. Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Fire
29 Alarm Permit.
30 e. If the Installing Vendor fails the Fire Marshal Inspection, the following shall occur;
31 1. The Installing Vendor shall make all of the necessary corrections as required, to
32 pass the AHJ testing and inspection. Then, notify the AHJ and schedule another
33 test, and continue making corrections until the Fire Alarm System has been
34 accepted by the AHJ.
35 f. The Installing Vendor is subject to the Close Out requirements as specified in Section
36 20 00 00, Schedule of Values.
37 2. As- builts:
38 a. Refer to the "As -Built Documentation" of this specification for more information.
39 3. Training:
40 a. Refer to Section 28 3100 for the Training Requirements as described in "Training
41 Materials ".
42 4. Complete System Functionality:
43 a. After ALL the above conditions have been met, and includes each of the required
44 signatures, this shall then be deemed that the Owners ability to use the Complete
45 System Functionality as it was designed.
46 5. Warranty:
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-20 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
_111
42
43
44
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
The Warranty period shall now begin, and the initiating date of the Warranty period
shall commence on the date of the Owners ability to use the Complete System
Functionality as it was designed. Refer to the "Warranty" of this specification for more
information.
C. Upon completion of the installation, testing, and Instruction & Training, the Installing Vendor
shall provide the following Signed Test Forms, in the as -built documentation as required.
1. The signed original Record of Completion
2. The signed original Fire Alarm Permit
3.15 TESTING & COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY (SPECIFICALLY FOR AUDIOVISUAL
SYSTEMS)
A. Electronic System Testing:
1. After all equipment specified herein for the system has been completely fabricated and
wired and is in operating condition in the Sound System Installing Vendor's shop,
performance tests shall be conducted by the Sound System Installing Vendor on the
system to determine if the installation and components comply with these specifications.
2. The following test shall be performed and the system shall be made to meet each listed
performance criterion:
3. Overall frequency response of the complete electronic system (unequalized) shall be 20 to
20,000 Hz +2 dB. Equalizing circuits shall be temporarily set in the indicated "flat" position.
4. Total harmonic distortion from microphone input to power amplifier output at rated power
shall be less than 1 % for the frequency range of 20 to 20,000 Hz
5. The overall broadband hum and noise from 20 Hz to 20 kHz using 6 dB /octave filter at
12.47 kHz shall be at least 65 dB below the rated output from system input to output.
6. The total system shall be installed from microphone to loudspeaker in Absolute Polarity. A
positive pressure on the microphone shall produce a positive pressure from the
loudspeaker.
B. Acoustical Testing:
1. After all electronic equipment specified herein is fully installed at the job site and the
speakers are fully installed, the system shall be equalized and acoustically tested by the
Sound System Installing Vendor utilizing the Real Time testing technique. Personnel, test
equipment, complete report, and signing shall be as described.
2. The speakers shall be oriented and sound levels set to provide an even distribution of the
Sound Field frequency response of 250 to 10,000 Hz throughout the seating area.
3. Provide equalization to DSP (when applicable) to attain frequency response that is within
+3 dB from 100 to 10,000 Hz with a 6 dB roll off below 80 Hz and above 12,500 Hz, at any
seat in the audience covered by the loudspeakers.
4. The system shall deliver a minimum of 85 dB average program level with additional 10 dB
peaking margin to any seat in the audience at distortion level below 1 % THD over the
specified frequency range.
3.16 TESTING & COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY (FOR ALL SYSTEMS THAT IDENTIFY THIS
TESTING REQUIREMENT)
A. The warranty shall NOT begin until the following conditions have been met:
1. Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Permit(s) and
other required documentation. Provide this documentation with the As -Built documents.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
270000-21
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2. The Installing Vendor shall provide a copy of the (Section Number and Section Title here)
2 - Operational Test Form has been performed and submitted to the Architect for review.
3 The purpose of this document is to show that the Installing Vendor has in fact performed a
4 complete test. In some cases, every device may not pass the test. This shall serve as the
5 Installing Vendors own punch list, to make corrections prior to the Acceptance Test. This
6 must be completely filled out, and have an original signature of the representative of the
7 Installing Vendor. Allow for a minimum of ten (10) business days for the Architect to review
8 this document.
9 3. After the Architects review of the System Operational Test Form, the Architect will discuss
10 the results of the test with the Installing Vendor.
11 4. The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Architect to witness Performance Test.
12 Allow for a minimum of ten (10) business days to schedule this testing.
13 5. System Testing:
14 a. The Installing Vendor shall provide two -way communication devices for their own
15 staff, each Owners Representative, and the Architect, so that all parties can
16 communicate as required to perform all tests.
17 b. The Installing Vendor shall demonstrate the testing of each device, to the Owners
18 Representative and the Architect, and document this information on the (Section
19 Number and Section Title here) - Performance Test Form.
20 c. Upon the completion and passing the Performance Test with 100% positive results,
21 the Acceptance Test form shall be signed by the Installing Vendor, the Owners
22 Representative, and the Architect.
23 1. If the Installing Vendor fails this test by NOT passing the test with 100% positive
24 results, the following shall occur;
25 2. The Installing Vendor shall make all of the necessary corrections to provide
26 100% positive results.
27 3. The Installing Vendor shall document the corrective action taken for each item
28 that failed the Test, and submit to the Architect for review. Upon approval by the
29 Architect, the Acceptance Test shall be rescheduled.
30 4. The Installing Vendor is subject to the Close Out requirements as specified in
31 Section 20 0000, Schedule of Values.
32 6. As- builts:
33 a. Refer to the "As -Built Documentation" of this specification for more information.
34 7. Training:
35 a. Refer to EACH specific Section for the Training Requirements as described in
36 "Training Materials and Programming Survey ".
37 8. Complete System Functionality:
38 a. After ALL the above conditions have been met as deemed by a "Pass" on the
39 Governing Acceptance Form - (Section Name and Section Title here), all training has
40 been completed, and the required signatures have been acquired, this shall then be
41 deemed that the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it was
42 designed.
43 9. Warranty:
44 a. The Warranty period shall now begin, and the initiating date of the Warranty period
45 shall commence on the date of the Owners ability to use the Complete System
46 Functionality as it was intended. Refer to the "Warranty" of this specification for more
47 information.
48 3.17 WARRANTY
49 A. See "Testing & Complete System Functionality ", listed elsewhere in these specifications, to
50 establish the requirements and confirm when the actual warranty period shall begin.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-22 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. The Installing Vendor shall include in the pricing of their bid that they will honor and provide
2 EACH of the manufacturers Full Term Warranty period for the provision of replacement
3 equipment for EACH individual device and /or component provided for this project. The
4 completed and fully functional System, including wiring, installation, and all equipment shall be
5 free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects. At a minimum, this shall be no less than
6 one (1) year from the date of Complete System Functionality as defined in "Testing & Complete
7 System Functionality" portion of this specification. Warranty service for the on -site replacement
8 of equipment shall be provided by the system supplier's Manufacturer trained representative
9 during normal working hours, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays, and respond for
10 service no later than the following business day after the call was received.
11 C. When the manufacturers warranty exceeds one year, the Installing Vendor shall be responsible
12 for replacing the actual component or device for the Full Duration of the manufacturer's
13 warranty, if the Owner or their representative chooses to take the item to the Installing Vendors
14 place of business. If the Owner chooses to have the Installing Vendor provide on -site service,
15 then the Installing Vendor is entitled to their standard published (or negotiated) labor rates and
16 miscellaneous material items to replace the damaged warranty item.
17 D. The Installing Vendor who is authorized to provide Warranty Service for this project is defined in
18 "Quality Assurance" located in Part 1 of this specification.
19 3.18 AS -BUILT DOCUMENTATION
20 A. The following documentation must be completed to the satisfaction of the Architect, in order to
21 fulfill the Close Out requirements as specified in Section 26 0000, Schedule of Values.
22 B. All electronic and hard copy information submitted to the Owner shall immediately become the
23 Owners property to use as best determined by the Owner, without any compensation to any
24 party.
25 C. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the
26 room number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings).
27 D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Installing Vendor /Contractor shall provide three (3)
28 sets of detailed Operation and Maintenance manuals in a "D" style 3 -ring binder. The binder
29 shall be sized to allow for 20% additional documentation. The spine of the binder shall have a
30 clear cover with an insert clearly typed with the following label " (Project Name, Section
31 Number, and Section Title here) Operation and Maintenance Manual ". The binder shall have a
32 clear front cover with an insert clearly typed with the title of the spine on the binder, located at
33 the top of the page, and centered. The following information shall also be included on the front
34 sheet of the binder; the Project Name and Project Number, Specification Section Number and
35 Section Title, the Owners name, the Site Name and Site Address, the Installing Vendors Name,
36 Address, and Contact Name. These O & M Manuals shall include the following;
37 1. Use color -coded numbered tabs to separate each item defined below and for each device
38 that was installed.
39 a. Provide these items in the following order.
40 1. Provide an 8'/2" x 11" clear heavy plastic sheet in front of a Table of Contents
41 page as the first page of the binder indicating each of the equipment or device
42 documents contained in each tab section.
43 2. The System Software User Guide.
44 3. The Web Server "Web- based" software User Guide.
45 4. The System Control Panel LCD Display User Guide.
46 5. The Remote LCD Display User Guide (Where Applicable).
47 a. Provide Step -By -Step instructions for typical Basic Operation of EACH
48 System.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-23 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
6. Warranty information. The Installing Vendor shall provide Warranty information
in the form of a matrix from left to right, list the following information:
a. Use the symbol on the Legend of the contract drawings.
b. List the actual manufacturer's name of each device shown on the Installing
Vendors shop drawings.
c. List the actual manufacturer's model number of each device shown on the
Installing Vendors shop drawings.
d. Provide the description of the device that is used for each symbol on the
legend.
e. On the matrix, indicate recommended testing frequency for each item.
f. State the Manufacturers Full Term of the Warranty for EACH control panel,
EACH power supply, and EACH device provided.
g. Indicate where the Owner may purchase each of these devices. Provide
the Business Name, Address, City, State, Zip Code, Phone Number, and list
two (2) contact names.
7. A reduced copy (11 "x17 ") of record drawings. Enlarge all notes, text, and
symbols to a legible (as defined by the Architect) reading format.
8. Provide one (1) original and two (2) copies of the "Spare Parts Proof of Delivery"
form that was signed by the Owners representative.
9. A printed copy of the final completed version of the (Section Number and
Section Title here) technical configuration and this document shall be dated.
10. A printed copy of the final completed version of the (Section Number and
Section Title here) software `point status report' (where applicable) and this
document shall be dated.
11. Update the matrix as defined in the `System Device Naming Matrix' for each
specification section, to correct any changes that may have occurred through the
course of this project. This list shall follow the above equipment list.
12. The technical date sheet for each Control Panel, Power Supply, Terminal
Cabinet, field device and component installed. Use a separate tab for each of
these that were supplied and /or installed.
a. Include all testing documentation and the procedure to properly test each
device. Put this document immediately behind the respective technical data
sheet.
b. Include the installation manual for each device that was installed. Put this
information immediately behind the testing documentation.
13. Provide one (1) original and two (2) copies of the AHJ approved document(s).
14. Provide one (1) original and two (2) copies of the completed documents:
a. The (Section Number, and Section Title here) - Operational Test Form.
b. The (Section Number, and Section Title here) - Performance Test Form.
c. The approved Governing Acceptance Form - (Section Number, and Section
Title here) .
d. If the Governing Acceptance Form has not been approved, accepted, and
signed by the Architect, this binder will be rejected.
15. Each binder shall not exceed three - inches in width. Use multiple binders as
required. Indicate Volume 1 of X, Volume 2 or X, etc.
16. Provide the above information on six (6) CD's and label each one (with a PC
generated label) "(Owners Name, Project Name, Section Number, Section Title,
and the current date goes here) - Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Data
Sheets, Documents, and As -Built Shop Drawings ". Organize the manuals, data
sheets, documents, and drawings into separate folders.
a. Include on EACH system CD provided, the AutoCAD As -Built Drawings,
located elsewhere in these specifications.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI
270000-24
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 b. EACH of the three (3) Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall have one
2 CD securely fastened inside.
3 c. Provide three (3) CD's for general As -Built documentation for the project.
4 E. On -Site System Information Binder: The Installing Vendor shall provide Individual Site Manual,
5 in a "D" style 3 -ring binder with an 18 -inch heavy -duty chain securely fastened to the inside of
6 the " (Section Title here) information" enclosure. See the "On -Site System Information Binder
7 Enclosure" listed elsewhere in these specifications, for the enclosure information and location.
8 The binder shall be sized to allow for 20% additional documentation. The spine of the binder
9 shall have a clear cover with an insert clearly typed with the following label " (Section Title
10 here) information ". The binder shall have a clear front cover with an insert clearly typed with
11 the title of the spine on the front sheet, located at the top of the page, and centered. The
12 following information shall also be included on the front sheet of the binder; the Project Name
13 and Project Number, Specification Section Number and Section Title, the Owners name, the
14 Site Name and Site Address, the Installing Vendors Name, Address, and Contact Name. Each
15 binder shall include the following;
16 1. Use color -coded numbered tabs to separate each item defined below and for each device
17 that was installed.
18 a. Provide these items in the following order.
19 1. Provide an 8'/2" x 11" clear heavy plastic sheet in front of a Table of Contents
20 page as the first page of the binder indicating each of the equipment or device
21 documents contained in each tab section.
22 b. The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Owner to obtain the information listed
23 below. A single sheet shall list the following items;
24 1. The Site Name and Site Address.
25 2. State "In case of emergency during regular business hours: (list the
26 appropriate name and telephone number) ". List the Owners Representative who
27 should be contacted during regular business hours.
28 3. State "In case of emergency after regular business hours: (list the
29 appropriate name and telephone number) ". List the Owners Representative who
30 should be contacted after regular business hours.
31 4. List the following information (where applicable). State "The monitoring of the
32 (Section Title here) is being monitored by (list the name of the central
33 monitoring station here), Phone Number: (list the central station phone number
34 here) Account # (enter the account number here) ".
35 c. Provide each of the items identified in the operation and Maintenance Manuals, with
36 the following exceptions. Do NOT provide:
37 1. Spare Parts Proof of Delivery form.
38 2. As -built Operation and Maintenance CD's of the project.
39 F. As -Built Drawings: The Installing Vendor shall provide three (3) sets of hard copy As -Built
40 drawings. Drawings shall be the same size that were issued for the shop drawings and clearly
41 indicates the following:
42 1. Update the Shop Drawings:
43 a. To address any changes, including but not limited to the Riser, point -to -point wiring
44 diagrams, and mounting details.
45 b. To accurately reflect the final installation of equipment and devices that were
46 relocated, added or removed.
47 c. Update the matrix as defined in the `System Device Naming Matrix' of the
48 specification, to correct any changes that may have occurred through the course of
49 this project.
50 d. Actual routing of all raceways.
51 e. Actual routing of all Open Cables.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-25 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18 G.
19
20 H.
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
f. Actual cable type, color, and numbers.
g. Actual splice locations.
h. Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, and interface of all components
in the system.
i. Provide scale drawings of the internal components of the main panel, and each power
supply. Show each circuit number coming from the terminals of each Control Panel
and /or Power Supply.
j. Actual room number and programming addresses (where applicable) for all
components in the system.
k. Show on the As -Built drawings the location of each panel board that is being used to
power any System equipment, and list each panel board circuit used (at the device
that is connected to that circuit. IE: FACP or FAPS).
I. Indicate on the As -Built drawings where EACH of the End -Of -Line Resistors is
located.
m. Provide all updated As -Built drawings in AutoCADTm 2004 format (or newer) and put
this electronic files on the Operation and Maintenance Manuals CD, as described
elsewhere in these specifications.
Provide all As -Built Documentation to the Architect prior to any Training and no less than ten
(10) business days prior to project completion.
Any re- submittal(s) shall be provided at the Installing Vendor /Contractors expense.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270000-26 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
2 Z
W O
}o
co Z
W U
H
J
> Z
LU
O0
J
r-
04
O
O
O
O
r—
N
W it
aLL a
(-)20-
LU
J
aLL
U �
0
LU
J
0
0 LU
0 �
aLU
LU
N
N
0-
�
N
N
0-
Cl) W 0 Q
U W 0 Q
H
LL
LL
LL
H Cl) LL 0
H co LL 0
z
W
CL
O
0
C4
C4
C4
N
U O
� J
pO
Z U
Ow
U O
LL
2
LU It
as
Z
y W
U a
c0
J
W
cc
U) LL I
m
aLL
U �
0
0
0
LU
LU D �j
O H
W
Z 0
J
Z 0
J
Z 0
> J
Z 0
> J
Z 0
> J
Z 0
> J
D
J
J - Z
Fj Q
ui
_j Z
U WJ Q
U
a
H
H Cl)
H Cl)
H Cl)
H Cl)
H co
H co
H co
H Cl) LL 0
H co LL 0
Z
O
U
W
J
}
�
zC
!
N
N
NNNNN
W
U
H �
OU
H
H
J
O
J
O
�
Z
O
Q
m
�
Q
m
�
of
�
>_
>
�
>=
>
Q
m
}
Q
m
}
Q
m
0
0
0
ZO
O
+
+
m
+
m
+
+
+
+
W
W
Of
U
W
J
co
W
J
co O
W
co
LU
Co O
Q
Q
O
O
W
O
z
C
C7i
O
Of
O _j
Of
O
F- (D
O _j
F- (D
O
_j
of
0
Cl)
(nzH
Cl) F--
Cl) H
ZZF
zzH
�H
WH
W H
U
W H5
Of Q
WHD
� Q
�0
z
�0
z
WHO
> Q
LLI��
> Q
C)
D
Y0
YD
U
D~
U
D~
U
0
v
0
U
0~
U
0~
U
U
0--
U
0 Of
LL
QzU
QzU
=U
=U
C)
Uz5
NU
co C)
co C)
w
W
H
LUH
Q
m
U
o
W
LL
2 Z
W O
}o
co Z
W U
H
J
> Z
LU
O0
J
r-
04
O
O
O
O
r—
N
d
E
N
O
L
CL
E
N
H
N
d
U
i
O
U
LL
N N
o
z
N v
O L
Oa
U
CO
o
� C7
7 U
E�
O N
U Y
E .L
LU
z
0
H
U
LL
N
LL
0
a
z
W
co
2
LU
}
co
LU
Q
H
J
O
O
J
co
N
O
O
O
O
r—
N
i
i
A
n
n
W
aLLa
U 2 a
w
m C7
aU LL
�
W
J
Pco
� L_
�
w U_ J
LU
M
I
H
LL
H
a
LU
U
ao Ir
_
a
-i
-
z
H
LL
H Cl) LL 0
— H Cl) LL 0
LL
LL
W
LU
p
O
z
('1
N
N
V
LL
LU
m
v
ao
ao
v
v
a
U)
a
U
W
00
O
J
p O
a
z U
p
pa
°0
LL
2
W It
J �
p
as
Z
y w
U a
a0
LU
RJ
W
FLU
mw
aLL
U �
0
0
0
0
z0
LU LU
�°�z
W
LU°�z
z0
z0
O
LU
Lu
Lu
:)
}
=0
.0 of
'oo3:=oi
=0
=0
p
H
HCl)
HCl) LL 0
HCl) LL 0
H co
HCl)
z
O
U
W
J
>.
�
zC!
N
N
N
U
c0 c0
V
V
0�0
0�0
V
V
V
V
W
LU
LU
U
H
00
p J
Z>
Y
W
J
0
Z
W
J
0
Z
w
w
p
00
z U
> uW
O
U
Q
0
W
p
p
0-
Q
0
Q
�
LU
mm
C0
O
O
U)
p OUO
+
+
+
w
U
0
O
>
>
Cl)
z
U
z
Q
U
Cl) of
U
Cl) of
J
O
H
LL
0
U
z—
z U
QW
z U
QW
O
of —
U
WD
w
a
U
��
�Z
Z0-
H�
of 0
fn
of
of T
of �OO
OTf
0-O
U
LL
Q U
LL 0-
LL 0- J
U U
co U
W
L
a
H
p
J
Y
J
Z
Q
z
0
H
U
LL
N
LL
0
a
z
W
co
2
LU
}
co
LU
Q
H
J
O
O
J
co
N
O
O
O
O
r—
N
i
i
A
n
n
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
SECTION 27 0528
2
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
3
PART1
GENERAL
4
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary
6
Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
7
1.02 SCOPE
8
A.
The installation shall include innerduct, fire rated penetration assemblies, conduit, cable tray,
9
and wire management
10
B.
The bonding of metallic raceways
11
C.
The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a
12
workmanlike manner. In this context "good quality" means the work shall meet industry
13
technical standards and quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a
14
portion of the work performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds.
15
D.
The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems
16
General Requirements PART 3 "Testing & Complete System Functionality ", prior to "Substantial
17
Completion ".
18
E.
Contractual information, guidelines, requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully
19
functional system for Section 27 0528 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in
20
Section 27 0000.
21
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
22
A.
Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
23
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to work specified in this Section.
24
B.
Applicable Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
25
following standards:
26
1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
27
a. NEMA FG 1 - Fiberglass Cable Tray Systems.
28
b. NEMA VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems.
29
c. NEMA VE 2 - Cable Tray Installation Guidelines.
30
2. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code
31
3. ANSI /TIA- 568 -C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises
32
4. ANSI /TIA -569 -B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
33
Spaces
34
5. ANSI -J- STD -607 -A Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
35
Telecommunications.
36
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
37
A.
Installing Contractor Qualifications:
38
1. Work in this section shall be performed by a licensed and bonded low voltage Installing
39
Contractor with a minimum of five years' experience in the installation and maintenance of
40
high speed data and voice networks. Only Installing Contractors whose primary business is
41
that of installing, maintaining, troubleshooting, and testing Telecommunication
42
Infrastructures shall perform this work.
43
2. License Classification: Installing Contractor must possess a valid Washington State 06
44
Electrical Low Voltage License.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270528-1 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.05 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS
2 A. If the requirements of this section or the Project Drawings exceed those of the governing codes
3 and regulations, then the requirements of this section and the Drawings shall govern. However,
4 nothing in this section or the Drawings shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all
5 governing codes and regulations.
6 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS - ARCHITECTURAL PLANS
7 A. The Installing Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings
8 and shall consult the architectural plans to determine ceiling and floor types in the various
9 areas.
10 1.07 SUBMITTALS
11 A. Refer to specification 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements, for additional data
12 sheet submittal requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements.
13 PART 2 PRODUCTS
14 2.01 MATERIALS
15 A. See Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional requirements.
16 B. The Installing Contractor shall review the Site Plans, Floor Plans, Riser Diagrams, and Detail
17 Sheets for additional work that is required to be performed by the Installing Contractor of this
18 section.
i1$0 411Y11111590Z0]01]1 ill /_rI Is] ill
20 A. Refer to "Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment" for additional coordination and installation
21 requirements.
22 B. Refer to "Submittals" for additional coordination requirements.
23 2.03 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
24 A. Refer to "As -Built Drawings" listed elsewhere in this specification for additional equipment
25 required for this project.
26 2.04 SEISMIC BRACING
27 A. Provide Seismic Bracing as required by the AHJ.
28 B. This includes, but is not limited to:
29 1. Racks.
30 2. Cable Tray.
31 3. Cable Supports.
32 2.05 INNERDUCTS AND CONDUIT SEALS
33 A. Innerduct (Fabric Mesh):
34 1. The Installing Contractor shall provide the proper type of fabric mesh innerduct for the
35 application in which it is being used.
36 2. Provide flexible multi -cell fabric mesh innerduct consisting of White Polyester and Nylon
37 resin polymer.
38 3. EACH Cell shall contain a factory installed pull tape, which shall be a different color of pull
39 tape for EACH Cell.
40 4. Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456BK (Black), or approved equal. Provide
41 quantities as required where shown on plans.
42 a. This shall be the default color for one 3 -Cell innerduct.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270528-2 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
5.
Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456RD (Red), or approved equal. Provide
2
quantities as required where shown on plans.
3
a. Where two 3 -Cell innerducts are shown in a single conduit on the plans, this shall be
4
the second color.
5
6.
Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456BL (Blue), or approved equal. Provide
6
quantities as required where shown on plans.
7
a. Where three 3 -Cell innerducts are shown in a single conduit on the plans, this shall be
8
the third color.
9
B. Inner
Duct (Non - Metallic Tubing):
10
1.
Provide 1" corrugated inner duct for EACH fiber optic cable run.
11
2.
Inner duct shall be rated for the application and environment that it is installed in and shall
12
meet all Code and AHJ requirements.
13
3.
Non - Metallic Tubing for Fiber Optic Cables shall be Orange in color.
14
4.
Provide quantities as required where shown on plans.
15
5.
Approved Manufacturer: Pyramid Industries or approved equal.
16
C. Inflation
Bags (for 3" Conduits and 4" Conduits):
17
1.
Inside EACH Hand Hole and inside EACH Man Hole, install inflation bags in 3" Conduit(s)
18
and 4" Conduit(s) that comes into the building. Provide inflation bags in EACH conduit at
19
the opposite end (in the MDF and designated IDF locations).
20
2.
Provide inflation bags
21
3.
Locate inflation bags in EACH 3" underground conduit and in EACH 4" underground
22
conduit (at each end of the conduit) that is routed between the MDF and EACH designated
23
IDF location.
24
4.
Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITB3 (for 3" conduits), or approved equal.
25
Provide quantities as required.
26
a. Seal each conduit as described above using the manufacturer approved inflation seal
27
method at the completion of the project.
28
b. Provide (6) 3" conduit inflation bags (when this sized conduit is used on this project) to
29
the Owner at the completion of the project.
30
5.
Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITB4 (for 4" conduits), or approved equal.
31
Provide quantities as required.
32
a. Seal each conduit as described above using the manufacturer approved inflation seal
33
method at the completion of the project.
34
b. Provide (6) 4" conduit inflation bags (when this sized conduit is used on this project) to
35
the Owner at the completion of the project.
36
6.
Inflation Tool.
37
a. Provide (1) new (unopened package) inflation tool to the Owner at the completion of
38
the project.
39
b. Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITT, or approved equal.
40
7.
Gas Cartridges.
41
a. Provide (12) new (unopened packages) gas cartridges to the Owner at the completion
42
of the project.
43
D. Duct Seal (for conduits that are 2.5" or less):
44
1.
Inside EACH Hand Hole and inside EACH Man Hole, install a water tight seal in EACH
45
Conduit that comes into the building. Provide a water tight seal in EACH conduit at the
46
opposite end (in the MDF and designated IDF locations).
47
2.
In addition to the above locations, provide Duct Seal that includes, but is not limited to
48
other conduits such as:
49
a. Reader Boards.
50
b. Portables.
51
c. Hand holes for future equipment.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270528-3 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3. Manufactured by Ideal: Model # 31 -601, or Manufactured by Gardner Bender: Model #
2 DS -130, or approved equal.
3 2.06 OPEN CABLING SUPPORT & HARDWARE
4 A. Each Cable Support shall be UL Listed for the Application and meet the TIA requirements for
5 structured cabling systems.
6 B. Provide manufacturer approved mounting brackets and fasteners.
7 C. Do not exceed the cable support manufacturer's cable fill capacity for each type provided for
8 this project.
9 D. Do not exceed the cable manufacturer's recommendations for cable suspension in open cabling
10 environments.
11 E. J -Hooks shall have a galvanized finish.
12 1. Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT32HP, or approved equal. Provide quantities
13 as required.
14 2. Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT48HP, or approved equal. Provide quantities
15 as required.
16 F. Mounting Tree:
17 1. Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CATHPTM, or approved equal. Provide
18 quantities as required.
19 G. Adjustable Cable Support:
20 1. Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT425 Series, or approved equal. Provide
21 quantities as required.
22 H. Conduit Waterfalls:
23 1. Conduit Waterfalls shall be used where conduits empty into cable trays.
24 2. Manufactured by Panduit: Model # CWF400, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
25 required.
26 I. Conduit Bushings:
27 1. Conduit Bushings shall be used to protect communications cabling where conduits
28 terminate in accessible ceiling space.
29 2. Bushings shall be non - metallic to reduce cable abrasion.
30 3. Manufactured by Arlington: Model #EMTXXX, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
31 required.
32 2.07 CABLE TRAY — WIRE BASKET STYLE:
33
1.
Provide Seismic bracing where required by the AHJ.
34
2.
The Cable Tray shall be UL Classified.
35
3.
The Cable Tray shall be 4" high x 18" wide (unless otherwise noted).
36
a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34821 -618, or approved
37
equal. Provide quantities as required.
38
4.
Splice Bar, Splice Bolt/Washer Trapeze Support Bracket, Cable Radius Drop, Ground
39
Clam and other related materials:
40
a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34728 -501, or approved
41
equal. Provide quantities as required.
42
b. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34739 -501, or approved
43
equal. Provide quantities as required.
44
5.
Trapeze Support Bracket:
45
a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34730 -620, or approved
46
equal. Provide quantities as required.
47
b. Unistrut may be used in lieu of the above model number if approved by the AHJ.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270528-4 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 6. Cable Radius Drop:
2 a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34747 -701, or approved
3 equal. Provide quantities as required.
4 7. Ground Clamp:
5 a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34838 -001, or approved
6 equal. Provide quantities as required.
7 2.08 CABLE TRAY — LADDER STYLE:
8
A.
Provide Seismic bracing where required by the AHJ.
9
B.
The Cable Tray shall be UL Classified.
10
C.
The Cable Tray shall be 1.5" high x 18" wide (unless otherwise noted) with 9" rung spacing in
11
Steel construction that has been painted by the manufacturer.
12
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 11275-718, or approved equal.
13
Provide quantities as required.
14
D.
Butt Splice, Junction Splice, Swivel Butt Splice, Swivel Junction Splice, Wall Mount Bracket,
15
Rack Mount Plate, Ground Strap, Cable Runway Dividers and Cable Radius Drop:
16
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16301 -701, or approved equal.
17
Provide quantities as required.
18
E.
Junction Splice:
19
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16302 -701, or approved equal.
20
Provide quantities as required.
21
F.
Swivel Butt Splice:
22
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16487 -701, or approved equal.
23
Provide quantities as required, where applicable.
24
G.
Swivel Junction Splice:
25
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16488 -701, or approved equal.
26
Provide quantities as required, where applicable.
27
H.
Wall Mount Bracket:
28
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 11746-718, or approved equal.
29
Provide quantities as required.
30
I.
Ground Strap:
31
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 40164 -001, or approved equal.
32
Provide quantities as required.
33
J.
Cable Runway Dividers:
34
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 13392 -721, or approved equal.
35
Provide quantities as required.
36
K.
Cable Radius Drop:
37
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 12100 -718, or approved equal.
38
Provide quantities as required.
39
2. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 12101 -702, or approved equal.
40
Provide quantities as required.
41
2.09 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS
42
A.
Provide Fire Rated Penetration equipment at EACH location shown on the Plans and at EACH
43
wall that is rated for 1 -Hour or more.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270528-5 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
B.
A firestop system shall be comprised of the item or items penetrating the fire rated structure; the
2
opening in the structure and the materials and assembly of the materials used to seal the
3
penetrated structure. Firestop systems comprise of an effective block for fire, heat, vapor, and
4
pressurized water stream.
5
C.
All penetrations through fire rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed with an
6
appropriate firestop system. This requirement applies to through penetrations (complete
7
penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire rated structure). Any
8
penetrating items i.e., riser slots and sleeves, cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc.
9
shall be properly firestopped.
10
D.
Firestop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
11
E.
Indicate on the Shop Drawings EACH location showing the proposed firestopped system
12
location for approval, prior to installing the firestop system(s).
13
F.
All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
14
and shall be completely installed and available for inspection by the local authorities prior to
15
cabling system acceptance.
16
G.
For EACH penetration, the following requirements shall apply:
17
1. Provide pathway assemblies for EACH Low Voltage System Cables for each individual
18
assembly opening.
19
2. Provide the quantity of pathway assemblies required for the Horizontal cables, while
20
maintaining all code requirements. Additionally, provide (1) pathway assembly
21
opening for EACH System listed on the Electrical Legend. This includes, but is not
22
limited to: Fire Alarm System, Intrusion Alarm System, Intercom System, Access Control
23
System, CCTV System, etc.) and no less than (2) Spare empty assembly openings,
24
which shall remain empty at the completion of the project.
25
3. Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc (STI): EZ Path Model # 33 Series and /or EZ
26
Path Model # 44 Series. Provide quantities as required for all rated installations.
27
a. For EACH penetration, provide the Stud Wall Attachment (for either series provided),
28
filling the entire stud wall space with cable pathways for all cabling required and future
29
cabling. Maintain all spare capacity requirements.
30
b. For EACH EZ Path Model # 33 Series provided, provide one pair of Radius Control
31
Modules.
32
c. Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc (STI): EZ Path Model # RCM33.
33
4. Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): EZ Path Model # NEZP33 Series.
34
Provide quantities as required for all non -rated installations.
35 2.10 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
36 A. See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and /or Labor
37 PART 3 EXECUTION
38 3.01 GENERAL
39 A. See Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information.
40 B. Prior to rough -in, coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s).
41 C. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendation.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270528-6 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.02 PRODUCT INSPECTIONS
2 A. The Installing Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify that it is identified
3 properly on the reel identification label, that it is of proper gauge, containing correct number of
4 pairs, and is the material ordered. Any physical damage to the cable and wire must be noted;
5 un- uniform jacket thickness and jacket tightness should also be identified. Note any buckling of
6 the jacket, which would indicate possible problems.
7 3.03 GROUNDING AND BONDING
8 A. Provide grounding and bonding per ANSI - STD -J- 607 -A, which includes, but is not limited to:
9 Cable Tray, Rack(s), conduit sleeves, and other equipment connected to the TMGB/TGB.
10 B. The minimum conductor size shall be #6 green insulated copper grounding conductor.
11 However, size each conductor shall be based on the actual cable length as defined in ANSI -
12 STD -J- 607 -A.
13 3.04 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS
14 A. Install per manufacturers recommendations.
15 B. Maintain all Code and AHJ requirements.
16 3.05 WARRANTY
17 A. The warranty shall be direct to the end user, from the manufacturer, supported through the
18 installing and certified Installing Contractor, and shall cover both materials and labor costs for
19 any claims related to the warranty program. If the Installing Contractor were to default, the
20 manufacturer will assume responsibility of employing another certified installer to maintain the
21 existing warranty. Bids from installers or Installing Contractors who are not certified by the
22 connecting hardware manufacturer and wire manufacturer at the time of project bid, will be
23 rejected.
24 3.06 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O &M'S)
25 A. PROVIDE ALL OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O &M'S) DOCUMENTATION AS
26 DEFINED IN Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed
27 elsewhere in this specification.
28 3.07 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
29 A. Provide all As -Built documentation as defined in Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General
30 Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
31 B. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the
32 room number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings).
33 C. Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the
34 actual equipment that was provided for this project, and the actual locations of the installed
35 equipment.
36 D. The Installing Contractor shall provide As -Built drawings to the Architect, which clearly indicates:
37 1. The floor plan of the building showing the As -Built location of conduit runs, cable tray, and
38 terminal cabinets.
39 2. Provide (3) sets of complete As- Builts.
40 3.08 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
41 A. Upon completion of the system installation, the installation representative shall conduct a
42 system test for the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Owner or their appointed representatives.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270528-7 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. Upon completion of the installation, after test and demonstration, the Installing Contractor shall
2 provide to the Architect a signed written statement substantiating the:
3 1. "System has been completely tested, demonstrated to the Owner's representative, and
4 accepted by the appropriate authority."
END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 270528-8 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
2
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
SECTION 27 2000
DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
5 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary
6 Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
7 1.02 SCOPE
8 A. The Installing Contractor shall furnish and install all materials for a complete, fully functional data
9 and voice Telecommunications Infrastructure system in accordance with this specification and
10 the contract drawings. The system shall be in full compliance with a "Limited Lifetime Warranty ".
11 The Installing Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete, functional system
12 including all necessary components, whether included in this specification or not.
13
B.
All copper Horizontal Cables shall be terminated on patch panels in the Telecommunication
14
Rooms (MDF and designated IDF locations) and on Telecommunications Outlets. All copper
15
backbone cables shall be terminated on punch blocks at main cross connects and on patch
16
panels at the horizontal cross connect end, unless noted otherwise.
17
C.
Upon completion of installation, the Installing Contractor shall test all copper cables. All cables
18
shall be tested as defined elsewhere within this specification.
19
D.
The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a
20
workmanlike manner. In this context "good quality" means the work shall meet industry technical
21
standards and quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a portion of
22
the work performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds.
23
E.
The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems
24
General Requirements PART 3 "Testing & Complete System Functionality ", prior to "Substantial
25
Completion ".
26
F.
Contractual information, guidelines, requirements, or other work specified to provide a fully
27
functional system for Section 27 2000 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in
28
Section 27 0000.
29 G. See "Horizontal Cable" and "Racks" located in this specification for additional work and
30 equipment. This includes, but is not limited to; CAT6 Cabling for ALL Local Area Network (LAN)
31 based Systems as shown on the plans, detail sheets, and riser diagrams.
32 1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
33 A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
34 Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to work specified in this Section.
35 B. Applicable Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
36 following standards:
37 1. BICSI Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual, 6th Edition
38 2. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 13th Edition
39 3. ANSI /TIA 606 -A (2002) Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications
40 Infrastructure.
41 4. ANSI -J- STD -607 -A Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
42 Telecommunications.
43 5. EIA /TIA- 455 -61 (latest edition). "FOTP -61, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation Using
44 An OTDR ".
45 6. TIA- 526 -7. Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single -Mode Fiber Cable Plant
46 OFSTP -7.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-1 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 7. ANSI /TIA 568 -C.0. "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises."
2 8. ANSI /TIA 568 -C.1. "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1:
3 General Requirements."
4 9. ANSI /TIA 568 -C.2. "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2:
5 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components."
6 10. ANSI /TIA 568 -C.3. "Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard."
7 11. EIA /TIA 569 -B. "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
8 Spaces."
9 12. IEEE 802.3 (latest edition) "Carrier Sense Multiple Access With Collision Detection."
10 13. International Building Code (latest edition).
11 14. International Fire Code (latest edition).
12 15. NEC (National Electrical Code) (latest edition).
13 16. Telecommunications Architectural Standards - In Washington State Government (latest
14 edition).
15 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
16 A. Installing Contractor Qualifications:
17 1. The Installing Contractor project manager shall hold a valid and current Registered
18 Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) certification issued by Building Industry
19 Consulting Service International (BICSI). The project manager shall have a minimum of five
20 years' experience with projects of similar size and scope.
21 2. The Installing Contractor field staff installers shall hold valid and current Installation
22 certifications issued by Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) or hold
23 documented certification of training from the manufacturer of the cabling and equipmentthat is
24 being installed. The field staff shall have a minimum of five years' experience with projects of
25 similar size and scope.
26 3. The Installing Contractor shall be an Authorized Partner of the Manufacturer of the equipment
27 being installed and shall furnish documentation showing that the Installing Contractor is trained
28 and certified. The Installing Contractor shall be capable of providing the Owner with a
29 documented 20 Year "Application Warranty" of the equipment being installed at the time of
30 project bid, to be approved for bidding.
31 4. Work in this section shall be performed by a licensed and bonded low voltage Installing
32 Contractor with a minimum of five years' experience in the installation and maintenance of high
33 speed data and voice networks. Only Installing Contractors whose primary business is that of
34 installing, maintaining, troubleshooting, and testing Telecommunication Infrastructures shall
35 perform this work.
36 5. In orderto qualify for installation of the Telecommunications Infrastructure Installing Contractor
37 must possess the required license classification, a performance history, experience in the
38 installation and termination of copper and optical fiber cable systems, and proof of time in
39 business.
40 6. License Classification: Installing Contractor must possess a valid Washington State 06
41 Electrical Low Voltage License.
42 1.05 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS
43 A. If the requirements of this section or the Project Drawings exceed those of the governing codes
44 and regulations, then the requirements of this section and the Drawings shall govern. However,
45 nothing in this section or the Drawings shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all
46 governing codes and regulations.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-2 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS - ARCHITECTURAL PLANS
2 A. The Installing Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings
3 and shall consult the architectural plans to determine ceiling and floor types in the various areas.
4 1.07 SUBMITTALS
5 A. Refer to specification 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements, for additional data
6 sheet submittal requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements.
7 PART 2 PRODUCTS
8 2.01 MATERIALS
9
A.
See Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional requirements.
10
B.
The Installing Contractor shall review the Site Plans, Floor Plans, Riser Diagrams, and Detail
11
Sheets for additional work that is required to be performed by the Installing Contractor of this
12
section.
13
C.
Leviton / Berk -Tek manufactures the products that are used for the basis of design of this
14
specification. Substitutions are not allowed.
15
D.
All products shall be new, and brought to the job site in original manufacturer's packaging.
16
Electrical components shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories label. All Telecommunications
17
cable shall bear the manufacturer's label in accordance with NEC 800 based on flammability
18
testing as follows:
19
1. CMR General Purpose Communications Riser Cable.
20
2. CMP Plenum -rated Communications Cable.
21
3. And other cable ratings to comply with the National Electrical Code requirements for the
22
installation.
23
E.
All products shall meet the certification requirements of the warranty. All device products and all
24
cabling products shall be of a single manufacturer.
25
F.
Provide all equipment as defined in the specification(s) and shown on the drawings.
26
G.
Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined.
27
2.02 MATERIALS NOT INCLUDED (PROVIDED & INSTALLED BY OTHERS)
28
A.
Telephone switching equipment and related appurtenances.
29
B.
Telephones.
30
C.
Switchers, routers, network hubs, data concentrators and other similar active electronic
31
equipment for data communications.
32
D.
Computers, printers, facsimile machines, modems and other similar utilization equipment.
33
2.03 COORDINATION
34 A. Refer to "Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment" for additional coordination and installation
35 requirements.
36 B. Refer to "Submittals" for additional coordination requirements.
37 2.04 INSTALLATION OF OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
38 A. The Installing Contractor shall install the following Owner Furnished equipment:
39 1. Wireless Access Points (WAP's). Coordinate with the Owner as required.
40 a. Install each WAP where indicated on the plans.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-3 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 2.05 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
2
A.
Refer to "As -Built Drawings" listed elsewhere in this specification for additional equipment
3
required for this project.
4
2.06 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
5
A.
Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication port to the nearest MDF or designated
6
IDF location. Each Telecommunication Outlet type and style shall contain the quantity of
7
Horizontal Cables identified on the Legend, unless noted otherwise.
8
B.
Horizontal cables are to be terminated on rack - mounted patch panels of the same data speed
9
transfer rating. Horizontal Cabling shall be to Patch Panels within each designated rack.
10
Horizontal Cabling shall be cross - connected to backbone cables.
11
C.
Modems, fax machines, wall mount voice outlets for telephone handsets, etc. shall be connected
12
to the data and voice infrastructure via Horizontal Cabling.
13
2.07 LABELING
14
A.
See Section 27 0000 for additional label type and additional requirements.
15
B.
The alpha- numeric labeling shall be developed by the Installing Contractor, under the direction of
16
the Owners IT Department at the Pre - Installation project kick -off meeting. Numbering shall begin
17
at the first patch panel at the top of the rack, working downwards.
18
C.
The Installing Contractor shall label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion of a
19
sequential manner to the satisfaction of the Owner.
20
D.
All label printing shall be machine generated using indelible ink ribbons or cartridges, and self -
21
laminating labels shall be used on cable jackets appropriately sized to the outside diameter of
22
the cable.
23
E.
All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the
24
room number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to;
25
the Outlets, Port Addresses, Patch Panels, As -Built Drawings, and Test Results.
26
F.
Patch panels shall have each port labeled to identify each outlet port.
27
G.
Cable Identification Labels shall be places in the following locations:
28
1. Horizontal Cables. Each cable shall be identified and marked with the outlet port identification
29
near the cable termination point at the rear of the patch panel and placed within view.
30
H.
Where Wireless Access Point telecommunications outlets are located above accessible ceiling
31
space, provide a blue with whit lettered Phenolic label directly on the ceiling tile grid indicating
32
"AP ".
33
2.08 TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS
34
A.
Review the Site Plan(s), Floor Plan(s), Riser Diagram(s), and Detail Sheet(s) for all cable types
35
and quantities required for this project.
36
B.
Each Telecommunication Outlet type and style shall contain the quantity of Horizontal Cables
37
identified on the Electrical Legend, unless otherwise noted.
38
C.
Provide Horizontal Cabling from EACH Telecommunication Outlet port to the nearest MDF or
39
designated IDF location.
40
D.
Telecommunication Outlet:
41
1. Each Outlet shall accommodate individual modular ports and each modular port shall be
42
individually removed without affecting any other port within the outlet.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-4 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
2.
Coordinate the labeling requirements with the Owner's IT department.
2
a. Outlet label identification information shall be typed text and indicate patch panel and
3
port for each jack and shall comply with the Owners Labeling Standards. Hand written
4
information will not be acceptable.
5
1. 1 -Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall
6
be manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-11-1, or approved equal. Provide
7
quantities as required.
8
b. 2 -Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
9
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080 -1 L2, or approved equal. Provide quantities
10
as required.
11
c. 4 -Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
12
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080 -1 L4, or approved equal. Provide quantities
13
as required.
14
d. 6 -Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
15
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080 -1 L6, or approved equal. Provide quantities
16
as required.
17
3.
Surface Mount Outlet Locations shall only be installed above accessible ceiling spaces, the
18
MDF Room, and designated IDF locations. They are not to be installed below the ceiling
19
surface or exposed to view, unless approved in writing by the Engineer.
20
a. Provide modular single -port or dual port Surface Mount Outlet where indicated on the
21
Plans. This includes, but is not limited to:
22
1. Wireless Access Points.
23
2. Projector Mounts.
24
3. CCTV Cameras.
25
4. Intrusion Alarm Control Panel.
26
5. Access Control Panel.
27
a. Energy Management Panels.
28
b. 1 -Port Surface Mount Telecommunication Outlet, where shown on the plans, shall be
29
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41089 -11P, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
30
required.
31
c. 2 -Port Surface Mount Telecommunication Outlet, where shown on the plans, shall be
32
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41089 -21P, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
33
required.
34
E. Modular
Inserts:
35
1.
8- position, 8- conductor (8P8C). Individual workstation port modules shall be Category 6 rated,
36
8- position, 8- conductor (8P8C) for termination of conductors and shall be approved by the
37
manufacturer.
38
2.
8- position, 8- conductor (8P8C). Individual Wireless Access port modules shall be Category 6A
39
rated, 8- position, 8- conductor (8P8C) for termination of conductors and shall be approved by
40
the manufacturer.
41
3.
EACH workstation port shall be Category 6 rated.
42
a. Each Wireless Access port shall be Category 6A rated.
43
4.
Cables shall be wired in accordance with TIA /EIA- T568B, unless noted otherwise.
44
5.
Each individual insert shall be fully compatible with the Face Plates provided.
45
a. Provide "DATA" identification icon tabs for each jack designated for data.
46
b. Provide "VOICE" identification icon tabs for each jack designated for voice.
47
C. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 61110 -R(X)6 Series for Category 6 applications, or
48
approved equal. Provide quantities as required. (X) Indicates color.
49
d. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 6110G -R(X)6 Series for Category 6A applications,
50
or approved equal. Provide quantities as required. (X) Indicates color.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-5 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
6. Blank inserts. Fill all remaining unused ports with a blank filler insert that is approved by the
2
manufacturer.
3
a. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41084BGB, or approved equal. Provide quantities
4
as required.
5
F.
Wall Mount Telephone Outlet:
6
1. Provide modular single -port stainless steel wall phone outlet with mounting studs.
7
2. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 4108W -1SP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
8
required.
9
2.09 HORIZONTAL CABLE — INSIDE PLANT (ISP)
10
A.
See "Testing of Cables" listed elsewhere within this specification for Testing Requirements to be
11
documented and submitted at the completion of this project.
12
B.
EACH Cable installed shall be rated for the appropriate application, such as; Riser Rated,
13
Plenum Rated, Wet Rated, etc.
14
C.
Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication Outlet to the nearest MDF or the
15
nearest designated IDF location.
16
D.
Analog Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) lines shall be provided for, but not limited to, the
17
following items. These items shall be installed complete without splices between the jack and
18
cable termination point.
19
1. Fire Alarm System.
20
2. Intrusion Alarm System.
21
3. Elevator (where applicable).
22
4. Terminate all telephone jacks as described elsewhere in these specifications.
23
E.
Cable color codes shall be as follows.
24
1. All horizontal data cable shall be blue in color.
25
2. All voice cable shall be white in color.
26
3. All CCTV cable shall be yellow in color.
27
4. All IP intercom clock shall be gray in color.
28
5. All Wireless Access Points shall be green in color
29
F.
The Telecommunication Horizontal Cable shall be Category 6 rated, 4 -pair, 23 AWG UTP,
30
unless noted otherwise.
31
1. Manufactured by Berk -Tek: Model # LANmark 1000 Series plenum rated cable for Category 6
32
applications, or approved equal.
33
2. Manufactured by Berk -Tek: Model # LANmark -10G Series plenum rated cable for Category 6A
34
applications, or approved equal.
35 2.10 PATCH PANELS —COPPER
36 A. All patch panels shall be located at the MDF and each designated IDF location. They shall be
37 rack mounted unless specifically otherwise noted.
38 B. Provide a minimum of 25 % spare patch panel jack capacity. Each patch panel shall be fully
39 loaded.
40 C. Patch panels should be fully populated, avoiding blanks and empty ports (with the exception
41 being the last patch panel in the series which may not be fully populated).
42 1. All Category 6 patch panels shall be tested and approved for Category 6 wiring, per TIA /EIA-
43 568C; shall have rear covers to protect printed circuit boards, rear cable management bar and
44 front and rear labeling.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-6 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
D.
All Category 6A patch panels shall be tested and approved for Category 6A wiring, per TIA /EIA-
2
Quantity of
568C; shall have rear covers to protect printed circuit boards, rear cable management bar and
3
front and rear labeling.
4
E.
Provide separate Patch Panels for the following equipment connection types:
5
1. Data Cables.
6
2. IP Telephones.
7
percentage of patch cables
3. Wireless Access Points.
8
Length
4. IP Speakers / IP Intercom System equipment.
9
5. Analog Voice Cables.
10
6. Section 28 2300 CCTV System.
11
a. Prior to running any cables, coordinate with the CCTV System Installing Contractor for
12
actual Patch Panel locations within each Rack.
13
F.
Patch panels shall be 48 port unless noted otherwise.
14
1. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 69586 -U48, or approved equal for Category 6 wiring.
15
2. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 6A586 -U48, or approved equal for Category 6A wiring.
16
2.11 PATCH CABLES - COPPER
17
A.
The Patch Cables shall be Category 6 rated, 4 -pair, 23 AWG UTP, unless noted otherwise.
18
B.
The outer cable jacket shall match the color selection of the Horizontal Cable Color identified in
19
60%
"Horizontal Cable ".
20
C.
Provide a minimum quantity of (1) 15' equipment cord for EACH telecommunication outlet box
21
20%
shown in work areas. ( Leviton # 62460 -15L), or approved equal.. See table below for MDF /IDF
22
patch cord quantities.
23
D.
Upon completion of the project, the Data and Voice Infrastructure Installing Contractor shall
24
deliver the following patch cables:
25
E.
Provide a minimum of (1) 3' and (1) 5' equipment for each CCTV camera, Access Control Panel
26
and Intercom /Clock Speaker.
27
F.
Provide a minimum of (1) 3' and (1) 5' Green CAT6A patch cords for all Wireless Access Points.
28
The following items shall apply ONLY to the MDF Room and designated IDF locations.
Quantity of
Patch Cables
(provide the following
Cable
percentage of patch cables
Item #
Length
Color
based on the Total patch
panel Ports provided for this
project)
Manufactured by
Model #
Unless noted otherwise.
1
3'
Blue
20%
Leviton
62460 -03L
2
7'
Blue
60%
Leviton
62460 -07L
3
9'
Blue
20%
Leviton
62460 -09L
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-7 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1
G.
Cable Management:
2
1. Vertical Cable Management for open -frame racks: Provide vertical cable management on both
3
sides of each rack. Where two racks are installed side -to -side, provide one section between the
4
Racks for each Rack provided for this project.
5
a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI): Model # 30162 -703, or approved
6
equal. Provide quantities as required.
7
2. Horizontal Cable Management
8
a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI): Model # 30139 -719, or approved
9
equal for 1 RU applications. Provide quantities as required.
10
b. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI): Model # 30130 -719, or approved
11
equal for 2RU applications. Provide quantities as required.
12
2.12 WIRE RINGS
13
A.
Cables on backboards shall be supported using open distribution rings. Rings shall be located
14
within 12" of entering or exiting conduit, 6" prior to any radius bends and at least 12" on center.
15
The rings shall have rounded edges and be designed in a "C" configuration. Securely mount
16
distribution rings to the plywood backboard.
17
B.
Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI): Model # 12035 -001, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
18
required.
19
2.13 CABLE
MANAGEMENT TIES
20
A.
Wire ties of any type shall NOT be used anywhere in this installation.
21
B.
Bundle all Horizontal Cables together with Velcro -type tie wraps.
22
1. Adjustable Velcro Straps shall be used for all cable bundles.
23
a. Provide Velcro Straps every two -feet (approximately) above accessible ceilings, in
24
Cable Trays (where applicable) and throughout the cable run.
25
b. Provide Velcro Straps every twelve- inches (approximately) within the MDF and each
26
designated IDF location.
27
2. Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI): Model # 020XX -201, or approved equal. XX indicates actual
28
length. "06" (6- inches long for two -inch diameter cable bundles), "09" (9- inches long for three-
29
inch diameter cable bundles), and "12" (12- inches long for four -inch diameter cable bundles).
30
Provide quantities as required.
31
2.14 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
32
A.
See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and /or Labor.
33
B.
See 27 05 28 for pathway requirements (cable tray, inner duct, etc).
34
PART 3
EXECUTION
35
3.01 GENERAL
36
A.
See Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information.
37
B.
Prior to rough -in, coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s).
38
C.
Install all cabling, devices, and /or equipment per the manufacturer's recommendation.
39
3.02 PRODUCT
INSPECTIONS
40
A.
The Installing Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify that it is identified
41
properly on the reel identification label, that it is of proper gauge, containing correct number of
42
pairs, and is the material ordered. Any physical damage to the cable and wire must be noted;
43
un- uniform jacket thickness and jacket tightness should also be identified. Note any buckling of
44
the jacket, which would indicate possible problems.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-8 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION -GENERAL
2
A.
EACH CABLE RUN SHALL BE CONTINUOUS, WITHOUT ANY SPLICES, from the
3
Telecommunications Outlet to the patch panel(s). Any cable run that does not meet this
4
requirement shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
5
B.
The Installing Contractor shall insure that EACH Telecommunications cable is installed with
6
care, using techniques which prevent kinking, sharp bends, scraping cutting, deforming the
7
jacket, or other damage. During inspection evidence of such damage will result in the material
8
being declared unacceptable. The Installing Contractor shall replace unacceptable cabling at no
9
additional cost to the Owner.
10
C.
Conduit and Raceway Usage: All Telecommunications cable shall be installed in grounded metal
11
conduit or raceway dedicated for Telecommunications purposes, when called for on the Project
12
Drawings, and not to be shared with electrical wiring.
13
D.
Cable shall not be draped on, tied or otherwise secured to electrical conduit, plumbing,
14
ventilation ductwork or any other equipment. Cable shall be secured to building supports or
15
hangers or to additional blocks or anchors specifically installed for this purpose.
16
E.
All wiring to be installed in a neat and inconspicuous manner and per local code requirements.
17
Route wires parallel or perpendicular to the building structure using the specified cable supports.
18
Wiring shall be installed near or on structural members as to minimize risk of physical damage
19
by other trades or maintenance personnel servicing the equipment.
20
F.
Cable Lubricants specifically designed for installing Telecommunications cable may be used to
21
reduce pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. After installation, exposed
22
cable and other surfaces must be cleaned of lubricant residue.
23
G.
Backboard and Rack Cable Supports: Clamps, "D- Rings ", Velcro and tie -wraps are all
24
acceptable ways to support cable. However, installation of these supports must be done with
25
care so as not to cause crushing or distortion of the cable, nor cause tighter bends than the
26
minimum radius permitted for each type cable.
27
3.04 HORIZONTAL CABLING
28
A.
Horizontal Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with TIA /EIA -568 -B
29
requirements and the cable manufacturer's recommendations.
30
1. Untwisting of pairs at the termination point shall not exceed one -half an inch for Category 6
31
connecting hardware.
32
2. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than the manufacturer's
33
recommendation.
34
3. The Horizontal Cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.
35
B.
Every attempt shall be made to avoid running Horizontal Cables close to (less than 24 ") and
36
parallel to power raceway and wiring, or close to light fixtures.
37
C.
When an approved cable support is used to support cable bundles, all horizontal cables shall be
38
supported at a maximum of four -foot intervals with UL approved cable support. At no point shall
39
cables rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or
40
lighting support wires. Where light support for drop cable legs is required, the Installing
41
Contractor shall install clips to support the cabling.
42
D.
The installation of Horizontal Cables around moveable devices, instruments, subpanels, etc.
43
shall be provided with adequate support, length, protection, and flexibility so that the cable is not
44
damaged in the event the equipment is moved.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-9 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3.05 PLYWOOD BACKBOARD CABLING
2
A.
Horizontal Cable installation must conform to the Project Drawings. All cabling shall be routed so
3
as to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or maintenance purposes
4
such as access boxes, ventilation mixing boxes, access hatches to air filters, switch or electrical
5
outlets, electrical panels, fire alarm equipment, clock systems, and lighting fixtures. Avoid
6
crossing areas horizontally just above or below any riser conduit. Lay and dress cables to allow
7
other cables to enter the conduit/riser without difficulty at a later time by maintaining maximum
8
distance from these openings.
9
B.
Horizontal Cables shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling, floor, or corners to insure
10
that adequate backboard space is available for current and future equipment and for cable
11
terminations. Horizontal Cables shall not be connected or attached to electrical conduit or other
12
equipment. Minimum bend radius shall be observed.
13
C.
Lay cables via the shortest route directly to the nearest edge of the backboard from the mounted
14
equipment or block. Velcro wrap all similar cables together and attached by means of clamps
15
screwed to the outside edge(s) of the backboard vertically and /or horizontally, then route via
16
"square" corners over a path that will offer minimum obstruction to future installations of
17
equipment or other cables.
18
D.
Horizontal Cables that are not dressed in a neat fashion, or with excessive slack, will not be
19
accepted.
20
3.06 CABLE LABELING
21
A.
Alpha- numeric numbering shall be developed by Installing Contractor, under the direction of the
22
Owners IT Department. Label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion.
23
B.
Patch Panel Labeling: Each terminal shall be identified and marked on the patch panel with the
24
outlet port identification.
25
C.
Outlet Port Labeling: Outlet labels for each port shall be identified and marked on the Outlet with
26
the outlet port identification.
27
D.
Horizontal Cables: Each cable shall be identified and marked with the outlet port identification
28
near the cable termination point at the rear of the patch panel.
29
3.07 TESTING OF CABLES
30
A.
Notification shall be given a minimum of 14 days prior to any testing so that the testing may be
31
witnessed by the Owner.
32
1. An ETL certified, TIA -1152 Level IIIe (ISO /IEC 11801 Level IV) Test Meter shall be used to test
33
all balanced twisted -pair coper cabling.
34
B.
All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the
35
room number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to;
36
the Outlets, Port Addresses, Patch Panels, As -Built Drawings, and Test Results.
37
C.
Provide documentation of the following items of EACH Test Meter used:
38
1. Calibration certification from a third party shall be within two -years of testing (at the time that
39
the test is performed).
40
2. Manufacturer of Test Meter.
41
3. Model Number of Test Meter.
42
4. Serial Number of Test Meter.
43 D. Copper Cables — Category 6 and 6A Cables: Each of the pairs shall be tested from the Patch
44 Panel or Punch Block to the Outlet. The Installing Contractor shall test:
45 1. Wire Map.
46 2. Length.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-10 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 3. Insertion Loss / Attenuation.
2 4. NEXT (Near End Cross Talk).
3 5. PS -NEXT (Power Sum Near End Cross Talk).
4 6. ACR -F Loss (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far -end).
5 7. PS ACR -F Loss (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far -end).
6 8. Return Loss.
7 9. Propagation Delay.
8 10. Delay Skew.
9 11. The following tests are only required for CAT6A cabling:
10 a. PSANEXT (Power Sum Alien NEXT)
11 b. PSAACRF (Power Sum Alien ACR -F)
12
E.
The source of each error shall be determined, corrected, and the cable re- tested. All defective
13
cables, connectors, connections, and related appurtenances shall be replaced and re- tested at
14
no additional cost to the Owner.
15
F.
Submit the Test Reports in PDF format.
16
G.
See the O & M Manual / Asbuilt Drawings requirements in this specification and also in Section
17
27 0000 for additional requirements.
18
H.
Acceptance of these test procedures is predicated on the Installing Contractor's use of the
19
recommended products including, but not limited to; the specified cable type, patch panels,
20
outlets, punch blocks, specified equipment identified in Part 2 and the installation standards of
21
this specification. Adherence to these requirements shall be determined upon the completed
22
installation and will be evaluated in the context of each of these factors.
23
3.08 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS
24
A.
Install per manufacturers recommendations.
25
B.
Maintain all Code and AHJ requirements.
26
C.
See 27 0528 for additional requirements.
27
3.09 WARRANTY
28
A.
Upon final installation, a certificate providing a "Performance and Application Warranty" shall be
29
provided to the owner. This warranty shall be valid for a period of no less than 20 Years. The
30
warranty shall be direct to the end user, from the manufacturer, supported through the installing
31
and certified Installing Contractor, and shall cover both materials and labor costs for any claims
32
related to the warranty program. If the Installing Contractor were to default, the manufacturer will
33
assume responsibility of employing another certified installer to maintain the existing warranty.
34
Bids from installers or Installing Contractors who are not certified by the connecting hardware
35
manufacturer and wire manufacturer at the time of project bid, will be rejected.
36
3.10 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS (O &M'S)
37
A.
Provide all Operation & Maintenance Manuals (O &M's) documentation as defined in Section 27
38
0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
39
B.
Provide hard copies of the Test Results of EACH Cable tested.
40
C.
Provide the Test Results on CD in PDF format.
41
3.11 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
42
A.
Provide all As -Built documentation as defined in Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General
43
Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-11 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE
Education Center Tenant Improvement
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
Erickson McGovern Architects
1 B. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project (not the
2 room number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to;
3 the Outlets, Port Addresses, Patch Panels, As -Built Drawings, and Test Results.
4 C. Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the
5 actual equipment that was provided for this project, and the actual locations of the installed
6 equipment.
7 D. The Installing Contractor shall provide As -Built drawings to the Architect, which clearly indicates:
8 1. The floor plan of the building showing the As -Built location of Telecommunication Outlets and
9 their associated Port Address(es), conduit runs, and terminal cabinets.
10 2. A list of EACH Telecommunication Outlet and the associated Port Address(es) shall clearly be
11 identified according to system labeling scheme. Show all ports and punchdowns.
12 3. Provide (3) sets of complete As- Builts.
13 END OF SECTION
2015 -19 / YCS Ed Center TI 272000-12 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE